HP 8753E Network Analyzer Service Guide - Agilent Technologies

Errata 

Title & Document Type: 8753E Network Analyzer Service Guide 

Manual Part Number: 08753-90374 

Revision Date: February 1999 

HP References in this Manual 

This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett-Packard. Please note that Hewlett- 

Packard's former test and measurement, semiconductor products and chemical analysis 

businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies. We have made no changes to this 

manual copy. The HP XXXX referred to in this document is now the Agilent XXXX. 

For example, model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A. 

About this Manual 

We’ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your 

product. This manual provides the best information we could find. It may be incomplete 

or contain dated information, and the scan quality may not be ideal. If we find a better 

copy in the future, we will add it to the Agilent website. 

Support for Your Product 

Agilent no longer sells or supports this product. You will find any other available 

product information on the Agilent Test & Measurement website: 

www.tm.agilent.com 

Search for the model number of this product, and the resulting product page will guide 

you to any available information. Our service centers may be able to perform calibration 

if no repair parts are needed, but no other support from Agilent is available.

Service Guide 

HP 8753E Network Analyzer 

HEWLETT 

PACKARD

HP part number: 08753-90374 Supersedes October 1998 

Printed in USA February 1999 

Notice. 

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. 

Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, 

including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and 

fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors 

contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with 

the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. 

@Copyright 1998-1999 Hewlett-Packard Company

Network Analyzer Documentation Set 

The Installation and Quick Start 

Guide familiarizes you with the 

network analyzer’s front and rear 

panels, electrical and environmental 

operating requirements, as well as 

procedures for installing, conGguring, 

and verifying the operation of the 

analyzer. 

The User’s Guide shows how to make 

measurements, explains 

commonly-used features, and tells you 

how to get the most performance from 

your analyzer. 

The Quick Reference Guide provides 

a summary of selected user features. 

The HP-IB Programm iug and 

Command Reference Guide provides 

programming information for 

operation of the network analyzer 

under HP-IB control. 

. . . 

III

The BP BASIC Programming 

Examples Guide provides a tutorial 

introduction using BASIC programming 

examples to demonstrate the remote 

operation of the network analyzer. 

The System Veracation and Test 

Guide provides the system verification 

and performance tests and the 

Performance Test Record for your 

analyzer.

Contents 

1. Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 

lhble of Service Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Principles of Microwave Connector Care . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Analyzer Options Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Option lD5, High Stability Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . 

Option 002, Harmonic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

OptionOO6,6GHzOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Option 010, Time Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Option 011, Receiver Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Option 075,750 Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Option lDT, Delete Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Option lCM, Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles . . . . . 

Option lCP, Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handies . . . . . . . 

Service and Support Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Option W32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Option W34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

2. System VeriIkation and Performance ‘lksts 

System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Instrument SpecBcations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

System Verification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

How to ConfIrm Performance to System Specifications . . . . . 

How to ConfIrm Performance to Instrument Specifications . . . 

Certificate of Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Sections in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Performance Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

System Verification Cycle and Kit Re-certification . . . . . . . . 

HP 8753E System Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Initiaiization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Measurement Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Device Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

l-l 

l-5 

l-7 

l-7 

l-7 

l-7 

l-7 

l-7 

l-8 

l-8 

1-8 

l-8 

l-9 

l-9 

l-9 

2-l 

2-2 

2-2 

2-3 

2-3 

2-3 

2-4 

2-5 

2-6 

2-7 

2-8 

2-9 

2-11 

2-14 

contmts-1

Contents-2 

In Case of DifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

1. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy . . . . . . . 

In Case of Difficuhy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

2. External Source Mode Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . 

InCaseofDifficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

3. Test Port Output Power Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

InCaseofDifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

4. Test Port Output Power Range and Linearity . . . . . . . . . 

In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

5.MinhnumRChannelLevel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 


6. Test Port Input Noise Floor Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz) 

Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz) 

Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz) 

Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz) 

Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz) . 

Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz) . 

Port 1 Noise Floor Level for 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz) . . 

Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz) . 

InCaseofDifficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

7. Test Port Input Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 1 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz . 

Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response from 300 kHz to 3 GHz . 

Power Meter Calibration on Port 2 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz . . . 

Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response from 300 kHz to 3 GHz . 

Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 2 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . 

Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response from 3 GHz to 6 GHz 

Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 1 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz : 1 

Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . 


8. Test Port Crosstalk 

CrosstaurtoTestPort2from30d1;H;.tb3GI;z’ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

Crosstalk to Test Port 1 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz . . . . . . . . 

CrosstaIktoTestPortlfrom3GHzto6GHz . . . . . . . . . 

Crosstalk to Test Port 2 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . . . . . . . . 

InCaseofDifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

9. Calibration Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

First FulI 2-Port Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Directivity (Forward) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . 

Source Match (Forward) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . 

2-17 

2-18 

2-20 

2-21 

2-23 

2-24 

2-26 

2-27 

2-29 

2-31 

2-33 

2-37 

2-38 

2-39 

2-39 

2-40 

2-40 

2-41 

2-41 

2-41 

2-42 

243 

2-44 

2-47 

2-48 

249 

2-49 

2-51 

2-52 

2-53 

2-53 

2-54 

2-55 

2-55 

2-55 

2-56 

2-56 

2-58 

2-59 

2-61 

2-61

Transmission Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient . . . . 2-61 

Reflection Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . 2-61 

Load Match (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . . 2-61 

Transmission Tracking (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient . . . . 2-62 

Second FuiI 2-Port Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 

Load Match (Forward) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . . 2-64 

Directivity (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 

Source Match (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . . . . 2-64 

Reflection Tracking (Reverse) Calibration Coefficient . . . . . . 2-64 

10. System Trace Noise (Only for Analyzers without Option 006) . 2-65 

System Trace Noise for A/R Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 

System Trace Noise for A/R Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 

System Trace Noise for B/R Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 

System Trace Noise for B/R Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 

In Case of DifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 

11. System Trace Noise (Only for Analyzers with Option 006) . . 2-68 

System Trace Noise for A/R Magnitude from 30 kHz to 3 GHz . . 2-69 

System Trace Noise for A/R Magnitude from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . 2-69 

System Trace Noise for A/R Phase from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . . . 2-69 

System Trace Noise for A/R Phase from 30 kHz to 3 GHz . . . . 2-70 

System Trace Noise for B/R Magnitude from 30 kHz to 3 GHz . . 2-70 

System Trace Noise for B/R Magnitude from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . 2-70 

System Trace Noise for B/R Phase from 3 GHz to 6 GHz . . . . 2-70 

System Trace Noise for B/R Phase from 30 kHz to 3 GHz . . . . 2-71 

InCaseofDifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 

12. Test Port Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 

In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 

13. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . 2-77 

Initial CalcuIations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 

Power Meter Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 

Adapter Removal Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 

Measure Test Port 2 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . 2-85 

Measure Test Port 1 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . 2-87 

InCaseofDifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87 

14. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression . . . . . . . . . 2-89 

Test Port 2 Magnitude Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90 

Test Port 1 Magnitude Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 


15. Test Port Receiver Phase Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 

Test Port 2 Phase Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93 

Test Port 1 Phase Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 

Contents-3

2a. 

2b. 

3. 

Contents4 


16. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002 Analyzers 

without Option 006 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

‘l&t Port Output Worst Case 2nd Harmonic . . . . . . . . . . 

Test Port Output Worst Case 3rd Harmonic . . . . . . . . . . 

Port 1 Input Worst Case 2ndHarmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . 

PortlInputWorstCase3rdHarmonic. . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Port2InputWorstCase2ndHarmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Port 2 Input Worst Case 3rd Harmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

17. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002 Analyzers with 

Option 006 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Test Port Output Worst Case 2nd Harmonic . . . . . . . . . . 

Test Port Output Worst Case 3rd Harmonic . . . . . . . . . . 

Port 1 Input Worst Case 2ndHarmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . 

PortlInputWorstCase3rdHarmonic. . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Port2InputWorstCase2ndHarmonic . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Port2InputWorstCase3rdHarmonic. . . . . . . . . . . . . 

18. Test Port Output Harmonics (Analyzers without Option 002) . 

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Performance ‘lkst Record 

For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 30 kHz to 3 GHz . . . . 

Performance ‘l&t Record 

For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 30 kHz to 6 GHz . . . . 

Adjustments and Cmmction Constants 

Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

A9 Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44) . . . . . . . . . . 

Source Pretune Default Correction Constants (Test 45) . . . . . . 

Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46) . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48) . . . . . . . . . . 

RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47) . . . . . . . . . 

Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . 

IF Arnphfier Correction Constants (Test 51) . . . . . . . . . . . 

ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52) . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53) . . . 

Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Determine the Insertion Loss of the Cable at 1 GHz . . . . . . 

Sampler Correction Constants Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . 

2-94 

2-95 

2-96 

2-97 

2-97 

2-99 

2-99 

2-100 

2-101 

2-102 

2-103 

2-104 

2-105 

2-105 

2-106 

2-107 

2-108 

2a-1 

2b-1 

3-2 

3-5 

3-7 

3-8 

3-9 

3-10 

3-11 

3-12 

3-16 

3-17 

3-18 

3-19 

3-20 

3-21

Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54) . . . . 3-28 

Spur Search Procedure with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 

Spurs Search Procedure without a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 

Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55) . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 

Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56) . . . . . . . . . 3-36 

Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 

EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 

Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 

LoadingFirmware.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 

LoadingFirmwareintoanExistingCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 

In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 

LoadingFirmwareintoaNewCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 

In Case of DifficuIty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 

Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 

Frequency Accuracy Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 

Instruments with Option ID5 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 


High/Low Band Transition Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52 

Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment . . . . 3-54 

Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 3-58 

Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants . . 3-60 

Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62 

How to Load Sequences from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62 

How to Set Up the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment . . 3-63 

How to Set Up the High/Low Band Transition Adjustments . . . . 3-63 

How to Set Up the Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband 

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64 

Sequence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64 

Sequence for the High/Low Band Transition Adjustment . . . . 3-64 

Sequences for the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment . . 3-65 

Sequences for the Fractional-N Avoidance and FM Sideband 

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66 

4. Staxt Troubleshooting Here 

Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Having Your Analyzer Serviced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Step 1. Initial Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Initiate the Analyzer Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Step 2. Operator’s Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

4-2 

4-2 

4-3 

4-3 

4-4 

4-4 

4-4 

Contents-5

Step 3. HP-IB Systems Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 

If Using a Plotter or Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 

IfUsinganExternaiDiskDrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 

Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals . . . . . . . 48 

Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 

Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 

Check the Rear Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 

Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 

Digital Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 

Observe the Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 

Verify IntemaI Tests Passed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 

Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 

Phase Lock Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 

Check Source Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 

No Oscilloscope or Power Meter? Try the ABUS . . . . . . . . 4-15 

Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 

ObservetheAandBInputTraces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 

Receiver Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 

Faulty Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 

Accessories Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 

5. Power Supply Troubleshooting 

Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 

Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 

StartHere. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 

Check the Green LED and Red LED on Al5 . . . . . . . . . . 54 

Check the Green LEDs on A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 

Measure the Post Regulator Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 

If the Green LED of the Al5 Is not ON Steadily . . . . . . . . . 5-7 

Check the Line Voltage, Selector Switch, and Fuse . . . . . . . 5-7 

IftheRedLEDoftheA15IsON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 

Check the A8 Post Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 

Verify the Al5 Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 

Check for a Faulty Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 

Check the Operating Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 

Inspect the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 

IftheGreenLEDsoftheABarenotalION . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 

Remove AS, Maintain A15Wl Cable Connection . . . . . . . . 5-14 

Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 

Contents-6

Remove the Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 

Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 

Inspect the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 

Error Messages 

5-19 

Check the Fuses and Isolate .A8 . 1 : 1 . 1 1 1 : 1 : 1 1 1 : 1 5-20 

Pan Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Fan Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Check the Pan Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

5-22 

5-22 

5-22 

Short ABTP3 to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 

Intermittent Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 

6. Digital Control Troubleshooting 

Digital Control Group Block Diagram . . . . . . 

Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . 

CPU Troubleshooting (A9) . . . . . . . . . . . 

A9 CC Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Checking A9 CPU Red LED Patterns . . . . . 

Display Troubleshooting (A2, A18, A19, A27) . . 

Evaluating your Display . . . . . . . . . . . 

Backlight Intensity Check . . . . . . . . . 

Red, Green, or Blue Pixels Specifications . . 

Dark Pixels Specifications . . . . . . . . . 

Newton’s Riis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Troubleshooting a White Display . . . . . . . 

Troubleshooting a Black Display . . . . . . . 

Troubleshooting a Display with Color Problems 

Front Panel Troubleshooting (Al, A2) . . . . . . 

Check Front Panel LEDs After Preset . . . . . 

Identify the Stuck Key . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Inspect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Test Using a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Run the Internal Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . 

If the Fault Is Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . 

Repeat Test Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

HP-IB Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

........ 6-2 

........ 6-3 

........ 64 

........ 6-4 

........ 6-5 

........ 6-7 

........ 6-7 

........ 6-8 

........ 6-9 

........ 6-10 

........ 6-10 

........ 6-12 

........ 6-12 

........ 6-12 

........ 6-13 

........ 6-13 

........ 6-14 

........ 6-16 

........ 6-16 

........ 6-17 

........ 6-19 

........ 6-19 

........ 6-19

7. Source Troubleshooting 


Before You Start Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 

Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 

1. Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44) . . . . . . . . 7-3 

2. RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47) . . . . . . 7-3 

3. Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53) 7-3 

Phase Lock Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 

Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 

A4 Sampler/Mixer Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 

A3 Source and All Phase Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 

YO Coil Drive Check with Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 

YO Coil Drive Check with Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 

Al2 Reference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 

Analog Bus Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 

Oscilloscope Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 

1OOkHzPulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 

PLREF Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 

REFSiiAtAllTP9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 

HighBandREFSii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 

LowBandREFSiial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 

FNLOatA12Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 

4 MHz Reference Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 

2ND LO Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 

90 Degree Phase Offset of 2nd LO Signals in High Band . . 7-21 

InPhase2ndLOSignalsinLowBand . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 

Al2 Digital Control Siials Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 

LENREFLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 

LHBandLLBLines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 

A13/A14 Fractional-N Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 

Fractional-N Check with Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 

Al4 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 

Al4 VCO Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 

Al4 Divide-by-N Circuit Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 

A14-to-Al3 Digital Control Siials Check. . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 

HMBLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 

A7 Pulse Generator Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 

A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . 7-32 

Rechecking the A13/A14 Fractional-N . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 

A7 Pulse Generator Check with Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . 7-34 

All Phase Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 

Contents-8

Phase Lock Check with PLL DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 

Phase Lock Check by Signal Examination . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 

Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 

Troubleshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus . . . . . 7-38 

Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 

Phase Lock Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 

Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 

Broadband Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 

8. Receiver Troubleshooting 


Receiver Failure Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 

ChecktheAandBInputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 

Troubleshooting When AU Inputs Look Bad . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 

RunIntemalTests18and17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 

Check 2nd LO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 

Checkthe4MHzREFSiiaI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 

Check A10 by Substitution or SiiaI Examination . . . . . . . 8-8 

Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good . . . . . . 8-11 

Checkthe4kHzSiial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 

Check the Trace with the Sampler Correction Constants Off . . 8-12 

Check 1st I.0 Siial at Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 

Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 

9. Accessories Troubleshooting 

Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Inspect the Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Inspect the Test Port Connectors and Calibration Devices . . . . 

Inspect the Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Verify Shorts and Opens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

10. Service Key Menus and Error Messages 

Service Key Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-l 

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-l 

Service Key Menus . Internal Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-2 

Tests Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 

Test Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-5 

Self Diagnose Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo.7 

Test Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-7 

Internal Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-7 

9-2 

9-3 

9-3 

9-3 

9-5 

9-6 

Contents-9

External Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

System Verification Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Adjustment Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Display Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Service Key Menus - Service Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Service Modes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Service Modes More Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Description of the Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

TheMainADC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

The Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Analog In Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Analog Bus Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

A3 Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

A10 Digital IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

All Phase Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

A12 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Al4 Fractional-N (Digital) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

PEEK/POKE Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Firmware Revision Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

HP-IB Service Mnemonic Deiinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Invoking Tests Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Analog Bus Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

10-11 

10-12 

10-13 

10-15 

lo-16 

10-18 

lo-18 

10-21 

10-22 

lo-22 

lo-23 

lo-23 

lo-24 

lo-26 

lo-26 

lo-33 

lo-34 

10-40 

1043 

1046 

lo-47 

lo-48 

1048 

1049 

10-50 

11. Error lkrms 

Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose . . . . . . . . 11-l 

FuII Two-Port Error-Correction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 

Error l&m Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values . . . . . . . . 

11-8 

11-9 

Uncorrected Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Error Term Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Directivity (EDF and EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

11-9 

11-10 

11-11 

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 

Significant System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 

Affected Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 

Source Match (ESF and ESR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 

Significant System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 . 

Affected Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 

Contents-l 0

Reflection Tracking (ERF’ and ERR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 



Isolation (Crosstalk, EXF and EXR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 



LoadMatch(ELF’andELR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 



Transmission Tracking (ETF and ETR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16 

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16 



12. Theory of Operation 

How the HP 8753E Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 

The Built-In Synthesized Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 

The Source Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 

The Built-In Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 

The Receiver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 

The Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 

Required Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 

A Close Look at the Analyzer’s Functional Groups . . . . . . . . 12-4 

Power Supply Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 

Al5 PrereguIator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 

Line Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 

Preregulated Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 

Regulated +5 V Digital Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 

Shutdown Indications: the Green LED and Red LED . . . . . 12-6 

A8 Post Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 

Voltage Indications: the Green LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 

Shutdown Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 

Variable Pan Circuit and Air Flow Detector . . . . . . . . . 12-7 

Display Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 

Probe Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 

Digital Control Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 

Al Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 

A2 Front Panel Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 

Contmte11

Contents-12 

A9 CPU/A10 Digital IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 

Main CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 

MainRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 

EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 

Digital SiiaI Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 

Al8 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 

A19 GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 

A27 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 

Al6 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 

Source Theory Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 

A14/A13 Fractional-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 

Al2 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 

A7 Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 

All Phase Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 

A3 Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 

Source Super Low Band Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 

Source Low Band Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 

Source High Band Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 

Source Operation in other Modes/Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 

Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 

Harmonic Analysis (Option 002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 

External Source Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23 

Tuned Receiver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25 

Signal Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 

TheBuiIt-InTestSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 

A21 andA22’IWPortCouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 

A23LEDFrontPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 

A24 Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 

A25 Test Set Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 

Receiver Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28 

A4lA5lA6 Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29 

TheSamplerCircuitinHighBand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29 

The Sampler Circuit in Low Band or Super Low Band . . . . 12-29 

The2ndLOSignaI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29 

The Mixer Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30 

AlODi@talIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30

13. Replaceable parts 

Replacing an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Replaceable Part Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Major Assemblies, ‘Ibp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Major Assemblies, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Cables, Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Cables, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Cables, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Cables, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Cables, Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

F’ront Panel Assembly, Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

kont Panel Assembly, Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Rear Panel Assembly, Option lD5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Hardware, Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Hardware, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Hardware, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Hardware, Test Set Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Hardware, Disk Drive Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Hardware, Memory Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Hardware, Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Chassis Parts, Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Chassis Parts, Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

13-2 

13-3 

13-3 

13-5 

13-6 

13-8 

13-10 

13-12 

13-14 

13-16 

13-18 

13-20 

13-22 

13-24 

13-26 

13-28 

13-30 

13-32 

13-34 

13-36 

13-38 

13-40 

1342 

1344 

1346 

14. Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 

Replacing an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 

Procedures described in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 

LineFuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 

Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 

Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 


Removing the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 

Removing the side covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 

Removing the bottom cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 

Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 

Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 

Contents-13

Contents-14 

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 

Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies (Al, A2) . . . . . 14-10 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 

Display Lamp and Inverter Assemblies (A18, A27) . . . . . . . . 14-12 

‘Ibols Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 

Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416 

‘Ibois Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 

Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly (A16) . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 

‘Ibols Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 

A3 Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 

A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . 1426 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28 

AS, AlO, All, A12, A13, Al4 Card Cage Boards . . . . . . . . . 14-30 

lbois Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430 

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30 

A9 CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32 

A9BTl Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36 

Al5 Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38 

Al7 Motherboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-40 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-40 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-43 

A19 Graphics Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 

A20 Disk Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446 


Required Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446 

Prehminary Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46 

Install the replacement disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48 

Test the disk-eject function, and adjust if required. . . . . . . 1448 

Reinstall the covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449 

A21, A22 Test Port Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50 

A23 LED Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52 

Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52 

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52 

A24 Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-54 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-54 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-54 

A25 Test Set Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456 

A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option lD5) Assembly . 14-58 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58 

Bl Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-60 


Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-60 

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460 

Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462 

Contents-l 5

15. Safety and Licensing 

Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 

Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 

warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 

Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 

Shipment for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4 

Safety Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 

Instrument Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6 

Safety Earth Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6 

Before Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6 

servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 

Compliance with German FTZ Emissions Requirements . . . . . 15-9 

Compliance with German Noise Requirements . . . . . . . . . 15-9 

Index 

Content*16

Figures 

2-l. System Verification Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 

2-2. Connections for Measurement Calibration Standards . . . . . . 2-12 

2-3. Transmission Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 

2-4. Connections for the 20 dB Verification Device . . . . . . . . . 2-14 

2-5. Connections for the 50 dB Verification Device . . . . . . . . . 2-15 

2-6. Mismatch Device Verification Setup 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 

2-7. Mismatch Device Verification Setup 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 

2-8. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy Test Setup . . 2-19 

2-9. External Source Mode Frequency Range Test Setup . . . . . . 2-22 

2-10. Source Output Power Accuracy Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 

2-11. Test Port Output Power Range and Accuracy Test Setup . . . . 2-28 

2-12. Minimum R Channel Level Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 

2-13. Flexible RF Cable Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 

2-14. Connections for Substituting the R Sampler (A4) . . . . . . . . 2-35 

2-15. Setup for Checking the R Sampler (A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 

2-16. Source Input Noise Floor Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 

2-17. Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 1 . . . . . . . 2-44 

2-18. Test Port 2 Input Frequency Response Test Setup . . . . . . . 2-47 




2-22. Setup for Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response . . . . . . . . 2-51 



2-25. Test Port Crosstalk Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 

2-26. HP 8753E Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 

2-27. First FulI 2-Port Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 

2-28. Transmission Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 

2-29. Second FuR 2-Port Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 

2-30. Transmission Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 

2-31. System Trace Noise Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 

2-32. System Trace Noise Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 

Conteints-17

2-33. Sll l-Port Cal Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

2-34. Test Port 2 Input Impedance Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 

2-35. S22 l-Port Cal Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

2-36. Test Port 1 Input Impedance Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 

2-37. Power Meter Calibration for Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy . . . 

2-38. FulI 2-Port Calibration with Adapter Removal . . . . . . . . . 

2-39. Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Measurement . . . . . . . . . . 

240. Test Port Magnitude Compression Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . 

2-41. Test Port Phase Compression Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 

242. Test Port Output Harmonics Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 

2-43. Receiver Harmonics Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

2-44. Test Port Output Harmonics Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 

245. Receiver Harmonics Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

246. Test Port Output Harmonics Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 

3-l. A9 Correction Constants Switch 

3-2. RF Output Correction Constants T&t’S&up’fdr ‘the HP 8753E : : 

3-3. First Connections for Insertion Loss Measurement . . . . . . . 

34. Second Connections for Insertion Loss Measurement . . . . . . 

3-5. Connections for Sampler Correction Routine . . . . . . . . . . 

3-6. Connections for Sampler Correction at 6 GHz . . . . . . . . . 

3-7. Connections for Sampler Correction at Port 2 . . . . . . . . . 

3-8. Connections for Sampler Correction at Port 2 for 6 GHz . . . . 

3-9. Connections for the Second Through Cable . . . . . . . . . . 

3-10. Setup for Cavity Oscihator Frequency Correction Constant 

Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

3-11. Typical Display of Spurs with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

3-12. Typical Display of Four Spurs without a Filter . . . . . . . . . 

3-13. lhrget Spur Is Fourth in Display of Five Spurs . . . . . . . . . 

3-14. Target Spur Is Almost Invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

3-15. Location of the FN VCO TUNE Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 

3-16. Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment Display . . . . . . . 

3-17. Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 

3-18. Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 

3-19. High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location . . . . . . . . . 

3-20. High/Low Band Transition Adjustment Trace . . . . . . . . . 

3-21. High/Low Band Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

3-22. Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup 

3-23. Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . 

3-24. Location of All Test Points and A3 CAV ADJ Adjustments . . . 

3-25. Display of Acceptable versus Excessive Spikes . . . . . . . . . 

4-l. Preset Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Contents-l 8 

2-73 

2-74 

2-75 

2-76 

2-81 

2-83 

2-85 

2-90 

2-93 

2-96 

2-98 

2-102 

2-104 

2-109 

3-6 

3-14 

3-20 

3-21 

3-22 

3-23 

3-24 

3-25 

3-25 

3-29 

3-30 

3-31 

3-32 

3-33 

3-46 

346 

3-49 

3-50 

3-51 

3-53 

3-53 

3-55 

3-56 

3-58 

3-59 

4-3

4-2. Troubleshooting Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 

4-3. Al5 Prereguiator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 

44. kont Panel Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 

4-5. Equipment Setup for Source Power Check . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 

4-6. ABUSNode 16: 1 V/GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 

4-7. Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 

4-8. Typical Measurement Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 

4-9. HP 8753E Overall Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 

5-l. Power Supply Group SimpIified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . 5-3 

5-2. Location of Al5 Diagnostic LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 

5-3. A8 Post Regulator Test Point Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 

5-4. Removing the Line Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 

5-5. Power Supply Cable Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 

5-6. A15Wl Plug Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 

5-7. kont Panel Probe Power Connector Voltages . . . . . . . . . 5-20 

5-8. Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 

6-l. Digital Control Group Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 

6-2. Switch Positions on the A9 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 

6-3. CPU LED Window on Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 

6-4. Backlight Intensity Check Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 

6-5. Newtons Rings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 

6-6. Preset Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 

7-l. Basic Phase Lock Error Troubleshooting Equipment Setup . . . 74 

7-2. Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 

7-3. Sampler/Mixer to Phase Lock Cable Connection Diagram . . . . 7-7 

74. Waveform Integrity in SRC Tune Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 

7-5. Phase Locked Output Compared to Open Loop Output in SRC 

Tune Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 

7-6. 1 V/GHz at Analog Bus Node 16 with Source PLL Off. . . . . . 7-11 

7-7. YO- and YO+ Coil Drive Voltage Differences with SOURCE PLL 

OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 

7-8. Sharp 109 kHz pulses at A13TP5 (any frequency) . . . . . . . 7-16 

7-9.HighBandREFSiiaI(~l6MHzCW). . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 

7-10. REF’SiiaIatAllTP9(5MHzCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 

7-11. Typical F’N LO Waveform at A12Jl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 

7-12. 4 MHz Reference SiiaI at A12TP9 (Preset) . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 

7-13. 90 Degree Phase Offset of High Band 2nd LO Siiais (116 MHz 

cw). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 

7-14. In-Phase Low Band 2nd LO SiiaIs (14 MHz CW) . . . . . . . . 7-22 

7-15. L ENREP Line at A12P2-16 (Preset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 

7-16. Complementary L HB and L LB Signals (Preset) . . . . . . . . 7-24 

Contents-19

7-17. 10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14Jl . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 



7-20. LC OUT Waveform at A14J2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 

7-21. Al4 Generated Digital Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 

7-22. H MB Signal at A14Pl-5 (Preset and 16 MHz to 31 MHz Sweep) . 7-31 

7-23. Pulse Generator Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 

7-24. HighQuaiityComb’Ibothat3GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 

7-25. Stable HI OUT SiiaI in FRACN TUNE Mode . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 

7-26. Typical 1st IF Waveform in FRACN TUNE/SRC TUNE Mode . . 7-35 

7-27. FM Coil - Plot with 3 Point Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 

8-l. Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 

8-2. Typical Good Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 

8-3. 4 MHz REF Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 

8-4. Digital Data Lines Observed UsingL INTCOP as Trigger . . . . S-10 

8-5. Digital Control Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger . . . S-10 

8-6. 2nd IF (4 kHz) Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 

8-7. Typical Trace with Sampler Correction On and Off . . . . . . . 8-13 

9-l. Typical Return Loss Traces of Good and Poor Cables . . . . . . 9-5 

9-2. Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short (a) and Open (b) . . . 9-7 

10-l. Internal Diagnostics Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 

10-2. A9 CPU Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-S 

10-3. Service Feature Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-18 

104. Analog Bus Node 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-27 

10-5. AnaiogBusNode2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-28 

10-6. Analog Bus Node 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-29 

10-7. AnalogBusNode4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-30 

10-B. Analog Bus Node 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 





10-13. Counter Readout Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lo-38 

10-14. Analog Bus Node 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 


10-16. Analog Bus Node 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041 



10-19. Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display . . . . . 1047 

11-l. Standard Connections for Fuli Two-Port Error-Correction . . . 11-4 

11-2. ‘ljpical EDF/EDR without and with Cables . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 

Contents-20

11-3. Typical ESF/ESR without and with Cables . . . . . . . . . . . 

114. Typical ERF/ERR without and with Cables . . . . . . . . . . 

11-5. Typical EXFLEXR with 10 Hz Bandwidth and with 3 kHz 

Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

11-6. Typical ELFLELR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

11-7. Typical ETFLETR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

12-1. Simplified Block Diagram of the Network Analyzer System . . . 

12-2. Power Supply Functional Group, Simplified Block Diagram . . . 

12-3. Digital Control Group, Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . 

12-4. Low Band Operation of the Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

12-5. High Band Operation of the Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

12-6. Harmonic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

12-7. External Source Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

12-8. Tuned Receiver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

12-9. Simplified Block Diagram of the Built-in Test Set . . . . . . . . 

12-10. Receiver Functional Group, Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . 

13-1. Module Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

11-12 

11-13 

11-14 

11-15 

11-16 

12-2 

12-5 

12-9 

12-17 

12-20 

12-23 

12-24 

12-25 

12-27 

12-28 

13-4 

Contents-21

Tables 

l-l. Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l 

l-2. Service Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-2 

l-3. Connector Care Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-6 

2-l. Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Calculations . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 

3-l. Related Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 

3-2. PEEK/POKE Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 

5-l. A8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 

5-2. Output Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 

5-3. Recommended Order for RemovaYDiscoMection . . . . . . . . 5-12 

5-4. Recommended Order for RemovaVDiscoMection . . . . . . . . 5-18 

6-l. Front Panel Key Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 

6-2. Internal Diagnostic Test with Commentary . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 

7-l. Output Frequency in SRC Tune Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 

7-2. Analog Bus Check of Reference Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 

7-3. Al2 Reference Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 

7-4. AlX-Related Digitd Control SiiaIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 

7-5. VCO Range Check Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 

7-6. A14to-A13 Digital Control Siiai Locations . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 

7-7. 1st IF Waveform Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 

7-8. All Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 

8-l. SiiaIs Required for A10 Assembly Operation . . . . . . . . . 8-9 

8-2. 2nd IF (4 kHz) Siiai Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 

8-3. 2nd LO Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 

9-l. Components Related to Specific Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . 94 

10-l. Test status Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 

11-l. Calibration Coefficient Terms and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 

1 l-2. Uncorrected System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 

12-1. Super Low Band Subsweep Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 

12-2. Low Band Subsweep Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 

12-3. High Band Subsweep Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21 

12-4. Mixer Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30 

13-1. Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Options . . . . . . 1348 

14-1. Related Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462 

Contents-22

Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 

‘lhble of Service Test Equipment 

‘Ihble l-l. Required ‘Idols 

T-8, T-10, T-15, T-20, and T-25 TORX screwdrivers 

Flat-blade screwdrivers-small, medium, and large 

5/164nch open-end wrench (for SMA nuts) 

2-mm extended bit allen wrench 

3/16, 5/16, and 9/16-&h hex nut drivers 

5/164nch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb) 

2.5~mm hex-key driver 

Non-conductive and non-ferrous adjustment tool 

Needle-nose pliers 

Tweezers 

Antistatic work mat with wrist-strap 

1 

Service Equipment and Analyzer Options l-1

‘able 1-2. Service lkst Equipment 

llequired Critical J&commended Use* 

Equipment specmcatioM Model 

Spectrum Analyzer Freq. Accuracy f7 Bz HP 86633 A, T 

Spectrum Analyzer BP 8696E P 

Frequency Counter Frequency: 300 kB2 - 3 GBz (0 GBz BP 6364B/SlB/62B P 

for Option 006) 

Synthesized Sweeper Idaxhnum spuriomr input: < -30 dBc HP 8362OA P 

Residual FM: 60 dB @ 2.06 Bz and pamband that 

includes 803 IdBz 

BP P/N Q136-0198 A 

No substitute HP 8496A Opt. 001, Bl8 P

Eesnired 

Equipment 

Attenuators (tied): 

Attenuators (tied): 

Power splitter 

MinhnumLossPad 

Adapter 

AdaPt= (2) 

Adapter 

Adapter 

Adapter 

Adapter 

Adapter 

Adapter 

Adapter 

RF Cable (2 each) 

RF Cable Bet 

RF+ Cable 

RF Cable 

RF Cable 

RF Cable Bet 

HP-El Cable 

Coax Cable 

coax cable 

8 P - Performance lbst9 

A - mtauent 

T - Troubleshooting 

able l-2. Service ‘l&t Equipment (2 of 3) 

Critld 

spedficstions 

l&tum loss: >s2 dB APG7 20 dB (2) 

Type-N 20 cm (2) 

Z-Way, 500 

Type-N, 6OU to 76Q 

APGI to Type-N (f) 

APG7 to Type-N (m) 

APG7 to 3.6 nun (m) 

APG7 to 3.6 nun (f) 

BNC to Alligator Clip 

APGS.6 (m) to Type-N (f) 

APGS.6 Q to Type-N Q 

BNC (m) to Type-N (f) 

M-N Q to Type-N Q 

24-inch, APG7 

APG7, 6ou 

24~inch, APG7, 6OQ (2) 

24-inch, Type-N, 7W (2) 

24-inch, Type-N, 600 (3) 

‘be-N, LOU 

BNC 

BNC (m) to BNC (m), 600 

Eecvmmended 

Model 

l-lP 8402A Opt. 020 

HP 84QlA Opt. 020 

BP 11667A 

HP 11862B 

ElP 11624A 

EIP 11626A 

ElP P/N 126@1746 

HP P/N 1260-1747 

ElP P/N 8120-1292 

la P/N l26@1760 

El’F’ P/N 1260-1746 

HF’ PIN 1260-1477 


HP P/N 812Ck4770 

BF’ 11867D 

HF’ P/N 812G4770 


BP P/N 8120-4781 

HP 11861B 

HP 10833A/B/t/D 

BP P/N 8l20-1840 

HP 106OSA 

CT 

P, T 

P, T 

P, T A 

A, P 

A, P 

A, P 

A, P 

A 

A, P 

A, P 

P 

P 

A, P 

A, P 

P, A 

A, P 

A, P 

P, A 

A 

A 

A 

Use* 


pestid 

Equipment 

Antistatic wrist Btrap 

Antistatic wrist strap cord 

Gtatic-control lbble Mat and 

Earth Ground Wire 

Non-Met&c Adjustment lbol 

BNC Alligator Clip Adapter 

BNGto-BNC Cable 

8 P - Performance lb&s 

A - A&ustment 

T - Troubleshooting 

able 1-2. Service ‘l&t Equipment (3 of 3) 

14 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 

critical 

speciflcatioM 

Recommended Use* 

Model 

BP P/N 0so&1367 A, T P 

HP P/N 030&0080 A, T P 

HP P/N 03oo-o707 A, T P 

HPP/N8830-0024 A 

BF’ P/N 8120-1292 A 

HP P/N 81213l&IO A

Principles of Microwave Connector Care 

Proper connector care and connection techniques are critical for accurate, 

repeatable measurements. 

Refer to the calibration kit documentation for connector care information. 

Prior to making connections to the network analyzer, carefully review the 

information about inspecting, cleaning, and gaging connectors. 

Having good connector care and connection techniques extends the life of these 

devices. In addition, you obtain the most accurate measurements. 

This type of information is typically located in Chapter 3 of the calibration kit 

manuals 

For additional connector care instruction, contact your local Hewlett-Packard 

Sales and Service Office about course numbers HP 8505OA + 24A and 

HP 8505OA + 24D. 

See the following table for quick reference tips about connector care. 


‘Ihble 1-3. Connector Care Quick Reference 

HandUng and Storage 

Do Do Not 

Keep connectors clean Touch mating-plane surfaces 

Extend sleeve or connector nut Set connectors contact-end down 

Use plastic end-caps during storage 

vit3uaI Inspection 

Do I Do Not 

Inspect all connectors carefully Use a damaged connector-ever 

Look for metal particles, scratches, and dents 

Do 

‘lYy compressed air first 

Use isopropyl alcohol 

Clean connector threads 

connector CI- 

Do Not 

Use any abrasives 

Get liquid into plastic support beads 

Gaging Connectors 

Do 

Do Not 

Clean and zero the gage before use Use an out-of-spec connector 

Use the correct gage type 

Use correct end of calibration block 

Gage all connectora before first ufx 

Making conueetions 

Do 

Do Not 

Align connectors carefully Apply bending force to connection 

Make preliminary connection lightly Over tighten preliminary connection 

Turn only the connector nut 

Twifrt or screw any connection 

Use a torque wrench for final connect Tighten past torque wrench ‘break” point 

l-6 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 

I

Analyzer Options Available 

Option lD5, High Stability Frequency Reference 

This option offers f0.05 ppm temperature stability from 0 to 60° C 

(referenced to 25O C). 

Option 002, Harmonic Mode 

This option provides measurement of second or third harmonics of the test 

device’s fundamental output signal. Frequency and power sweep are supported 

in this mode. Harmonic frequencies can be measured up to the maxinuun 

frequency of the receiver. However, the fundamental frequency may not be 

lower than 16 MHz. 

Option 006, 6 GHz Operation 

This option extends the maximurn source and receiver frequency of the analyzer 

to 6 GHz. 

Option 010, Time Domain 

This option displays the time domain response of a network by computing 

the inverse Fourier transform of the frequency domain response. It shows 

the response of a test device as a function of time or distance. Displaying the 

reflection coefficient of a network versus time determines the magnitude and 

location of each discontinuity. Displaying the transmission coefficient of a 

network versus time determines the characteristics of individual transmission 

paths Time domain operation retains all accuracy inherent with the correction 

that is active in of such devices as SAW filters, SAW delay lines, RF cables, and 

RF antennas. 

Option 011, Receiver Configuration 

This option allows front panel access to the R, A, and B samplers and receivers. 

The transfer switch, couplers, and bias tees have been removed. Therefore, 

external accessories are required to make most measurements 


Option 075, 7563 Impedance 

This option offers 75 ohm impedance bridges with type-N test port connectors. 

Option lDT, Delete Display 

This option removes the built-in flat panel display, allowing measurement results 

to be viewed with an external VGA monitor only. 

Option EM, Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles 

This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary 

hardware to mount the instrument, with handles detached, in an equipment 

rack with 482.6 mm (19 inches) horizontal spacing. 

Option lCP, Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles 

This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary 

hardware to mount the instrument with handles attached in an equipment rack 

with 482.6 mm (19 inches) spacing. 

l-8 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options

Service and Support Options 

The analyzer automatically includes a three-year warranty for repair at a 

Hewlett-Packard facility. 

The following service and support options are also available. Contact your local 

sales or service office. 

Option W32 

This option provides three years of return to HP calibration service. 

Option W34 

This option provides three years of return to HP Standards Compliant 

Calibration. 

Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1-9

System Verification and 

Performance lksts 

The performance of the HP 8753E network analyzer is specified in two ways: 

Specifies warranted performance of the wu?asurm system when making 

error-corrected S-parameter measurements. The measurement system 

includes the analyzer, test cables, and calibration kit. The System Verification 

Procedure is used to conti performance of the measurement system to the 

System Specilications. 

Specifies the network analyzer’s output and input behavior and its 

uncorrected measurement port characteristics. Performance tests are used to 

confirm performance of the analyzer to the Instrument Specifications. 

System Specifications 

System Specifications, also called Measurement Port Specifications, are 

described in Chapter 7 of the HP 8753E User’s cuides. They specify warranted 

performance of the entire TTMXISU~ tqpctem when making error-corrected 

S-parameter measurements The measurement system includes the analyzer, test 

cables, and calibration kit. System Specifications are expressed in two ways: 

� graphs of measurement uncertainty versus reflection and transmission 

coefficients 

� residual errors of the measurement system-the corrected Measurement Port 

Characteristics 

System Specifications, conhrmed by the System Verification Procedure, are 

applicable when the measurement system is used to make error-corrected 

S-parameter measurements 

2 

System Verification and 2-l 

Performance Tests

Instrument Specifications 

Instrument specifications comprise the following sections and tables in Chapter 

7, “Specifications and Measurement Uncertainties, n of the HP 8753E User’s 

Guide: 

w all specifications in the section “Instrument Specifications” 

w ‘lhble 7-3 “Measurement Port Characteristics (uncorrected) for HP 8753E (5OQ) 

with 7-mm ‘l&t Ports” 

w ‘lhble 7-7 “Measurement Port Characteristics (uncorrected) for HP 8753E (75Q) 

with 7-mm Test Ports” 

These specifications apply when the analyzer is used to make measurements 

other than error-corrected S-parameter measurements An example would be 

the measurement of amplifier gain compression. In such cases, the analyzer’s 

output and input behavior-such as source power, receiver accuracy, and 

receiver linearity-are important and are covered by Instrument Specifications. 

System Veriffication Procedure 

The System Verillcation Procedure tests the network analyzer measurement 

system, as dellned above, against the System Specillcations. If conllrmation 

is successful, the measurement system is capable of making S-parameter 

measurements to the accuracy specified by the graphs of measurement 

uncertainty. An outline of the System Verification Procedure follows: 

w The measurement system is calibrated with the calibration kit to be used 

for future measurements The measurement system’s systematic errors are 

determined by this procedure. 

� The S-parameters of verification-kit test-devices are measured with error 

correction applied. 

� These measurements are compared to measurement data stored on a unique, 

serial-numbered data disk included with the verification kit. 

� The measurement system passes the System Verification Procedure if the 

measurements of the test devices differ from the measurement data on 

the data disk by less than specified test limits. The test limits account for 

the specified accuracy of the measurement system and the measurement 

uncertainties attributed to the stored data for the test devices. 

2-2 System Verification and 

Performance Tests

Note Calibration kits are different from verification kits. Culibrution 

kits are used to determine the systematic errors of a network 

analyzer measurement system. Vmttin kits are used to 

conErm system speciEcations and are not used to generate 

error-correction. For example, the HP 85031B is a 7-mm 

calibration kit, but the HP 85029B is a 7-mm verification kit. 

Performance Wsts 

Performance tests are used to confirm analyzer performance against the 

Instrument SpeciEcations. If conErmation is successful, the analyzer meets the 

Instrument SpeciEcations as deEned above. If the calibration kit to be used for 

measurements is also certiEed, successful completion of the Performance Tests 

also ensures that the network analyzer measurement system meets the System 

Specifications. 

How to Confirm Performance to System Specifications 

w Complete the System VeriEcation Procedure in this chapter using a certiEed 

verification kit, or 

� Complete all of the performance tests and certify (or re-certify) the 

calibration kit to be used for future measurements. This alternative verifies 

both the System Specifications and the Instrument Specifications for the 

analyzer. 

How to Confirm Performance to Instrument Specifkations 

� Complete the Performance Tests 

System Verification and 2-3 

Performance Teete

Certificate of Calibration 

Hewlett-Packard will issue a Certificate of Calibration for the product upon 

successful completion of System VeriEcation or completion of the Performance 

Tests. The Certificate of Calibration will include a S@~T?Z Attachment if the 

System Verification Procedure is used to confirm the System SpeciEcations. 

If the Performance Tests are used to conErm Instrument Specifications, the 

CertiEcate of Calibration will not include a System Attachment. The equipment 

and measurement standards used for the tests must be certiEed and must be 

traceable to recognized standards. 

Note If you have a measurement application that does not use all of 

the measurement capabilities of the analyzer, you may ask your 

local Hewlett-Packard Customer Service Center to verify only a 

subset of the speciEcations. However, this creates the possibility 

of making inaccurate measurements if you then use the analyzer 

in an application requiring additional capabilities. 

24 System Verification and 

Performance Tests

Sections in This Chapter 

� System Verification 

� Performance lksts 

1. Test Port Output F’requency Range and Accuracy 

2. External Source Mode kequency Range 

3. Test Port Output Power Accuracy 

4. Test Port Output Power Range and Linearity 

5. Minimum R Channel Level 

6. Test Port Input Noise Floor Level 

7. Test Port Input Frequency Response 

8. Test Port Crosstalk 

9. Calibration Coefficients 

10. System Trace Noise (only for Analyzers without Option 006) 

11. System Trace Noise (only for Analyzers with Option 006) 

12. Test Port Input Impedance 

13. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 

14. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression 

15. Test Port Receiver Phase Compression 

16. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002 Analyzers �� Option 

006 only) 

17. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002 Analyzers with Option 006 

OdY) 

18. Test Port Output Harmonics (Analyzers without Option 002) 


Performance Tests

Performance ‘I&t Record 

Find and use the appropriate “Performance ‘I&t Record” in the following 

subchapters: 

� Performance Test Record for 30 kHz to 3 GHz 

� Performance Test Record for 30 kHz to 6 GHz 


Performance Tests

System Verification Cycle and Kit Re-certification 

Hewlett-Packard recommends that you verify your network analyzer 

measurement system every six months. Hewlett-Packard also suggests that 

you get your verification kit re-certified annually. Refer to HP 85029B r-mm 

V’ttin Kit Operating and Seruice Manual for more information. 

Note The system veriEcation procedures can also apply to analyzers 

with Option 075 (75 ohm analyzers) if minimum loss pads and 

type-N (m) to APC-7 adapters are used. 

Check to see how the veriEcation kit floppy disk is labeled: 

� If your veriEcation disk is labeled HP 8753D Verification Data Disk, or 

HP 8753D& HP 8753EVerificationDataDisk, you may proceed with the 

system verification. 

� If your veriEcation disk is not labeled as indicated above, you may send 

your HP 85029B 7-mm veriEcation kit to the nearest service center for 

recertiEcation, which includes a data disk that you can use with the 

HP 8753E. 


Performance Teete

HP 8753E System Verification 

Equipment Required 

Calibration Kit, 7-mm ................................................ HP 85031B 

Verification Kit, 7-mm ............................................... .HP 85029B 

Test Port Extension Cable Set, 7-mm ................................ HP 11857D 

Printer ........................................... HP ThinkJet/DeskJet/LaserJet 

Additional Equipment Required for Option 075 Analyzers 

Minimum Loss Pad (2), 50 Q to 75 Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B 

Adapter (2), APC-7 to Type-N (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11525A 

Anulgzer warmup time: 1 hour 

This system veriEcation consists of three separate procedures: 

1. Initialization 

2. Measurement Calibration 

3. Device Verification 


Performance Tests

Initialization 

1. Clear all internal memory. 

Caution This will erase all instrument states that may be stored in 

internal memory. 

Perform the following steps to save any instrument states that 

are stored in internal memory to a floppy disk. 

d. If the instrument state file was not saved to disk with the 

same name that it had while in internal memory, you may 

wish to rename the tie. 

Press ~~.~~:~~~~~~~~~~ .~~~~~~~~ enter the de&e-j 

./ .:. ..:;... . ..y 

name, and press ~##,3@8J. 

_........................ 

e. Repeat steps a through d for each instrument state that you 

wish to save. 

To 

,. _ _ ,. _ 

clear all iM!rnal memory, press (s) ,~~~~~.~~~~ .._..._.... 3JSlJKJ~j3@ 

.._ -..-.._- .._ - ._............... 

._...__........ :jgj##$: - .._.. -- lJmm@ .._._.... - . .-....... 

. . . . . . . _.. LPreset). 


Performance Tests

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-l. Let the analyzer warm up 

for one hour 

HP 8753E 

NETWORK ANALYZER 

Figure 2-1. System Verification ‘l&t Setup 

While the equipment is warming up, review the “Connector Care Quick 

Reference” information in Chapter 1. Good connections and clean, 

undamaged connectors are criticaI for accurate measurement results. 

Insert the verification kit disk into the analyzer disk drive. 

Note If you switch on the record function, you CAiWOT switch it off 

during the verification procedure. 

7. Position the paper in the printer so that priuting starts at the top of the 

page. 


Performance Tests

8. If you have difficulty with the printer: 

� If the interface on your printer is HP-IB, verify that the printer address is 

set to 1 (or change the setting in the analyzer to match the printer). 

� If the interface on your printer is serial or parallel, be sure that you 

selected the printer port and the printer type correctly (refer to the 

HP 8753ENetuwrk Anulgzer User’s Guide for more information on how to 

perform these tasks). 

10. The analyzer displays Sys Ver Init DONE; the initialization procedure is 

complete. 

Caution Do NOT press (Preset or recall another instrument state. You 

must use the instrument state that you loaded during the 

initialization procedure. 

Measurement Calibration 

14. Connect the “open” end of the open/short combination (supplied in the 

calibration kit) to reference test port 1, as shown in Figure 2-2. 

System Verifcationand 2-11 

PerformanceTests

REFERENCE TEST 

PORT 1 

H P 8753E 


- REFERENCE TEST 

PORT 2 

Figure 2-2. Connections for Measurement Calibration Standards 

16. When the analyzer finishes measuring the standard, connect the “short” end 

of the open/short combination to reference test port 1. 

18. When the analyzer hnishes measuring the standard, connect the 50 ohm 

termination (supplied in the calibration kit) to reference test port 1. 

19. Pres ~~~~~~~~ 

* .... ...... . 

20. When the analyzer 6nishes measuring the standard, connect the “open” end 


21. mess ~~~~~~~~~. 

-.._........" ..:.-: ~.~.~.~.~.~.~..-~..~.~..~:.~.~::~ 

22. When the analyzer hnishes measuring the standard, connect the “short” end 


24. When the analyzer Gnashes measuring the standard, connect the 50 ohm 

termination to reference test port 2. 

25. press ~~~~~~~~ 

~.:.:.~.:...~.~:.:.:.~.:.~~.“‘-~ . ::,_ . :.:.~.~:.:.~.~.:.:.:.~~~.~.:.:.:.:.~ - 

2-l 2 System Verification and 

Performance Tests 

sg62e

The analyzer briefly displays COMPUTING CAL COEFFICIENTS. 

27. Connect the test port cables as shown Figure 2-3. 



-PORT 1 

H P 11857D 

EXTENSION CABLE SET 

Figure 2-3. Transmission Calibration Setup 

28. Press .~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~:. 

.,. 

..~......................-..........~~~~~ ii -.:: :....... . . . ... . . . ..~.......... ._....A. .. . . ~.c.~.~.~.. . . . . . . il_.^i...ii ..__G_ ..:. . . ..A u . . . . . . . . / . . . . i...........~...~......~ ..___............ 

29. mess ~,~~~~~~~~~;,.~~. 

_i \. ,.,.,..:::, 

.,. ; .,. _ 

.._...............__._.I.~...~.... :::.L..iL.: /:... 

3(-J. Press (-, ~~~~~~~~ ,,, g,:qs= ~~~~-,:,~~~~. ~~;...y:c+y < ..;.., ,,, ; ,; . . . ..:....:..:.:.:. 

. . ~~~ ~~~~~~~~, to 

e i . . . . . . . . s . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . A....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.__........_.__......~..........~. . . . . . . 

i.vLv..... ..~ . .._.. . . ~L......~.........i .A.. . . . L . . ..A . ~........,...........................-......~.........-..~.i.:::.i 

. . 

save the calibration into the analyzer internal memory. 

,,,.,.,~,~,., :...::.:.y ..:.:.: . . . ..y .) ... 

3 1. men the a&rzr mhes saving the instrument state, prt?SS -@%@j@; @gBg 

~~~~~~~~~. 

,.,., ...i . . . . . . . . . . i .:: i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..__.._...... - .._._....._..... 

~........... A. 


Performance Tests

Device Verification 

33. At the prompt, connect the 20 dI3 attenuator (supplied in the verification 

kit) as shown in Figure 2-4. 

,.. 

If you switched OFF the record function, you have to press ~~~~~ 

.., ,.... ,................... 

after each S-parameter measurement. 

If you switched ON the record function, the analyzer measures all 

S-parameters (magnitude and phase) without pausing. Also, the analyzer 

only displays and prints the PASS/FAIL information for the S-parameter 

measurements that are valid for system verification. 

HP R753F 

. . . -. --- 


Figure 2-4. Connections for the 20 dB Verification Device 

35. When the analyzer fmishes all the measurements, connect the 50 dB 

attenuator (supplied in the vetication kit), as shown in F’igure 2-5. 



/



“ERlFlCATlON DEVICE 

Figure 2-5. Connections for the 50 dB Verifkation Device 

37. When all measurements are complete, replace the verification device with 

the verification mismatch, as shown in Figure 2-6. Be sure that you connect 

Port A of the verification mismatch to reference test port 1. 



Figure 2-6. Mismatch Device Verification Setup 1 

39. When the analyzer finishes all the measurements, connect the mismatch 

verification device, as shown in Figure 2-7. Notice that Port B is now 

connected to reference test port 1. 

T2 

sg65e 

sg66e 

Syetem Verification and 2-l 5 

Performance Tests



PORT 1 

PORT 2 

7 

(rORT 

VERIFICATION MISMATCH 

Figure 2-7. Mismatch Device Verification Setup 2 

:.:.:.. ;:

In Case of Difiblty 

1. Inspect alI connections. 

Caution Do NOT disconnect the cables from the analyzer test ports. 

Doing so WILL lNkYLU?B the calibration that you have done 

earlier. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

Press [EJ ‘Save/Recall, +&g@$$g&K. ~~~~~~~~~ f&@g. using the 

_. - i: _... >u i - __,..... ..:.:.: .._ .: ..:. :... i.. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..,...,.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._... .: .._... .:::: ..,...... A......::::::: .:: -.: 

front panel knob, highlight the,,title of the full 2-Port calibration that you 

... ..,.; ,.,,.,.,.,: ;: 

have done earlier, then press ~~~~~~~~. 

Repeat the “Device Verification” procedure. 

If the analyzer still fails the test, check the measurement calibration as 

follows: 

a. Press [preset). 

d. Connect the short to reference test port 1. 

g. Check that the trace response is 0.00 f 0.05 dB. 

h. Disconnect the short and connect it to reference test port 2. 

j. Check that the trace response is 0.00 f 0.05 dD. 

k. If any of the trace responses are out of the specified limits, repeat the 

“Measurement Calibration” and “Device Verification” procedures. 

Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here,” for more troubleshooting 

information. 


PerfonnanEe Tests

1. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy 

Specifications 

Required Equipment 

Frequency Range Frequency Accuracy1 

30 kHz to 3 GHz f10 ppm 

1 3GHzto6GHz2 1 &lo ppm I 

1 At 25O C f5* C. 

2 Only for analyzers with Option 006 - 30 kHz to 

6GIIzrange. 

kequency Counter (30 kHz to 500 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 5350B/51B/52B 

F’requency Counter (500 MHz to 6 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 5350B/51B/52B 

Cable, 500 Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 81204781 

Adapter, APC-3.5 (f) to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1745 

Adapter, APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 11524A 

Adapter, Type-N (f) to BNC (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1477 

Additional equipment needed for an HP 8753E with Option 075 

Minimum Loss Pad, 5OQ to 75Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B 

Aruzlgzer warmup time: 30 minutes 

Perform this test to verify the frequency accuracy of the HP 8753E over its 

entire operating frequency range. 

2-l 8 Syetem Veriiication and 

Performance Tests

1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-8. 

* DIRECT (:ONNECTlON 



WITH OPTION 075 

PORT1 * 

PI 

5on 17s 

MIMIMUM 

LOSS PAD 

5Ofl TYPE-N CABLE ASSEMBLY 

FREQUENCY COUNTER 


NETWORK ANALYZER FREQUENCY COUNTER 

ADAPTER 

w-3.5 (f) 

TO NPE-N(f) 

ADAPTER 

APC-3.5 (f) 

TO TYPE-N(f) 

Figure 2-8. lkst Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy ‘I&t Setup 

2. Press (IFKGQ [Menu) t%Xmi$. 

3. Press 13oJ Ck/m) and write the frequency counter reading on the “Performance 

Test Record. n 

4. Repeat step 3 for each instrument frequency listed in the “Performance Test 

Record. n 

ig68e 


Performance Tests

In Case of Difljiculty 

1. If any measured frequency is close to the specification limits, check the time 

base accuracy of the counter used. 

2. If the analyzer fails by a significant margin at all frequencies (especially if 

the deviation increases with frequency), the master time base probably needs 

adjustment. In this case, refer to the “Frequency Accuracy Adjustment” 

procedure, located in Chapter 3, “Adjustments and Correction Constants. ’ 

The “Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment” also affects frequency 

accuracy. 

3. Refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting,” for related troubleshooting 

information. 

2-20 System Veriication and 

Performance Tests

2. External Source Mode Frequency Range 



Frequency Range 

300 kHz to 3 GHz 

300 kHz to 6 GHzl 

1 Only for analyzers with 

OptionOO6- 3OkHzt.o 

6GHzrange. 

External Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 83620A 

Cable, APC-7, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779 

Adapter, APC-3.5 (f) to APC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1747 

Adapter, APC-3.5 (m) to APC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1746 

Aruzlgzer warmup time: 30 minutes 

Perform this test to verify that the analyzer’s reference channel, input R, is 

capable of phase locking to an external CW signal. 

1. On the external source, press [Presets Icw) LloJ (j-J [POWER LEVEL) m 

12o)(i~. 

2. Connect the equipment as shown in F’igure 2-9. 

System Verification and 2.21 

Performance Tests

* DRECT CONNECTION 

R CHANNEL IN * 

r ADAPTER 

TO WC-7 

P 

APC-3.5 (m) 

HP 83620A 

SYNTHESIZER 

\ CABLE APCG7 24 INCH J 

Figure 2-9. Exterml Source Mode Frequency Range lkst Setup 

5. Check to see if the analyzer is phase locking to the external CW signal: 

H If the analyzer displays any phase lock error messages, write “unlock” in 

the “Performance Test Record” for the set CW signal. 

sgE121e 

w If the analyzer does not display any phase lock error messages, write “lock” 

in the “Performance Test Record” for the set CW signal. 

6. On the external source, press m L20) [j]. 

7. On the analyzer, press I2oJ m. 

8. Repeat step 5 through 7 for the other external source CW frequencies listed 

in the “Performance Test Record.” 


Periormance Tests

In Case of Difkulty 

If the analyzer displayed any phase lock error messages: 

1. Be sure the external source power is set within 0 to -25 dBm. 

2. Make sure the analyzer’s “Ext Source Auto” feature is selected. In addition, 

verify that the analyzer is set to measure its input channel R. 

3. Verify that all connections are tight. 

System Veriication and 2-23 

Performance Tests

1. 

2. 

Zero and calibrate the power meter. For more information of how to perform 

this task, refer to the power meter operating manual. 

Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-10. 

ADAPTER APC-7 






POWER SENSOR 

HP 43BA 

Figure 2-10. Source Output Power Accuracy lkst Setup 


Performance Tests

3. Press-. 

Note The factory preset test port power is 0 dBm. 

..;; . . . . . . 

4. Press m &IE;~.‘@@Z~~j (300_) (i$J. Set the calibration factor on the power 

meter for this CW frequency. 

5. Write the power meter reading on the “Performance Test Record.” 

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each CW frequency listed in the “Performance Test 

Record.” For analyzers with Option 006, use the HP 8481A power sensor for 

all frequencies above 3 GHz. 

In Case of Difficulty 

. . . . . . ..~.~.~... :.:: 

1. Be sure the source power is switched on. Press IMenu) ..A :$&@$. .vs.. ii i ..A... ::A%..;; Check 

the ~~~~~ softkey; “on” should be highlighted. Otherwise, press 

; :..,...,

4. Test Port Output Power Range and Linearity 



Power Range 1 Power Level Linearity1 1 

1 -15 to +5 dBm I f0.2 dB 

1+5to +10dBm21 f0.5 dB I 

+5 to +8 dBm3 I f0.5 dB 

1 Relative to 0 dBm output level. 

2 Applies to instruments not using Option 076. 

3 For Option 075 only. 

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 437B/438A 

Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8482A 

Adapter, APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11524A 

Additional Required Equipment for Analyzers with Option 006 


Additional Required Equipment for Analyzers with Option 075 

Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8483A Option HO3 

Analgzm warmup time: 1 hour 

Perform this test to verify the analyzer’s test port output power range and 

power level linearity at selected CW frequencies. 


Performance Tests

1. Zero and calibrate the power meter. Refer to the power meter operating 

manual for more information on how to do this task. 

2. On the network analyzer, press (GJ LG_) ~~.~~~~~~ Isdo_) Lk/m. Set the 

power meter calibration factor for this CW frequency. 


* DIRECT CONNECTION 

ADAPTER APC-7 to N(F) 


POWER SENSOR 

3 - 6GHz 

HP 0753E 





PORT 2 P 

H P 8482A 

POWER SENSOR 

30KHz - 3GHz 

POWER SENSOR 

H P 438A 

H P 438A 

/ 

sg61 le 

Figure 2-11. ‘l&t Port Output Power Range and Accuracy ‘Ikst Setup 


Performance Tests

4. On the HP 438A, press (REL). This sets the current power level for relative 

power measurement. 

. . . . _ . . . . . . 

5. h the network maJyzer, press LMenu_] @@& ~~~~~~~~~~~ 1--15) a). 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~...~ ii .: . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .::::: /i............i .. . . . . . . . . .%___.__....... 

6. Write the power meter reading in the “Results Measured” column on the 

U Performance Test Record. ’ 

7. Calculate the difference between the analyzer test port power (which 

appears on the analyzer’s display) and the power meter reading. Write the 

result in the “Power Level Linearity” column on the “Performance Test 

Record. n 

8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the other power levels listed in the 

“Performance Test Record. n 

9. After all required power levels have been measured, press @ Lxl) to reset 

power to 0 dRm. 

. . . / . 

.;... :.. /;. 

10. Press ~~~~~~: .._......_.._.__ - _........ @a. 

11. Set the power meter calibration factor for this CW frequency and press m 

to set the reference at this new frequency. 

12. Press m g&$&&Y L-15] Lxl). 

_........ . 

13. Write the power meter reading in the “Results Measured” column on the 


14. Calculate the difference between the analyzer test port power and the 

power meter reading. Write the result in the “Power Level Linearity” 

column of the “Performance Test Record.” 

15. Repeat steps 11 through 13 for the other power levels listed in the 


16. Repeat steps 9 through 13 for 6 GHz using 8481A sensor. 

In Case of Dii3culty 

1. Ensure that the power meter and power sensor(s) are operating to 

specifications. Be sure you set the power meter calibration factor for the CW 

frequency that you are testing. 

Syctem Verification and 2-29 

Performance Tests

2. Verify that there is power coming out of the analyzer’s test port 1. Be sure 

you did not accidentally switch off theCCCCmaIyzer’s internal source. If you did 

so, press 1Menu) &j#j@ ~~~~~~~.~~ ‘$Ep :. 

_....... - - -_..- .._........_....... ..u; .,........._ - -... 

3. Repeat this performance test. 


Performance Tests

5. Minimum R Channel Level 


1 Frequency Range 1 Minimum B Channel Level 1 

1300kHzto3GHz 1 c-35 dBm I 

13GHzto6GHzl 1 c-30 dBm I 

1OnlyforanalyzerswithOption006-3OkHzto6GHz 

range. 

Required Equipment for 500 Analyzers 

Adapter, APC-3.5 (m) to APC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1746 

Cable, APC-7 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779 

Required Equipment for 75 ohm Analyzers (Option 075) 

Minimum Loss Pad, 5OQ to 75Q . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B 

Cable, 508 Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 8120-4781 

Adapter, APC-3.5 (m) to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 1250-1750 

An&m warmup time: 1 hour 

Perform this test to determine the minimum R channel input power level at 

which phase lock can be accomplished. 



Performance Tests



I Q m , ‘I R CHANNEL 

c T 

PORT1 PORT2 

CABLE APC-7 24 INCH 

ADAPTER 

5on /7x-l 

APC-3.5 (m) MINIMUM 

TO APCG7 

LOSS PAD 



* DIRECT CONNECTION 

Figure 2-12. Minimum I1 Channel Level ‘I&t Setup 

4* mess CSca,e Ref, ~~~~“~~~~~~ 1-701 Ixil. 

5. Press Ihnenul ~~~~~~ ~ ~. 

-.-...-...._......... L~.:.. 

. . ..A . .,.,.,. ,... . . . . . ;,.; . . . ,.,.,.. ..::..:....:. 

6- Press LMenu) !E&&fg @TJ @. 

R ( 

sg612e 

The analyzer displays the message CAUTION : NO IF FOUND : CHECK R INPUT 

LEVEL. 

7. Press @J to increase the test port power by 1 dBm. 

8. If the analyzer displays a phase lock error message, continue increasing the 

test port power until phase lock is achieved. 

9. Write the test port power, that is displayed on the analyzer, on the 


10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 for the other CW frequencies listed in the 


2-32 Syetem Verification and 

Performance Teete

In Case of DilEculty 

1. Check the flexible RF cable (W8, as shown in Figure 2-13) between the R 

sampler assembly (A4) and the All phase lock assembly. Make sure it is 

connected between AllJl (PL IF IN) and 1st IF Out. 

Caution a0 not push cable W8 down next to the All phase lock 

assembly. 

System Verification and 233 

Performance Tests



A10 A8 All A12 

Figure 2-13. Flexible RF Cable Location

2. Using an ohmmeter, verify that the RF cable is not open. In addition, 

examine both the cable connectors-measure the resistance between the 

cable center pin and the cable connector and make sure it is not close to 

zero. 

3. Check the R sampler by substituting it with the B sampler (A6). 

a. Move cable W8 to the B sampler (A6), as shown in Figure 2-14. 

Figure 2-14. Connections for Substituting the B !kmpler (A4) 


All 

sg6115-z 


Performance Tests



- 24-INCH CABI 

Figure 2-15. Setup for Checking the B Sampler (A4) 

5. Repeat the test, but select the B sampler (A6) by pressing m 

~:~~~~~~~~: ‘B h step 2. Use the following specific&ions: 

..__._ . .._ _ _ _i .,.,,__ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ 

300 kHz to 3 GHz c-27 dBm 

3 GHz to 6 GHz c-22 dBm 

6. If the analyzer fails the test, replace the All assembly. 

7. Verify that the high/Iow band adjustments are still within specifications For 

more information on how to perform this task, refer to the “High/Low Band 

Transition Adjustment” located in Chapter 3, “Adjustments and Correction 

Constants n 

8. Refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting 

information. 


Performance Tests

6. ‘Jkst Port Input Noise Floor Level 

Specifkations 

Frequency Range ‘l&t Port IF Bandwidth Average 

Noise Level 

300 kHz to 3.0 GHz Port 1 3kHz -82 dBm 

300 kHz to 3.0 GHz Port 1 10 Hz -102 dBm 

300 kHz to 3.0 GHz Port 2 3 kHz -82 dBm 

300 kHz to 3.0 GHz Port 2 10 Hz -102 dBm 

3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz’ Port 1 3kHz -77 dBm 

3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHzl Port 1 10 Hz -97 dBm 

3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHzl Port 2 3kHz -77 dBm 

3.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz’ Port 2 10 Hz -97 dBm 

1 Only for analyzer with Option 006 - 30 kHz to 6 GHz range. 

Equipment Required for 508 Analyzers 

Calibration Kit, 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85031B 

Equipment Required for 75 ohm Analyzers 

Calibration Kit, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85036B 

An&zerwarmuptime:1 hour 

Perform this test to determine the HP 8753E port 1 and port 2 noise floor levels 

at the input test ports 

Syctem Verification and 2-37 

Performance Tests

Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 300 kHz to 3 GHz 

(lFHw = 3kHz) 




50R TERM,NAmJNS 

Figure 2-16. Source Input Noise Floor ‘l&t Setup 

5. When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value (which 

appears on the analyzer display). 

sg614e 

6. Convert the measured linear magnitude mean value to log magnitude, using 

this equation. 

Power (dBm) = 20 * [log&near magnitude mecrn value)] 

Note Notice that the mean value that is displayed on the analyzer is 

in ~Units So, for example, if the displayed value is 62 /rU, the 

value that you would put in the equation is (62 x 106). 

7. Write this calculated value on the “Performance Test Record.” 


Performance Tests


(IF BW = 10 Hz) 

10. When the analyzer finishes the sweep, notice the mean value. 



Power (dBm) = 20 * [lOgIO(Zinear magnitude mean value)] 



(IFBW = 1OHz) 




Power (dBm) = 20 * [log,,(Zinear magnitude mean value)] 



Performance Tests


(IFm = 3kHz) 

i. .;-... .:‘

Port 2 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz) 

29. Press &) $@@@ .._ (iiJ [xl] to change the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz. 

/ ::::::. . . . . . . . i... .:.: .I.... / 

30. Press IMenu) .;.; ~~.~~~ ............__........._........... . .A..... . . Li ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . %YXgm. 

..--..- . . . . . . . . . . . i ...i i 

31. When the analyzer hnishes the sweep, notice the mean value. 



Power (dBm) = 20 * [log,o(Zinear magnitude mean value)] 


Port 1 Noise Floor Level for 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 10 Hz) 

. . . . . . . ./ . . .,..,.,. ,.................. ;.;,.,,. . . . . . . . . . ..,.............,..........,................ 

. . 

.......................I 

35. press (Menu) .., ~~~~~~~ ,; ,_,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,. e i_ i...~.~__._.,._.,._. ~~~~~~. 

..~ 




Power (dBm) = 20 * [logI,,(Zinear magnitude mean value)] 


Port 1 Noise Floor Level from 3 GHz to 6 GHz (IF BW = 3 kHz) 

..,... :.s,,, 

39. press &) &j$+~~:> 

- .._ --. 

@ m. 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

40. Press LMenu) ~~.~~~~~~~~ .. . . . aw.;;..; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :::::: . . . . . . . :.L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m . . . . . . . ...::..: ~~~. 

. . . . . . . . . . .2 . . . . . . .._ . . . .:.:: 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

41. When the analyzer hnishes the sweep, notice the mean value. 



Power (dBm) = 20 * [lo&-,(Zinear magnitude mean value)] 



Performance Tests

ln Case of Difficulty 

1. Perform the “ADC Linearity Correction Constants (Test 52),’ located in 

Chapter 3, “Adjustments and Correction Constants n 

2. Repeat the “Test Port Input Noise Floor Level” procedure. 

3. Suspect the A10 Digital IF assembly if the analyzer fails both test port input 

noise floor tests. 

4. Refer to Chapter 8, “Receiver Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting 

information. 


Performance Tests

7. Test Port Input Frequency Response 


Frequency Range lkst Port Input 

Frequency Response 

300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 1 fl dH 

300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 2 fl dB 

3 GHz to 6 GHzl Port 1 52 dE3 

1 3GHz to 6 GHzl 1 Port2 1 

1 Only for analyzers with Option 006 - 30 kHz to 6 GHz range. 

Equipment Required for 5OQ Analyzers 

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 436AI437W438A 


Cable, APC-7 24inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 81204779 

Adapter, APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 11524A 

Additional Equipment Required for Analyzers with Option 006 

Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8481A 

Equipment Required for 75Q Analyzers 

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 436AJ437Bl438A 

Power Sensor ..*................................... . . . . . . . HP8483AOptionH03 

Cable, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-2408 

Anulgger warmup time: 1 hour 

Perform this test to examine the vector sum of all test setup error vectors in 

both magnitude and phase change as a function of frequency. 


Performance Tests

Power Meter Calibration for Test Port 1 from 300 KHz to 3 GHz 

1. Zero and calibrate the power meter. 







/’ 

Figure 2-17. Setup for Power Meter Calibration on ‘I&t Port 1 

3. Press m m 1300_) Lk/m. 

4. Only for Analyzers with Option 006: Press [Stop_] (T’J &J. 

5. Press (-..@ ~.~~~~~~~~~~~. 

_ .,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,i __~_.,._ .,_ _ .,.,.,. _.,._.,._._.,._ _ i .,.,.,.,.,. ~.~._.__ 

6. Press ~~,,,~~~~~~~ . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . and ~~~~~~ Mtil the malyzer shows the correct 

power meter model. 


Performance Tests

. . . . . . . “......,,,,,,,,,.,, ;.::...;. ‘...... ,,,.. ;; /.... 

7. Press ~~~~~~:,~:-g #T&j%!&. The default power meter HP-IB address 

., 

is 13. Make sure it is the same as your power meter HP-IB address. 

Otherwise, use the analyzer front panel keypad to enter the correct HP-IB 

address for your power meter. 

8. Press ~ I~~.:~~~~~~~~~.l . . . . . . . . . . . . ,..;.,.,;, . . . . . .: L51) Ixl). 

. ../_ii~~..........-//-.......~ ii .: ..:::::.::... :..:............i 

“‘:y:: ..~.y”,. .d.d;;, ;x; g .:f ‘.;“. ::::::i 

9. Press @@j% ‘~~~~~~,~~~~ to turn the auto power range off. 

Note The analyzer displays the PRm annotation, indicating that the 

analyzer power range is set to MANUAL. 

“. :,... ‘.; ‘.;;;;.;~~, f ,, ,“; E 

10. Press ?#$@I@ SW&I4 to uncouple the test port output power. 

Note 

their corresponding frequencies. 

The analyzer’s calibration factor sensor table can hold a 

muximum of 12 calibration factor data points 

The following softkeys are included in the sensor calibration factor entries 

menu: 

_.. _ __; _ _.,.,....,.. __; ; _; _ _.:. ;.... .;. 

gggi#ggi: 

_; _) _ ~.-.:...:.:.:.:...~.:.~~:~~~~; 

press to select a point where you can use the front 

panel knob or entry keys to enter a value. 

..,............................... _ . . . . . . _ 

#g+Jg 

.A, ....i i . . . .w;.>.~..~.~.~.~.~.~ . . 

press to edit or change a previously entered value. 

press to delete a point from the sensor calibration 

factor table. 

~~~ select this key to add a point into the sensor 

calibration factor table. 

. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . ... “~.:.:.::;.::::::: ‘:~.;~~~~~~,~ :.:::::::.:.:.:~::::::::,.:;::::~:...:;:~.. 

~~~~~~~ select this key to erase the entire sensor calibration 

factor table. 

select this key when done entering points to the sensor 

calibration factor table. 


Performance Tests

Power Meter Calibration on Port 2 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz 

22. Connect the equipment as shown Figure 2-19. 






H P 8482A 

POWER SENSOR 

H P 8483A 

Figure 2-19. Setup for Power Meter Calibration on Test Port 2 

23. Press (seas) ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~.~~:~~.~. 

. .._..::, . ..~...,...~..~...~...~..,.~~.~ . . . . .a.G :... i~.~..,.....,.............~ : ..A.. ..::::: ._.,... . . . . . . . . . ..~.................. _... .......:::..u~.L 

. . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . 

. . . . _ _ _,, _.; /,. . . . . . . . _.; /, . . . . . . /_ _ ,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,...,...,_.,....i _ i _ i ._.,.._i _* 

24. fiess (g ~~~ ~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~ to start the power meter 

..-.... -..-.--_. .--_.- _......._._.__........ -... .~~.~.~~..~.~.~.~.~.~.~...----~ -......-..--..-..-._ - 

calibration for test port 2. 

25. When the analyzer displays the message POWEFl METER CALIBRATION SWEEP 

DONE, connect the equipment as shown as in Figure 2-20. 

248 Syetem Verification and 

Performance Tests



-PORT 1 

Figure Z-20. lkst Port 1 Input Frequency Response lkst Setup 

Test Port 1 Input Frequency Response from 300 kHz to 3 GHz 

.::.. .::>. ,, .. :::



HP 8753F 



H P 8481A 

POWER SENSOR 


Test Port 2 

sg617e 

35. Press ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~-:~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~: Repeat step 12 to build 

a calibration factor sensor table for the HP 8481A power sensor. 

36. Press ~%~#k .>......;.; .- . ..__.. i. . . . . . . . .;...; -.. . . . . to . exit the sensor calibration factor entries menu. 

. . . . . . . . . . . . .._ . . . . ::,::: 

37. m s&a the HP 8&lA power sensor, press ~~~~~~~~~~~. 

_ ._... 

38. Press ~~ ~~~ *ym;f 

: ..- -_..- ;..;I: .._._ -c 

i ,.=i_ . ~~~~~~~~~~~ . . . _ . _ _ to start the power meter calibration. 


Performance Tests


39. When the analyzer Gnashes the calibration sweep, connect the equipment as 

shown in Figure 2-22. 



PORT 1 

U 

I I 

PORT 2 

CABLE 

24 INCH 

Figure 2-22. Setup for lkst Port 1 Input Frequency Response 

. . . . . . . . 

_ . . . . . . . ..: . . . / / . . 

Press I-1 ~~~~~~~ c-1 ~~~~ ~~~~~~~~.. to put 

/i_.......-......~r~i_i_ 

~~i..................~~~;;;~;~.i ._ i......./......l .: . . . . . . . . . ..L......... _...._.... . -:: 

41. 

marker 1 at the minimum magnitude location of the trace. 

:..... :.. .+:.:~ / . ..>> ~~~~~ . . . . ./ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2L../:: . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . ... .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .:::::. ~~~~~ . . . . . . ~;..................._......~..........._............-~... ::.....i.i.::: to position 

marker 2 at the maximum magnitude location of the trace. 

43. Write the marker 1 or marker 2 reading, whichever has the largest absolute 

magnitude, in the “Performance Test Record. n 


Performance Tests


47. When the analyzer displays the message POWER METER CALIBRATION SWEEP 

DONE, connect the equipment as shown as in Figure 2-24. 

H P -.-~~ 8753E 


PORT 1UPORT 

2 

CABLE 

24 INCH 

Figure 2-24. ‘Ikst Port 2 Input Frequency Response ‘lkst Setup 

51. Write the marker 1 or marker 2 reading, whichever has the largest 

magnitude, in the “Performance Test Record.” 

In Case of Difaculty 

1. Be sure you have used the correct power sensor for the frequency range. 

2. Verify that the calibration factors that you have entered for the power 

sensors are correct. 

3. Repeat this test with a “known good” through cable. 


Performance Teete

8. lkst Port Crosstalk 

Specifhtions 

( Frequency Euuge 1 Crosstalk1 1 

1 300 kHz to 3 GHz 1 100 dB 1 

) 3GHzto6GHz2 1 9OdB 1 

1 At 25O C 3~5“ C. 

2 Only for analyzers with Option 006 - 

30kHzto6GHzrange. 

Required Equipment for 50 ohm Analyzers 

Calibration Kit, 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85031B 

Cable, APC-7 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779 

Required Equipment for 7513 Analyzers 

Calibration Kit, 75 ohm, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 85036B 

Analyzer warmup time: 1 hour 

Perform this test to verify the signal leakage between the analyzer’s test ports. 




PORT 11 

CABLE APC-7 

24 INCH 

I 

PORT 2 

OPEN END 

- I I 

PORT 1 * * PORT 2 

SHORT (m) 

(75fl) 

- 

ADAPTER 

TYPE-N(m to 

* 

TYPE-N(m i 

SHORT ( f ) 

x (75fl) 

(75n) 

* DIRECT CONNECTION sg620e 



Figure 2-25. ‘I&t Port Crosstalk l&t Setup

,.,.. . . . . .,. .,. / . . . . 

2. Press (jj) [iZG) P#%B ; . . . .._...... . ;;., :. @J (XJ 

3. Press m ~~~~ @J (xl). 

Crosstalk to Test Port 2 from 300 kHz to 3 GHz 

4. Press~(3iZJ(i$J&Tj@LG/n). 

.(:.~,~,~,.:.~,~,~. :.::. .:;.. ..: . . . . . ..z.. . . 

5. Press m :~~~~~~:~,,~~~,^~~~~~~~~~.,. 

. ..

18. Write the marker value (which appears on the analyzer display) in the 


Crosstalk to Test Port 2 from 3 GHz to 6 GHz 

.._ .,......_ i ..,.,.,.,.,.,...,.,.,.,..,, :i ,,, . . .... . . . . . . ..:. : . . . . . . .._. . ..~_ _ ._ ._ _ _ _i 

. . . . 

l- Press (Meas) _..i. ~~~~~;,~,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 

_../..i awA>>..> .i...A..L../......~.i- ...... . . . . .....................___._- 

. 

2. Press Ihnenu_) ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~ 

i.~.~.~.~_..>...~ ii z.sw;..i.ii . . . . . . . . . . . . ..ii^................._ . . . . . 

./:....:..:.... ..: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..:::.;x . . . . . . . . A . . . ..:..s.......: - 

3. 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . /,: :.,. ,;.,.;,.,.;........ * :; .: / ,, ,.,.,.,. 

Press (-Fan_) ,,~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~’ 

- . - . AS ._. 

4. Write the marker value (which appears on the analyzer display) in the 


In Case of DifBculty 

1. Remove the instrument top cover. Using an 8 lb-inch torque wrench, verify 

that all semirigid cables connected to the sampler/mixer assemblies are 

tight. In addition, tighten any loose screws on the sampler/mixer assemblies 

(A4/5/6) and the pulse generator assembly (A7). 

2. Remove the instrument bottom cover. Refer to F’igure 2-26. Verify that 

cables Wl, W31 and W32 are tight. 

3. Repeat this test. 


Performance Tests

W32, 

Figure 2-26. HP 8753E Bottom View 

sg6102e 


Performance Tests

9. Calibration Coefficients 


Uncorrected1 Frequency Range 

Error ‘kms 

300 kBz to 1.3 GHz 1.3 GElz to 3 GHz 3 GHz to 6 GHz2 

Directivity 35 dl3 30 dB 25 dB 

Source Match 16 dB 16 dB 14 dB 

Load Match 18 dB 16 dB 14 dB 

Transmission Tracking f1.5 dB f1.5 dB f2.5 dB 

Reflection Tracking f1.5 dB f1.5 dB f2.5 dB 

1 At 25’ f5O C, with less than lo C deviation from the measurement calibration temperature. 

2 Only for analyzers with Option 006 - 30 kHz to 6 GHz range. 

Equipment Required for 5011 Analyzers 

Calibration Kit, 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . HP 85031B 

Cable, APC-7, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 81204779 

Equipment Required for 75Q Analyzers 

Calibration Kit, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85036B 

Cable, Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4781 

Analger warmup time: 30 minutes 

Perform this procedure to verify the analyzer uncorrected test port 

characteristics. 

Note The crosstalk calibration coefficients are omitted in this 

procedure. They are covered in the “Test Port Crosstalk” 

performance test. 


Performance Tests

First Full 2-Port Calibration 


TEST PORT 1 



Figure 2-27. First Full 2-Port Calibration ‘I&t Setup 

2. PressLPreset)Lstart)@&EJ 

5. Connect the “open” end of the open/short combination (supplied in the 

calibration kit) to analyzer test port 1. 

6. ~~~ ~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~. 

-_...-...L i .._.. ~:~:....:..-- .:..:

,. ..,. ... ,... ..:: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

12. press ~~~~.~~~~. 

..__..............._ -_.: ..~........... :..::... 

13. Connect the “short” end of the open/short combination to the reference test 

port 2. 

15. Connect the 50 ohm termination to the reference test port 2. 

17. Whentheanalyzer “‘.’ _____.. ... . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . displays PRESS 'DONE' IF FINISHED WITH STD(s), press 

~~~~,l;~~~~ 

.._....._...._..._............--..................... 111.... I. ./ ..I..1 . . . ..A. * * i. . . . . . . . . . . ;;;;./;C~ . . . . . . . - i .::::: .::::. - - 

Waitforthemessage COMPUTINGCAL COEFFICIENTS to disappearfromthe 

analyzer display before proceeding to the next step. 






PORT 1 I I PORT 2 

Figure 2-28. Transmission Calibration lkst Setup

Directivity (Forward) Calibration Coefficient 

..::: ::.::.. ~.:~.~:~:~:~:.. .y::.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.::.:: .I -3, .+ y:~.:.:::: .f+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,,....,,... .a., .J.. 

21- Press [j] ~3~~~~:~~~ ii.... . ......... . . . . . .. . . ._A.A. . . . . z.v,c._ . . . 

. . . . . ..::::: . . . . . . . ..L . :XifF!# . . . ..A/ . .A.. ii ..A. T . . . .... . i.: (32) @J .~~.~~~ 

22. When the analyzer finishes the test, press B. 

23. Using the front panel knob, locate the maximum value of the data trace for 

the 300 kHz to 1.3 GHz frequency range. 

24. Write the maximum value in the “Performance Test Record.” 

25. Repeat the previous two steps for the other frequency range(s) listed on the 


Source Match (Forward) Calibration Coefficient 

27. When the analyzer finishes the test, repeat steps 22 through 25. 

Transmission Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient 

28. Press m ~~~~~~~ ~~~ ~37) (xl) ~~~~. 

. . . . _i_ i _ ___ _ _i .,.,.,.,.......,........... ii . . . . . . . _ .:::: _ i . . . . . . . ~;..~~ ..== _ 


Reflection Tracking (Forward) Calibration Coefficient 


Load lMatch (Reverse) Calibration Coemcient 



Performance Tests

44. Replace the open/short combination with the 50 ohm termination (supplied 

in the calibration kit). 

46. Connect the “open” end of the open/short combination to the analyzer test 

port 2. 

48. Connect the “short” end of the open/short combination to the analyzer test 

port 2. 

49. press ~~~~~~~~~. 

.,.. . . ~;.......,.......................~.~- . . . . . . 

. . . . . . . ..-..........~~~.~~...~...~~. . . . . . 

50. Connect the 50 ohm termination to the analyzer test port 2. 

52. When the analyzer displays PRESS ‘DONE’ IF FINISHED WITH STD(s) , press 

~:~~~~~~~~~:. 

*, i_i _ i _ __ .. _1 ,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,. _ 

Wait for the message COMPUTING CAL COEFFICIENTS to disappear from the 

analyzer display before proceeding to the next step. 




I I CABLE 

24 INCH 

Figure 2-30. Transmission Calibration ‘I&t Setup 

sg618.2 


Performance Tests

10. System Trace Noise (Only for Analyzers without 

Option 006) 

Frequency Range Ratio System Trace Noise System Trace Noise 

(Magnitude1 ) (Ph-3 

30kHzto3GHz A/R

. . . . . . . . . . .,............. 

j_., ./_ 

4. Press CMarker F~“, ‘~~~~~~~~: ~~~~~~~~: to activate the 

__........~.~............-........~~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~;.~ . . . . . . . I.._ .:::.._....../.: . i~~L~.~.~.~.~zz&..~.~ c//.~.~._.~.~.~~~~~.~.~ . . . . i . . . . . . . . -..-.. i.. 

instrument’s statistic feature. 

System Trace Noise for A/R Magnitude 

7. When the analyzer displays the “Hld” annotation, press c-j 

~~~‘:~~~~~~: 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 

8. Write the sdev (standard deviation) value, which appears on the analyzer 

display, on the “Performance Test Record. n 

System Trace Noise for A/R Phase 

9. press (format) ~~~~. 

11. When the analyzer finishes the number of sweeps, press @8@ 

~~~~~~~;. 

12. Write the sdev value on the “Performance Test Record.” 

System Trace Noise for B/R Magnitude 

15. When the analyzer l?nishes the number of sweeps, press c-1 

16. Write the sdev value on the “Performance Test Record.” 

2.66 System Verification and 

Performance Tests

System Trace Noise for B/R Phase 

17. Press B &j&j$. 

.._................. - -... 

18. Press LMenu) ~~~~~~~~ ~~~‘~~~:.. 

” .,.. :.:.i.:;.. 

.p&J& 

,,.~::.:,:.y ,, :

11. System Trace Noise (Only for Analyzers with 

Option 006) 


Frequency Range Ratio System Trace Noise System Trace Noise 

(Bfagnitudel) OPh-3 

30 kHz to 3 GHz A/R

. . . . 

3. ~~~~ (m)~~~~~~~.~~, ~~~~~~,.;~~. to a&iv& the 

instrument’s statistic feature. 

. . . . . . . i . ..:.......... _ . . . . . . . ..._/. . . . . _ ,.......... 

System Trace Noise for A/R Magnitude from 30 kHz to 3 GHz 

7. Write the sdev (standard deviation) value shown, which appears on the 

analyzer display, on the “Performance Test Record.” 

System Trace Noise for A/R Phase from 3 GHz to 6 GHz 

l l- Press (Format) $fJB#$%. - ..__..._ -- 

~,,,‘- ..‘.’ .“::~:~~ . . . .T . . :.. :.:..::. :,, ..:~~.~~~~~N,,:x~..- - ..-...---...... f$gfj@@i - ..-.....-.-.......^ 0 (xl. 

13. 

. 

When 

..- _.,,.,.,.,.....,...,.,.,...,._ 

.,,...;;.;‘....~.~. ~~:~.‘:~.~.~,..~,~,~,~.~.~.,,.,:.:.: 

the analyzer 

.:... ,.,...,..... _ 

hnishes the number of sweeps, press (j-1 

.:~~~~~.S~~~ 

;>;:.::

System Trace Noise for A/R Phase from 30 kHz to 3 GHz 

16. When the analyzer finishes the number of sweeps, press (Scale) 

~~~~~~. 

17. Write the s.dev value, which appears on the analyzer display, on the 

“Performance Test Record. ’ 

System Trace Noise for B/R lbgnitude from 30 kHz to 3 GHz 

z..;.>:. E.B.’ :>>>>>...... 

@ @). 

~~:.:.~~:.:.:.:.:.~:.~.:.;.:.:.:.~.~:.~.:.:.:.;.:.:.:.:.:.~..~ ..((................................. . . _ . . . . . . . 

19. When the analyzer finishes the number of sweeps, press &iii?@ 

. . . . . . ..A ‘.:.:.:.:.:.:.~;:..:::~.‘.~:.~,.:.::.:.:.: 

~~~~~,. 



System Trace Noise for B/R Magnitude from 3 GHz to 6 GHz 

22. When the analyzer Gnishes the number of sweeps, press (w) 

~~~~~~~~, 

23. Write the sdev value, which appears on the analyzer display, on the 


System Trace Noise for B/R Phase from 3 GHz to 6 GHz 

25. When the analyzer Gnashes the number of sweeps, press cm) 

~~~~~~~~. 

.=,.::.,y>,.u _ __i .~_,,,,,,,, 




Performance Tests

System Trace Noise for B/R Phase from 30 kHz to 3 GHz 

28. When the analyzer finishes the number of sweeps, press [-Ref) 

~~~~,~~~~~~~. 

29. Write the sdev value, which appears on the analyzer display, on the 


In Case of Diffhilty 

1. Perform the “ADC Offset Correction Constants” procedure, located in Chapter 

3, “Adjustments and Correction Constants.” 

2. Repeat this performance test. 

3. Suspect the A10 Digital IF board assembly if the analyzer still fails the test. 


Performance Tests

12. Test Port Input Impedance 


1 Frequency Range 1 ‘Ilest Port Input 1 Return Loss 1 

LkHzto 1.3GHzI Port 1 I IlSdB I 

m3Grr Port2 1 116dB 1 

r 3 GHz to 6 GHz l Port 2 I 114m I 



Calibration Kit, 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85031B 


Cable, 750, Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-2408 

Calibration Kit, 753, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85036B 

Anulgm- warmup time: 1 hour 

Perform this test to measure the return loss of each input test port. 


Performance Tests


REFERENCE TEST --) 

PORT I 



Figure 2-33. Sll l-Port Chl lkst Setup 

_ . . . . . _ _ / . ..~ . . . . ,,,,,,............. ., ..:?A 

2. Press w LAVG) ~~~~~ L3ooo) Lxl] IMenu) ~~~~~:~~~~~~s,, m (xl]. 

,.~._i _ _ _ _ 

3. Press m (3iZJ Lk/ml. 

. . . . . . ; _ ,,,; ./, .‘.:,,:,:,:,:,:) . . . . . . . . . . 

4. ~~~ Ical] ~~~~~~ ~~~~:,~~~~~~ ad xle& the appropriate calibration 

,.,. ii_ ,.,. _ ,.,......... i ..: _.:: _.. . . . . _ ..-.... ~.~....~.~.....i-... .__..._.....................~.. 

kit: 

_ 

, lf your analyzer is 5oQ, press ~~~~,;~~~~~~~* 

/..,/............,. _i _ _i_ _ 

.,..........., ,,...........; _; _i ,.,.,.,......................... 

, lf your mdyzr is 75Q, press ~~~~~~~~~~~. 

5. Press ~~ .“~~~,~“i ~~~~~~~~ . . ., _ .,.,.,...,.,.,...i . . . . ~~~~~~~~~~. 

. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . ..-‘.......... 

*.---;: ~~~ _i..~........_~.~.~;~~ E . . . . . i_.: . . . .:. / z..> . . .::::::::::.. . . i>..> . . . . .. . . . . .._ -... :: ~~~~:~~~~;;~;;:~:;~.:~;;~;:.:.. - 

6. Connect an open to reference test port 1, as shown in Figure 2-33. 

.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.......................,......... ..,,.. _ 

7. press :~~~~~~~~~~~. 

,. _ 

- 

8. When the analyzer displays the prompt CONNECT STD THEN PRESS KEY TO 

NEASUFE, connect a short to reference test port 1. 

g. Press ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - 

.,......; ,.,.,.,..../.................. .._ __ .,., 

10. At the prompt, connect a load to reference test port 1. 

sg623e 


Performance Tests

12. When ::.. the analyzer displays 'DONE' IF FINISHED WITH CAL, press 

&$& ‘:~~~~~~~~~ 

L- 

13. Press CSa”e,Reca,,, ~~~~~~~,:, * 


PORT 1 

U-. 

PORT 2 

- 

Z-INCH CABLE 

Fiure 2-34. ‘Jkst Port 2 Input Impedance ‘Jkst Setup 

15. Press e to turn the analyzer’s marker 1 on. Use the front panel knob 

to locate the maximum value of the data trace for each of the frequency 

ranges listed in the “Performance Test Record.” 

16. Write these maximum values on the “Performance Test Record.” 




g613e



- PORT 1 

REFERENCE TEST --c 

PORT 2 

I 

PORT 2 

CABLE 24 INCH 

I- 

Figure 2-35. $22 l-Port Cd ‘l&t Setup 

,.; .,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,. . . . . . ,. ,. .,. 

18. -ess ~cal] ..~~~~~~ &#f@ ~~~~~~~~~~~~,. 

._... .._.._.............~......... -..-- -2 . . . . . . . . . i....z . ii. .A.. .A.... ii zz. _... 

19. At the prompt, connect an open to reference test port 2, as shown in 

Figure 2-35. 

21. When the analyzer displays the prompt CONNECT STD THEN PRESS KEY TO 

MEASURE, connect a short to reference test port 2. 

23. At the prompt, connect a load to reference test port 2. 

~ .;.. ..,/,. 

24. press i~~:~~~~. 

25. When the analyzer displays ‘DONE’ IF FINISHED WITH CAL, press 

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~. 

.._......__......_.~.... . . ..a -:.......~:;..::.8:~~..~ i” _...........-.... 

26. press LB) ~~~~.~~~~~:~ _../.................._. 2: . . . . . . . i.~...............~............~......~i 

. . . . . . to save the l-Port calibration. 


sg624e 


Performanoe Tests

PORT 1 

LJ 

PORT 2 

CABLE 

24 INCH 

Figure 2-36. lkst Port 1 Input Impedance ‘I&t Setup 

28. Press m to activate the analyzer’s marker 1. Use the front panel knob 

to locate the maximum value of the data trace for each of the frequency 

ranges listed in the “Performance Test Record. n 

29. Write the maximum values on the “Performance Test Record.” 


1. Suspect the A10 digital IF board assembly if the analyzer fails both test port 

tests. 

2. Refer to Chapter 8, “Receiver Troubleshooting,” for more troubleshooting 

information. 


Petformanca Tests

13. ‘Ikst Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 

Spectications 

HP8753E Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 0.3 to 3000 MHz 

10 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -SO -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 

Test Port Power (dBm) 


HP8753E Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 3-6 GHz 

10 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 

Test Port Power (dBm) 

Power Meter ............................................... HP 436Af437Bl438A 

Power Sensor .......................................................... HP 8482A 

Step Attenuator, 110 dB ............................ HP 8496A Option 001, H18 

(See notes on the following page.) 

Adapter (2), APC-7 to Type-N (f) ....................................HP 11524A 

Adapter, Type-N (f) to Type-N (f) ............................HP P/N 1250-0777 

Cable (3), 509, Type-N, 24-inch ....................................... 8120-4781 

Cable, HP-IB.......................................................... HP 10833A 

Diskette, 3.5 inch ............................................................ 

Calibration Kit, Type-N, 50 Q......................................... HP 85Og: 

Additional Required Equipment for 75 ohm Analyzers 

MinimumLossPad(2), 500 to 75Q ................................... HP 11852B 

Analgger warmup time: 1 hour 


Performance Tests

Note The HP 8496A step attenuator (Option 001, H18) comes with a 

special calibration that supports the measurement uncertainties 

expressed in the test record for this performance test. 

The special calibration consists of two measurements The hrst 

is a measurement of the attenuation at each step. The data 

reported for this measurement have the following uncertainties: 

� f0.006 dB from 0 to 40 dB 

w f0.015 dB from >40 to 80 dB 

� f0.025 dB from >80 to 90 dB 

� f0.05 dB >90 dB 

The second calibration measurement characterizes match 

stability between attenuator settings for each attenuator port. 

The vector difference of S11 or ($2) between the reference 

attenuation step and all the other steps is measured. The 

magnitude of this difference is certified to be ~0.0316 (>30 dB). 

Note The HP 8496A used for this test wiU have known attenuator 

errors for attenuations up to 100 dB using a test frequency of 

30 MHz. The attenuation used as a reference is 0 dB. If the 

available calibration data is not expressed as attenuation errors, 

it can be converted to such a form by the following equation: 

2-76 System Veriiication and 


(actual attenuation) - (expected attenuation) = attenuator error 

Actual attenuation values that are greater than the expected 

attenuation values wiII result in positive errors Actual 

attenuation values that are less than the expected attenuation 

values wiII resuh in negative errors.

Initial Calculations 

1. Fill in the attenuator error values (referenced to 0 dB attenuation) 

in Table 2-l by referring to the calibration data for the HP 8496A 

step-attenuator. Refer to the note on the previous page. 

a. Find the column in the HP 8496A attenuation error table that pertains to 

the attenuation errors for 30 MHz. 

b. Starting with the “10 dB” step in this column, write down the value in 

the corresponding space in ‘Ikble 2-l for column “B.” This value should 

be placed in the row for the 10 dB HP 8496A setting. 

c. Continue transferring the remaining values of the HP 8496A attenuation 

errors to column “B” in lhble 2-l. 

2. In ‘lhble 2-1, transfer the 10 dB error value located within the parenthesis in 

column “B” to each space in column “C.” 

‘Bible 2-l. Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Calculations 

A B c 

8496A Attn. Error 10 dB Error Attn. Brror 

AttZl. (ref 0 dB) Vixlne (ref 10 dB) 

0 OdB 

10 ( 1 OdB 

20 

30 

40 

50 

60 

70 

so 

90 

E 

10 

0 

- 10 

- 20 

-30 

-40 

- 50 

-60 

- 70 

- 80 

Expected 

M-ement 

(corrected) 

@w 

3. The values in column “D” result from changing the reference attenuation of 

the calibration data of the HP 8496A to 10 dl3. 


Performance Tests

Calculate the attenuation error values for this column by subtracting the 

values in column “C” from the values in column “B” (B - C = D). 

4. The values in column “F” result from correcting the expected measurement 

value by the amount of attenuator error. 

Calculate the values in this column by subtracting the values in column “D” 

from the values in column “E” (E - D = F). 

5. Transfer the values from column “F” in ‘Iable 2-l to column “F” in the 

“Performance Test Record” for both test ports. 

Power Meter Calibration 

6. Zero and calibrate the power meter. (Refer to the power meter manual for 

details on this procedure.) 



Performance Tests

110 dB 

STEP 

ATTENUATOR 





POWER SENSOR 

POWER METER 

Figure 2-37. Power Meter Calibration for Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 


Performance Tests

8. Set the HP 8496A to 10 dB. 

9. Set the following analyzer parameters: 

10. Set up the HP 8753E for power meter calibration: 

a. Select the HP 8753E as the system controller: 

(Local.. _ .__.;;;;;;;;~.;;.; ::::,.;;;;;;:;;;,.;:_ i :z

Adapter Removal Calibration 

13. Connect the equipment as shown in the Figure 2-38: 

*DIRECT 



PORT I I [PORT 2 

Cm) TO Cm) ADAPTER 

TYPE-N ( f ) 

TO TYPE-N (f) 

24 INCH 



Cm) TO (m) ADAPTER 

TYPE-N (f) 

TO TYPE-N ( f) 

t.lNlMm.4 LOSS PAD 

TYPE-N 

24 INCH 

Cm) TO (4 

24 INCH 

(ml TO Cm) 

Figure 2-38. Full 2-Port Calibration with Adapter Removal 

sg6118e 


Performance Teete

14. Perform a full 2-port error correction with isolation. 

Note When you are performing error-correction for a system that has 

type-N test port connectors, the softkey menus label the sex of 

the test port connector-not t$ @bration standard connector. 

For example, the l&e1 ~tx#~~~~~~~~.~~ refers to the short that d 

be connected to the female test port. 

15. Save the results to disk. Name the lile “PORTl.” 

16. Move the adapter to reference test port 1 and perform another full 2-port 

error correction. 

17. Save the results to disk. Name the file “PORT2.” 

18. fiess Lcal) &$g ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~. 

.; ..,..:.,,./...... I .,........ . . . . ..../........~........... . . . . . . . . . M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .;-, .,_, /;:..:..: ...... . . . . L..,. . . . . . . . . . . ..~.-...........~...............~.....~~.~~~.~.~.~.~~~..~~~.~.~.~.~~~~... . . . . . . . . . . 

i. 

19. kom .. _ ...... ::; :::: the ~~,..: disk . . . . :.::. directory, choose the We “PORTl”and press 

~~~~~~~~::;~~~~~~. 

~:.:.=,:.:.:.:.~,.:.:.:.:.:.:.:~~~~.~~,..~ ..__. ;....;&;. j _,__.,....i in__ _ 

20. When this is complete, choose the fle “PORT2” and press 

,.,.,.,............ _; .,./ ;..; i..,...,............i 

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~. 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

21. When complete, press J$EJE#W. 

..~:::: i .._i..._ 

22. m enter the adapter delay, press ;~~~~~~~ L.llo] m (default for 

i .: ::.. ....__... . . . . . . . As?=:: . . . . . . . . . . . . i_>~>.~..s.x~.. . . . . . :... .A.....

Measure Test Port 2 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 

25. Remove the type-N (f) to (f) adapter and connect the equipment as shown in 

Figure 2-39. Con&m that the step attenuator is set to 10 dB. 

HP B753E 



PORT 11 1 PORT 2 

110 dB 

STEP ATTENUATOR 

* ADAPTER 

HP B753E 


a- 

PORT 11 I PORT 2 

* APC-7 TO 

TYPE-N (t) 

ADAPTER 

APC-7 TO 

TYPE-N (f) CABLE 500 

TYPE-N 

CABLE 50R 

24 INCH 

24 

TYPE-N 

INCH 

110 dB 

STEP ATTENUATOR 

*DIRECT CONNECTION 

Figure Z-39. Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Measurement 

,g661e 


Performance Tests

26. To set up the dynamic accuracy measurement, press the following: 

27- Wait for the sweep to finish, then press @i&i@ ~~~~~.~~~.~.~~ .._......_...__................~ - i .._. . . . . ,$k&#K&. 

..i. i.. :....... i . . . . . . . . . . . / 

28. Set the step attenuator to 0 dB. 

30. Write the mean value (which appears on the analyzer’s display) in the “Test 

Port Measurement” cohunn of the “Performance Test Record.” This column 

is also labeled “G.” 

31. Repeat steps 28 through 30 for each setting of the step attenuator. 

32. Calculate dynamic accuracy for each step by using the formula IG - FI. 

Place these values in the appropriate column of the “Performance Test 

Record. n 


Performance Tests

Measure Test Port 1 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 


34. To set up the dynamic accuracy measurement, press the following: 

35. W& for the sweep to finish, then press (m) f&$3 ,;& w,. &&$g&,&& 

......... . . .... . . /i... ~.~.ii~~...~.~.~ ..__i..::::..~~: . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . ..../........... 

. . . . . . /.~.zu~ i.... LSS.. * 


38. Write the mean value (which appears on the analyzer’s display) in the “Test 

Port Measurement” colrmm of the “Performance Test Record.” This column 

is also labeled “G.” 

39. Repeat steps 36 through 38 for each setting of the step attenuator. 

40. Calculate dynamic accuracy for each step by using the formula IG - FI. 

Place these values in the appropriate column of the “Performance Test 

Record. n 


1. If the analyzer fails the test at ALL power levels, be sure you followed the 

recommended attenuator settings as listed in the “Performance Test Record.” 

Repeat this performance test. 

2. If both test port measured values are out of specifications: 

a. Recalibrate the power meter. 

b. Repeat this performance test. 


Performance Teete

3. If the analyzer fails either test port 2 or test port 1 dynamic accuracy at 

lower power levels: 

a. Perform the “IF Amplifier Correction Constants” and “ADC Offset 

Correction Constants” procedures (located in Chapter 3, “Adjustments and 

Correction Constants”). 

b. Repeat this performance test. 

c. If it stiII fails, replace the A10 Digital IF assembly. 

d. Repeat the two adjustment procedures mentioned in this step and then 

repeat this performance test. 


Performance Tests

14. T&t Port Receiver Magnitude Compression 


Frequency Range ‘Jkst Port Magnitude1 

300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 1 so.45 dB 

3 GHz to 6 GHz* Port 1 10.80 dH 

300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 2 LO.45 dB 

3 GHz to 6 GHz* Port 2 ~0.80 dB 

1 With a 10 Hz IF bandwidth. 

2 OnIy for maIyzers with Option 006 - 30 IcHz to 

6 GHz range. 

Required Equipment for 5On Analyzers 



Cable, 750, Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-2408 

Anul~zerwarmuptime:1hour 

Perform this test to verify the compression/expansion magnitude levels of the 

analyzer’s test port receiver samplers. 


Performance Tests

l4- At the end of the sweep, press [mf) ,~~~~~~~. 

,.::::.:: . . . . . . . 

. . . . . ..~.....~ . . .. . ..A . ..>.a>: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A.. . . . . s . . . ..i. . >>>>. 

17. Write the absolute value of marker 2 in the “Performance Test Record. n 

18. Repeat steps 12 through 17 for the other frequencies listed for Port 2 on the 


Test Port 1 Magnitude Compression 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~~.................,:::::: .:::::: :::.:: 

19. Press (Meas) ~~~~~~~~~~~ :;~,~~~~.~~~~~~~. 

20- Press B i&ii+. 3!J#.iJQ~~ [sol (TiJiJ 

.._.._.... - - 

25. Write the absolute value of the marker 2 reading in the “Measured Value” 

column of the “Performance Test Record. n 

26. Repeat steps 20 through 25 for the other CW frequencies listed for Port 1 in 

the “Performance Test Record.” 

In Case of DifIkulty 

1. If the analyzer fails “Test Port 2 Magnitude Compression”: 

a. Repeat this test. 

b. Replace the A6 B sampler assembly if the analyzer stiII fails the test. 

2. If the analyzer fails “Test Port 1 Magnitude Compression”: 


b. Replace the A5 A sampler assembly if the analyzer stiII fails the test. 


Performance Tests

15. Test Port Receiver Phase Compression 


CW Frequency lkst Port Phase1 

300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 1 16” 

3 GHz to 6 GHz2 Port 1 57.5” 

300 kHz to 3 GHz Port 2 16” 

3 GHz to 6 GHz2 Port 2

Test Port 2 Phase Compression 




Figure 2-41. ‘Ikst Port Phase Compression ‘&St SetUP 


coh,unn of the “Performance Test Record.” 

12. Repeat steps 5 to 11 for the other CW frequencies listed for Port 2 in the 

“Performance Test Record. * 


Performance Tests

lkst Port 1 Phase Compression 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . ...:... :.: .:,, ~” ,.,;... 

15. Press LMenu) ~~~~~~ t&gggy. 

:~=~.::.i::..-.::~~...::::~:~~ . . :::::;::;;;s:.i .;::..L.i..i . i sm>../ 

16. At the end of the sweep, press LScaleJ -~~~~~. 

17. Press (j-f-&q ;m. 

:cl’x< ‘-.;.. 

.@&$;i,F;,;$~i 

. ..=.;.., ” ..a;:: 

(jj, ~~~~~ ~~~~~~~. 

..X....~...~ .. . . . . . . . . . . . . I_.......... . . . . . . 2s . . . . . . . i.......i.. . 

. . . . . . . . . . . w~.u_I..: . . . . 

A...:..-.:::.. . . . . . . . . . . . . s.,.. . . . 

. . . . . X. . . . . ...//_. i...........,.......~.~~~ .._................ ..__.........._,........... 

,..... 

18. Press ~ ;~~~ CMarker Fct”, ~~~~ ~~,:,,~:,~~~~~. 


column of the “Performance Test Record.” 

20. Repeat steps 14 to 19 for the other CW frequencies listed for Port 1 in the 


ln Case of DifEculty 

1. If the analyzer fails the “Test Port 2 Phase Compression” test: 


b. Replace the A6 B sampler assembly if analyzer still fails the test. 

2. If the analyzer fails the “Test Port 1 Phase Compression” test: 


b. Replace the A5 A sampler assembly if analyzer still fails the test. 


Performance Tests

16. Test Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002 

Analyzers without Option 006 Only) 

Specilkations 

lkst Port Harmonic Limit 

output 2nd c-25 dBc @I + 10 dBm 

Output 3rd c-25 dBc @I + 10 dBm 

Input Port 1 2nd c-15 dBc @ +8 dBm 

InDut Port 1 3rd c-30 dBc @ +8 dBm 

1 Inout Port 2 1 2nd 1

Test Port Output Worst Case 2nd Harmonic 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Press IstartJ (iZJ (E&J IstopJ 11.51 Cc/n] to set the frequency range. 

Press m ~~~~~~ [lol @ to set the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz. 

Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-42. 

20 dE FIXED 

ATTENUATORS 

H P i3753E 

PORT 11 I PORT 2 

CABLE APC-7 

2V INCH 

MINIMUM LOSS PAD 

20 dB FIXED 

ATTENUATORS 




ip 

MINIMUM LOSS F‘AD 

CABLE TYPE-N 

Figure 2-42. ‘l&t Port Output Harmonics ‘Ikst Setup 

._........_..........................; . .. . . . . . . . . . . . ,.,., ;... 

~~~~~ one sweep, press [m, ~~~~~~~ to get a better viewing of the 

trace. 


Performance Tests

10. Write the marker 1 value (which appears on the analyzer display) on the 

“Performance Test Record. n This is the worst case test port output 2nd 

harmonic 

Test Port Output Worst Case 3rd Harmonic 

11. Press @ 0 @JJ to change the stop frequency to 1 GHz. 

_ ., _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,., .,.: 

12. Press @iiG) lfi&JfQggQ i#Ei& lQk!B!~~~E lI&!j@~. 

,... .,.., ,. i 

13. After one sweep, press @j@ ‘~~~~~~~~~. &&&&f@f to nom&e the 

.._... ..__.................~...... /i 

trace. 

.*..... 

14. Press Is-= ~~~~~ )i ~~~~~~ @ (xl) to get a better viewing of 

the trace. 

i . . . . . . . ..I . . . ..;;:. . :.:. 

15. Press @ZE) ~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~.~~~. 

16. After one sweep, press &XT@ ~~~~~~~~. 

17. press (m) ~~~~ ‘~~:~~~~. 

.._ _~...............................i i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~. . ii . . . . . . . _ ..:.. 

18. Write the marker 1 value on the “Performance Test Record.” 

Port 1 Input Worst Case 2nd Harmonic 



Performance Tests

Port 1 Input Worst Case 3rd Harmonic 

29. Press m @ m to change the stop frequency for measuring the receiver 

3rd harmonic 

35. 

..; . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Press @jij) ~~~,~~~~~ ~~~~~~. 

:.:.:: . . . . . . . . .._~.-.............~~~...~ . 

.A.. x::.....i.::~~ . . . . . . ..~.~ . . :::. . ..A...? .i i.>ASS ii ~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~~_/.~.~.~.~..~.~.. 


..;. ,. . ,........................... 

. . . . . . . . ..:.:.:.:.....:.....:.:...:.... . . . . . . . . . . ..p (,Z... :.:,: .:.::.: ._ _ . . . . . . . . . . . .,..,.,.,; . . . . . . . _... . . . ../ ;; _ . . . . . ::.....: i ..:.zE:: . . . . . .A..... 

. i..........~.............. . . . . .::::.:... . . a.2 ~~~~~~~~~~~~. 

. . .._ . . ~....i.i_.......i .._............. 


38. Press Istoe) (XJ @J to set the stop frequency for measuring the 2nd 

harmonic 

d ,. *;... ..,:~..::::.:.:.::.::.:.::. 

.. ,,,.,, __, ,,,,..... .: ::. :: .) 7Li . . . >A. . . . i........~..-. ..._......... --~.r.&-~: . . . . . . . ..A . . . . . . . 

::.:::::::.. ‘?. T ..mr ::Gs.m.; :s,.


45. Press Lstoe) (iJ LG/n to change the stop frequency for measuring the receiver 

3rd harmonic 

46, mess csystem, ~~~~~~~, . . . . . . . . :... . . . . . . .. . . . . . ._ ~~~~~~~~~~. 

..~., 

..,... ..._ _ .. . . . .._....~ . . 

~.,.,.,.,.,.,..... _ . . . . . . . .._ ___ . ..= 

_ _ . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

47. Mter one sweep, press w ~~~~~~~~~ ~gg$~~mI to nomm the 

../ ..:...,-... . . ..u;..: . . . . . . . i.........-~.....~~.~.~.~~.....~...... . . . . . . . 

ii.. . ..A............. . i.::...:.. 

trace. 

w:........... ‘yg ~Eg

17. ‘I&t Port Output/Input Harmonics (Option 002 

Analyzers with Option 006 Only) 



T&t Port Harmonic Limit 

&ltDUt 2nd c-25 dBc @I + 10 dBm 

I output I 3rd I

Test Port Output Worst Case 2nd Harmonic 

l- Press (jjj (jj) .$$w .::.i 2: . . . ..i. . . _..... .:::., Ilo) Ixl) to set the test port power to + 10 dBm. 

2. Press m (16) a @ @ Cc/n to set the frequency range. 

3. Press &iJ ~&$&& @ Lxl] to set the IF bandwidth to 10 Hz. 


20 CIB FIXED 

ATTENUATORS 



PORT 1 1 PORT 2 

CABLE APC-7 

24 INCH 

Figure Z-44. ‘l&t Port Output Harmonics ‘lkst Setup 

s g629e 

6. After one sweep, press ~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~; to normalize the 

i” i:::: ._.. c: _... i.i . .._............. ii SW... - .._....._... - ..__.... 

trace. 

....

Test Port Output Worst Case 3rd Harmonic 

11. Press @ 0 m to change the stop frequency to 2 GHz. 

s ; ; ;.. .. . . .+. :-. .~. :,:., $ 

,,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,...,.......... . . . . . _ . . . . ; .A.. ~......~.~.~.~._i ..: L.. . . . . . . . ... . . . . . >..T . . ..::: ..: -.L ./._../ .. . i . . .._ .:: ....: - 

16. After one sweep, press CSca,e Rep ~~~~~~~~;. 

..., ,.... .,. ,..., / .,,.., /, . . . 

17- 

_ ‘.i..: .,,, :I,, ... .;;.::. . . . . . ;.:.:.: 

Press ljiiZXGFctn_) ~~~~~~ ~~~~~.~~. 


System Verification and 2-l 03 

Performance Tests





- I I 

- 

PORT 1 PORT 2 

I I CABLE APC-7 

Fiiure Z-45. Eeceiver Harmonics lkst Setup 

22. Press m (16) m m @ Lc/n to set the frequency range. 

. . . . . . . . . . . ., . . ..~...:.:.:.:.~.:.:. ‘:.:.:.:...:.:.:...:,:~:::.:~.,:.:..::~,,:,, 

24. After one sweep, press m ~~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~ to nom&e the 

-..... _ .~..................... ____..i . . . . . . .i_ .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -SW . . . . . . 2:: . . . . . . 3: . ...=... i....~............... 

trace. 

26. After one sweep, press Cm. ~~~~~~~~~~ to get a better tiewing of the 

trace. 

A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ,..,.. . ..: ,,..A/ . . . . . ...i.l.z:>;> 


‘Performance Test Record.” This is the worst case port 1 input (receiver 

channel A) 2nd harmonic 

2-l 04 Systam Verification and 

Performanw Tests 

sg630e


35. 

., ..:....:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:. .~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~_.~~,~~~,~,~_.~~.~.,_., .. . . . . . . . . ,,;..::; ,...:::.., ..:.:.:.:.:.:.: 

press [j) ~~~~~ ~~~~~. 


: 7:. _ :.:.:.:.~:...:.:.:.:.:.:...~:: 

37. press (T-1 ~~~~~,~~~~~ -i~~~~~~~~~~~. 


43* Press cm, ;~~~~ ~~~~~. 

i /..........//~..... ~.~..~~~.~.~........................~~.~ . . . . . . ~.~.~...~......................~.~ .._ -_..- _... - 


“Performance Test Record.” This is the worst case port 2 input (receiver 

channel B) 2nd harmonic 


Performance Tests


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

. . . 

45. Press &TJ (FJ (ZJZJ to change the stop frequency for measuring the receiver 

3rd harmonic 

. . . J

18. ‘Ikst Port Output Harmonics 

(Analyzers without Option 002) 

Speciikations 

1 For HP 87633 Option 075: + 8 dF%m source output; 

limits valid for frequencies below 2 GHz 

Equipment Required for 50 ohm Analyzers 

Spectrum analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85953 

Cable, 509, type-N (m) to type-N (m), 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 81204781 

Adapter, APC-7 to type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11524A 

Adapter, type-N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 1250-1476 

Cable, 503, BNC (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-1840 

Additional Equipment Required for 75 ohm Analyzers 

Minhmmvloss pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B 

z.$r warmup time: 30 minutes (network analyzer and spectrum 

Perform this test to determine the spectral purity of the network analyzer 

RF source. Use this procedure with HP 8753E network analyzers without 

Option 002 (harmonic measurement capability). 


Performance Tests

Procedure 

1. Calibrate the spectru?n analg~: 

a. Connect the BNC cable between the spectrum analyzer CAL OUT 

connector and the 508 input. Use the type-N (m) to BNC (f) adapter at the 

5OQ input. 

b. FVess m). 

f. Remove the BNC cable and adapter. 


2-l 08 System Verification and 

Performance Tests



PORT 1 

*DIRECT CONNECTION 

ADAPTER 

APT: TO TYPF-N if) 



WITH OPTIONS 075 

SPECTRUM ANALYZER 

. 

4’ 

CABLE 

50R TYPE-N 24 INCH 

Cm) TO Cm) 

Figure Z-46. ‘lkst Port Output Harmonics Ttkst Setup 

3. Set the netuwrk analgm source power to + 10 deem: 

a. Press @iERJ. 

b. Press @i’GZ). 

f ,..‘) .~: .y< 

d. Press Llo] [x. (For 750 analyzers, press (ZJ @‘J) 

e. press:~: 

- ::. .._....... ::::. - ,, . - 

Syotem Verification and 2-l 09 

Pwformance Tests

4. Set up the spectrum anulgzer display: 

5. 

a. Press m. 

b. Press L2o)m. 

c. Press (E&J 

d. Press (3ooJ m. 

.““” . . . . ,. . .,... . . . . ~ . . . . . ~::::::, ::::::::. :::..::..::::: 

e. press ~~#~~~~~~~~:. 

f. Press @ @%Q. 

g. Press QiiKiFS]. 

.,.. ,...; .:::.: : . . . .,.w.,.,.,. . . .. . . . . . . . ;,.a . . . . . . . . . . .: . . . 

h. Press .~~~~~~~. 

- .._ - .._.. -... 

i. Press (iZJ @KY). 

Set the network anulgzer and spectrum analyzer to the harmonic frequency. 

Use the appropriate test record to choose the proper harmonic frequency. 

Refer to the test record in Section 2a for 3 GHz network analyzers, or the 

test record in Section 2b for 6 GHz network analyzers. 

� Network Anulyzer 

a. 

b. 

c. 

d. 

e. 

f. 

g. 

h. 

i. 

2-l 10 

Press ~~:~~~~ 

,. . ...::./ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . * 

_._- . - ._.._. --. 

Enter the harmonic frequency from the test record. For example, press 

(iZJ m to set the network analyzer to the second harmonic of the first 

ftmdamental frequency in the 3 GHz test record. 

� Spectrum Analgger 

Press(jm). 

Enter the harmonic frequency from the test record. For example, press 

(iCJ @ to set the spectnmt analyzer to the second harmonic of the first 

fundamental frequency in the 3 GHz or 6 GHz test record. 

Pressfjj). 

Press ~~~~~~~. 

Press @EDiiF). 

Press LMKR). 

_ ; ,... :.:.,.:.:.:.:.:.;..‘.:::.:.:. 

Press ;~~~. 

System Verification and 

Performance Tests

6. Set up the network unuZ@zr to output the fundamental frequency: 

/ .: ...:....;. ... . 

.,. 

a. Press ~$Bj$gi$. 

b. Enter the fundamental frequency. For example, press lso) m to enter 

the hrst fundamental frequency in the 3 GHz test record. 

7. Measure and record the power in the second or third harmonic by taking a 

single sweep with the spectrum aruzlgzer: 

a. Press @iTZVKQ. 

b. Read the MARKER A measurement, and record it in the appropriate row 

of the test record under Measurement Value (dBc). 

8. Reset the spectrum un&z@r marker: 

9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 for the remaining second and third harmonic 

frequencies, and the fundamental frequencies listed in the test record. 


Performance Tests

Performance Xkst Record 

For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 

30 liEIz to 3 GHz 

2a 

Note See the next “Performance Test Record” section if your analyzer 

frequency range is from 30 kHz to 6 GHz (Option 006). 

Performance Test Record 2a-1

HP 8753E Performance Test Record (1 of 13) 

Calibration Lab Address: Report Number 

Model HP 8753E 

Serial No. 

F’irmware Revision 

Ambient Temperature 

‘Ikst Equipment Used: 

Description Model Number 

Frequency Counter 

Power Meter 

Power Sensor 

Calibration Kit 

Verification Kit 

Notes/Comments: 

2a-2 Performance Test Record 

Date 

Last Calibration Date 

Customer’s Name 

Performed by 

Option(s) 

’ C Relative Humidity % 

Trace Number CM Due Date

HP 8753E Performance ‘l&t Record (2 of 13) 

For 30 kEIz-3 GHz Analyzers 

Hewlett-lbkard Company 

vlodel HP 8753E Report Number 

3erialNnmber Date 

b) 1. Test Port Ontpnt Frequency Range and Accuracy 

CW Preqnencies Results Measured 

(MW t=i WW El 

Mensnrement 

Uncertainty 

WW 

0.03 0.029999 7 0.030 000 3 fO.OOO 000 050 

0.3 0.299 997 0.300003 f0.000000520 

5.0 4.999 950 5.000 050 f 0.000 009 

16.0 15.999 840 16.000 160 l 0.000 028 

31.0 30.999 690 31.000310 f 0.000 054 

60.999999 60.999 390 61.000 610 f 0.000 106 

121.0 120.998 790 121.001210 f 0.000 207 

180.0 179.QQ8200 180.001800 f 0.000 307 

310.0 309.995 900 310.003106 f 0.000528 

700.0 699.930 000 700.007000 f0.001192 

1300.0 1299.987 1300.013 f 0.002 212 

2 ooo.0 1 999.980 2000.020 f 0.003 403 

3 ooo.0 2 999.970 3 000.030 f 0.005 104 

)) 2. External Source Mode Preqnency Range 

!kst Preqnencies (GHz) lh3Illts 

0.010 

0.020 

0.100 

1.000 

2.000 

3.000 


EIP 8753E Performance ‘Jkst Record (3 of 13) 

For 30 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers 

Eewlett-Packard Company 

Model HP 87683 l&port Number 

Serial Number DlLt4? 

bb 3. Test Port Output Power Accuracy 

!lkst Frequencies n?st Port Speciilcation Measured Measurement 

output w9 Value Uncertainty 

Power 0-w WV 

(aBm) 

Center Frequency 

3oolcHz 0 fl f0.465 

20 MHz 0 fl f0.10 

5OMHZ 0 fl f0.10 

1OOMHZ 0 fl f0.10 

200 MHZ 0 fl f0.10 

500 MHz 0 � 1 f0.10 

1GHz 0 fl f0.13 

2GHz 0 fl f0.13 

3GHz 0 fl f0.27 

bb 4. ‘Jkst Port Output Power Range and Linearity 

T&t settings Eeslllts Power Level Specillcation Measnr ement 

Measured Linearity WI Uncertainty 

VW WI VW 

TW Frequency = 300 kHz 

- 15 f0.2 f0.03 

- 13 f0.2 f0.03 

- 11 f0.2 �0.03 

- 9 f0.2 f0.02 

-7 f0.2 f0.02 

-6 f0.2 f0.02 

-3 f0.2 � �� 

-1 f0.2 f0.02 

+l f0.2 f0.03 

+3 f0.2 f0.03 

+6 f0.5 f0.03 

2a4 Parfonnance Test Record

HP 8753E Performance ‘I&t Record (4 of 13) 

For 30 kHz-3 GHZ Analyzers 

Hewlett-Packard Company 

lode1 HP 8763E Report Number 

krial Number Date 

)) 4. !Cest Port Output Power Ra.nge and Linear5ty (continued) 

Test settings EesIllts Power Level Specification Measnrement 

Measured Linearity WV Uncertainty 

ow (W WI 

+7 f0.5 f0.03 

+8 f0.5 f0.03 

+Q f0.5 f0.03 

+ 10 

CW Frequency = 3 GHz 

f0.5 f0.03 

- 15 f0.2 �0.03 

- 13 f0.2 f0.03 

- 11 f0.2 f0.03 

- 9 f0.2 f0.02 

- 7 f0.2 f0.02 

-6 f0.2 f0.02 

- 3 f0.2 f0.02 

-1 f0.2 f0.02 

+l f0.2 f0.03 

+3 f0.2 f0.03 

+5 f0.6 f0.03 

+7 f0.5 f0.03 

+8 f0.5 f0.03 

+Q f0.6 f0.03 

+ 10 f0.5 f0.03 



For 30 kHz-3 GEz Analyzers 

Hewlett-Ikckard Company 

Model HP 876QE Beport Number 

%xialNnmber Date 

bb6. MinimnmBChaunelLevel 

CW Prequency Speciilcation lkst Port Power 

WV 

Measurement 

Uncertainty 

m 

300 kH2 < -35 f 1.0 

3.29 MHz < -35 f 1.0 

3.31 MHZ < -35 f1.0 

15.90 MHz < -35 f1.0 

16.10 MHz < -35 f1.0 

30.90 MHz < -35 f 1.0 

31.10 MHz < -35 f1.0 

1.6069 GHz < -35 f1.0 

1.6071 GHz < -35 f1.0 

3.000 GHz < -35 f1.0 

bb 6. Test Port Input Noise Ploor Level 

Frequency Bange Test Port IP Specification Calculated Yeast-ement 

Bandwidth (-1 Value Uncertainty 

3OOkHz-3GHz Port 1 3lcHz - 82 N/A 

3OOkHz-3GHz Port 1 10 Hz - 102 N/A 

3OOkHz-3GHz Port 2 10 Hz - 102 N/A 

3OOkHz-3GHz Port 2 3kHz -82 N/A 

2a-6 Performance Test Record


For 30 kEiz-3 GHz Analyzers 


Model HP 8763E Beport Number 

SerialNumber Date 

bb 7. Test Port Input Frequency Response 

Preqnency Bange Test Port Speci&ation Measured Value 

w9 WI 

300 kHz-3 GHz 

300 kHz-3 GHz 

Test settings 

CrosstdktoTfestPort2 

300 kHz-3 GHz 

Cro&aUc t.0 l&t Port 1 

300 kHz-3 GHz 

Port 2 fl 

Port 1 fl 

b) 8. Test Port Crosstalk 

SpeciHcation 

WI 

< -100 

< -100 

MeasuredValue 

WV 

Measurement 

Uncertainty 

uJ.9 

0.47 

0.47 

Measnrement 

Uncertainty 

N/A 

N/A 


Hewlett-Packard Compnny 

Model HP 8768E 

HP 8753E Performance TLkst Record (7 of 13) 

For 30 kHz-3 GEIz Analyzers 

Serial Number D&4.? 

Forward Direction 

Directivity 

Directivity 


Source Match 

Source Match 

Forward Dim&ion 

Trans. Tracking 

l-rarls. Trackiug 


Rd. Tracking 

Refl. Tracking 

F&verse Direction 

Load Match 

Load Match 

Beport Number 

bb 9. Calibration CoeiHcients 

‘l&t Description Frequency Hange Spee. 

VW 


300 kHz -1.3 GHz 

1.3GHz-3GHz 

2 35 f 0.9 

230 f 0.8 

300 kHz -1.3 GHz > 16 f 0.2 

1.3GHz-3GHz 1 16 f 0.2 

300 kHz -1.3 GHz 

1.3GHz-3GHz 

3OOkHz- 1.3GHz 

1.3GHz-3GHz 

f1.5 

f 1.5 

� 1.5 

f1.5 

Measured Value Yeasnrement 

(W 

Uncertainty 

f 0.006 

f 0.009 

f 0.001 

f 0.005 

300 kHz -1.3 GHz 1 18 f 0.1 

1.3GHz-3GHz 2 16 f 0.2

HP 8753E Performance ‘Ilest Record (8 of 13) 

For 30 kHz-3 GEL Analyzers 


Model HP 8766E I&port Number 

SerialNumber Dllh? 

bb 9. Calibration Coefficients (continued) 

Test Description Freqnency Bange SW. Measured Value Measurement 

(-1 WI Uncertainty 

WI 

Reverse Direction 

Trans. Tracking 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz f 1.5 f 0.006 

Trans. Tracking 1.3GHz-3GHz f 1.5 f 0.009 


Load Match 3OOkHz-1.3GHz 1 18 f 0.1 

Load Match 1.3GHz-3GHz 1 16 f 0.2 


Directivity 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz > 35 f 0.9 

Dire&vi@ 1.3GHz-3GHz 130 f 0.8 


Source Match 300 kHz - 1.3 GHz 2 16 f 0.2 

Source Match 1.3GHz-3GHz 1 16 f 0.2 


Ben. Tracking 3OOkHz-1.3GHz f 1.5 f 0.001 

Beil. Traclciug 1.3GHz-3GHz f 1.5 f 0.005 



For 30 kHz-3 GEJz Analyzers 

Hewlett-l%ckard Company 


Serial Number Date 

CW Frequency 

WW 

3 

3 

3 

3 

bb 10. System Trace Noise 

Bati Specj&ation 

An3 18 f1.5 

1.3 GHz-3 GHz Port 1 1 16 f1.5 




Iewlett-Packard Company 

lode1 JJP 8763E Report Number 

lerial Number Date 

bb 13. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 

G F IG - FI 

Test Port 8496A l&t Port Expected Dynamic SF. Meas. 

Input Power Attn. Measurement Meamrement A-==Y PI Uncer. 

VW 0-w WI (corrected) (C&alated) 0-w 

PI 

l&t Port 2 

- 10 0 5 0.033 f 0.008 

-2o(Ref) 10 0.000

HP 8753E Performance lkst Record (11 of 13) 


EewletMa&ard Company 


h-id Number Date 

)b 14. Test Port Receiver Magnitnde Compression 

CW Frequency Test Port MeamredVhlue Specification Measur ement 

(aB) WV Uncertainty 

50 MHZ Port 2 5 0.45 NIA 

1GHz Port 2 5 0.45 N/A 

2GHz Port 2 5 0.45 N/A 

3GHz Port 2 5 0.45 N/A 

5OMHZ Port 1 5 0.45 NIA 

1GI-h Port 1 5 0.45 NIA 

2GHz Port 1 5 0.45 N/A 

3GI-h Port 1 5 0.45 NIA 

bb 16. lbt Port Receiver Phase Compression 

CW Frequency lbst Port MeasnredValne Specification Measurement 

okP=) @%-=9 Uncertainty 

5OMHZ Port 2 5 6” NIA 

1GHz Port 2 5 6O N/A 

2GI-h Port 2 5 6O NIA 

3GH.z Port 2 5 6“ N/A 

50 MHz Port 1 5 6O NIA 



3GHz Port 1 5 6O NIA 





Model HP 8753E Beport Number 

BerielNumber Date 

)) 16. Test Port OutpW/lnput Harmonics (Option 002 without Option 006) 

‘l&t Description Speciikntion Meamrement Value Measurement 

w-3 (-3 Uncertainty 

WV 

l&t Port output 

HZ3llUOtiCS 

2nd

HP 8753E Option 011 Performance lkst Record (13 of 13) 


3ewlettPackard Company 

Bode1 HP 8762E Beport Number 

krial Number Date 

W 18. lbst Port Output Jhrmonics (Ansly7,ers without Option 002) 

Second Harmonic FbndamenW SpeciIkation Measurement blue Measurement 

Frequency Fhqnenc y ww Pw Uncertainty 

W) 

1OOMHZ 

1.0 GHz 

2.4 GHz 

3.0 GHz 

Third Harmonic 

Frequency 

300 MHz 

1.2 GHz 

2.7 GHz 

3.0 GHz 


50 MHz 525 f1.6 

500 MHz 525 f1.6 

1.2 GHz 525 f 1.6 

1.5 GHz 525 f1.6 

100 MHz 5 25 f1.6 

4OOMHZ 525 f1.6 

900 MHz 5 25 f1.6 

1GHz 525 f1.6

Performance Xkst Record 

For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 

30 kHz to 6 GHz 

Note See the previous “Performance Test Record” section if your 

analyzer frequency range is from 30 kHz to 3 GHz. 

2b 

Performance Test Record 2b-1


Calibration Lab Address: Report Number 

Model HP 87533 Option 006 

Serial No. 

Firmware Revision 

Ambient Temperature 

‘I&t Equipment Used: 

Description Model Number 

kequency Counter 

Power Meter 

Power Sensor 


Verification Kit 

Notes/Comments: 

Date 

Last Calibration Date 

Customer’s Name 

Performed by 

Option(s) 

o C Relative Humidity % 

Trace Number Cal Due Date 

I I 

I I 

2b-2 Performance Test Record


For 30 kHz-6 GEz Analyzers 

tIewletGPackard Company 

Model HP 87683 Option 006 Beport Number 

3erialNumber Date 

lb3t Frequencies 

(MW 

bb 1. Test Port Output Frequency Range and Accuracy 

&z) 

Results Measured 

(MW El 

Measurement 

Uncertainty 

WJW 

0.03 0.029999 7 0.0300003 f0.000000050 

0.3 0.299 997 0.300 003 f0.000 000 520 

5.0 4.9QQ 950 5.000 050 f 0.000 009 

16.0 15.999 840 16.000160 f 0.000 028 

31.0 30.999 690 31.000 310 f 0.000 054 

80.999 999 6O.QQQ3QO 61.000610 f 0.000 105 

121.0 120.998 790 121.001210 f0.000207 

180.0 179.QQ8200 180.001800 f 0.000307 

310.0 309.995 900 310.003100 f 0.000 528 

700.0 699.930 000 700.007000 f 0.001 192 

1300.0 1299.987 1300.013 f 0.002 212 

2 000.0 1999.980 2000.020 f 0.003 403 

3 000.0 2 999.970 3000.030 f 0.005 104 

4.0 3.QQQQ60 4.000 040 f 0.008 805 

5.0 4.QQQQ50 5.000050 f 0.008 506 

6.0 5.QQQ940 6.000 060 f 0.010207 

Perfomance Test Record 2b3

HP 8753E Performance ‘l&t I&cord (3 of 15) 


Elewlett-Packard Company 

Model HP 8763E Option 006 Report N&r 


bb 2. Extemsl Source Mode F’reqnency Range 

Test Frequencies (GHz) Result 

0.010 

0.020 

0.100 

1.000 

2.000 

3.000 

4.000 

5.000 

6.ooo 

!lbt Frequency 

bb 3. Test Port Output Power Accmaey 

Test Port specification Measured Value 

ontpnt 

Power 

(aBm) 

PI (~1 

Measurement 

Uncertainty 

PI 

300 lcl-lz 0 i l i0.47 

20 MHz 0 i l i0.25 

50 MHz 0 i l i0.12 

100 MHz 0 i l i0.12 

200 MHz 0 i l i0.12 

500 MHz 0 fl i0.12 

1GHz 0 i l i0.12 

2GHz 0 i l i0.15 

3GHz 0 i l i0.15 

4GHz 0 i l i0.17 

5GI-h 0 i l i0.17 

6GI-h 0 i l i0.17 

2b4 Performance Test Record

HP 8753E Performance ‘Ikst Record (4 of 15) 


tIewlett-lkckard Company 

Ldodel HP 876SaE Option 006 Report Nnmber 

3erialNnmber Date 

bb 4. ‘lbst Port Output Power Range and Linearity 

Test settings lknllts Measured Power Level specmcation Mess. 

WV linearity (aB) Uncert. 

WI (W 

CW Frequency = 300 kHz 

- 15 i0.2 i0.03 

- 13 i 0.2 i0.03 

- 11 i 0.2 i0.03 

- 9 i 0.2 i0.02 

- 7 i0.2 i0.02 

- 5 i0.2 i0.02 

- 3 i0.2 i0.02 

-1 i 0.2 i0.02 

+l i 0.2 i0.03 

+3 i0.2 i0.03 

+6 i0.5 f0.03 

+7 i0.5 i0.03 

+8 i0.5 i0.03 

+Q i0.5 i0.03 

+ 10 i0.5 i0.03 

CW F'requency -3 GHz 

- 15 i 0.2 i0.03 

- 13 i0.2 i0.03 

- 11 i0.2 i0.03 

- 9 i0.2 i0.02 

- 7 i 0.2 i0.02 

- 5 i0.2 i0.02 

- 3 i0.2 i0.02 

-1 i0.2 i0.02 

+l f0.2 i0.03 

+3 i0.2 i0.03 

+5 i0.5 i0.03 





Node1 HP 8763E Option 006 Report Number 

3erial Nnmber Date 

bb 4. Test Port Chzlxmt Power Ra 

Results Measured 

WV 

Test settings 

+7 

+8 

+Q 

+ 10 

CW Frequency = 6 GHz 

- 15 

- 13 

- 11 

- 9 

-7 

-5 

-3 

-1 

+l 

+3 

+5 

+7 

+8 

+Q 

+ 10 

2b-6 Performance Test Record 

ge and Linearity ( 

Power Level 

Li=a-Y WI 

mtinned) 

Speciilclrtioll 

em 

i0.5 

i0.5 

i0.5 

i0.5 

i0.2 

i0.2 

i0.2 

i0.2 

i0.2 

i0.2 

i0.2 

i0.2 

i0.2 

f0.2 

i0.5 

i0.5 

i0.5 

i0.5 

i0.5 

MeIl.8. 

Uncert. 

(W 

i0.03 

i0.03 

i0.03 

i0.03 

f0.03 

i0.03 

i0.03 

i0.03 

i0.02 

i0.02 

f0.02 

i0.02 

i0.02 

i0.03 

i0.03 

i0.03 

i0.03 

i0.03 

i0.03

1Eewlett-Packard 

Company 

.1 Model HP 875QE Option 006 I&port Number 

c 

RP 8753E Performance lkst Record (6 of 15) 

For 30 kHz-6 GElz Analyzers 


lb 6. Minimum It Channel Level 

CW Frequency Specification Test Port Power 

PI 

Meaanrement 

Uncertainty 

(9 

300 kHz < -35 i 1.0 

3.29 MHz < -35 i 1.0 

3.31 MHz < -35 i 1.0 

15.90 MHz < -35 i 1.0 

16.10 MHz

I 

I 

J3P 8753E Performance ‘Best Record (7 of 15) 

For 30 kHz-6 GHZ Analyzers 


Model HP 8753E Option 006 Report Number 


bb 7. Test Port Input Frequency Response 

Frequency Range lk?st Port Specilkation Meaared Value Meawrement 

(aB) om Uncertainty 

WV 

300kHz-3GHz Port2 

3OOkHz-3GHz Port1 

3GHz-6GHz Port1 

3GHz--6GHz Port2 

Test settings 

crosstallrto~stPort2 

3OOkHz-3GHz 

C~tQ%stPortl 

300kHz-3GHz 

C~toTestPortl 

3GHz-6GHz 

C~to'IlestPort2 

3GHz-6GHz 


il 

il 

i2 

i2 

1) 8. lkst Port crosstalk 

< -100 

< -100 



EewletWackard Company 

Model HP 87683 Option 066 Report Number 


W 9. Calibration Coeillcients 

Test Description Frequency Range Spx. Measured Valne Measuremen 

cm WV Uncertainty 

ow 


Directivity 300 kHz-1.3 GHz 2 36 i 0.9 

Directivity 1.3 GHz-3 GHz 130 i 0.8 

Directivity 3 GHz-6 GHz 2 25 i 0.8 


Source Match 300 kHz-1.3 GHz > 16 i 0.2 

Source Match 1.3 GHz-3 GHz 1 16 i 0.2 

Source Match 3 GHz-6 GHz > 14 i 0.3 


Trans. Tracking 300 kHz-1.3 GJ.-Iz i 1.5 i 0.006 

Trans. Tracking 1.3 GHz-3 GHz i 1.5 i 0.009 

Trans. Tracking 3 GHz-6 GHz i 2.5 i 0.021 


Refl. Tracking 300 kHz-1.3 GHz i 1.5 i 0.001 

Refl. Tradchg 1.3 GHz-3 GHz i 1.5 i 0.005 

Refl. Tracking 3 GHz-6 GHz i 2.5 i 0.020 


bad Match 300 kHz-1.3 GHz 2 18 i 0.1 

Load Match 1.3 GHz-3 GHz 2 16 i 0.2 

bad Match 3 GHz-6 GHz 1 14 i 0.2 

Perfomance Test Record 2b-9

HP 8753E Performance ‘Ikst Record (9 of 15) 



Model HP 8766E Option 666 Report Number 


‘l&t Description 






Load Match 

LoadMatch 

Load Match 

F&verse Direction 

Directivity 

Directivity 

Directivity 


Source Match 

Source Match 

Source Match 


Refl. Tracking 

Fkfl. Trsckjng 

R&l. Tracking 


bb 9. Calibration CoeiEcients (conthned) 

Measured Value 

(aB) 

300 kHz-1.3 GHz 

1.3 GHz-3 GHz 

3 GHz-6 GHz 

300 kHz-1.3 GHz 

1.3 GHz-3 GHz 

3 GHz-6 GHz 

300 kHz-1.3 GHz 

1.3 GHz-3 GHz 

3 GHz-6 GHz 

300 kHz - 1.3 GHz 

1.3GHz-3GHz 

3GHz-6GI-h 

300 kHz - 1.3 GHz 

1.3GHz-3GHz 

3GHz.-6GI-h 

i 1.5 

i 1.5 

f2.5 

2 18 

2 16 

> 14 

1% 

>30 

225 

1 16 

>_ 16 

2 14 

i 1.5 

i 1.5 

i2.5 

Measurement 

Uncertainty 

IdH) 

i 0.006 

i 0.009 

i 0.021 

i 0.1 

i 0.2 

i 0.2 

i 0.9 

i 0.8 

i 0.8 

i 0.2 

i 0.2 

i 0.3 

i 0.001 

i 0.005 

i 0.020



Iewlett-Packard Company 

llodel HP 8763E Option 006 Report Number 

kid Number Date 

b) 11. System Trace Noise 

Frequency Bati0 Measnred Specification Mtasurement 

WW V&he Uncertainty 

3 A/R (Magnitude) ~0.006dBlTUS i 0.001 dB 

6 A/R (Magnitude) 5 0.010 dB mls i 0.001 m 

6 AIR (P-1 5 0.0700 mw i 0.01 0 

3 AIR (P-1 5 0.03v mls i 0.01 o 

3 B/R (Magnitude) ~0.006dBrmS i 0.001 dB 

6 B/R (Magnitude) 5 0.010 dB rms i 0.001 dB 

6 B/R (P-1 5 o.070° rms i 0.01 o 

3 B/R (P-1 5 o.03s” ml8 i 0.01 o 

bb 12. lkst Port Input Impedance 

‘lbst Description matPort Return Loss Speciilcation Measurement 

(aB) m Uncertainty 

(aB) 

300 kHz-1.3 GHz Port 2 2 18 i 1.5 

1.3 GHz-3 GHz Port 2 1 16 i 1.5 

3 GHz-6 GBz Port 2 1 14 i 1.0 

300 kHz-1.3 GHz Port 1 > 18 i 1.6 

1.3 GHz-3 GHz Port 1 1 16 i 1.5 

3 GHz-6 GBz Port 1 >_ 14 i 1.0 

PerformanceTest Record 2b-11






bb 18. ‘l&t Port Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 

G F IG - 4 

lb& Port 8496A lkst Port Expected Dynamic spec. Mea& 

Input Power Attn. Measurement Measnrement &c-y (aB) Uncer. 

(aBm) WI WV (correctea) (celculated) WI 

(aB) 

lbtPort2 

- 10 0 5 0.033 i0.008 

-2o(Refl 10 0.000




lode1 HP 8751E Option 006 Report Number 

IerialNnmber Date 

)) 14. Test Port Receiver Magnitude Compression 

CW Frequency lkst Port MeasuredValue Specification Measar ement 

WV VW Uncertainty 

50 MHz Port 2 50.45 N/A 

1GHz Port 2 50.45 N/A 

2GHz Port 2 50.45 NIA 

3GHz Port 2 5 0.45 NIA 


SGBZ Port 2 50.80 N/A 


5OMHZ Port 1 50.45 NIA 


2GHz Port 1 50.45 N/A 




GGHZ Port 1 50.80 NIA 




BewletGPackard Company 



bb 15. lbst Port Receiver Phase Compression 

cw Frequency Test Port Measured Vshe Specification Measurement 

Wi?m=) vw=-) Uncertainty 

50 MHz Port 2 5 6O NIA 


2GI-h Port 2 5 6O N/A 


4GHz Port 2 5 7.50 N/A 

5GHz Port 2 5 7.50 N/A 

6GI-h Port 2 5 7.50 N/A 

6OMHZ Port 1 5 6O NIA 



3GHz Port 1 5 6’ NIA 

4GHz Port 1 5 7.60 NIA 

5GHz Port 1 5 7.50 N/A 

GGHZ Port 1 5 7.60 NIA 

2b-14 Performance Test Record






)) 17. OntpntIInpnt Test Port Jhrmonics (Option 662 only) 

Test Description Specilkation Measurement Value Meawrement 

VW ww Uncertainty 

(aB) 

l&t Port output 

IWlllOIliCS 

2nd 5 25 i 1.5 

3rd 5 25 i 1.5 

Port 1 Input Harmonics 

2nd 5 15 i 1.5 

3rd 5 30 i 1.5 

Port 2 Input Harmonics 

2nd 5 15 i 1.5 

3rd 5 30 i 1.5 




Elewlett-lkckard Company 

Model J3P 8755E Option 666 Report Number 


bb 18. ‘l&t Port Output Harmonics (Analyzers without Option 062) 

Second Harmonic Fnnd8menta.l Specification Measurement Value Measurement 

Frequency Frequency Gw ww UllCerh.illty 

ow 

100 MHz 

1.0 GHz 

2.4 GI-lz 

3.2 GI-Iz 

4.0 GBz 

5.0 GI-Iz 

6.0 GBz 

Third Harmonic 

PreqnencY 

300 MB2 

1.2 GBz 

2.7 GHz 

3.3 GHz 

4.8 GI-lz 

6.0 GBz 

2b-16 PorfonnanceTest Record 

50 MHz 525 i 1.6 

500 MHz 5 25 i 1.6 

1.2 GHz 525 i 1.6 

1.6 GI-lz 525 i 1.6 

2.0 GBz 5 25 i 1.6 

2.5 G&a 5 25 i 1.6 

3.0 GBz 525 i 1.6 

100 MHz 525 i 1.6 

400 MHz 5 25 i 1.6 

900 MHz 5 25 i 1.6 

1.1 GHz 525 i 1.6 

1.6 GHz 525 i 1.6 

2.0 GHz 525 i 1.6

Adjustments and Correction Constants 

This chapter has the following adjustment procedures: 

� A9 Switch Positions 

� Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44) 

� Source Prettme Default Correction Constants (Test 45) 

� Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46) 

0 Source Pretune Correction Constants (lest 48) 

� RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47) 

� IF Amplifier Correction Constants (Test 51) 

� ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52) 

Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53) 

0 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54) 

� Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55) 

� Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56) 

� Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58) 

� EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure 

� Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure 

0 Loading Firmware 

� Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment 

� Frequency Accuracy Adjustment 

� High/Low Band Transition Adjustment 

� Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment 

� Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment 

� Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants 

3 

Adjustments and Correstion Constants 3-l

Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753E 

lhble 3-l lists the additional service procedures which you must perform to 

ensure that the instrument is working correctly, following the replacement of an 

assembly. These procedures can be located in either Chapter 2 or Chapter 3. 

mform the procedures in the order that they are listed in the table. 

Replaced 

Assembly 

Al Front Panel 

Keyboard 

A2 Front Panel 

[nterface 

‘able 3-l. Related Service Procedures 

A@stments/ VerUlcation 

Correction Constants (Ch. 3) (a. 2) 

None ServiCl?flestO 

Service Test 23 

None Service lbt 0 

Service l&t 23 

service Test 12 

‘Rst.s 66 - 80 

k3 Source A9 Switch Positions lbt Port Output Frequency Range 

Source Def CC (!&St 44) and Accuracy 

Pretune Default CC (!&St 45) Test Port Output Power Accuracy 

AnalogBusCC(Test46) ‘l&t Port Output Power Range and 

Source Pretune CC (Test 48) Linearity 

RF Output Power CC (‘l&t 47) Tl?st Port output/Input Hamlonics 

Sampler Maguitude and Phase CC (‘l&t 53) (Option 002 only) 

Cavity OscUator Frequency CC (T&t 54) 

Source Spur Avoidance Tracking 

EEPROM Backup Disk 

WAS/A6 Samplers A9 Switch Positions MInimmu R Channel Level 

Sampler Maguitude and Phase CC (l&t 53) (if R sampler replaced) 

IF Amplifier CC (‘l&t 51) %stPortCroWalk 

EEPROM Backup Disk Test Port Input Frequency Response 

A7 Pulse Generator A9 Switch Positions Test Port Input Frequency Response 

Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) Test Port Frequency Range and 

EEPROM lb&up Disk A- 

A8 Post Regulator A9 Switch Positions Service l&t 0 

Cavity Oscillabr Frequency CC (l&t 54) Check A8 test point voltages 



3-2 Adjustments and Correction Constants

Replaeed 

Assembly 

A9 CPU 

FEPROM Backup 

Disk Available) 

‘able 3-l. Related Service Procedures (2 of 3) 

Adjnstmentsl 

Correction constallts (ch. 3) 

A9 Switch Positions 

Load Firmware 

CC Retrieval 

Serial Number CC (‘I&t 65) 

Option Number CC (Test 56) 

Operator’s Check 



Verification 

w. 2) 

A9 CPU A9 Switch Positions Test Port Output Frequency Range 

FEPROM Backup Lead Firmware andAccuracy 

Disk Not Available) Serial Number CC (l&t 56) ‘I&t Port Output Power Accuracy 

Option Number CC (‘Pzst 66) lkst Port Output Power Range and 

Source Def CC (lkst 44) Linearity 

Pretune Default CC (‘l&t 45) Test Port Receiver Dynamic Accuracy 

Am&gBusCC(%st46) l&t Port Input Frequency Response 

Cal Kit Default (‘kst 67) 

Source Pretune CC (T&t 48) 

RF Output Power CC (‘I& 47) 

Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (lkst 63) 

ADC Linearity CC (‘&St 62) 

IF Amplitler CC (lbst 51) 

Cavity OsciIlator Frequency CC (Test 54) 


A10 Digital IF A9 Switch Positions ‘I&t Port Input Noise FIoor Level 

Analog Bus CC (‘I&t 46) l&t Port CrossbE 

Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (lbst 53) System Trace Noise 

ADC Linearity CC (‘l&t 52) 

IF Amplifler CC (lkst 61) 


All Phase Lock A9 Switch Positions 

AnalogBusCC(‘Ibst46) 

Pretune Default CC (lbst 45) 

Source Pretune CC @St 4s) 


Al2 Reference A9 Switch Positions 

II&h/Low Band Transition 

Frequency Accuracy 


Minimum R Channel Level 

l&t Port Output Prequency Range 

andAccuracy 

l&t Port Output Frequency Range 

and Accuracy 

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-3

l&placed 

Al9fU?mbly 

Al3 Fractional-N 

(dog) 


UWW 

Al5 Preregulator 

Al6 Rear Panel 

Interface 

Al7 Motherboard 

‘lhble 3-1. Related Service Procedures (3 of 3) 

Awtments/ 

Correction chlstants (ch. 3) 

A9 switch Positions 

Fractional-N Spur and 

FM Sideband 

EEPROM Hackup Disk 


Fractional-N Frequency Range 

Fractional-N Spur Avoidance 

and FM sideband 

EEPROM Hackup Disk 

None 

None 

None 

Verification 

(a. 2) 

lbst Port Output Frequency Range 

and Accuracy 

lbst Port Output Frequency Range 

and Accuracy 

Self-l&t. 

Iutemal l&t 13, 

Rear Panel 

Observation of Display 

lksts60-80 

Al8 Display None Observation of Display 

‘lksta 06 - 80 

A19 Graphics System None Observation of Display 

Processor R&3 59 - 80 

A20 Disk Drive none none 

A21 lbst Port Coupler RF Output Power CC (Ibst 47) l&t Port cnxstalk 

Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) Test Port Frequency Response 

A22 lbst Port Coupler Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) ‘lbst Port Cromtalk 

� lbst Port Frequency Response 

A23RdAssyLED none Self-Test (Chapter 4) 

A24 Transfer Switch none Rst Port cromialk 

A26 7ht Set Interface none Self-l&t (Chapter 4) 

A26 H&h Stability Frequency Accuracy Adjustment !lbst Port Frequency Range 

Frequency Reference (Option lD5) ~AccuTacy 

* Hewlett-Packard verSes source output performance on port 1 only. Port 2 source output 

performance is typical. 

34 Adjustments and Correction Constants


1. Remove the power line cord from the analyzer. 

2. Set the analyzer on its side. 

3. Remove the two lower-rear comer bumpers from the bottom of the 

instrument with the T-10 TORX screwdriver. 

4. Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover’s back edge, using a T-15 

TORX screwdriver. 

5. Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument. 

6. Move the switch as shown in Figure 3-l: 

w Move the A9 switch to the Alter position before you run any of the 

correction constant adjustment routines. This is the position for altering 

the analyzer’s correction constants. 

w Move the A9 switch to the Normal position, after you have run correction 

constant adjustment routines. This is the position for normal operating 

conditions. 

7. Reins&R the bottom cover, but not the rear bumpers 

Adjustments and Correstion Constants 3-5

sga me 

A9 CPU Assembly 

Normal Mode Alter Mode Rocker Slide 

Figure 3-1. A9 Correction Constants Switch 

8. Reconnect the power line cord and switch on the instrument. 


Source Default Correction Constants (‘kst 44) 

Analggm- warmup time: 30 minutes. 

This internal adjustment routine writes default correction constants for the 

source power accuracy. 

.;...:............. / ........... z.:................: .y ........................ 

................... ..................... 

1. press CpzJ (22) ;$@$$~~:,~j@@ ~~~~: L44) Lxl] j&@$. 

2. ................... ..cw................._- _;;- ..........- T ......... ............................... 

.... 

........_ ......... .._..._ ...... _i....... _.... Li.. ..............::::. .._ .....-. ....._ ... :.::.i./..i i........ 

2. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine: 

H If the analyzer displays *Source Def DONE, you have completed this 

procedure. 

w If the analyzer displays *Source Def FAIL, refer to Chapter 7, “Source 

Troubleshooting. n 


Source Pretune Default Correction Constants (X&t 45) 

Anulgzm warmup time: 30 minutes. 

This adjustment writes default correction constants for rudimentary phase lock 

pretuning accuracy. 

..................:. ... .:.:.:::: ,,:::::.::.:~~~~~~~~;~~::~~~~~~~~: 

1. press (=I L-1 

..................... 

:../ .........................A.. ......................................_ ...................... .._. ......... 

......................... 

@ Ixl) im. ‘;$J$x. :*i. 

; A.s.zu>>>.L.L ..............2.. .....A ...... 

2. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine: 

� If the analyzer displays Pretune Def DONE, you have completed this 

procedure. 

� If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to Chapter 7, “Source 

Troubleshooting. ’ 


Analog Bus Correction Constants (‘I&t 46) 

Aruzlgmr warmup time: 30 minutes. 

This procedure calibrates the analog bus by using three reference voltages 

(ground, + 0.37 and +2.5 volts), then stores the calibration data as correction 

constants in EEPROMs. 


� If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor DONE, you have completed this 

procedure. 

� If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor FAIL, refer to Chapter 6, “Digital Control 



Source Pretune Correction Constants (Tkst 48) 

An.u&er warmup time: 30 minutes. 

This procedure generates pretune values for correct phase-locked loop 

operation. 


w If the analyzer displays Pretune Cor DONE, you have completed this 

procedure. 

� If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to Chapter 7, “Source 


3-l 0 Adjustments and Correction Constants

RF Output Power Correction Constants (T&t 47) 

Required Equipment and lbols 

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 437B or HP 438A 

HP-IB Cable . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 10833A 

Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367 

Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0980 

Static-control ‘Ihble Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0797 

Additional Required Equipment for 5Oll Analyzers 


Power Sensor (for Option 006 analyzers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8481A 

Adapter APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11524A 

Additional Eequired Equipment for 750 Analyzers 


Analgger warmup Time: 30 minutes. 

This procedure adjusts several correction constants that can improve the output 

power level accuracy of the internal source. They are related to the power 

level, power slope, power slope offset, and the ALC roll-off factors among 

others. 

1. If you just completed “Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants 

(Test 53),” continue this procedure with step 8. 

............. ::::-::x :::: ::: .::“:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:~~::::::::::::.:.:..~;~,,.~. . . ~.;; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...._G.. 

. . 

meter address is 13. Refer to the power meter manual as required to 

observe or change its HP-B3 address 

4. Press ~~~~~~~~~~~~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . to . . . . . toggle between *e 438A/437 and 436A 

c ,,, 

power meters. Choose the appropriate model number. 

Note If you are using the HP 438A power meter, connect the 

HP 8482A power sensor to channel A, and the HP 8481A power 

sensor to channel B. 


Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry 

.f ‘_’ .$ ” ,/ .“? .~..~.,, . ..., ; .,...__. . ... 

5. Press @--+q ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~..;~~~~3.. 

:::: ..::.z ~~.:.:;.:~:.:.:.~.;..:.:::.:~:::.:::.... I ..:.. :::.: .:.:.:..“- i “,.......... ,::.: ::; ,&~. ..,,.. ~......,O y . . . . .. ..~..~~~‘~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.,,~,~~.~~ . . . . . . . . ..L .u;;:,..

. . . . *. 

8. For Option 006 Instruments Only: Press ~~~l~,~~~~~~~~~~,~ri,.j ::. .: . . . . . . . . . . s . . . . ..A2 . . . . .::../ . . . ..A .>.I .A.. SW;;.>>: .i .T to create 

a power sensor calibration table for power sensor B (HP 8481A), using the 

softkeys mentioned above. 



HP 4388 

POWER METER 


POWER METER 


POWER 

SENSOR 

3 - 6GHz 

HP-B h 




PORT 2 


POWER 

SENSOR 

300KHz - 3GHz 



/’ 

\* 




PORT 2 

sg631e 

Figure 3-2. RF Output Correction Constants ‘kst Setup for the HP 8753E 


11. Press .~~, ~~~ and ~ at the prompt to alter *e correction 

.:..+ L.~..:...:...:..:. L . ;..:. .._....................... 

constants. 

12. Follow the ~s~&ions at the prompts and press ~~~~~~ * 

13. When the analyzer completes the test, observe the display for the results: 

� If you see DONE, press m and you have completed this procedure. 

� If you see FAIL, re-run this routine in the following order: 

a. Press-(Preset). 

b. Repeat the “Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)” procedure. 

c. Repeat the “RF’ Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)” 

procedure. 


IF Amplifier Correction Constants (‘I&t 61) 

Required Equipment and ‘lbols 

Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367 


Static-control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0797 


RF Cable - (5OQ) 24-inch, APC-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-4779 

Additional Required Equipment for 75Q Analyzers 

RF Cable - (750) 24-inch, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8120-2408 

Anulgz~warrnupTime: 30 minutes. 

These correction constants compensate for possible discontinuities of signal 

greater than -30 dBm. 

1. Connect the RF cable from Port 1 to Port 2 of the analyzer. 


z If DONE is displayed, you have completed this procedure. 

w If FAIL is displayed, check that the RF cable is COMeCted from Port 1 to 

Port 2. Then repeat this adjustment routine. 

w If the analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine, refer to the 

“Digital Control Troubleshooting” chapter. 


ADC Offset Correction Constants (‘I&t 52) 

Analyzer warmup tim.e: 30 minutes. 

These correction constants improve the dynamic accuracy by shifting small 

signals to the most linear part of the ADC quantizing curve. 

Note This routine takes about three minutes. 


w If the analyzer displays ADC Of 8 Cor DONE, you have completed this 

procedure. 

w If the analyzer displays ADC Of 8 Cor FAIL, refer to the “Digital Control 

Troubleshooting” chapter. 


Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants 

(%?st 53) 

Required Equipment and Tools 

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP 437B or HP 438A 

HP-IB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 10833A 



Static-control Mat and Earth Ground Wire . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 9300-0797 

Additional Required Equipment for 500 Analyzers 


Power Sensor (for Option 006 analyzers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8481A 

Cable, (509) 24-inch, APC-7 (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 81204779 

Adapter APC-7 to Type-N(f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11524A 

Additional Required Equipment for 75Q Analyzers 


Cable, (75ohm) 24-inch, Type-N (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8120-2408 

Armlgzer wamup time: 30 minutes. 

This adjustment procedure corrects the overall flatness of the microwave 

components that make up the analyzer receiver and test separation sections. 

This is necessary for the HP 8753E to meet the published test port flatness. 

1. If you just completed “Source Correction Constants (Test 47),” continue this 

procedure with step 8. 

............. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 

3. ~~~~ m ~~~~~~~~~.~ ,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~. me default power 

_ .:._:. _.i . . __j . . :::: i...~ .:..::::: ~.M..... x.> .._/,..... L..& -_- ..__...... -~::::~~:~~ .A.. T .A.. T .A.. ii . . ..~.~.~.~.~..~.~.~.~.~~.~.~.~~ . . . . . . . . 

meter address is 13. Refer to the power meter manual as required to 

observe or change its HP-IB address. 

4. Press ~~~~~~~~~~~~., to toggle between the 438A/437 md 436A 

..; ._....................,..._...._........_. ..~~~~~~;~~.~~~~~~~~~~~~.._ i:::. . . . . . ..t......... - .._.. ,, .::rF: .-....-.-..........-........ .... 

power meters. Choose the appropriate model number. 

Note If you are using the HP 438A power meter, connect the 

HP 8482A power sensor to channel A, and the HP 8481A power 

sensor to channel B. 


Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry 

/..;..- _/i . . . . . :. ....:.. 

5. press w $j@~. ,@f# ~~~~~~X~~~. ~~~~~~~~~~,~sT~~~~ 

..... .” ~;~~~~~;~-~ :“-...c:: .._............ . . . ..__..........._.............. ., ,................ .._. .:.: .._ .: 

Yi..l........ Li . . . . . . . . . . . .w>:> . . . . . .L_.> .:..:.:: . . . ..A . . . . . . . . ..A .: :....... ;;;>2.. i..z~..i 

.: ..;. ..:z::I $ .T:.:::.::. ..,. :::.:;:;U;..::...:~. allows you to complete the points entry of the sensor 

cal factor table. 

Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-l 9

7. For Option 006 Instruments Only: Zero and calibrate the power meter 

ad HP 8481A power sensor. ‘J’&n press ~~~.~~~~~~:~~~~~~.~::~~;- to meate 

. . . . . . i . . . . . . 2x.. . ii ~....~.~.~.~.~.~.~~ . . . .z . ii .~................................ .._. ~.~.~::; ._............. . . _ _...: i 

a power sensor calibration table for power sensor B (HP 8481A), using the 

softkeys mentioned above. 

Determine the Insertion Loss of the Cable at 1 GHz 

9. PressLcenter_)(TJ@FJ(3&J(%GJIM_U. 

10. Press Ical] ~~~~~ 

::::;:;::. . . ;..+:>>;;>;.;,;,, .;: 

~~~~.~~:~~~ ~~~, ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~. 

.._;..;..>;.>A . . . .: . i . . . ..s . .. . . . ..-.......~...........~..........~_~~ 

. . . . 

.A.. . . ..A . . . . . A...>.~~ . ii..... _....... - .._ -...- _.._...._ ~~~~-.:::..w.Le~.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . .>.;..A . . . . . ..i . i . . ..A . .:::..-.:::: i_..~.G.~~~.i . . . . . . . ii . :::. in....... .._...... 

11. Connect the 24 inch cable from Port 1 to Port 2, as shown in Figure 3-3. 



Figure 3-3. First Connections for Insertion Loss Measurement 

_ ,. .,. ,. _ 

12. press i$&$&.. and then :~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ when the analyzer is done 

measuring the through. 

13. fiess [W) ~~~~~~~~ 

_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

to Save *e calibration aat you just 

made. 

14. Make the connections as shown in Figure 3-4. 



POWER METER 

HP-B 


POWER 

SENSOR 

3 - CGHz 




PORT 2 




POWER 

SENSOR 


POWER 

SENSOR 

300KHz - 3GHz HP 8753E 



PORT 1 I 

Figure 3-5. Connections for Sampler Correction Routine 

3-22 Adjustments and Correction Constants 

PORT 2

. . _ . . . _ . . _ .., _ 

13. Press .~&+$&@#‘$ to start the test. This part of the test will take about seven 

minutes. 

� If the analyzer displays Sampler Cor - FAIL, check the following: 

a. The HP-IB address of your power meter is set at 13. Then rerun this 

routine (“Sampler Correction Constants Routine”). 

b. The HP 8482A power sensor is connected to Port 1. Rerun this routine 

(‘Sampler Correction Constants Routine “). 

19. For Option 006 Instruments Only: When the analyzer displays CONNECT 

6 GHz SENSOR B TO PORT 1, make the connections as shown in Figure 3-6. 

Then press @WJ~. This part of the test will take about 20 seconds. 

.._ .._..................-..-.. 




POWER SENSOR 

Figure 3-6. Connections for Sampler Correction at 6 GHz 

20. When the analyzer displays CONNECT


POWER METER 


POWER 

SENSOR 

3 - 6GHr 


POWER 

SENSOR 

300KHr 3GHr 


POWER 

SENSOR 

(OPTION H03) 

HP I3753E 

\ J 


POWER 

SENSOR 

k J sg636e 

Figure 3-7. Connections for Sampler Correction at Port 2 


21. 

22. 

23. 

24. 

. . ; ::.... :: . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., 

press ~~cla~#B$.,- This Pa of the test a t&e about 10 hues. 

For Option 606 Instruments Only: When the analyzer displays CONNECT 6 

GHz SENSOR TO PORT 2, make the connections as shown in Figure 3-8. Then 

press ~~~~~. This part of the test m t*e about $3) seconds. 

. .._... .._............... 




POWER SENSOR 

sg637e 

Figure 3-8. Connections for Sampler Correction at Port 2 for 6 GHz 

When the analyzer displays CONNECT PORT 1 TO PORT 2, make the 

connections of the second through cable (of which you have determined its 

insertion loss) as shown in F’igure 3-9. 



PORT 1 PORT 2 

UCSECOND THRU CABLE 

Figure 3-9. Connections for the Second Through Cable 

sg638e 


25. Enter the insertion loss of the through cable (determined in step 15) and 

press ...... :~~~~~~. . . ....i . . ..:::. ~.....~........~...~i...~;;......~.. For example, if the insertion loss of the through cable at 

1 GHz is found to be 0.25 dB, then press 1.25) @. 

26. When the analyzer completes the test, observe the display for the results: 

� If you see Sampler Cor - DONE, you have completed this procedure. 

� Ifyousee Sampler Cor - FAIL, it is necessary to adjust the sampler gain 

offset values, which are stored in EEPROM. 

b. Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing $jpKK: (46) a). 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .y:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . 

.,., ‘..~..~.~.~,~,.,. . . . . . . . . ....:::::.. 

C- Access the second address by pressing ~~~~~~~-:~~~~ c-1 

Ixl). 

d. Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing $&%I,@ @ 

@. 

e. Press (FEZ] for the analyzer to use the new values. 

f. Repeat the “Sampler Correction Constants Routine” starting at step 16. 

� If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine, refer to Chapter 

7, “Source Troubleshooting. n 

d. Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing @$&I$: (248_) 

jxl. 

e. Press B for the analyzer to use the new values 



� If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine, refer to Chapter 


B Channel Sampler 

b- Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing :@I& (66) (xl. 

. . . . . . . . 

C- Access the second address by pressing ;~~~~~~:~~~~~~:,~ ... . . . . . . . ;a :..; . . .. . i..............................~........~............~.........~....~.........--.~~ -...... .._ s. (jj) 

(QiJ 

_ ..,:,.,. 

de Enter the new value at the accessed address by pressing @$l$R 1128J 

(XJ 

e. Press w for the analyzer to use the new values. 


w If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine, refer to Chapter 



Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants 

(Ykst 54) 


Low-pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 91350198 



Static-control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP PM 9300-0797 


Adapter APC-7 to 3.5 mm (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 1250-1746 

Adapter APC-7 to 3.5 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 1250-1747 

RF Cable Set APC-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 118571) 


Adapter APC-3.5 (f) to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 1250-1745 

Adapter APC-3.5 (m) to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 1250-1750 

RF Cable Set 503, Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11851B 

Minimum Loss Pad 50ohm 75Q to (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 11852B 

Analyzer warmup Time: 30 minutes. 

The nominal frequency of the cavity oscillator is 2.982 GHz, but it varies with 

temperature. This procedure determines the precise frequency of the cavity 

oscillator at a particular temperature by identifying a known spur 

Note You should perform this procedure with the recommended 

filter, or a filter with at least 50 dB of rejection at 2.9 GHz, 

and a passband which includes 800 MHz. The filter makes spur 

identification substantially faster and more reliable. 

With the filter, you need to distinguish between only two spurs, each of which 

should be 10 dB to 20 dB (3 to 4 divisions) above the trace noise. 

Without the filter, you need to distinguish the target spur between four or five 

spurs, each of which may be 0.002 to 0.010 dB (invisible to 2 divisions) above or 

below the trace noise. 


Perform the first five steps of the procedure at least once for familiarization 

before trying to select the target spur (especially if you are not using a filter). 

1. Connect the equipment shown in Figure 3-10. 






LOW PASS F ILTER LOW PASS FILTER 

ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER ADAPTER 

Figure 3-10. 

Setup for Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constant Routine 

During this adjustment routine, you will see several softkeys: 

sweeps the current frequency span; you may 

press it repeatedly for additional sweeps of the 

current frequency span. 

sweeps the next frequency span (2 MHz higher). 

enters the value of the marker (which you have 

placed on the spur) and exits the routine. 

exits the routine. 

sg639e 


3. Press .~~~~~~,: to sweep the first frequenw span three times. Each new 

2 /. .:~...=.:..:..:..~.=;~~..... .-:.;.: . . . . . . . > . . . . . . ..


H If the analyzer displays Cav Osc Cor DONE, you have completed this 

procedure. 

H If the analyzer does not display DONE, repeat this procedure. 

w If the analyzer continues not to display DONE, refer to Chapter 7, “Source 


Spurs Search Procedure without a Filter 

On occasion the largest spur appears as one of a group of five evenly spaced 

spurs as shown in F’igure 3-13. The target spur is again the fourth from the left 

(not the fifth, right-most spur). 

Figure 3-13. ‘Ihrget Spur Is Fourth in Display of Five spurs 

Figure 3-14 shows another variation of the basic four spur pattern: some up, 

some down, and the target spur itself almost indistinguishable. 


CENTER 2 983.000 000 MHz SPAN 5.000 000 mr 

Figure 3-14. ‘Ihrget Spur Is Almost Invisible 

10. Rotate the front panel knob to position the marker on the target spur. Then 

.) /,.;; ,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,. 

press &@&&E@ and observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment 

routine: 

w If the analyzer displays Cav Osc Cor DONE, you have completed this 

procedure. 

w If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to Chapter 7, “Source 


Adjustments and Correction Constants 3.33

Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55) 

Analyzer warmup time: 5 minutes. 

This procedure stores the analyzer serial number in the A9 CPU assembly 

EEPROMs. 

Caution Perform this procedure ON= if the A9 CPU assembly has been 

replaced. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

Record the ten character serial number that is on the HP 8753E rear panel 

identification label. 

Enter the serial number with an external keyboard or by rotating the front 

panel knob to position the arrow below each character of the instrument 

.,:,.,,,,,:, 

s&d nu&er, ad then pressing ~~~:~~~ to enter ea& letter. Enter 

a total of ten characters: four digits, one letter, and five 9nal digits. 

press ~~~~~~~ if you 

* i .:..... 

made a m&&e. 

. - .._ - - - 

press &id when you have mshed entering the title. 

:..---::... 

Caution You CMOT correct mistakes after you perform step 5, unless 

you contact the factory for a clear serial number keyword. 

Then you must perform the “Options Correction Constants” 

procedure and repeat this procedure. 


6. Observe the analyzer for the results of the routine: 

� If the analyzer displays the message Serial Cor DONE, you have 

completed this procedure. 

� If the analyzer does not display DONE, then either the serial number that 

you entered in steps 3 and 4 did not match the required format or a serial 

number was already stored. Check the serial number recognized by the 

analyzer: 

b. Look for the serial number displayed on the analyzer screen. 

c. Rerun this adjustment test. 

� If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine, contact your 

nearest HP sales or service office. 


Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56) 

This procedure stores instrument option(s) information in A9 CPU assembly 

EEPROMs. You can also use this procedure to remove a serial number, with the 

unique keyword, as referred to in “Serial Number Correction Constant.” 

1. Remove the instrument top cover and record the keyword label(s) that are on 

the display assembly. Note that eachkeyword is for each option installed in 

the instrument. 

w If the instrument does not have a label, then contact your nearest 

Hewlett-Packard sales or service office. Be sure to include the full serial 

number of the instrument. 

2. press Is) (Displad 

--.-.-.-.__ 

&&&,, 

..__.. 

$j$&J$ 

.:.-.:..;.. -.- 

;~~~~~~~. 

.._. - .._.... -_- .._ -._ 

3. Enter the keyword with an external keyboard or by rotating the front panel 

knob to position the arrow below each character of the keyword, and then 

pressing ‘~~~~~:~:, to enter each letter. 

,./,. . . . . . . . . . ._ .,.,...,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,....,... i _. 

Press ..,.,., ._._........_...........---.... ~3~~~~~~. i:, .~ ..:.; ,.,. ,,, ./_ .._; - _.,.,.,i .._ -.,., 

if you made a mistake. 

4. Press ,,#bs:; when you 

/. ./. ii /i 

.._..................... 

have &-&hed entering the title. 

Caution Do not confuse “I” with “1” or “0” with “0” (zero). 


� If the analyzer displays Option Cor DONE, you have completed this 

procedure. 

w If the analyzer has more than one option, repeat steps 2 through 5 to 

install the remaining options. 

� If the analyzer displays Option Cor FAIL, check the keyword used in step 

3 and make sure it is correct. Pay special attention to the letters “I” or “O”, 

the numbers “1” or “0” (zero). Repeat this entire adjustment test. 

� If the analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine, contact your 

nearest HP sales or service office. 


Initialize EEPROMs (T&t 58) 

This service internal test performs the following functions: 

� Destroys ail correction constants and all unprotected options 

� Initializes certain EEPROM address locations to zeroes. 

Note This routine till not alter the serial number or Options 002, 006 

and 010 correction constants. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Make sure the A9 switch is in the alter position. 

Restore the analyzer correction constants in the EEPROMs: 

� If you have the correction constants backed up on a disk, perform these 

steps: 

b. Use the front panel knob to highhght the filename that represents your 

serial number. 

� If you don’t have the correction constants backed up on a disk, run all the 

internal service routines in the following order: 

13 Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44) 

0 Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 45) 

� Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46) 

0 Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48) 

� Calibration Kit Default Correction Constants (Test 57) 

II ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52) 

� RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47) 

� Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53) 

0 IF Amplifier Correction Constants (Test 51) 

0 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54) 


EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure 

Required Equipment and ‘Idols 

3.5~inch Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 92192A (box of 10) 




The correction constants, that are unique to your instrument, are stored in 

EEPROM on the A9 controller assembly. By creating an EEPROM backup disk, 

you will have a copy of all the correction constant data should you need to 

replace or repair the A9 assembly. 

1. Insert a 3.5~inch disk into the analyzer disk drive. 

2. If the disk is not formatted, follow these steps: 

a* fiess I-, ~.~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~. _ . . . . .,. ,. .., .;;.... _ 

.._. /-..A.: . . -.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.-.-.-~-.-.-.-.~~.~.~.~.~~~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~..~.~..~..~.~.~;;~~ . . 

. .

5. Write the following information on the disk label: 

� analyzer serial number 

� today’s date 

� “EEPROM Backup Disk” 


Correction Constants Retrieval Procedure 

Required Equipment and Tools 


Antistatic Wrist Strap . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367 


Static-control ‘Ihble Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0797 

By using the current EEPROM backup disk, you can download the correction 

constants data into the instrument EEPROMs. 

1. Insert the “EEPROM Backup Disk” into the HP 8753E disk drive. 

2. Make sure the A9 switch is in the Alter position. 

* p f!g;-~ :>+?$?q&:. pL+y .::: .:: ) :.:::y ,,,,,, 

3. Press t-1 ‘~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~. Use the front panel knob 

to highhght the IiIe “N12345” where N12345 represents the file name of the 

EEPROM data for the analyzer. On the factory shipped EEPROM backup 

disk, the filename is PILEl. 

i........... :..:..v..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i. . . . .,.. . . .““’ . . . . . . .:.:: :... :;:::;:j :.~,,.,,,,,~~~~~.~: :.::::::.:::.:::.:....:::::::::::::~.:::::::::: 

4. press Tm ~~~~~~~~~~ to download the come&ion constants data into 

the instrument EEPROMs. 

5. Perform “Option Numbers Correction Constant (Test 56). n 

6. Press preset] and verify that good data was transferred to EEPROM by 

performing a simple measurement. 

7. Move the A9 switch back to its Normal position when you are done working 

with the instrument. 


Loading Firmware 


� Firmware disk for the HP 8753E 

Anulgzzr warmup l%m: None required. 

The following procedures will load firmware for new or existing CPU boards in 

an HP 8753E network analyzer. 

Loading Firmware into an Existing CPU 

Use this procedure for upgrading firmware in an operational instrument whose 

CPU board has not been changed. 

Caution Loading hrmware will clear all internal memory. 

Perform the following steps to save any instrument states that 

are stored in internal memory to a floppy disk. 

~:: :::: i .~~,a~~~ . . .;yf&+?& 7 FE i

At the end of a successful loading, the LEDs for Channel 1 and Testport 1 

will remain on and the display will turn on indicating the version of lirmware 

that was loaded. 

I.nCa13eofDifticulty 

If the firmware did not load successfully, LED patterns on the front panel can 

help you isolate the problem. 

� If the following LED pattern is present, the firmware disk is not for use with 

your instrument model. Check that the firmware disk used was for the 

HP 8753E. 

� If any of the following LED patterns are present, 

defective. 

LEDlhttern 

CJIlCE2 B L T S 

. 

. 

. 

. . 

. . . 

. 

. 

. 

. . 

. . . 

. . 

. . . 

. . . 

. . 

. . . 

the firmware disk may be 

� If any other LED pattern is present, the CPU board is defective. 


Loading Firmware into a New CPU 

Use this procedure to load firmware for an instrument whose CPU board has 

been replaced. 

1. Turn off the network analyzer. 

2. Insert the firmware disk into the instrument’s disk drive. 

3. Turn the instrument on. The firmware wilI be loaded automatically during 

power-on. The front panel LEDs should step through a sequence as firmware 

is loaded. The display will be blank during this time. 

At the end of a successful loading, the LEDs for Channel 1 and Testport 1 

will remain on and the display will turn on indicating the version of firmware 

that was loaded. 

Note After the llrmware has been loaded, the correction constants 

must be restored. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-l (2 of 3) to identify the 

service procedures required to restore (retrieve) or recreate the 

correction constants. 

In Case of Diflhlty 

� If the lirmware did not load successfully, LED patterns on the front panel can 

help you isolate the problem. 

� If the following LED pattern is present, an acceptable hrmware filename 

was not found on the disk. (The desired format for gnuware filenames is 

87533-07. -02.) Check that the lirmware disk used was for the HP 87533. 

Adjustments and Correction Constants 343

� If any of the following LED patterns are present, the firmware disk may be 

defective. 

LED pattern 

CElCE2 B L T 6 

. 

. . 

. . 

. . . 

. 

. . 

. . 

. . . 

. . 

. . . 

. . . 

� � 

. . . 

� If any other LED pattern is present, the CPU board is defective. 

Note If Grmware did not load, a red LED on the CPU board will be 

flashing. 

� If the following LED pattern is present on the CPU board, suspect the disk 

drive or associated cabling: 

344 Adjustments and Correction Constants 

� � � � � � � � 

(front of instrument 4)

sg640e 

FN VCO ADJ 

ADJUSTMENT HOLE 

Figure 3-15. Location of the FN VCO TUNJZ Adjustment 

Figure 3-16. Fractioual-N Frequency Range Adjustment Display 


10. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment: 

� If the marker value is less than 7, you have completed this procedure. 

� If the marker value is greater than 7, readjust ‘TN VCO ADJ” to 7. 

Then perform steps 2 to 10 to con&m that the channel 1 and channel 2 

markers are stilI above and below the reference line respectively. 

w If you cannot adjust the analyzer correctly, replace the Al4 board 

assembly. 


Frequency Accuracy Adjustment 


Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8563E 

RF Cable, 500 Type-N, 24-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP P/N 8120-4781 

Non-metallic Adjustment lb01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8830-0024 

Antistatic Wrist Strap . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-1367 


Static-control ‘lhble Mat and Earth Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 9300-0797 

Additional Required Equipment for 5OQ Analyzers 

Adapter APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11525A 


Minimum Loss Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B 

Anul~m warmup time: 30 minutes. 

This adjustment sets the VCXO (voltage controlled crystal oscillator) frequency 

to maintain the instrument’s frequency accuracy. 

1. Remove the upper-rear bumpers and analyzer top cover 



Note 

3. 

4. 



PORTI 

I 

PORT2 

50R MPE-N CABLE ASSEMBLY 




WITH OPTION 075 HP 8563A 

SPECTRUM ANALYZER 

PGRTl 

I 

PORT?: 

Figure 3-17. Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup 

Make sure that the spectrum analyzer and network analyzer 

references are not connected. 

For Option lD5 Instruments Only: Remove the BNC-to-BNC jumper 

that is connected between the “EXT REF” and the “10 MHz Precision 

Reference,” as shown in Figure 3-19. 

Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows: 

I 

I 

sq641e 


5- On the HP 8753E, press @GZj @GG) :~~~~~~~,- @ Lc/n (or @ Lc/nl for 

Option 006). 

6. No adjustment is required if the spectrum analyzer measurement is within 

the following specifications: 

� &30 kHz for the HP 8753E 

� f60 kHz for the HP 8753e, Option 006 

Otherwise, locate the Al2 assembly (red extractors) and adjust the 

VCXO ADJ (see Figure 3-18) for a spectrum analyzer center frequency 

measurement within specifications. 

7. Replace the Al2 assembly if you are unable to adjust the frequency as 

specified. Repeat this adjustment test. 

A12 Reference Assembly 

Figure 3-18. Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment 

Note To increase the accuracy of this adjustment, the following steps 

are recommended. 

8. Replace the instrument covers and wait 10 to 15 minutes in order to allow 

the analyzer to reach its precise operating temperature. 

9. Recheck the CW frequency and adjust if necessary. 


Instruments with Option lD5 Only 

10. Reconnect the BNC-to-BNC jumper between the “EXT REF” and the “10 

MHz Precision Reference” as shown in Figure 3-19. 

ENC T O ENC HIGH STABILITY 

JUMPER FREGUENCY ADJUST 

\ / 

Figure 3-19. High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location 

11. Insert a narrow screwdriver and adjust the high-stability frequency 

reference potentiometer for a CW frequency measurement within 

specification. 

In Case of Difficulty 

Replace the A26 assembly if you cannot adjust the CW frequency within 

specification. 

sgb42e 


High/Low Band Transition Adjustment 

&x&red Equipment and 9bols 

Non-metalhc Adjustment lb01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP P/N 8830-0024 

Amlgzer warmup time: 30 minutes. 

This adjustment centers the VCO (voltage controlled oscillator) of the Al2 

reference assembly for high and low band operations. 

3. Press m ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ (--& a (.., Illl @-& 

4. Press (Scale L.1] Lxl_] and observe the VCO tuning trace: 

� If the left half of trace = 0 flOO0 mV and right half of trace = 100 to 

200 mV higher (one to two divisions, see Figure 3-20): no adjustment is 

necessary. 

� If the adjustment is necessary, follow these steps: 

a. Adjust the VCO tune (see Pigure 3-21) to position the left half of the 

trace to 0 f125 mV. The variable capacitor, C85, has a half-turn tuning 

range if the Al2 Reference Board is part number 08753-60209, and 

seven turns if the part number is 08753-60357. Be careful not to 

overtighten and damage the seven-turn capacitor. 

b. Adjust the HBLB (see Figure 3-21) to position the right half of the trace 

125 to 175 mV (about 1 to 1.5 divisions) higher than the left half. 

� Refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting,” if you cannot perform the 

adjustment. 


I I I I I I I I 11 I 

START ii.*00 000 mz STOP 21.OdO 000 MHZ 

Figure 3-20. High/Low Band Transition Adjustment Trace 

Al2 Reference Assembly 

Figure 3-21. High/Low Band Adjustment Locations 


Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and 

FM Sideband Adjustment 


Spectrum Analyzer .................................................... HP 8563E 

HP-IB Cable ................................................... HP 10833A/B/G/B 

RF Cable 50 ohm, Type-N, 24-inch ............................... HP P/N 81204781 

Cable, 509 Coax, BNC (m) to BNC (m) .............................. .HP 10503A 

Non-metallic Adjustment lb01 ................................ HP P/N 8830-0024 

Antistatic Wrist Strap ........................................ HP P/N 9300-1367 

Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord .................................. HP P/N 9300-0980 

Static-control Able Mat and Earth Ground Wire ............ HP P/N 9300-0797 


Adapter APC-7 to Type-N (f) . . . . .., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11525A 


Minimum Loss Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11852B 

Anulgm warmup time: 30 minutes. 

This adjustment minimizes the spurs caused by the API (analog phase 

interpolator, on the fractional-N assembly) circuits. It also improves the 

sideband characteristics. 


2. Make sure the instruments are set to their default HP-IB addresses: 

HP 8753E = 16, Spectrum Analyzer = 18. 




WITH OPTION 075 1 

PORT1 



I 

PORT2 

EXT REF 

INPUT 

5Ofi, COAX, BNI. 

Figure 3-22. 

Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup 

3. Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows: 

Reference Level OdBm 

Resolution Bandwidth lOOI% 

Center Frequency 676.145105 MHz 

Spa 

2.5 kHz 

I 


4. On the HP 8753E, press LPreset] (i&) IF- l&J w @ m {&&!“I&Q.. 

...... . . . s ....T .:..: T ::.................. . . . L... 

(pzLmiqm. 

5. Adjust the 100 kHz (R77) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum 

analyzer. The minimum signal may, or may not, drop down into the noise 

floor. 

1OOkHr API1 API2 API3 API4 

ORANGE (R77) (R35j (R43j (R45) CR471 

Al3 Fractional-N Analog Assembly 

Figure 3-23. Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments 

6. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.051105 MHz. 

7. On the HP 8753e, press m ~~~~~~~ @ZiZiiZ) m. 

- .._....._........__.... 

8. Adjust the API1 (R35) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum 

analyzer. 


1o. on the HP 8753E, press m ~~,~~ ‘-, ms 


analyzer. 


_ _ 

13. ()n the HP 87533, press CMenu) ~~~~~; (676.ooo45) (MIII). 

_ _ i .,.........,.,.,.,....i _ .~ . . ..__.. . 

14. Adjust the API3 (R45) for a nuII (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum 

analyzer. 



16. On the HP 8753E, press (Menu) YmFY$$Q. c-1 m. 


analyzer. 

ln Case of Difliculty 

18. If this adjustment cannot be performed satisfactorily, repeat the entire 

procedure. Or else replace the Al3 board assembly. 


Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment 


BNC AIIigator Clip Adapter .................................. HP P/N 8120-1292 

BNC-to-BNC Cable ........................................... .HP P/N 8120-1840 

Antistatic Wrist Strap ........................................ HP P/N 9300-1367 

Antistatic Wrist Strap Cord .................................. HP P/N 9300-0980 

Static-control Table Mat and Earth Ground Wire ............HP P/N 9300-0797 

Anulgzer warmup time: 30 minutes. 

This adjustment optimizes tracking between the YO (YIG oscillator) and the 

cavity oscillator when they are frequency offset to avoid spurs. Optimizing 

YO-cavity oscillator tracking reduces potential phase-locked loop problems. 

1. Mate the adapter to the BNC cable and connect the BNC connector end to 

AUX INPUT on the HP 8753E rear panel. Connect the BNC center conductor 

alligator-clip to All TPlO (labeled 4 ERR); the shield clip to All TPl (GND) 

as shown in Figure 3-24. 

BROWN 

A l lTP1 A l lip10 

GND @ERR UNLK CAV ADJ 

A3 Source 

Figure 3-24. Location of All Test Points and A3 CAV ADJ Adjustments 


5. To make sure that you have connected the test points properly, adjust the 

CAV ADJ potentiometer while observing the analyzer display. You should 

notice a change in voltage. 

6. Observe the phase locked loop error voltage: 

w If “spikes” are not visible on the analyzer display (see Figure 3-25): no 

adjustment is necessary. 

� If “spikes” are excessive (see Figure 3-25): adjust the CAV ADJ 

potentiometer (see Pigure 3-24) on the A3 source bias assembly to eliminate 

the spikes. 

� If the “spikes” persist, refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting.” 

I i i i i i i i i i 1 

a) Acceptable b) Excessive 

Figure 3-25. Display of Acceptable versus Excessive Spikes 

sg637s 


Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction 

Constants 

Aruzlyzer warmup Tim.&- None. 

This procedure stores the instrument’s unprotected option(s) information in A9 

CPU assembly EEPROMs. 

1. Make sure the A9 switch is in the Alter position. 

2. Record the installed options that are printed on the rear panel of the 

analyzer. 

4. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-2 for the address of each unprotected hardware option. 

Enter the address for the speci& installed hardware option that needs to be 

enabled or disabled. Follow the address entry by ~~~~. o Lxl. 

. Press f&!$$: L-1] (xl, then w to enable the option; 

.;s/ ,, ,:;::.. 

. or, press :@m -._._-. @ (XJ), then w to disable the option. 

‘Ihble 3-2. PEEK/POKE Addressies 

Hardware PEEK/POKE 

Options Address 

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all of the unprotected options that you want to 

enable. 


6. After you have entered all of the instrument’s hardware options, press the 

following keys: 

7. View the analyzer display for the listed options 

8. When you have entered all of the hardware options, return the A9 switch to 

the Normal position. 

9. Perform the “EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure” located on page 3-42. 

In Case of DiiTiculty 

If any of the installed options are missing from the list, return to step 2 and 

reenter the missing option(s). 


Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments 

The network analyzer has the capability of automating tasks through a 

sequencing function. The following adjustment sequences are available via 

Access HP on the World Wide Web. 

� F’ractional-N kequency Range Adjustment (F’NADJ and FNCHK) 

� High/Low Band Transition Adjustment (HBLBADJ) 

� Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and F’M Sideband Adjustment (APIADJ) 

You can download these adjustment sequences from the following URL: 

http://vaw.tmo.hp.com/tmo/pia/component-test/PIATop/~glish/ 

comptest,support.htmI 

How to Load Sequences from Disk 

1. Place the sequence disk in the analyzer disk drive. 

3. Select any or all of the following sequence liles by pressing: 

..........ii ., / .:. : :::::::... _ .,..; .;.,.,... .::,..../,.,.,.;..; .a......... .:: . . . ,......... . . . 

. Select ~~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~ if you want to load the file for the “kacti0nal-N 

~......... .._......... ...............i....... .: .: .:::: . . . ...._;i~..........................~~~. 

. . 

Spur Avoidance and F’M Sideband Adjustment. n 

. ‘&led ~~~~~~~~.~~~~ 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

if you wmt to lOad the fle for the “High/Low 

Band Transition Adjustment. n 


How to Set Up the Fractional-N Frequency Range 

Adjustment 

1. Remove the right-rear bumpers and right side cover. This exposes the 

adjustment location in the sheet metal. 

2. Press (iGZ-j ~~~~~-.~..E~~~ ..~............................-:::: .:::: .: -.......A ii.. i.v.uA .......... . . ..A.......-. 

. . (where X is the sequence number). 

3. Adjust the “F’N VCO TUNE” with a non-metallic tool so that the channel 1 

marker is as many divisions above the reference line as the channel 2 marker 

is below it. 

. . . . . . . . . . . .’ :............. 

4. Press Ipreset] ?g#?jm@J ~.~@jK$&~ (where X is the sequence number). 

� If the marker value is ~7, you have completed this procedure. 

� If the marker value is >7, readjust “F’N VCO TUNE” to 7. Then repeat 

steps 2,3, and 4 to conlirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 markers are 

still above and below the reference line respectively. 

How to Set Up the High/Low Band Transition 

Adjustments / ,.; _ _ _ ; 

l. Press B ~~~~:~~~~~?~~~ (where X is the sequence number). 

2. Observe the VCO tuning trace: 

� If the left half of trace = of1000 mV and right half of 

trace = 100 to 200 mV higher (one to two divisions): no adjustment is 

necessary. 

w If the adjustment is necessary, follow these steps: 

a. Remove the upper-rear bumpers and top cover, using a TORX 

screwdriver. 

b. Adjust the VCO tune (Al2 C85) to position the left half of the trace 

to of125 mV. This is a very sensitive adjustment where the trace could 

easily go off of the screen. 

c. Adjust the HBLB (Al2 R68) to position the right half of the trace 

125 to 175 mV (about 1 to 1.5 divisions) higher than the left half. 


� Refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting,” if you cannot perform the 

adjustment. 

How to Set Up the Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and 


1. Press B ~~~:~~~,~~~~~~’ (where X is the sequence number). 

2. Remove the upper-rear comer bumpers and the top cover, using a TORX 

screwdriver. 

3. Follow the directions on the analyzer display and make alI of the API 

adjustments. 

Sequence Contents 

Sequence for the High/Low Band Transition Adjustment 

--Sequence HB~sets the hi-band to low-band switch point.- 

PRESET 

SYSTEM 

SERVICE MENU 

ANALOG BUS ON 

STARTllIWu 

STOP 21 M/u 

MEAS 

ANALOG IN 22 xl (Al2 GND) 

DISPLAY 

DATA>MEM 

DATA-MEM 

MEAS 

ANALOG IN 23 xl (VCO TUNE) 

MKR11IWl.l 

SCALELREF .l xl 


Sequences for the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment 

-Sequence FND sets up Al4 (FRAC N Digital) VCO.- 

DISPLAY 

DUAL CHAN ON 

SYSTEM 

SERVICE MENU 

ANALOG BUS ON 

MENU 

NUMBER OF POINTS 11 xl 

COUPLED CHAN OFF 

START 36 M/u 

STOP 60.75 M./u 

MENU 

SWEEP TIME 12.5 k/m 

MEAS 

ANALOG IN 29 xl (FN VCO TUN) 

SCALE/REF 0.6 xl 

REF VALUE -7 xl 

CH 2 

MENU 

CW FREQ 31.0001 M/u 

SWEEP TIME 12.375 k/m 

MEAS 

ANALOG IN 29 xl (FN VCO TUN) 

SCALELREF .2 xl 

REF VALUE 6.77 xl 

MKR6k/m 

--Sequence FNCHK check the VCO a@@stmmt.- 

MENU 

CW FREQ 1 G/n 

SYSTEM 

SERVICE MENU 

ANALOG BUS ON 

SERVICE MODES 

FRACNTUNEON 

ANALOG IN 29 xl 


SCALELREF 

REF VALUE 7 xl 

Sequences for the Fractional-N Avoidance and 


--Sequence APL4DJsets up thejhctional-N API spur a@shmnts- 

TITLE 

SP 2.5K 

PERIPHERAL HPIB ADDR 

18 xl 

TITLE TO PERIPHERAL 

WAIT x 

0 xl 

TITLE 

AT ODB 


WAIT x 

0 xl 

TITLE 

RM 1OOHz 


WAIT x 

0 xl 

TITLE 

CF 676.145105MZ 


WAIT x 

0 xl 

CW FREQ 

676.045105Mh 

TITLE 

ADJ Al3 1OOKHZ 

SEQUENCE 

PAUSE 

TITLE 

CF 676.048105MZ 


WAIT x 

0 xl 


TITLE 

ADJ Al3 API1 

SEQUENCE 

PAUSE 

TITLE 

CF 676.007515MZ 


WATT x 

0 xl 

CW FREQ 

676.004515Mh 

TITLE 

ADJ Al3 API2 

SEQUENCE 

PAUSE 

TITLE 

CF 676.00345OMZ 


WMT x 

0 xl 

CW FREQ 

676.00045OMh.1 

TITLE 

ADJ Al3 API3 

SEQUENCE 

PAUSE 

TITLE 

CF 676.003045MZ 


WMT x 

0 xl 

CW FREQ 

676.000045Mh 

TITLE 

ADJ Al3 API4 


Start Troubleshooting Here 

The information in this chapter helps you: 

� Identify the portion of the analyzer that is at fault. 

� Locate the specific troubleshooting procedures to identify the assembly or 

peripheral at fault. 

To identify the portion of the analyzer at fault, follow these procedures: 

Step 1. Initial Observations 

Step 2. Operator’s Check 

Step 3. HP-IB Systems Check 

Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation 

4 

Start Troubleshooting Here 4-l

Assembly Replacement Sequence 

The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753E 

network analyzer. 

1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here.” 

Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the 

faulty assembly. 

2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts. n 

3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. 

Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures. n 

4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustments and 

Correction Constants. n 

5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, “System 

Verification and Performance Tests. n 

Having Your Analyzer Serviced 

The HP 8753E has a one year on-site warranty, where available. If the analyzer 

should fail any of the following checks, call your local HP sales or service office. 

A customer engineer will be dispatched to service your analyzer on-site. If a 

customer engineer is not available in your area, follow the steps below to send 

your analyzer back to HP for repair 

1. Choose the nearest HP service center. (A table listing of Hewlett-Packard 

sales or service offices is provided at the end of this guide.) 

2. Include a detailed description of any failed test and any error message. 

3. Ship the analyzer, using the original or comparable antistatic packaging 

materials. 

4-2 Start Troubleshooting Here

Step 1. InitiaI Observations 

Initiate the Analyzer Self-‘I&t 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Disconnect all devices and peripherals from the analyzer. 

Switch on the analyzer and press WI. 

Watch for the indications shown in Figure 4-l to determine if the analyzer is 

operating correctly. 

w If the self-test failed, refer to “Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation”. 

Start Troubleshooting Here 4-3

Step 2. Operator’s Check 

Description 

The operator’s check consists of two softkey initiated tests: Port 1 Op Chk and 

Port 2 Op Chk. 

A short is connected to port 1 (port 2) to reflect ah the source energy back into 

the analyzer for an SII (SZZ) measurement. 

The first part of Port I Op Chk checks the repeatability of the transfer switch. 

An SI1 measurement is stored in memory and the switch is toggled to port 2 and 

then back to port 1 where another SII measurement is made. The difference 

between the memory trace and the second trace is switch repeatability. 

The remaining parts of both tests exercise the internal attenuator in 5 dEI steps 

over a 55 dB range. 

The resulting measurements must fall within a limit testing window to pass the 

test. The window size is based on both source and receiver specifications. 

The operator’s check determines that: 

� The source is phase locked across the entire frequency range. 

� All three samplers are functioning properly. 

� The transfer switch is operational. 

� The attenuator steps 5 dB at a time. 

Required Equipment and lbols 

Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . part of the HP 85031B calibration kit 

Analgzm warm-up time: 30 minutes. 

Procedure 

1. Disconnect all devices, peripherals, and accessories (including adapters and 

limiters) from the analyzer. 

3. The display should show TEST 21 Port 1 Op Chk in the active entry area. 

44 Start Troubleshooting Here

4. Press ~E@WTE ‘EST to begin the test. 

/. ;.i.::. ..: . 

5. At the prompt, connect the short to the port indicated. Make sure the 

connection is tight. 

7. The test is a sequence of subtests. At the end of the subtests, the test title 

and result will be displayed. If all tests pass successfully, the overall test 

status will be PASS. If any test fails, the overall test status will be FAIL. 

8. ‘lb run the test for port 2, press the step &) key. The display should show 

TEST 22 Port2 Op Chkin the active entry area. 

9. Repeat steps 4 through 7. 

10. If both tests pass, the analyzer is about 80% verified. If either test fails, 

refer to “Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation” in this section, or: 

a. Make sure that the connection is tight. Repeat the test. 

b. Visually inspect the connector interfaces and clean if necessary (refer to 

“Principles of Microwave Connector Care” located in Chapter 1). 

c. Verify that the short meets published specihcations. 

d. Substitute another short, and repeat the test. 

e. Finally, refer to the detailed tests located in this section, or fault 

isolation procedures located in the troubleshooting sections 


Step 3. HP-IB Systems Check 

Check the analyzer’s HP-IB functions with a known. working passive peripheral 

(such as a plotter, printer, or disk drive). 

1. Connect the peripheral to the analyzer using a good HP-IB cable.. 

2. Press o “““““““““““““““““““” to enable the analyzer to controI the 

peripheral. 

3. men press -~~~~~~~~~ and the appropriate softkeys to verify aat the 

L:L-.;..;; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _i . . . . . . . ..-... _ .-.... _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i:::: i. 

device addresses will be recognized by the analyzer. The factory default 

addresses are: 

Device HP-IB Address 

HP 87533 16 

Plotter port - BP-IB 5 

Printer port - BP-IB 1 

Disk (external) 0 

Controller 21 

Power meter - I-FIB 13 

Note You may use other addresses with two provisions: 

4-6 Start Troubleshooting Here 

� Each device must have its own address. 

m The address set on each device must match the one 

recognized by the analyzer (and displayed). 

Peripheral addresses are often set with a rear panel switch. 

Refer to the manual of the peripheral to read or change its 

address.

If Using a Plotter or Printer 

1. Ensure that the plotter or printer is set up correctly: 

� Power is on. 

� Pens and paper loaded. 

� Pinch wheels are down. 

� Some plotters need to have Pl and P2 positions set. 

:, 

2. Press Lcopy and then ,..................../ 3%~~ or ;.:...-:.:...> ~~~.~.~~~~~~~~~. 

. . . . :: . . . . ~........._.......................... .._.... .::./ ..~..-. L .A...... 

� If the result is a copy of the analyzer display, the printing/plotting features 

are functional in the analyzer. Continue with “Troubleshooting Systems 

with Multiple Peripherals”, “Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers”, or 

the “Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation” section in this chapter. 

� If the result is not a copy of the analyzer display, suspect the HP-IB 

function of the analyzer. Refer to Chapter 6, “Digital Control 


lf Using an External Disk Drive 

::::~...~...:......:.:...::::~:~,~:~~..

� If the resultant trace starts at 1 MHz, HP-IB is functional in the analyzer. 

Continue with “Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals”, 

“Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers”, or the “Step 4. Faulty Group 

Isolation” section in this chapter. 

� If the resultant trace does not start at 1 MHz, suspect the HP-IB function 

of the analyzer: refer to Chapter 6, “Digital Control Troubleshooting.” 

Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals 

Connect any other system peripherals (but not a controller) to the analyzer 

one at a time and check their functionality. Any problems observed are in the 

peripherals, cables, or are address problems (see above). 

Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers 

Passing the preceding checks indicates that the analyzer’s peripheral functions 

are normal. Therefore, if the analyzer has not been operating properly with an 

external controller, check the following: 

� The HP-ID interface hardware is incorrectly installed or not operational. (See 

“HP-II3 Requirements” in the HP 8753E Network Anulgzer User’s Guide.) 

� The programming syntax is incorrect. (Refer to the HP 8753E Network 

Aruzlgzer Programmer’s G&&e.) 

If the analyzer appears to be operating unexpectedly but has not completely 

failed, go to “Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation.” 

4-8 Start TroubleshootinN Here

Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation 

Use the following procedures only if you have read the previous sections in 

this chapter and you think the problem is in the analyzer. These are simple 

procedures to verify the four functional groups in sequence, and determine 

which group is faulty. 

The four functional groups are: 

� power supplies 

w digital control 

� source 

� receiver 

Descriptions of these groups are provided in Chapter 12, “Theory of Operation.” 

The checks in the following pages must be performed in the order presented. 

If one of the procedures fails, it is an indication that the problem is in the 

functional group checked. Go to the troubleshooting information for the 

indicated group, to isolate the problem to the defective assembly. 

Figure 4-2 illustrates the troubleshooting organization. 

I-------------------------------------------- 

I ISOLATE FAULTY GROUP 

I 

I ASSEMBLY 

LEVEL TROUBLESHOOTING 

Figure 4-2. Troubleshooting Orgunization 

sg645d 


Power Supply 

Check the Rear Panel LEDs 

Switch on the analyzer. Notice the condition of the two LEDs on the Al5 

preregulator at rear of the analyzer. (See Figure 4-3.) 

� The upper (red) LED should be off. 

� The lower (green) LED should be on. 

i I 

RED LED GREEN LED 

NORMALLY OFF NORMALLY ON 

Figure 43. Al5 Preregulator LEDs 

Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDs 

UNE VOLTAGE 

SELECTOR SWITCH 

/ 

sg646e 

Remove the analyzer’s top cover. Switch on the power. Inspect the green LEDs 

along the top edge of the A8 post-regulator assembly. 

I Ail green LEDs should be on. 

� The fan should be audible. 

In case of difficulty, refer to Chapter 5, “Power Supply Troubleshooting.” 

4-l 0 Start Troubleshooting Here

Digital Control 

Observe the Power Up Sequence 

Switch the analyzer power off, then on. The following should take place within 

a few seconds: 

� On the front panel, observe the following: 

1. All six amber LEDs illuminate. 

2. The port 2 LED illuminates. 

3. The amber LEDs go off after a few seconds, except the CH 1 LED. At the 

same moment, the port 2 LED goes off and the port 1 LED ilhnninates. 

(See Figure 4-4.) 

� The display should come up bright with no irregularity in colors. 

� After an initial pattern, five red LEDs on the A9 CPU board should remain 

off. They can be observed through a small opening in the rear panel. 

If the power up sequence does not occur as described, or if there are 

problems using the front panel keyboard, refer to Chapter 6, “Digital Control 


Figure 4-4. Front Panel Power Up Sequence 


Verify Internal Tests Passed 

. . . . . . . . . . ,. .,..... . . . . _ . . / / . . . . 

l- Press [Preset) (System) .~~~~~~~.~ ..:::: . ii .._ i.::::::.~; . . . . . . . . . . . . .:::..: . .._. .._ ;;.:..;, .*T$i:: ..:.: .._..... :~~~~.:~~~, 

. . . . . . . . ..~.........~.~.....~ . . . . . . _... ;.:.::..: . ... ;:z:.:



/ \ 

ADAPTER WC-7 to N(f) 

_- 

li 

.-, 

: 

I 

HP 8481A ’ HP 8482A 

POWER 

SENSOR 

POWER 

SENSOR 

” 5 


POWER METER 

Figure 4-5. Equipment Setup for Source Power Check 

2. Zero and calibrate the power meter. Press LPreset] on the analyzer to initialize 

the instrument. 

3. on the analyzer, press LMenu) ~~~~~ ~ Lk/m) to output a cw 3oo kHz 

signal. The power meter should read approximately 0 deem. 

4. Press [161 m to change the CW frequency to 16 MHz. The output power 

should remain approximately 0 dBm throughout the analyzer frequency 

range. Repeat this step at 1 and 3 GHz. (For Option 006 include an additional 

check at 6 GHz.) 

If any incorrect power levels are measured, refer to Chapter 7, “Source 


4.14 Start Troubleshooting Here 

s9648e

Figure 4-6. ABUS Node 16: 1 V/GHz 

sg641 d 

If any of the above procedures provide unexpected results, or if error messages 

are present, refer to Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting.” 


Receiver 

Observe the A and B Input Traces 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

Connect the equipment as shown in F’igure 47 below. Be sure that any 

special accessories, such as limiters, have been disconnected. (The through 

cable is HP part number 8120-4779.) 



TEST PORT 

THRU CABLE 

Figure 4-7. Equipment Setup 

sg649e 

Observe the measurement trace displayed by the A input. The trace should 

have about the same flatness as the trace in Figure 4-8. 

Observe the measurement trace displayed by the B input. The trace should 

have about the same flatness as the trace in Figure 4-8. 


Accessories 

If the analyzer has passed all of the previous checks but is still making incorrect 

measurements, suspect the system accessories Accessories such as RF or 

interconnect cables, calibration or verification kit devices, limiters, and adapters 

can ail induce system problems 

Reconfigure the system as it is normally used and reconllrm the problem. 

Continue with Chapter 9, “Accessories Troubleshooting. n 

Accessories Error Messages 

� POWERPROBESHUTDOWN! 

The biasing supplies to a front panel powered device (like a probe 

or millimeter module) are shut down due to excessive current draw. 

Troubleshoot the device. 


Power Supply Troubleshooting 

Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting 

Here.” Follow the procedures in the order given, unless: 

� an error message appears on the display, refer to “Error Messages” near the 

end of this chapter. 

� the fan is not working; refer to “Fan Troubleshooting” in this chapter. 

The power supply group assemblies consist of the following: 

� A8 post regulator 

� Al5 preregulator 

All assemblies, however, are related to the power supply group because power is 

supplied to each assembly. 

5 

Powor Supply Troubleshooting 5-l







2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts.” 





5. Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2, “System 

Verification and Performance Tests ’ 

5-2 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Simplified Block Diagram 

Figure 5-l shows the power supply group in simplified block diagram form. 

Refer to the detailed block diagram of the power supply (Figure 5-8) located at 

the end of this chapter to see voltage lines and specific connector pin numbers. 

PREREGULATOR 

A17 MOTHEREOARG 

OFF DURING 

NORMAL OPERATION 

\ON DURING 

NORMAL OPERATION 

\ ALL ON DURING 

NORMAL OPERAllON 

Figure 5-1. Power Supply Group Simplified Block Diagram 

sg6105e 

Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-3

Start Here 

Check the Green LED and Red LED on Al5 

Switch on the analyzer and look at the rear panel of the analyzer. Check the 

two power supply diagnostic LEDs on the Al5 preregulator casting by looking 

through the holes located to the left of the line voltage selector switch. (See 

Figure 5-2.) 

During normal operation, the bottom (green) LED is on and the top (red) LED is 

off. If these LEDs are normal, then Al5 is 95% verified. Continue to “Check the 

Green LEDs on A8”. 

� If the green LED is not on steadily, refer to “If the Green LED of the Al5 Is 

not ON Steadily” in this procedure. 

� If the red LED is on or flashing, refer to “If the Red LED of the Al5 Is ON” in 

this procedure. 

54 Power Supply Troubleshooting 

RED LED GREEN LED 

NORMALLY OFF NORMALLY ON 

/ / 

Figure 5-2. Location of Al5 Diagnostic LEDs 

LINE VOLTAGE 

SELECTOR SWITCH 

sg646e

Check the Green LEDs on A8 

Remove the top cover of the analyzer and locate the A8 post regulator; use the 

location diagram under the top cover if necessary. Check to see if the green 

LEDs on the top edge of A8 are all on. There are eight green LEDs (one is not 

visible without removing the PC board stabilizer). 

� If all of the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 are on, there is a 95% 

confidence level that the power supply is verified. lb confirm the last 5% 

uncertainty of the power supply, refer to “Measure the Post Regulator 

Voltages” (next). 

� If any LED on the A8 post regulator is off or Eashing, refer to “If the Green 

LEDs of the A8 are not alI ON” in this procedure. 

Measure the Post Regulator Voltages 

Measure the DC voltages on the test points of A8 with a voltmeter. Refer to 

Figure 5-3 for test point locations and Table 5-l for supply voltages and limits. 

+f%v AGND +5v!? SIX -1% -12.6VPP +15V -5VU -5.2V +22v t6V 

Figure 5-3. A8 Post Regulator ‘l&t Point Locations 


‘lhble 5-1. A8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages 

TP SUPPlY 

1 + 66 V (not used) 

2 AGND 

3 +6VD 

4 SDIS 

6 -16V 

6 - 12.6 VPP (probe power) 

7 +16V 

8 +6W 

0 -5.2 V 

10 +22v 

11 +6V 

5-5 Power Supply Troubleshooting 

Bane 

+ 64.6 to + 65.4 

n/a 

+4.0 to +6.3 

n/a 

-14.4 to -15.6 

-12.1 to -12.8 

+ 14.5 to + 15.5 

+ 5.05 to + 5.35 

-5.0 to -5.4 

+21.3 to +22.7 

+6.8 to +6.2

If the Green LED of the Al5 Is not ON Steadily 

If the green LED is not on steadily, the line voltage is not enough to power the 

analyzer. 

Check the Line Voltage, Selector Switch, and Fuse 

Check the main power line cord, line fuse, line selector switch setting, and 

actual line voltage to see that they are all correct. F’igure 5-4 shows how to 

remove the line fuse, using a small flat-blade screwdriver to pry out the fuse 

holder. Figure 5-2 shows the location of the line voltage selector switch. Use a 

small flat-blade screwdriver to select the correct switch position. 

If the Al5 green LED is still not on steadily, replace A15. 

FUSE IN USE 

\ INSERT SCREWDRIVER, 

PRY OPEN 

Figure 5-4. Removing the Line Fuse 


If the Red LED of the Al5 Is ON 

If the red LED is on or flashing, the power supply is shutting down. Use the 

following procedures to determine which assembly is causing the problem. 

Check the A8 Post Regulator 

1. Switch off the analyzer. 

2. Disconnect the cable A15Wl from the A8 post regulator. (See Figure 5-5.) 

3. Switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on A15. 

� If the red LED goes out, the problem is probably the A8 post regulator. 

Continue to “Verify the Al5 Preregulator” to first verify that the inputs to 

A8 are correct. 

� If the red LED is still on, the problem is probably the Al5 preregulator, or 

one of the assemblies obtaining power from it. Continue with “Check for a 

Faulty Assembly”. 


Al5 Al5Wl (To 

Pre Reguloiur A17J2 Motherboardi 

Verify the Al6 Preregulator 

A15Wl (To 

A812 Post Regulator) 

Figure 5-5. Power Supply Cable Locations 

A8 

Post KegulatoI 

Verify that the Al5 preregulator is supplying the correct voltages to the A8 post 

regulator. Use a voltmeter with a small probe to measure the output voltages of 

A15Wl’s plug. Refer to lhble 5-2 and F’igure 5-6. 

17 If the voltages are not within tolerance, replace A15. 

Pewer Supply Troubleshooting 5-9

� If the voltages are within tolerance, Al5 is verified. Continue to “Check for a 

Faulty Assembly”. 

Pin 

1 

2 

394 

696 

7 

8 

0,lO 

11 

12 

A15WlPl (Dieeonnectea) 

vohgw 

N/C 

+126 to +loo 

+22.4to+33.6 

-22.4to-33.6 

N/C 

+9.4to +14 

-0.4 to -14 

N/C 

+32io+48 

‘able 5-2. Output Voltages 

A&J2 (connectea) Voltagee A15 Preregulatm Label 

+68to+72 

+68to+72 

+17.0 to +18.4 

-17.0 to -18.4 

+7.4 to +a.0 

+7.4io +a.0 

-6.7to -7.3 

+24.6to +28.6 

+24.6to +28.6 

N/C 

+7ov 

+18V 

-18V 

N/C 

+8V 

-8V 

N/C 

+26V 

IOTJZ: The + 6 VD supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies at alI times, or the other voltages will 

lot be correct. It connects to the motherboard connector A17J3 Pin 4. 

5-10 Power Supply Troubleshooting 

1

&T 

REGULATOR BOARD 

SOLDER s, DE ::I:I::: : A1532 

NOTE- 

I 1 

VOLTAGES ALL CABLES 

AND ASSEMBLIES 

CONNECTED 

Check for a Faulty Assembly 

Figure 5-6. A15Wl Plug Detail 

This procedure checks for a faulty assembly that might be shutting down the 

Al5 preregulator via one of the following lines (also refer to F’igure 5-l): 

� A15Wl connecting to the A8 post regulator 

� the + 5 VCPU line through the motherboard 

� the +5 VDIG line through the motherboard 

Do the following: 


2. Ensure that A15Wl is reconnected to A8. (Refer to Figure 5-5.) 

3. Remove or disconnect the assemblies listed in ‘lhble 5-3 one at a time 

and in the order shown. The assemblies are sorted from most to least 

accessible. Table 5-3 also lists any associated assemblies that are supplied 

sb6130d 

Puwer Supply Troubleshooting 5-11

y the assembly that is being removed. After each assembly is removed or 

disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on A15. 

Note � Alwags switch ofl the analgzer before rewwwing or 

disconnecting assemblies. 

� When extensive disassembly is required, refer to Chapter 14, 

“Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures. n 

� Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts,” to identify specific 

cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter. 

� If the red LED goes out, the particular assembly (or one receiving power from 

it) that allows it to go out is faulty. 

� If the red LED is still on after you have checked all of the assemblies listed in 

‘lhble 5-3, continue to “Check the Operating Temperature”. 

‘able 5-3. Recommended Order for RemovaUDisconnection 

Assembly Removal or Other Assemblies that Receive 

To Remove Disconne&ion Method Power from the Removed Assembly 

1. A19 Graphics Processor Remove from Card Cage None 

2. A14PracNDigital Remove from Card Cage None 

3. A9 CPU Disconnect W36 A20 Disk Drive 

(see “Cables, Rear” in 

Chapter 13) 

4. Al6 Rear Panel Interface 

5. A2 Front Panel Interface 

5-l 2 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Check the Operating Temperature 

The temperature sensing circuitry inside the Al5 preregulator may be shutting 

down the supply. Make sure the temperature of the open air operating 

environment does not exceed 55 OC (131 OF’), and that the analyzer fan is 

operating. 

� If the fan does not seem to be operating correctly, refer to “Pan 

Troubleshooting” at the end of this procedure. 

� If there does not appear to be a temperature problem, it is likely that Al5 is 

faulty. 

Inspect the Motherboard 

If the red LED is still on after replacement or repair of A15, switch off the 

analyzer and inspect the motherboard for solder bridges and other noticeable 

defects. Use an ohmmeter to check for shorts The +5 VD, +5 VCPU, or 

+5 VDSENSE lines may be bad. Refer to the block diagram (Figure 5-8) at the 

end of this chapter and troubleshoot these suspected power supply lines on the 

Al7 motherboard. 


If the Green LEDs of the A8 are not all ON 

The green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 post regulator are normally on. 

Flashing LEDs on A8 indicate that the shutdown circuitry on the A8 post 

regulator is protecting power supplies from overcurrent conditions by 

repeatedly shutting them down. This may be caused by supply loading on A8 or 

on any other assembly in the analyzer. 

Remove A8, Maintain A15Wl Cable Connection 


2. Remove A8 from its motherboard connector, but keep the A15Wl cable 

connected to A8. 

3. Short A8TP2 (AGND) (see F’igure 5-3) to chassis ground with a clip lead. 

4. Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8. 

� If any green LEDs other than +5 VD are still off or flashing, continue to 

“Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages”. 

� If all LEDs are now on steadily except for the +5 VD LED, the Al5 

preregulator and A8 post regulator are working properly and the trouble 

is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at A8. 

Continue to “Remove the Assemblies”. 

Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages 

Check the fuses along the top edge of A8. If any A8 fuse has burned out, 

replace it. If it burns out again when power is applied to the analyzer, A8 or 

Al5 is faulty. Determine which assembly has failed as follows. 

1. Remove the A15Wl cable at AS. (See Figure 5-5.) 

2. Measure the voltages at A15WlPl (see F’igure 5-6) with a voltmeter having a 

small probe. 

3. Compare the measured voltages with those in Table 5-2. 

0 If the voltages are within tolerance, replace A8. 

� If the voltages are not within tolerance, replace A15. 


If the green LEDs are now on, the Al5 preregulator and A8 post regulator are 

working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the 

motherboard connections at A8. Continue to “Remove the Assemblies”. 

Remove the Assemblies 


2. Install A8. Remove the jumper from A8TP2 (AGND) to chassis ground. 

3. Remove or disconnect all the assemblies listed below. (See Figure 5-5.) 

Alwags suvitch ofl the anulgzer before removing or diswnnectircg an 

ass&lg. 

Al0 digital IF 

All phase lock 

Al2 reference 

Al3 fractional-N analog 

Al4 fractional-N digital 

A19 graphics processor 

4. Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8. 

� If any of the green LEDs are off or flashing, it is not likely that any of 

the assemblies listed above is causing the problem. Continue to “Briefly 

Disable the Shutdown Circuitry“. 

� If alI green LEDs are now on, one or more of the above assemblies may be 

faulty. Continue to next step. 


6. Reinstall each assembly one at a time. Switch on the analyzer after each 

assembly is instaIled. The assembly that causes the green LEDs to go off or 

flash could be faulty. 

Note It is possible, however, that this condition is caused by the 

A8 post regulator not supplying enough current. ‘Ib check 

this, reinstall the assemblies in a different order to change the 

loading. If the same assembly appears to be faulty, replace that 

assembly. If a different assembly appears faulty, A8 is most 

likely faulty (unless both of the other assemblies are faulty). 


Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry 

In this step, you shutdown the protective circuitry for a short time, and the 

supplies are forced on (including shorted supplies) with a 100% duty cycle. 

Caution Damage to components or to circuit traces may occur if A8TP4 

(SDIS) is shorted to chassis ground for more than a few seconds 

while supplies are shorted. 

1. Connect A8TP4 (SDIS) to chassis ground with a jumper wire. 

2. Switch on the analyzer and note the signal mnemonics and test points of any 

LEDs that are off. Immediately resow the jumper wire. 

3. Refer to the block diagram (Figure 5-8) at the end of this chapter and do the 

foIIowing: 

� Note the mnemonics of any additional signals that may connect to any A8 

test point that showed a fault in the previous step. 

� Cross reference alI assemblies that use the power supplies whose A8 LEDs 

went out when A8TP4 (SDIS) was connected to chassis ground. 


� Make a list of these assemblies. 

� Delete the following assemblies from your list as they have already been 

verified earlier in this section. 

A10 digital IF 

All phase lock 

Al2 reference 

Al3 fractional-N analog 

Al4 fractional-N digital 

A19 graphics processor 


5. of those assemblies that are left on the list, remove or disconnect them 

from the analyzer one at a time. lbble 5-4 shows the best order in which to 

remove them, sorting them from most to least accessible. lhble 5-4 also lists 

any associated assemblies that are supplied by the assembly that is being 

removed. After each assembly is removed or disconnected, switch on the 

analyzer and observe the LEDs. 

Note 

w When extensive disassembly is required, refer to Chapter 14, 

“Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures. n 

H Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts”, to identify specific 

cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter. 

� If all the LEDs light, the assembly (or one receiving power from it) that allows 

them to light is faulty. 

� If the LEDs are still not on steadily, continue to “Inspect the Motherboard”. 


1. A3 Source 

‘able 5-4. Recommended Order for Removal/Disconnection 

Assembly 

To Remove 

2. A7 Pulse Generator 

3. A4 R Sampler 

4. A5 A Sampler 

6. A6 B Sampler 

6. A9 CPU 

7. A2 Front Panel Interface 

8. Al6 Rear Panel Interface 

Inspect the Motherboard 

Removal or OtherAssemblieathat Receive 

Disconnection Method Power from the Removed Assembly 

Remove from Card Cage None 




F&move from Card Cage None 

Disconnect W36 and W36 A20 Disk Drive 

Disconnect W17 Al Front Panel Keyboard 

Disconnect W27 A25 Test Set Interface 

A24 Transfer Switch 

AZ3 LED Front Panel 

Inspect the Al7 motherboard for solder bridges and shorted traces. In 

particuIar, inspect the traces that cany the supplies whose LEDs faulted when 

A8TP4 (SDIS) was grounded earlier. 



Three error messages are associated with the power supplies functional group. 

They are shown here. 

� POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN! 

One or more supplies on the A8 post regulator assembly is shut down due to 

one of the following conditions: overcurrent, overvoltage, or undervoltage. 

Refer to “If the Red LED of the Al5 Is ON” earlier in this procedure. 

� POWER SUPPLY HOT 

The temperature sensors on the A8 post regulator assembly detect an 

overtemperature condition. The regulated power supplies on A8 have been 

shut down. 

Check the temperature of the operating environment; it should not be greater 

than + 55 OC (131 OF). The fan should be operating and there should be at 

least 15 cm (6 in) spacing behind and all around the analyzer to allow for 

proper ventilation. 

� PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN ! 

The front panel RF probe biasing supplies are shut down due to excessive 

current draw. These supplies are + 15 VPP and -12.6 VPP, both supplied by 

the A8 post regulator. + 15 VPP is derived from the + 15 V supply. -12.6 VPP 

is derived from the -12.6 V supply. 

Refer to Figure 5-7 and carefully measure the power supply voltages at the 

front panel RF probe connectors. 

Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-1 g

(C&K 

GROUND) 

SY -126” 

+15v 

Figure 5-7. Front Rmel Probe Power Connector Voltages 

� If the correct voltages are present, troubleshoot the probe. 

sg650e 

� If the voltages are not present, check the + 15 V and -12.6 V green LEDs on 

A8. 

� If the LEDs are on, there is an open between the A8 assembly and the 

front panel probe power connectors, Put A8 onto an extender board and 

measure the voltages at the following pins: 

ASP2 pins 6 and 36 -12.6 volts 

A8P2 pins 4 and 34 + 15 volts 

� If the LEDs are off, continue with “Check the Fuses and Isolate A8”. 

Check the Fuses and Isolate A8 

Check the fuses associated with each of these supplies near the A8 test points. 

If these fuses keep burning out, a short exists. Try isolating A8 by removing 

it from the motherboard connector, but keeping the cable A15Wl connected 

to A8J2. Connect a jumper wire from A8TP2 to chassis ground. If either the 

+ 15 V or -12.6 V fuse blows, or the associated green LEDs do not light, replace 

A8. 


If the + 15 V and -12.6 V green LEDs light, troubleshoot for a short between 

the motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 6 and 36 (-12.6 V) and the front 

panel probe power connectors. Also check between motherboard connector pins 

XA8P2 pins 4 and 34 (+ 15 V) and the front panel probe power connectors. 


Fan Troubleshooting 

Fan Speeds 

The fan speed varies depending upon temperature. It is normal for the fan to 

be at high speed when the analyzer is just switched on, and then change to low 

speed when the analyzer is cooled. 

Check the Ran Voltages 

If the fan is dead, refer to the A8 post regulator block diagram (F’igure 5-8) at 

the end of this chapter. The fan is driven by the + 18 V and -18 V supplies 

coming from the Al5 preregulator. Neither of these supplies is fused. 

The -18 V supply is regulated on A8 in the fan drive block, and remains 

constant at approximately -14 volts It connects to the Al7 motherboard via 

pin 32 of the A8Pl connector. 

The + 18 V supply is regulated on A8 but changes the voltage to the fan, 

depending on airflow and temperature information. Its voltage ranges from 

approximately - 1.0 volts to + 14.7 volts, and connects to the Al7 motherboard 

via pin 31 of the ASP1 connector. 

Measure the voltages of these supplies while using an extender board to allow 

access to the PC board connector, A8Pl. 

Short ASTP3 to Ground 

If there is no voltage at A8Pl pins 31 and 32, switch off the analyzer. Remove 

A8 from its motherboard connector (or extender board) but keep the cable 

A15Wl connected to A8. (See Figure 5-5.) Connect a jumper wire between 

A8TP3 and chassis ground. Switch on the analyzer. 

� If aII the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 Iight (except +5 VD), replace the 

fan. 

� If other green LEDs on A8 do not Iight, refer to “If the Green LEDs of the A8 

are not all ON” earlier in this procedure. 

5-22 Power Supply Troubleshootins

Intermittent Problems 

PRESET states that appear spontaneously (without pressing -I) typically 

signal a power supply or A9 CPU problem. Since the A9 CPU assembly is 

the easiest to substitute, do so. If the problem ceases, replace the A9. If the 

problem continues, replace the Al5 preregulator assembly. 


Digital Control Troubleshooting 


Here. n 

The digital control group assemblies consist of the following: 

� CPU 

� A9 

� Display 

� A2, A18, A19, A27 

� Front Panel 

� Al, A2 

� Digital IF 

� A10 

� Rear Panel Interface 

� Al6 

Begin with “CPU Troubleshooting,” then proceed to the assembly that you 

suspect has a problem. If you suspect an HP-IB interface problem, refer to 

“HP-IB Failures,” at the end of this chapter. 

6 

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-1

Digital Control Group Block Diagram 

6-2 Digital Control Troubleshooting 

Figure 6-1. Digital Control Group Block Diagram









Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures.” 


Correction Constants n 


Verification and Performance Tests. n 


CPU Troubleshooting (A9) 

A9 CC Switch Positions 

The A9 CC switch must be in the NORMAL position for these procedures. This 

is the position for normal operating conditions. To move the switch to the 

NORMAL position, do the following: 

1. Remove the power line cord from the analyzer. 

2. Set the analyzer on its side. 

3. Remove the two comer bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with a 

T-15 TORX screwdriver. 

4. Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover’s back edge. 

5. Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument. 

6. Move the switch to the NORMAL position as shown in Figure 6-2. 

7. Replace the bottom cover and power cord. 

64 Digital Control Troubleshooting

sga c8e 



Figure 6-2. Switch Positions on the A9 CPU 

Checking A9 CPU Red LED Patterns 

The A9 CPU has five red LEDs that can be viewed through a small opening in 

the rear panel of the analyzer. (See Figure 6-3.) Four LEDs are easily viewable. 

The fifth LED must be viewed by looking to the left at an angle. 

1. Cycle the power while observing five red LEDs 

Cycle the power on the analyzer and observe the five red LEDs. After an 

initial pattern, the five red LEDs on the A9 CPU board should remain off. 

� If the LEDs remained off, then proceed to the assembly that you suspect 

has a problem. 

� If the LEDs did not remain off, switch off the power and remove the 

bottom cover for further troubleshooting. 

Digital Control Troubloshooting 6-5

LCPU LED 

WlNDOW 

Figure 6-3. CPU LED Window on Rear Panel 

2. Cycle the power while observing all eight red LEDs 

With the analyzer positioned bottom up, cycle the power and observe the 

eight red LEDs while looking from the front of the instrument. 

Note If Grmware did not load, a red LED on the CPU board will be 

flashing. Refer to “Loading Firmware” in Chapter 3. 

3. Evaluate results 

� If either of the following LED patterns remain, go to “Display 


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

� � � � � � � � 

(front of instrument 4) 

sg651e 

� If any other LED patterns remain, replace the A9 CPU after verifying the 

power supply. 

6-6 Digital Control Troubleshooting

Display Troubleshooting (A2, A18, A19, A27) 

This section contains the following information: 

� Evaluating your Display 

� Troubleshooting a White Display 

� Troubleshooting a Black Display 

w Troubleshooting a Display with Color Problems 

Evaluating your Display 

Switch the analyzer off, and then on. The display should be bright with the 

annotation legible and intelligible. There are four criteria against which your 

display is measured: 

� Background Lamp Intensity 

� Green, Red or Blue Stuck Pixels 

w Dark Stuck Pixels 

� Newtons �� 

Evaluate the display as follows: 

� If either the Al8 LCD, A19 GSP, A9 CPU or AZ7 backlight inverter assemblies 

are replaced, perform a visual inspection of the display. 

� If it appears that there is a problem with the display, refer to the 

troubleshooting information that follows 

� If the new display appears dim or doesn’t light, see “Backlight Intensity 

Check, n next. 


Backlight Intensity Check 

Required Equipment and Ytbols 

Photometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tektronix J16 

Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‘Pektronix J6503 

Light Occluder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tektronix 016-0305-00 




Analgm- warmup time: 30 minutes. Photomder warrn-up time: 30 minutes. 

Note This procedure should be performed with a photometer and only 

by qualified personnel. 

1. Press ~~)~~~~.~~~~~'.~~~~~~~~. ~~~~~~~Iloo]Lxl], to set the &play 

- . . . . . ~::::::. ..-.-..... -- -......-......-......... -- ..-. ..-- -- --.- -.. 

intensity at 100%. 

,.,,,,,......,._. _ .,.,.,.,., _ __ . . . . . . . . . . . . / ,;.?.., . . . . . . . ..,, . . . _ . ,............,...,.........:....::: 

..;. ._ hy:.::*,7

Note 



PHOTOMETER PHOTOMETER 

PROBE 

Figure 6-4. Backlight Intensity Check Setup 

The intensity levels are read with a display bezel installed. 

sg632e 

5. If the photometer registers less than 50 Nits, the display backlight lamp is 

bad. Refer to the “Replacement Procedures” chapter in the service manual 

for information on display lamp replacement. 

Red, Green, or Blue Pixels SpeciIlcations 

Red, green, or blue “stuck on” pixeis may appear against a black background. 

m ted for these dots, press w ~~~~~~~~~ .~~ 170) Ixl) 

:~~~~~~ ~~~~~, 

..,. ..,,.,...... ..,. - _- - ._.. -- - 

In a properly working display, the following will not occur: 

� complete rows or columns of stuck pixels 

� more than 5 stuck pixels (not to exceed a maximimi of 2 red or blue, and 3 

green) 

� 2 or more consecutive stuck pixels 

� stuck pixels less than 6.5 mm apart 

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-g

Dark Pixels Specidications 

Dark “stuck on” pixels may appear against a white background. To test for 

these dots, press I?) ~~~~~~l~~~ :&‘J$ L66) @) ~~~~~~~ 

::: ~.~.zsz -....... i_..-...:::::: . . .. . . . . . . . . . ..~...................-............. . . . . . . . . 

~~~~~~~~~~..~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~..~.~~~~~~~~. 

~~~~~~~.. 

: . ..A.. . . . . . . . . . 

In a properly working display, the following will not occur: 

� more than 12 stuck pixels (not to exceed a maximum of 7 red, green, or 

blue) 

� more than one occurrence of 2 consecutive stuck pixels 

� stuck pixels less than 6.5 mm apart 

Newton’s Rings 

To check for the patterns known as Newton’s Rings, change the display to white 

by pressing the following keys: 

Figure 6-5 ilhrstrates acceptable and non-acceptable examples of Newtons Rings 


V 

4 Rings 

Unacceptable 

3 Rings 

Acceptable 

Figure 6-5. Newtons Rings 

sb8123d 


Troubleshooting a White Display 

If the display is white, the A27 back light inverter is functioning properly. 

Connect a VGA monitor to the analyzer. 

� If the image on the external monitor is normal, then suspect A2, AM, or the 

front panel cabling. 

H If the image on the external monitor is bad, suspect the A19 GSP or cable 

W20 (CPU to motherboard). 

Troubleshooting a Black Display 

1. Remove the front panel with the exception of leaving cable W17 (A2 to 

motherboard) connected. 

2. Press 1Preset) while checking to see if there is a flash of light. 

� If the light does not flash, suspect the front panel cabling, the display lamp, 

or the A27 inverter. 

Troubleshooting a Display with Color Problems 

2. Run display service test 74 as described in Chapter 10. Confirm that there 

are four intensities for each color. 

� If the test passes, then continue. 

� If the test fails, then suspect the front panel cabling, A2, A19, or Al& 

3. Connect a VGA monitor to the analyzer. 

� If the image on the external monitor has the same color problems, then 

replace the A19 GSl? 

w If the image on the external monitor is acceptable, then there must be a 

missing color bit. Suspect the front panel cabling, A2, A19, or AM. 

6.12 Digital Control Troubleshooting

Front Panel Troubleshooting (Al, A2) 

Check Front Panel LEDs After Preset 

1. Press B on the analyzer. 

2. Observe that all front panel LEDs turn on and, within five seconds after 

releasing B, all but the CHl and Port 1 LED turns off. Refer to 

Figure 6-6. 

� If all the front panel LEDs either stay on or off, there is a control problem 

between A9 and Al/A2. See “Inspect Cables, n located later in this chapter. 

� If, at the end of the turn on sequence, the channel 1 LED is not on and all 

HP-IB status LEDs are not off, continue with “Identify the Stuck Key”. 

� If you suspect that one or more LEDs have burned out, replace the Al 

keypad assembly. 

Note Port 1 and port 2 LED problems may be caused by the 

malfunction of the A23 LED board or the A24 transfer switch. 

Figure 6-6. Preset Sequence 


Identify the Stuck Key 

Match the LED pattern with the patterns in ‘Ihble 6-l. The LED pattern 

identifies the stuck key. Free the stuck key or replace the front panel part 

causing the problem. 

‘lhble 6-l. Front Panel Key Codes 

DeChWl LBD fattern % Front Rrnel Block 

Nnmber 

CEl CE2 R L T 6 

0 

1 . 

E 

2 . & 

Response 

Entry 

=m 

3 . . -Pm 

4 . 

EAx! BfXpOnSe 

5 . . 

0 

Entry 

6 . . 

0 

Entry 

7 . . . &f.f.;j:T~ Softicey 

8 . ;-.;g. MtJ=Y 

9 . . 

El 

Entry 

10 . . Lo/n) -try 

11 . . . m Active Channel 

12 . . Active Channel 

13 . . . 

14 . . . 

15 . . . . 

77 

b 

g&&#&f; 

Entry 

Entry 

softkey 

16 . @GJ StllllUlUS 

17 . . Instrument State 

18 . . 

@F Instrument State 

19 . . . && StllllUlUS 

20 . . Start StiIllUlW 

21 . . . 

@ii2 

Instrument State 

22. . . . Lsystem Instrument State 

23 . . . . $j?jR&$d softkey 

24 . . aesponse 

25 . . . Entry 


Dedmal 

Number 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

4G47 

48 

49 

50 

51 

62 

63 

64 

66 

‘able 6-1. Front Panel Key Codes (continued) 

CEl CE2 

LED Pattern 

R L T S 

s . 

. 

. . 

. . 

. . . 

. . . 

. 

. . . . 

. 

. . � 

� . 

. 

. 

. 

� 

. 

. 

� . 

. 

. 

. 

� 

. 

lot used 

� . 

. . 

. . 

. 

. . 

� 

. . 

� . 

. . . 

. . . . 

. . . 

� 

. . . 

� . 


Inspect Cables 

Remove the front panel assembly and visually inspect the ribbon cable that 

connects the front panel to the motherboard. Also, inspect the interconnecting 

ribbon cable between Al and A2. Make sure the cables are properly connected. 

Replace any bad cables. 

Test Using a Controller 

If a controller is available, write a simple command to the analyzer. If the 

analyzer successfully executes the command, the problem is either the A2 front 

panel interface or W17 (A2 to motherboard ribbon cable) is faulty. 


Run the Internal Diagnostic ‘lksts 

The analyzer incorporates 20 internal diagnostic tests. Most tests can be run as 

part of one or both major test sequences: alI internal (test 0) and preset (test 1). 

,. ,.z.;;;;,;.;~~ i ..: a.; .?, :: :*~:(;(;$,~, ;f; 51’:::” zgz,, . . . . _ _ .,. _ ,. / _ 

1. Press @&J .$&&@J&#&#$@ Iaw @ Ixl) ~~~~~~: to perform a 

: . . . . . . . . . . ..$ .._._ .:: I .._. .L... .._............. - .._... ..-... -- -. 

INT tests. 

2. Then press (i-J Lxl) to see the results of the preset test. If either sequence 

fails, press the Q) @) keys to Gnd the tist occurrence of a FAIL message for 

tests 2 through 20. See ‘lhble 6-2 for further troubleshooting information. 


0Allrnt 

1 Preset 

2IwM 

lkst 

3CMosRAM 

QMahlDRAM 

5 DSP WrlRd 

6DSPRAM 

7DSPALU 

8 DSP Intrpt 

9 DIP Control 

10 DIP Counter 

11 DSP Control 

12 Fr Pan Wr/Rd 

13 Rear Panel 

14 Post-reg 

15 FYac-N Cant 

16 Sweep !l’rig 

17ADcLin 

18ADcofs 

19 ABUS lbst 

20 PN count 

‘ICable 6-2. Internal Diagnostic ‘I&t with Commentary 

Seauence’ Probable Fniled AwembliPat --- I 

Comments and Troubleshooting Hints 

-: Executes tests 3-11,13-16,20. 

-: Executes tests 2-11, 14-16. Runs at power-on or preset. 

AOz Repeats on fail; refer to “CPU Troubleshooting (As)” in this chapter 

to replace ROM or A9. 

AOt Beplace A9. 

AOz Repeats on fail; replace A9. 

AOz Replace A9. 

AOI Replace A9. 

A& Replace A9. 

AO/AlO: Remove AlO, rerun test. If fail, replace A9. If paw, replace AlC 

AOiAlO: Most likely A0 assembly. 

AlO/AO/AlP: Check analog bus node 17 for 1 MHz. If correct, Al2 is 

verified; suspect AlO. 

AlO/& Most likely AlO. 

A2iAlIAg: Run test 23. lf fail, replace A2. If pass, problem is on bus 

between AS and A2 or on A9 assembly. 

AlB/AOz Disconnect A16, and check A9J2 pin 48 for 4 IdIiz clock signal. 

If OK, replace A16. If not, replace A9. 

AlS/A8/Destination assembly: See Chapter 6, ‘Power Supply 

Troubleshootiug.” 

A14: Replace A14. 

A14,AlOz Most likely A14. 

Al& Replace AlO. 

A10: Replace AlO. 

AlO: Replace AlO. 

*P- part of PRESET sequence; AI -part of ALL INTERNAL sequence. 

t in decreasiug order of probability. 

6-16 Digital ControlTroubleshooting 

A14lA13/A10: Most likely Al4 or A13, as previous tests check AlO. See 

1 Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting.”

If the Fault Is Intermittent 

Repeat Test Function 

If the failure is intermittent, do the following: 

.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,. . . _ _ ‘....s ;~.,_..;;_ ..~.......,.,.,.,.,. ,....... .~, ., ,/ ,,,,, ,,,,,,, . . . ( 

1. Press (s) 

.._........._...._~~.....~..-..........-.. 

~~~~~,~~ 

/-._ii ..-- 

~~~~~~~~~~~~ 

i _.._..........__ --:;;;::;A-...;;; _........................ 

.m!&g.: @g 

- -.. 

to turn on the 

repeat function. 

3. Select the test desired and press ~~~~~ 

:..: . . .. ii . . . . . . . I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . .ii .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..x. . . 

4. Press any key to stop the function. The test repeat function is explained in 

Chapter 10, “Service Key Menus and Error Messages n 

HP-II3 Failures 

If you have performed “Step 3. Troubleshooting HP-B3 Systems” in Chapter 4, 

“Start Troubleshooting Here,” and you suspect there is an HP-IB problem in the 

analyzer, perform the following test. It checks the internal communication path 

between the A9 CPU and the Al6 rear panel. It does not check the HP-IB paths 

external to the instrument. 

., .... .............................. ........ .............. . .. .... ..... .::.:.:,,: .. ............ ::.::.::.::.~:: 

hem m ~~~~~~~~,- 

_,i ,_,, i........................... i ..,.:........__ ....... .._ ....... j.......... 

:;~~~ 

........................_ 

L13) Lxl] :~~~~~~~~. 

If the analyzer fails the test, the problem is likely to be the Al6 rear panel. 

� If the analyzer passes the test, it indicates that the A9 CPU can communicate 

with the Al6 rear panel with a 50% confidence level. There is a good chance 

that the Al6 rear panel is working. This is because internal bus lines have 

been tested between the A9 CPU and A16, and HP-IB signal paths are not 

checked external to the analyzer. 

Digital Control Troubleshooting 6-l 6

Source Troubleshooting 


Here.” This chapter is divided into two troubleshooting procedures for the 

following problems: 

w Incorrect power levels: Perform the “Power” troubleshooting checks. 

� Phase lock error: Perform the “Phase Lock Error” troubleshooting checks. 

The source group assemblies consist of the following: 

� A3 source 

� A4 sampler/mixer 

� A7 pulse generator 

w A11 phase lock 

w Al2 reference 

w Al3 fractional-N (analog) 

� Al4 fractional-N (digital) 

7 

Source Troubleshooting 7-l




1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here. n 



2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts. n 






Verihcation and Performance Tests. n 

Before You Start Troubleshooting 

Make sure ail of the assemblies are llrmly seated. Also make sure that input R 

has a signal of at least -35 dBm (about 0.01 Vp-p into 50 ohms) at all times to 

maintain phase lock. 

7-2 Source Troubleshooting

Phase Lock Error 

sg652e 

GIGITIZING 

OX I LLOSCOPE 


NETWORK 

ANALYZER 

(USE WITH SPECTRUM ANALYZER) 

i 

EXT 

REF 

INPUT 

10 MHz 

OUT , i 

SPECTRUM 

ANALYZER 

I / 

I 

I I 

I 

/ 

, 

I 

, 

I I 

I 

I I 

I 

I 

, 

\ A 

.------------ _ ------------~_-__________ 

J 

Figure 7-1. Basic Phase Lock Error Troubleshooting Equipment Setup 

Troubleshooting tools include the assembly location diagram and phase lock 

diagnostic tools. The assembly location diagram is on the underside of the 

instrument top cover. The diagram shows major assembly locations and RF cable 

connections. The phase lock diagnostic tools are explained in the “Source Group 

Troubleshooting Appendix” and should be used to troubleshoot phase lock 

problems The equipment setup shown in Figure 7-l can be used throughout this 

chapter. 

Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check 

Phase lock error messages may appear as a result of incorrect pretune 

correction constants. To check this possibility, perform the pretune correction 

constants routine. 

The four phase lock error messages, listed below, are described in the “Source 

Group Troubleshooting Appendix” at the end of this chapter. 

� NO IFFOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 

� NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 

� PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED 

74 Source Troubleshooting

H PHASE LOCK LOST 

1. Make sure the A9 CC switch is in the AIZER position: 

a. Remove the power line cord from the analyzer. 

b. Set the analyzer on its side. 

c. Remove the two corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with 

a T-15 TORX screwdriver. 

d. Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover’s back edge. 

e. Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument. 

f. Move the jumper to the AI.X position as shown in Figure 7-2. 

g. Replace the bottom cover, comer bumpers, and power cord. 

sgs1 me 



Figure 7-2. Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU 

Source Troubleshooting 7-5

. . . . . . . 

2. ‘Jet& on the andyzer md press [s) :~~~~~~~~~; ;*?a$ (46) Ixl] 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

.,........... ..,. ., 

_.........A.. -~~;~.............-/..........~.......... i............ ..__... u;...:.

new analog bus correction constants. Then press 

L45) Lxl) ~~~~ to generate default 

pretune correction constants 

_ i .._... .: ,:..: _ _ _ . . _ _ ::. ...::--:.:.:.:. := . . . . x ; ..z.; . . . _..... . . . T ..../....: ..-.... __; ‘Q&f& -.... /._i&. L48) Lxl) ~~~:...~~. 1-i to 

generate new pretune correction constants. 

3. Press m and observe the analyzer display: 

a. No error message: restore the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position. Then 

refer to “Post-Repair Procedures” in Chapter 14 to verify operation. 

b. Error message visible: continue with “A4 Sampler/Mixer Check”. 

A4 Sampler/Mixer Check 

The A4, A5, and A6 (R, A and B) sampler/mixers are similar in operation. Any 

sampler can be used to phase lock the source. lb eliminate the possibility of a 

faulty R sampler, follow this procedure. 

1. Remove the W8 cable (Al 1Jl to A4) from the R-channel sampler (A4) and 

connect it to either the A-channel sampler (A5) or the B-channel sampler 

(A6). Refer to F’igure 7-3. 


All A12 Al3 Al4 

I I 

sg6116e 

Figure 7-3. Sampler/Mixer to Phase Lock Cable Connection Diagram 

2. If you connected W8 to: 

3. Ignore the displayed trace, but check for phase lock error messages. If the 

phase lock problem persists, the R-channel sampler is not the problem. 


A3 Source and A11 Phase Lock Check 

This procedure checks the source and part of the phase lock assembly. It opens 

the phase-locked loop and exercises the source by varying the source output 

frequency with the A11 pretune DAC. 

Note If the analyzer failed internal test 48, default pretune correction 

constants were stored which may result in a constant offset of 

several MHz. Regardless, continue with this procedure. 

Note Use a spectrum analyzer for problems above 100 MHz. 

1. Connect the oscilloscope or spectrum analyzer as shown in Figure 7-l. (Set 

the oscilloscope input impedance to 50 ohms) 

I 

2. 

mess (Preset, Lsyst~, ~~~~~~ 

. 

~~~~~~~~~; 

. . . . _ ..,., ,.,. . . ..,.. 

,,. 

~~~~~~~~~, 

,, _,,, ,.....,..... ..,,,,,, .,:...:.:.::.. i .._ __.................,.,.,.,.,.,.....i 

,.,.,...,.,.,.,,.,.,,j __;__~__~ 

._.; .,.. . 

.-,. 

. . .._.. 

i _ 

__. 

._,,_ i _,__ i _ . . . . . . . . . . _____i _.. _ .,.; i . ..=.... _i . .._....... ./ 

. . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . _ 

~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ to activate *e SoUTce tune (SRC ME) 

service mode. 

3. Use the front panel knob or front panel keys to set the pretune frequency 

to 300 kHz, 30 MHz, and 40 MHz. Verify the signal frequency on the 

0sciIioscope. 

Note In SRC TUNE mode, the source output frequency changes in 

1 to 2 MHz increments and should be 1 to 6 MHz above the 

indicated output frequency. 

4. Check for the frequencies indicated by Table 7-l. 

settins! 

‘Ikxble 7-1. Output Frequency in SEC Tune Mode 

Observed Frequency 

3ookHz 1.3 to 6.3 MHZ 

3oMHz 

4oMHz 

31to36MHz 

41to46lmz 

5. The signal observed on an osciRoscope should be as solid as the signal in 

Figure 7-4. 

7-g SourceTroubleshooting

6. 

-SO. MO n.oc O.OMOO met so.MO n.sc 

I I t 

ch. 1 � �� Off-t 

11- - 10.0 -miv Dmloy : ik5iizotYs 

Figure 7-4. Waveform Integrity in SRC Tune Mode 

sg607s 

The signal observed on the spectrum analyzer will appear jittery as in 

Figure 7-5 (B), not solid as in F’igure 7-5 (A). This is because in SRC TUNE 

mode the output is not phase locked. 

B 

sg609s 

Figure 7-5. 

Phase Locked Output Compared to Open Loop Output in SRC Tune Mode 


7- Press IMenu) ~~hkd# to vary the power and check for corresponding level 

changes on the test instrument. (A power change of 20 dl3 wilI change the 

voltage observed on the oscilIoscope by a factor of ten.) 

8. Note the results of the frequency and power changes: 

If the frequency and power output changes are correct, skip ahead to “Al2 

Reference Check” located in this chapter. 

If the frequency changes are not correct, continue with “YO Coil Drive 

Check with Analog Bus”. 

If the power output changes are not correct, check analog bus node 3. 

b. Press (Marker) @ Lc/n). The marker should read approximately 434 mu. 

c. Press (K) @ Lc/n). The marker should read approximately 646 mu. 

7-10 Sourcs Troubleshooting

YO Coil Drive Check with Oscilloscope 

Note Use the large extender board for easy access to the voltage 

points. The extender board is included with the HP 8753 lb01 

Kit. See Chapter 13, “Replaceable ParW, for part numbers and 

ordering information. 

1. Connect oscilloscope probes to AllPl-1 and AllPl-2. The YO coil drive 

signal is actually two signals whose voltage difference drives the coil. 

3. Monitor the two YO coil drive lines In source tune mode the voltage 

difference should vary from approximately 3.5 to 5.0 volts as shown in 

Figure 7-7. 

� If the voltages are not correct, replace the faulty All assembly. 

� If the output signa.ls from the All assembly are correct, replace the faulty 

A3 source assembly. 

� If neither the A11, nor the A3 assembly is faulty, continue with the next 

check. 

-300.000 Ins -150.000 IS 0.00000 s 

I 

z::: - 1.000 

1. GCG volte/div 

volts/div 

Offmet 

Offset 

- 

7.000 

7.000 

volts 

11-e - 30.0 

volts 

mddiv Oeloy - 0. OOMO s 

Figure 7-7. 

YO- and YO + Coil Drive Voltage Differences with SOURCE PIA OFF 

7-12 Source Troubleshooting 

sg606s

Al2 Reference Check 

The signals are evaluated with pass/fail checks. The most efficient way to check 

the Al2 frequency reference signals is to use the analog bus while referring to 

‘Pable 7-2. 

Alternatively, you can use an osciuoscope, while referring to ‘Ihble 7-3 and 

Figure 7-8 through F’igure 7-14. If any of the observed signals differs from 

the figures, there is a 90% probability that the Al2 assembly is faulty. Either 

consider the Al2 assembly defective or perform the “A12 Digital Control Signals 

Check”. 

Both of these procedures are described ahead. 

Analog Bus Method 

counter. 

2. Press L21) IXJ to count the frequency of the 100 kHz signal. 

3. Press 1Menu) ~~~~~~~ ::: :... ii ~........~...i__--.i . . . . 1500) . . m. Verify that the counter reading (displayed 

on the analyzer next to cnt :) matches the corresponding 100 kHz value for 

the CW frequency. (Refer to Table 7-2.) 

4. Verify the remaining CW frequencies, comparing the counter reading with 

the value in ‘Ihble 7-2: 

CW Fre4pency 

5ookIiz 

2Bm!& 

6OBmz 

able 7-2. Analog Bus Check of Reference Frequencies 

Analog BM Node 21 Analog BUE Node 24 

lOOkILt 2ndLO 

0.100 MHZ 0.504 MHZ 

0.100 MHZ 2.007 Jmz 

0.100 MHZ 0.996 MB2 

Analog Bus Node 25 

0.500 MHZ 

2.000 MHZ 

1.000 Bmz 

the frequencies listed in this table to within 3~0.1%. Accuracy may vary 


5. Press L24) Lxl] to count the frequency of the 2nd Lo signal. 

. . . . . . 

6- Press Ihnenu_) ~$ji!t~:~t~~~~ Lsoo] Ck/m. Verify that the counter reading matches 

the corresponding 2nd Lo value for the CW frequency. (Refer to ‘lhble 7-2.) 


the value in Table 7-2: 

� Press ��☺ �� 

� Press �␇�☺ �� 

8. Press L25_) Lxl] to count the frequency of the PLREF signai. 

9. Press @J ~~~~~: L500) m. Verify that the counter reading matches 

the corresponding PLREF value for the CW frequency. (Refer to ‘Pable 7-2.) 


the value in ‘lhble 7-2: 

� ��☺��☺ 

� ��☺�☺� 

11. Check the results. 

� If aII the counter readings match the frequencies listed in Table 7-2, skip 

ahead to “A13/A14 Fractional-N Check”. 

� If the counter readings are incorrect at the 500 kHz and 2 MHz settings 

only, go to ‘TN LO at Al2 Check”. 

� If aII the counter readings are incorrect at aII three CW frequencies, the 

counter may be faulty. Perform the “OsciIIoscope Method” check of the 

signals described below. (If the signais are good, either the A10 or Al4 

assemblies could be faulty.) 


Oscilloscope Method 

You need not use the oscilloscope method unless the analog bus is 

non-functional or any of the signals fail the specifications listed in mble 7-2. 

If the analog bus is non-functional or the previous check has revealed 

questionable signals, observe the signal(s) with an oscilloscope. ‘Pdble 7-3 

identifies a convenient test point and a plot for the five signals listed. 

able 7-3. Al2 Reference Frequencies 

Mnemonic Signal LOCdi0n 

Description 

FN1OOkIiZREF 100 kH2 Reference AlSTPb 

RF2 Phase Lock AllTP9 

Reference 

REP Phase Lock AllTP9 

Reference 

mm* Fractional-N Lo A14J2 

4MHzREF 4 MHZ Reference Al2TP9 

2ND Lo+/- Second Lo AEPl-2,4 

2ND Lo+/- Second M Al2Pl-2,4 

Not an Al2 signal, but required for Al2 lowband operation. 

see Analyzer 

Fh3=e htting 

Figure 7-8 any 

Figure 7-9 216MHzCW 

Plgure 7-10 6MHzCW 

F?gure 7-11 1oMHzcw 

F?gure 7-12 any 

F?gure 7-1s >lSMHzCW 

pisure 7-14 14MHzcw 


100kHzPulses 

The 100 kHz pulses are very narrow and typically 1.5 V in amplitude. You may 

have to increase the oscilloscope intensity to see these pulses. (See Figure 7-8.) 

-100.000 us 0.00000 L 100.000 “* 

sg6i OS 

Figure 7-8. Sharp 100 kHz Pulses at A13TP5 (any frequency) 


PLREF Waveforms 

REF Signal At AllTP9. REF is the buffered PLREF+ signal. The 1st IF is 

phase locked to this signal. Use an oscilloscope to observe the signal at the 

frequencies noted in Figure 7-9 and Figure 7-10. 

High Band RJW Signal. In high band the REF signal is a constant 1 MHz square 

wave as indicated by Figure 7-9. 

-1.00000 us 0.00000 5 1.00000 us 

ch.1 - SOD.0 auoltm/div off& - o.wo VOIU 

Timsboso - 200 ns/drv DdCby - 0.00000 s 

Figure 7-9. High Band REF Signal (216 MHz CW) 

sg611 s 


Low Band REF Signal. In low band this signal follows the frequency of the RF 

output signal. Figure 7-10 illustrates a 5 MHz CW signal. 

Figure 7-10. REF Signal at AllTP9 (5 MHz CW) 

� If REF looks good, skip ahead to “4 MHz Reference Signal”. 

� If REF is bad in low band, continue with TN Lo at Al2 Check”. 


sg612s

FN LO at Al2 Check 

1. Use an oscilloscope to observe the FN Lo from.&14 at the cable 

end of A14J2. Press (jj) (SystemJ . . ~~~~~,~~~~.. . . . . . . . . . . . . i . . . : . . . . . . . . . .i . . .. . . . . . ~,............../..~..... . . 

. . -.::: .:.

4 MHz Reference Signal 

This reference signal is used to control the receiver. If faulty, this signal can 

cause apparent source problems because the CPU uses receiver data to control 

the source. At A12TP9 it should appear similar to Figure 7-12. 

-5oo.oon rleec 500.000 l-was 

ch. 1 - 1.000 volts/dav Offset - o.ooo volts 

11rboro = 100 nsec/div OPlDy - o.oocoo *PC 

Figure 7-12. 4 MHz Reference Signal at A12TP!3 (Preset) 


sg614s

2ND LO Waveforms 

The 2nd LO signals appear different in phase and shape at different frequencies. 

90 Degree Phase Offset of 2nd LO Signals in High Band. In high band, the 

2nd Lo is 996 kHz. As indicated by Figure 7-13, the 2nd Lo actually consists of 

two signals 90 degrees out of phase. 

-1.00000 “.OO 0.00000 mc 

sg615s 

Figure 7-13. 

90 Degree Phase Offset of High Band 2nd LO Signals (216 MHZ CW) 

In-Phase 2nd LO Signals in Low Band. The 2nd Lo signals in low band, as 

shown in Figure 7-14, are not phase shifted. In low band these signals track the 

RF output with a 4 kHz offset. 

SourceTroubleshooting 7-21

-1M.000 - O.MMO .mc lLlo.om “UC 

I I I t I I 

I I I I I I I 

- 200.0 mvoltm/dlv 

- ROD0 voltm 

Ek=: - $O&O~ve~~;d’v 

Tmobamo - 

m: 

oehy 

: gL:h: 

Figure 7-14. In-Phase Low Band 2nd LO Signals SSgnals (14 MHZ CW) 

sg616s 

If any of the signals of Table 7-2 are incorrect, the probability is 90% that the 

Al2 assembly is faulty. Either consider the Al2 assembly faulty or perform the 

“Al2 Digital Control Signals Check” described ahead. 


Al2 Digital Control Signals Check 

Several digital control signals must be functional for the Al2 assembly 

to operate properly. Check the control lines listed in ‘I%ble 7-4 with the 

oscilloscope in the high input impedance setting. 

Mnemonic 

LENREF 

LHB 

LLB 

‘Ihble 7-4. Ala-Related Digital Control Signals 

Signtll 

Description 

L-Reference Enable 

L-Hi& Band 

L-Low Band 

Loc8tion 

Al2P2-6 

Al2P2-32 

Al2Pl-23 

see Analyzer 

FIBrve -ttinB 

Figure 7-15 Preset 

Figlm 7-16 Preset 

Finure 7-16 Preset 

L ENREF Line. This is a TI’L signal. lb observe it, trigger on the negative edge. 

In preset state, the signal should show activity similar to Figure 7-15. 

ch.2 - Fg>z;d’v offwt 

Tim,bwm - . 

sg617s 

Figure 7-15. L ENREF Line at A12P2-16 (Preset) 


L HB and L LB Lines. These complementary signals toggle when the instrument 

switches from low band to high band as illustrated by Figure 7-16. 

sg618s 

Figure 7-16. Complementary L J3.B and L LB Signals (Preset) 

If all of the digital signals appeared good, the Al2 assembly is faulty 

A13/A14 Fractional-N Check 

Use the analog bus or an oscilloscope to check the Al4 VCO’s ability to sweep 

from 30 MHz to 60 MHz. The faster analog bus method should suffice unless 

problems are detected. 

Fractional-N Check with Analog Bus 

. . . . . . . . . . .,. .,.,...,.......,.,.. :,. ,. ,. ..-.- /,.,.,._ ;; _. .._............................ - .._ -__ _ _ .,.~.....~.,..... _ _ i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ../~_....... . . . . . . . . . . . . 

;&&&+z& -~,~,~~~~~~~ _ _ ~~~~ 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . / . . _ . . .;,.. 

to sMtch on the andog bus md the 

.i 

..:... :

‘Jhble 7-5. VC0 Range Check Frequencies 

Imtmment Setting Counter Qeadng 1 

31Bmz 30f0.030 MHZ 

6o.oooooo MHZ 60*0.060 MHZ 

4. Check the counter reading at the frequencies indicated. 

� If the readings are within the limits specified, the probability is greater 

than 90% that the fractional-N assemblies are functional. Either skip 

ahead to the “A7 PuIse Generator Check” or perform the more conclusive 

“Al4 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope” described below. 

� If the readings fail the specified limits, perform the “Al4 VCO Exercise”. 

Al4 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope 

1. Remove the W9 HI OUT cable (A14Jl to A7) from the A7 assembly and 

connect it to an oscilloscope set for 50 ohm input impedance. Switch on the 

analyzer. 

Menus and Error Messages”, for more information-on the F’RACN TUNE 

mode. 

3. Vary the fractional-N VCO frequency with the front panel knob and check 

the signal with the oscilloscope. The waveform should resemble F’igure 7-17, 

Figure 7-18, and F’igure 7-19. 

If the fractional-N output signals are correct, continue source troubleshooting 

by skipping ahead to “A7 Pulse Generator Check”. 


Ch. 2 - 100.0 mvolta/div Offrt - a000 VO~+E 

T~mebase - 10.0 nsec/div Delay - 0.00000 set 

Figure 7-17. 10 MHZ HI OUT Wiweform from A14Jl 

Ch. 2 - 100.0 mvol+a/div 

T~nsba - 10.0 nmec/div 


Figure 7-18. 25 MHz El OUT Wiweform from A14Jl 

sgdi 9s 

sg62Os

-50.000 n-w 0.00000 eec SO.000 “.OC 

I I I I I I I 

ch.2 - lm.0 wolt=/div 0ffwt - aM0 Volta 

Tirmbo8a - 10.0 nmos/div -ioy = aoomo .PC 

Al4 VCO Exercise 

Figure 7-19. 60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14Jl 

sg621 s 

The nominal tuning voltage range of the VCO is + 10 to -5 volts When the 

analyzer is in operation, this voltage is supplied by the Al3 assembly. This 

procedure substitutes a power supply for the Al3 assembly to check the 

frequency range of the Al4 VCO. 

1. Switch off the analyzer and remove the Al3 assembly. 

2. Put the Al4 assembly on an extender board and switch on the instrument. 

3. Prepare to monitor the VCO frequency, either by: 

a. Activating the analog bus and setting the internal counter to the FRACN 

node, or 

b. Connecting an oscilloscope to A14J2 (labeled LO OUT) and looking for 

waveforms similar to Figure 7-20. 


-50.000 - 0.00000 *es 50.000 “se.2 

I-* II - ,nn n -..^>~~,.4*., nrr--r - 0. MO vo 

Figure 7-20. LO OUT Waveform at A14J2 

4. Vary the voltage at A14TP14 from + 10 to -5 volts either by: 

a. Connecting an appropriate external power supply to A14TP14, or 

sg613s 

b. First jumping the + 15 V internal power supply from A8TP8 to A14TP14 

and then jumping the -5.2 V supply from ASTPlO to A14TP14. 

5. Conhrm that the VCO frequency changes from approximately 30 MHz or less 

to 60 MHz or more. 

6. If this procedure produces unexpected results, the Al4 assembly is faulty. 

7. If this procedure produces the expected results, continue with the “Al4 

Divide-by-N Circuit Check”. 


Al4 Divide-by-N Circuit Check 

Note The Al3 assembly should still be out of the instrument and the 

Al4 assembly on an extender board. 

1. Ground A14TP14 and confirm (as in the Al4 VCO Exercise) that the VCO 

oscillates at approximately 50 to 55 MHz. 

2. Put the analyzer in CW mode (to avoid relock transitions) and activate the 

F’RACN TUNE service mode. 

3. Connect an oscilloscope to A14J3 and observe the output. 

4. With the F’RACN TUNE service feature, vary the frequency from 30 MHz to 

60.8 MHz. 

5. The period of the observed signal should vary from 5.5 ps to 11 p.s. 

� If this procedure produces unexpected results, the Al4 assembly is faulty. 

� If this procedure produces the expected results, perform the “A14-to-Al3 

Digital Control Signals Check. n. 

6. Remember to replace the Al3 assembly. 

A14-to-Al3 Digital Control Signals Check. 

The Al4 assembly generates a ‘ITL cycle start (CST) signal every 10 

microseconds. If the VCO is oscillating and the CST signal is not detectable at 

A14TP3, the Al4 assembly is non-functional. 

Use the CST signal as an external trigger for the oscilloscope and monitor the 

signals in ‘Ihble 7-6. Since these ‘ITL signals are generated by Al4 to control 

A13, check them at Al3 6rst. Place Al3 on the large extender board. The 

signals should look similar to Pigure 7-21. If these signals are good, the Al3 

assembly is defective. 


‘lhble 7-6. A14-to-Al3 Digital Control Signal Locations 

05T 

L FNHOLD 

FNBIA6 

APU 

API2 

API3 

API4 

API6 


Al3 Location 

none 

P2-2 

P2-6 

Al4 Location 

TP3 

P2-2 

P2-6 

P2-32 P2-32 

P2-3 P2-3 

P2-34 P2-34 

P2-4 P2-4 

P2-36 P2-36 

Pl-23 Pl-63 

* LFNHOLO 

API14 

FN LATCH 

sg622s 

Figure 7-21. Al4 Generated Digital Control Signals

H MB Line. This signal is active during the 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep. The 

upper trace of F’igure 7-22 shows relative inactivity of this signal during preset 

condition. The lower trace shows its status during a 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep 

with inactivity during retrace only. 

-1.00000 set 0.00000 *PC 1.00000 (105 

sg623s 

Figure 7-22. 

H MB Signal at A14Pl-5 (Preset and 16 MHZ to 31 MHz Sweep) 

Source Troubleshooting 731

A7 Pulse Generator Check 

The pulse generator affects phase lock in high band only. It can be checked with 

either a spectrum analyzer or an oscilloscope. 

A7 Pube Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer 

1. Remove the A7-to-A6 SMB cable (W7) from the A7 pulse generator assembly. 

Set the analyzer to generate a 16 MHz CW signal. Connect the spectrum 

analyzer to the A7 output connector and observe the signal. The A7 comb 

should resemble the spectral display in Figure 7-23. 

Figure 7-23. Pulse Generator Output 

sg624s 

2. If the analyzer malfunction relates to a particular frequency or range, look 

more closely at the comb tooth there. Adjust the spectrum analyzer span 

and bandwidth as required. Even at 3 GHz, the comb should look as clean 

as Figure 7-24. For Option 006 instruments at 6 GHz, the comb tooth level 

should be approximately -46 dBm. 

732 Source Troubleshooting

I I I I I I I 

CENTER 2.989 88 GClL *PAN ?. .ea wiz 

mas ml 36 *uz VW 363 *cIx OYP 28.8 un.5 

sg625s 

Figure 7-24. High Quality Comb lboth at 3 GHz 

3. If the signaI at the A7 output is good, check the A7-to-A4 cable. 

4. If the signal is not as clean as F’igure 7-24, observe the HI OUT input signal to 

the A7 assembly. 

. . . . . . . . . :E .;y: ( ., 

~~~~~~~~~~. 

::: .... . . . z.2 . :.... z :...... 2: . . . ~.;..:....~.i . .,:si . . i.;,.~......_~......i . . . 

&he&e do not readjust the instrument. Remove the 

A14-to-A7 SMB cable (WQ) from the A7 pulse generator assembly 

(CW B 16 MHz). 

b. Set the spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of 45 MHz and a span 

of 30 MHz. Connect it to the A14-to-A7 cable still attached to the Al4 

assembly. Narrow the span and bandwidth to observe the signal closely. 

5. If the HI OUT signal is as clean as Figure 7-25, the A7 assembly is faulty. 

Otherwise, check the A14-to-A7 cable or recheck the A13/A14 fractional-N as 

described ahead. 

Rechecking the A13/A14 Fractional-N 

Some phase lock problems may result from phase noise problems in the 

fractional-N loop. lb troubleshoot this unusual failure mode, do the following: 

1. Set the network analyzer at 60 MHz in the FRACN TUNE mode. 


2. Use a spectrum analyzer, to examin e the HI OUT signal from the Al4 

assembly. The signal should appear as clean as Figure 7-25. The comb shape 

may vary from pulse generator to pulse generator. 

sg626s 

Figure 7-25. Stable HI OUT Signal in FRACN TUNE Mode 

A7 Pulse Generator Check with Oscilloscope 

Perform this check if a spectrum analyzer is not available. 

1. Remove the A4to-All SMB cable from the A4 (R) sampler/mixer output. 

Connect the oscilloscope to the A4 output (1st IF). 

2. Activate the FRACN TUNE .._.................................. service mode ,.,, _ _ ..; . ..,., . . . ..,.,... . _ . . . . and . . _. _ ;... _,. t.~e,,ne.~~~~ion~~,~ _ . . . i_ _ __.....i . . .,. _ t@-, 

50 MHz. press Is-] ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~:~,~~~~.~~~~ [sol 

m- 

3. Activate the SRC TUNE service mode of the analyzer and tune the source to 

,:: 7 .i .:z: .~~;.;~~~~;.~~~;~;;;~~; ii 

50 M&. press ~~~~.~.~~~~~ 

i . .. . . . _._ . _ . _ . _ . . . . . . __ . 

~~~~~~~ 

_ . __ . ____ . . _ .,.,.,.,. . i _ . _ . ,.,. _.,._.,_.~.._ 

. . . 

L50) 

. . . 

Irln_llE). 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

4. Set the SRC TUNE frequency to those listed in Table 7-7 and observe the 1st 

Il? waveforms. They should appear similar to F’igure 7-26. 

� If the signals observed are proper, continue with “All Phase Lock Check”. 

~3 If the signals observed are questionable, use a spectrum analyzer to 

perform the preceding “A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum 

Analyzer”. 


‘Ihble 7-7. 1st IF Waveform Settings 

I SRCTUNE I PBACN I HZUIUOlIiC I 

1stlF I 

6obfHz 6oMHz 1 ltO6MHZ 

26oMHz 6oMHz 6 lto6MHz 

266OBfHz 6oMHz 51 lto6MHZ 

-,.00040 “0 0.04400 E 1.00400 us 

I I t I I I I 

Ch. 1 - 15 -00 avol+s/div Offset - 0.000 volts 

T,nebnsa - 200 ns/drv Delay - 0.04400 c 

Ch. I Pormetoro Froq. - 4. 21293 WL 

sg627s 

Figure 7-26. Typical 1st IF WAveform in FRACN lTJNE/SRC TUNE Mode 

All Phase Lock Check 

At this point, the All phase lock assembly appears to be faulty (its inputs 

should have been verified already). Nevertheless, you may elect to use the 

phase lock diagnostic routines or check the relevant signals at the assembly 

itself for confirmation. 

Note If external source mode is the only operating mode with phase 

lock problems, replace the A11 phase lock assembly. 

Source Troubleshooting 735

Phase Lock Check with PLL DIAG 

Refer to “Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools” in “Source Group Troubleshooting 

Appendix” at the end of this chapter for an explanation of the error messages 

and the diagnostic routines. Follow the steps there to determine in which state 

the phase lock is lost. 

� If NO IF FOUND is displayed, con&m that the analog bus is functional and 

perform the “Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)” as outlined in 

Chapter 3, “Adjustments and Correction Constants.” 

� If phase lock is lost in the ACQUIRE state, the A11 assembly is faulty 

� If phase lock is lost in the TRACK state, troubleshoot source phase lock loop 

components other than the A11 assembly. 

Phase Lock Check by Signal Examination 

lb con&m that the A11 assembly is receiving the signals required for its proper 

operation, perform the following steps. 

1. Place the A11 assembly on the large extender board. 

2. Switch on the analyzer and press Ipreset). 

3. Check for the signals listed in ‘Ihble 7-8. 

Mnemonic II0 Accesa 

‘Ihble 7-8. All Input Signals 

FE= 

Notes 

FMCOIL- 0 AllPl-S,SS Figure7-27 AidsYOcoILinaettingYIG.PreasLPreset)LMenu) 

,._._ i .,., .__ 

~~~~~~. @ @-J to *serve this s.I. 

REP I AllTPD FIgwe 7-0, Observe both low band and high band CW frequencies. 

Figure 7-10 

YOcoIL+ 0 AllPl-2,S2 pjgure 7-7 uw .~~~~~. 

._....... - _.............. I- .._... .._._. 

YOCOIL- 0 AllPl-1,Sl F-lgure 7-7 

WrIF I AllPLIFIN F’igure 7-26 Check for 1 MHz with tee a All jack (not at cable end) ir 

high band. 


ti 

. I . L. 

I 

I 

I I t ’ II 

I 

0.00000 3 

m. I - 2.000 volfa/div Offs*+ - 0.000 volto 

Tirobosn - �� s/div 0010y - 0.00000 s 

Figure 7-27. FM Coil - Plot with 3 Point Sweep 

I 

sg628s 

4. If any of the input signal is not proper, refer to the overall block diagram in 

Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here,” as an aid to trouble shooting the 

problem to its source. 

5. If any of the output signals is not proper, the A11 assembly is faulty. 


Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix 

Troubleshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus 

The analog bus can perform a variety of fast checks, However, it too is subject 

to failure and thus should be tested prior to use. You should have done this in 

Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here. n 

lb use the analog bus to check anv one of the nodes. : Dress e . . . . . . I 

i 

I 

~~~~~~~ .~~~~~~~~~~~. men press m ~~~~~~~~~~~;~:~~~. 

.,. 

..-.....................-.... ::::: ..::::.: - .::::::, - .._....__... . . . . . . . .::::..;: . . -. . . . L;.,:.;.:.;.:.:.;.: .,,. >,:L. .,.,, .L’.._ :. .._ :.: . . . ..__ . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

and enter the analog bus node number followed by Lxl]. Refer to “Analog 

Bus” in Chapter 10, “Service Key Menus and Error Messages”, for additional 

information. 

Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools 

� error messages 

� diagnostic routines 

Phase Lock Error Messages 

All phase lock error messages can result from improper front panel connections. 

NO IF FOUND : CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means no IF was detected during pretune: 

a source problem. Perform the “A4 Sampler/Mixer Check”. 

NO PHASE LOCK : CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means the IF was not acquired after 

pretune: a source problem. Perform the “A4 Sampler/Mixer Check”, earlier in 

this chapter. 

PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED means that a calculation of prettme values was not 

successful: a source or receiver failure. Perform the “Source Prettme Correction 

Constants” routine as outlined in Chapter 3, “Adjustments and Correction 

Constants” If the analyzer fails that routine, perform the “A4 Sampler/Mixer 

Check”. 

PHASE LOCK LOST means that phase lock was lost or interrupted before the band 

sweep ended: a source problem. Refer to “Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines” 

next to access the phase lock loop diagnostic service routine. Then troubleshoot 

the problem by following the procedures in this chapter. 


Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines 

Perform the following steps to determine at what frequencies and bands the 

phase lock problem occurs 

_.,,. . . . . . . . ,,,...... : ..::.: .:;: ::. ::: / . ...::::. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :,:s’::::,:,:,:,:, ..,.,., .:...

Receiver Troubleshooting 


Here. n Follow the procedures in the order given, unless instructed otherwise. 

The receiver group assemblies consist of the following: 

w A4/5/6 sampler/mixer assemblies 

� A10 digital IF assembly 

8 

Receiver Troubleshooting 8-1













Verification and Performance Tests n 

8-2 Receiver Troubleshooting

Receiver Failure Error Messages 

The error messages which indicate receiver group problems may be caused by 

the instrument itself or by external devices or connections. The following three 

error messages share the same description. 

� CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER REDUCED 

w CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER REDUCED 

� CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED 

If any of the above error messages appear, the analyzer has exceeded 

approximately + 14 dBm at one of the test ports. The RF output power is 

automatically reduced to -85 dBm. The annotation PJ appears in the left 

margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been 

activated. lb reset the analyzer’s power and regain control of the power level, 

do the following: 

1. Remove any devices under test which may have contributed excess power to 

the input. 

2. fiess m @&&@ @ Lxl] ~~~~~~~~~~~, to return the power level to 

~.....~........................... . . . . . ..-.I . . . . . . . . . . . . ~............~ . . . . . i . . . . . . v~-~.~..~...~.~.~..~ ._.. i 

the preset state. 

� If the power trip indicator (Pi) does not reappear, reconfigure the test 

setup to keep input power levels at 0 dBm or below. 

� If Pl reappears, continue with “Check the A and B Inputs”. 


Check the A and B Inputs 

Good inputs produce traces similar to Figure 8-2 in terms of flatness. To examine 

both input traces, do the following: 

1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-1. (The through cable is HP part 

number 8120-4779.) 

2. 

3. 


Figure S-l. Equipment Setup 

Check the flatness of the input A trace by comparing it with the trace in 

Figure 8-2. 

Check the flatness of the input B trace by comparing it with the trace in 

Figure 8-2. 

:.:............................... __ .... ................... ..~.~...~.~ ...... . _ ................................ ...) p .:.:.:.:.:.... / ::..:...:.:.:.: .... 

fie3 1Meao) 

~~~~~~~~., ;@) ... 

.................. 

............_.............-. 

.............................................. 

_......................._....iiii. .....................2.. ... :.z.x.:.: .- ,. :.:.:.z.:.&...........ii.............................. 

.._ ........:.:.::.,_L :cz.:.m 

� If neither of the input traces resembles Figure 8-2, continue with 

“Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad”. 

� If at least one input trace resembles Figure 8-2, continue with 

“Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good”. 

84 Receiver Troubleshooting

START 030 000 MHZ 

Figure 8-2. Typical Good Trace 


Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad 

Run Internal Tests 18 and 17 

1. Press (Preset) ~ ~~~I~~~~.~~ ~~~~ Llsl Lxl) ~~~~~~ to I-un 

- . ..-.................-... .._...._... - .._. -... ;:... .._........ 

the ADC offset. 

__ _ _ ~~. 

2. Then, when the analyzer finishes test 18, press L17) Lxl) .~~~~~~~~ to 

run the ADC linearity test. 

If either of these tests FAIL, the A10 assembly is probably faulty. This can be 

conflrmed by checking the 4 MHz signal and substituting the A10 assembly or 

checking the signals listed in Table 8-l. 

Check 2nd LO 

Check the 2nd Lo signal. Refer to the “Al2 Reference Check” section of 

Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting” for analog bus and oscilloscope checks of 

the 2nd Lo and waveform illustrations. 

� If the analyzer passes the checks, continue to “Check the 4 MHz REF Signal”. 

� If the analyzer fails the checks, perform the high/Iow band transition 

adjustment. If the adjustment fails, or brings no improvement, replace A12. 


Check the 4 MHz REF Signal 

1. Press w. 

2. Use an oscilloscope to observe the 4 MHz reference signal at AlOP2-6. 

� If the signal does not resemble Figure 8-3, troubleshoot the signal source 

(A12P2-36) and path. 

� If the signal is good, the probability is greater than 90% that the A10 

assembly is faulty. For confirmation, perform “Check A10 by Substitution 

or Signal Examination”. 

I 

-500.000 nmec 0.00000 ma0 soo.000 Mac 

I I 

iA 

f/ I / I 

I 

\ 

/ 

/ \ 

A 

/t \ 

/ 

/ \ 

I 

/ 

I 

Ch. 1 - 1.000 volt.s/d,v Offmet - 0.000 Volts 

TImebase - 100 nwc/div OIlOY - o.ooooo se= 

Figure 8-3. 4 MHz RJIF Waveform 

sg603s 


Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination 

If the 4 MHz REF signal is good at the A10 digital IF assembly, check the A10 

assembly by one of the following methods: 

� Substitute another A10 assembly or 

� Check the signal/control lines required for its operation. The pins and signal 

sources of those lines are identified in ‘Ihble 8-1. It is possible that the A9 

assembly may not be providing the necessary signals. These signal checks 

allow you to determine which assembly is faulty. Some of the waveforms are 

illustrated by Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5. 

If the substitute assembly shows no improvement or if all of the input signals 

are valid, continue with “Check the 4 kHz Signal”. Otherwise troubleshoot the 

suspect signal(s) or consider the A10 assembly faulty. 


Dlmo 

DlFDl 

DE-D2 

DIFD3 

DlFD4 

DEDS 

DEDB 

DlFD7 

L DIPEN 

L D-1 

L DIFEN2 

DIFCC 

DIRXK 

DIF DATA 

LFiNDlF 

LINTCOP 

Mnemonic 

‘Check for Tl’L activity. 

‘Ihble S-l. Signals Required for A10 Assembly Operation 

Description 

Digital IF date 0 (MB) 

DigitallFdatal 

DigitallFdata2 

DigitallPdata3 

DigitallFdata4 

DigitdIFdata6 

DigitdIFdlIta6 

Digital lF data 7 (MSB) 

Digital IF enable 0 



Digital IF conversion camp. 

Digital IF aerial clock 

Digital lF aerial data out 

L-enable digital IF 

L-interrupt, DSP 

P2-27 

P2-67 

P2-28 

P2-63 

F%20 

P2-69 

P2-30 

P2-60 

P2-34 

P2-6 

P2-36 

F%33 

P2-4 

P2-3 

P2-17 

P2-2 

A10 

LOCAiOU 

SW 

source 

Aopz-27 

AQP2-67 

AQP2-28 

AOPZ-63 

AQP2-20 

AW2-60 

ABP2-30 

Am&60 

AQP2-34 

Mm-6 

AoP2-36 

AlOP2-33 

AlOP2-4 

AlOP2-3 

AoP2-17 

AlOP2-2 

Receiver Troubleshooting 8-g

* DIF DATA consists of 16 serial bits per input conversion. 

the LSB is on the right side and is the most volatile. 

DIFCLK 

DIFDATA* 

Figure 8-4. Digital Data Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger 

Ch. 1 - 4.000 vo1tc/cirv 

Ch. 2 - 1.000 voltddrv 

T , **boss - 20.0 “dd2V 

sg604s 

sg602s 

Figure 8-5. Digital Control Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger 

g-10 Receiver Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good 

Since at least one input is good, all of the common receiver circuitry beyond the 

multiplexer is functional. Only the status of the individual sampler/mixers and 

their individual signal paths is undetermined. 

Check the 4 kHz Signal 

l- Press Lpreset) LMenu) ~~~~~. 

2. Use an oscilloscope to check the 4 kHz output of the sampler/mixer in 

question at the Al0 assembly. The input and output access pins are listed in 

lhble 8-2. The signal should resemble the waveform of Figure 8-6. 

� If the signal is good, continue with “Check the Trace with the Sampler 

Correction Constants Off n. 

� If the signal is bad, skip ahead to “Check 1st Lo SiiaI at Sampler/Mixer”. 

‘ItLble 8-2. 2nd IF (4 kHz) Signal Locations 

I Mnemonic I DeecrlPtlon I A10 Locatlou I slgual solute I 

lm 

IFA 

IFB 

4kHz AlOPl-1, 31 A4Pl-6 

4kHz AlOPl-4, 34 ASPl-6 

4kHz AlOPl-7, 37 A6Pl-6 

Receiver Troubleshooting 8-l 1

If the trace shows no improvement when the sampler correction constants are 

toggled from off to on, perform the “Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction 

Constants (Test 53)” adjustment described in Chapter 3, “Adjustments and 

Correction Constants” If the trace remains bad after this adjustment, the A10 

assembly is defective. 

(4 04 

Figure 8-7. Typical Trace with Sampler Correction On and off 

sg643d 


Check 1st LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer 

If the 4 kHz signal is bad at the sampler/mixer assembly, check the 1st LO signal 

where it enters the sampler/mixer assembly in question. 

� If the 1st LO is faulty, check the 1st LO signal at its output connector on the 

A7 assembly to determine if the failure is in the cable or the assembly. 

� If the 1st LO is good, continue with “Check 2nd LO SiiaI at Sampler/Mixer”. 

Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer 

Check the 2nd LO signal at the pins identified in ‘0ble 8-3. Refer to the “Al2 

Reference Check” in Chapter 7, “Source Troubleshooting”, for analog bus 

and oscilloscope checks of the 2nd LO and waveform illustrations ‘Ihble 8-3 

identifies the signal location at the samplers and the Al2 assembly. 

Mnemonic Description 

ZndL01 2nd Lo (0 degrees) 

2nd Lo 2 2nd Lo ( - 9O degrees) 

‘Ihble 8-3. 2nd LO Locations 

Sampler 

LOCdl0n 

A4/6/6 Pl-11 

A4lbl6 Pl-4 

SW 

soluce 

Al2Pl-2, 32 

Al2Pl-4, 34 

If the 2nd LO is good at the sampler/mixer, the sampler/mixer assembly is faulty. 

Otherwise, troubleshoot the Al2 assembly and associated signal path. 


Accessories Troubleshooting 


Here.” Follow the procedures in the order given, unless instructed otherwise. 

Measurement failures can be divided into two categories: 

� Failures which don’t affect the normal functioning of the analyzer but render 

incorrect measurement data. 

� Failures which impede the normal functioning of the analyzer or prohibit the 

use of a feature. 

This chapter addresses the First category of failures which are usually caused by 

the following: 

� operator errors 

� faulty calibration devices or connectors 

� bad cables or adapters 

w improper calibration techniques 

These failures are checked using the following procedures: 

� “Inspect the Accessories” 

� “Inspect the Error Terms” 

9 

AccessoriesTroubleshooting g-1













Verification and Performance Tests n 

9-2 Accessories Troubleshooting

Inspect the Accessories 

Inspect the Test Port Connectors and Calibration Devices 

1. Check for damage to the mating contacts of the test port center conductors 

and loose connector bulkheads. 

2. Inspect the calibration kit devices for bent or broken center conductors and 

other physical damage. Refer to the calibration kit operating and service 

manual for information on gaging and inspecting the device connectors. 

If any calibration device is obviously damaged or out of mechanical 

tolerance, replace the device. 

Inspect the Error ‘Ikmns 

Error terms are a measure of a “system”: a network analyzer, calibration kit, 

and any cables used. As required, refer to Chapter 11, “Error Terms,” for the 

following: 

� The specific measurement calibration procedure used to generate the error 

terms. 

� The routines required to extract error terms from the instrument. 

� Typical error term data. 

Use Table 9-l to cross-reference error term data to system faults 

Accessories Troubleshooting g-3

Component 


load 

open/short 

Analyzer 

sampler 

A10 d&ital IF 

tent port connector8 

External cablea 

‘lhble 9-l. Components Related to Specific Error ‘lkrms 

X 

X X 

X X X 

X X X X X X 

X 

X X 

If you detect problems using error term analysis, use the following approach to 

isolate the fault: 

1. Check the cable by examining the load match and transmission tracking 

terms. If those terms are incorrect, go to “Cable Test.” 

2. Verify the calibration kit devices: 

Loads: If the directivity error term looks good, the load and the test port 

are good. If directivity looks bad, connect the same load on the other test 

port and measure its directivity. If the second port looks bad, as if the 

problem had shifted with the load, replace the load. If the second port 

looks good, as if the load had not been the problem, troubleshoot the llrst 

port. 

Shorts and opens: If the source match and reflection tracking terms look 

good, the shorts and the opens are good. If these terms look bad while the 

rest of the terms look good, proceed to “Verify Shorts and Opens.” 

94 Accessories Troubleshooting

Cable Test 

The load match error term is a good indicator of cable problems. You can 

further verify a faulty cable by measuring the reflection of the cable. Perform 

an Sll l-port calibration directly at port 1 (no cables). Then connect the suspect 

cable to port 1 and terminate the open end in 50 ohms. 

Figure 9-l shows the return loss trace of a good (left side) and faulty cable. 

Note that the important characteristic of a cable trace is its level (the good cable 

trace is much lower) not its regularity. Refer to the cable manual for return loss 

specifications. 

CHl Sll log MAG 5dB/ REF 0 dB I-: -28.426 dB CHl Sll 

START 030 000 MHZ STOP 6 000.000 000 MHz 

log WAG 5 dB, REF 0 dB I-: -15.524 dE 

START 030 000 MHZ STOP 6 000.000 000 MHz 

Figure 9-1. Typical Return LOSS Traces of Good and Poor Cables 

sg642d 

Accessories Troubleshooting g-5

Verify Shorts and Opens 

Substitute a known good short and open of the same connector type and sex as 

the short and open in question. If the devices are not from one of the standard 

calibration kits, refer to the HP 8753E Network A~~~lyzer User’s Guide for 

hfomation on how to use the ~~~~~~~~~~~~ fMction* Set aside the short 

and open that are causing the problem. 

1. Perform an Sll l-port calibration using the good short and open. Then press 

zpQ&g,c,, 

. . . . .._. . ;ii.....:L.:!. i I-- ~~~~~~~~ 

-._- ..__.._... - . . . . .../.. 

to view the devices h S&h chart format. 

2. Come& the good shod to poti 1. Press c-1 ~~~~~~~~~ ad 

turn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace 

appears as a dot at the left side of the circle. (See Figure 9-2a, left.) 

Replace the good short with the questionable short at port 1. The trace of 

the questionable short should appear very similar to the known good short. 

3. CoMect *e good open to port 1. mess lscale, ~.~~~~~~~~ and 

turn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace 

appears as a dot at the right side of the circle. (See Figure 9-2b, right.) 

Replace the good open with the questionable open at port 1. The trace of the 

questionable open should appear very similar to the known good open. 

g-6 Accessories Troubleshooting

Figure 9-2. Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short (a) and Open (b) 

Accessories Troubleshooting 9-7

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 

Service Key Menus 

These menus allow you to perform the following service functions: 

� test 

� verify 

� adjust 

� control 

w troubleshoot 

The menus are divided into two groups: 

1. Internal Diagnostics 

2. Service Features 

When applicable, the HP-IB mnemonic is written in parentheses following the 

key. See HP-IB Service Mnemonic Definitions at the end of this section. 


The displayed messages that pertain to service functions are also listed in this 

chapter to help you: 

� Understand the message. 

� Solve the problem. 

10 

Sarvics Kay Menus and Error Messages 1 O-1

Service Key Menus - Internal Diagnostics 

The internal diagnostics menus are shown in Figure 10-l and described in the 

following paragraphs. The following keys access the internal diagnostics menus: 

sg6104e 

Note 

Figure 10-l. Internal Diagnostics Menus 

Throughout this service guide, these conventions are observed: 

o m are labeled front pane1 keys. 

� �� ␛ �� ␛� �� 

�� 

� (HP-IB COMMANDS) when applicable, follow the keystrokes 

in parentheses. 

1 O-2 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Tests Menu 

To access this menu, press w ~~~~~,~~ :,TlZYK$:. 

. i ._... / 

accesses a menu that allows you to select or execute 

the service tests The default is set to internal 

test 1. 

Note Descriptions of tests in each of the categories are given under 

the heading Z&Z Lkscript&nzs in the following pages. 

The tests are divided by function into the following 

categories: 

0 Internal Tests (O-20) 

� External Tests (21-26) 

� System Verification Tests (27-43) 

13 Adjustment Tests (44-58) 

� Display Tests (59-65) 

0 Test Patterns (66-80) 

‘lb access the tlrst test in each category, press the 

category softkey. To access the other tests, use the 

numeric keypad, step keys, or front panel knob. The 

test number, name, and status abbreviation will be 

displayed in the active entry area of the display. 

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-3

‘Ihble 10-l shows the test status abbreviation that appears on the display, its 

delinition, and the equivalent HP-IB code. The HP-IB command to output 

the test status of the most recently executed test is OUTPTESS. For more 

information, refer to “HP-IB Service Mnemonic Definitions” located at the end 

of this chapter. 

‘able 10-l. l’kst Status ‘kms 

Display Abbreviation Defiuition UF-IB code 

;;:>a “‘..‘.F 

_ _ 

PASS PASS 0 

FAIL FAIL 1 

-lP- lNFFmGlzEss 2 

WA) NOT AVAILABLE 3 

-ND- NOT DONE 4 

DONE DONE 6 

&@$@J$., ?&#@j (EmT) 

Lz:..... . . ..s.s...i . . .. . .::: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~~~.22> . . ..A.... ~.W~..> . . . . . . i . ...::: 

104 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 

runs the selected test and may display these 

softkeys: 

y ,, ‘.:.:..‘~::...:.:~.:.:.:.. ..:.:. . . . . :: :.:.: :.. :.:.I 

~~~~~~ (TEBl) continues the selected test. 

_....._ - ._..___.. -.__-..-.- 

.m (TESRB) alters correction constants during 

adjustment tests. 

:,..... 

:$&J&Y$ (TESR4) displays the next choice. 

.__..........__....._ ~~ - .._.. -. (TESR6) chooses the option indicated. 

,.,. .,.; 

~~~~~ (‘J-Em@ terminates _......_._..... -...-.. 

the test and returns to 

the tests menu. 

evaluates the analyzer’s internal operation. These 

tests are completely internal and do not require 

external connections or user interaction. 

evaluate the analyzer’s external operation. These 

additional tests require some user interaction (such 

as keystrokes).

Test Options Menu 

verifies the analyzer system operation by examining 

the contents of the measurement calibration arrays. 

The procedure is in the “System Verification and 

Performance Tests” chapter. Information about the 

calibration arrays is provided in the “Error Terms” 

chapter. 

generates and stores the correction constants. 

For more information, refer to the “Adjustments” 

chapter. 

checks for correct operation of the display and GSP 

board. 

accesses softkeys that affect the way tests (routines) 

run, or supply necessary additional data. 

resumes the test from where it was stopped. 

toggles the repeat function on and off. When the 

function is ON, the selected test will rtm 10,000 

times unless you press any key to stop it. The 

analyzer shows the current number of passes and 

fails. 

toggles the record function on and off. When the 

function is ON, certain test results are sent to 

a printer via HP-IB. This is especially useful for 

correction constants. The indent must be in 

system controller mode or pass control mode to 

print (refer to the “Printing, Plotting, and Saving 

Measurement Results” chapter in the HP 87533 

User’s Guidt?. 

selects either NORMal or SPeCiaL (tighter) limits for 

the Operator’s Check. The SPCL limits are useful for 

a guard band. 

accesses the following Edit List menu to allow 

modihcation of the external power loss data table. 


accesses the power loss/sensor lists menu: 

‘~~~~~~~~~~,~‘~~~~:. 

. . .._ . . . . . . .,.......,.... s . ..., . . . . . . . . . . ;.. . . . . . . . 

se1e&s the A or B power SenSOr 

calibration factor list for use in power meter 

calibration measurements. 

.& ,,~~~~~~~~~~:~~ (CALFSENA) aCCeSSeS 

L...AL..:~:.: . . . ..A. .._.... ..........i.........~; .:: ..:... ;:...: . ...&...L :.. 

the Edit List menu to allow modification of the 

calibration data table for power sensor A. 

~~~,~.~~~~~~~~~~~~.. (CALFSENB) acceSSeS 

the Edit List menu to allow modification of the 

calibration data table for power sensor B. 

~~~,~~~~~ (pOjVIJJST) acceSSeS the Edit I&t 

menu to allow modification of the external power 

loss data table that corrects coupled-arm power 

loss when a directional coupler samples the RF 

output. 

generates printed graphs of verification results when 

activated during a system verification. 

Edit List Menu To access this menu, press &Z&T) ~.~~~~~~~ 

.. . . . . . . . . . . . .._. L .,.,,,,,,,__ii~;~ _i i _; _ _: 

__ . . . . . . . _.I.i ,.... ; “‘,.,.,. 

fj$gi&@ 

__ i ,.,.,.,.,.............. 

‘#j%$$ (SEDI[D]) 

‘@$@’ (EDITDONE) 

1 O-6 Service Kay Menus and Error Messages 

selects a segment (frequency point) to be edited, 

deleted from, or added to the current data table. 

Works with the entry controls 

allows modification of frequency, cal factor and loss 

values previously entered in the current data table. 

deletes frequency, cal factor and loss values 

previously entered in the current data table. 

adds new frequency, cal factor and loss values to the 

current data table up to a maximum of 12 segments 

(frequency points, PTS). 

/ deletes _ _ the entire ctu~+~~data table (or list) when 

:i@; b pressed. &es #&: to avoid deletion. 

returns to the previous menu.

Self Diagnose Softkey 

. . . . . . . . . :i ..:: ..:... .:.: : . . . 

You cm access the self d@mos~ fundon by pressing I%@) ~~~~Jr.~..~~~~ 

.~~~~~~~~.~~~. This fun&ion examines, in order, the pass/fail status of ail 

internal tests and displays NO FAILURE FOUND if no tests have failed. 

If a failure is detected, the routine displays the assembly or assemblies most 

probably faulty and assigns a failme probability factor to each assembly. 

Test Descriptions 

The analyzer has up to 80 routines that test, verify, and adjust the instrument. 

This section describes those tests. 

Internal Tests 

This group of tests runs without external connections or operator interaction. 

All return a PASS or FAIL condition. All of these tests run on power-up and 

PRESET except as noted. 

0 ALL INT. Runs only when selected. It consists of internal tests 3-11, 

13-16, and 20. Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and 

see which failed. If aIl pass, the test displays a PASS status. Each test 

in the subset retains its own test status. 

1 PRESET. Runs the following subset of internal tests: first, the 

ROM/RAM tests 2, 3, and 4; then tests 5 through 11, 14, 15, and 16. If 

any of these tests fail, this test returns a FAIL status. Use the front 

panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed. If all pass, 

this test displays a PASS status. Each test in the subset retains its own 

test status. This same subset is available over HP-IB as “TST?“. It is not 

performed upon remote preset. 

2 ROM. Part of the ROMJRAM tests and cannot be nm separately. Refer 

to the “Digital Control Troubleshooting” chapter for more information. 

Service Kay Menus and Error Messages 1 O-7

3 SRAM RAM. Verifies the A9 CPU SRAM (long-term) memory with a 

non-destructive write/read pattern. A destructive version that writes 

over stored data at power-on can be enabled by changing the 4th 

switch position of the A9 CPU switch as shown in Figure 10-2. 

sge117e 

s400 


Normal Mode Destructive SRAM 

Test Enabled 

Figure 19-2. A9 CPU Switch Positions 

I 

Rocker Slide 

4 Main DRAM. Verifies the A9 CPU main memory (DRAM) with a 

non-destructive write/read test pattern. A destructive version of this 

test is run during power-on. 

For additional information, see Internal Tests (near the front of this 

section) and the “Digital Control Troubleshooting” chapter. 

1 O-8 Service Kay Menus and Error Messages

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

DSP WdRd. Verifies the ability of the main processor and the 

DSP (digital signal processor), both on the A9 CPU assembly, to 

communicate with each other through DRAM. This also verifies that 

programs can be loaded to the DSP, and that most of the main RAM 

access circuits operate correctly. 

DSP RAM. Verifies the A9 CPU RAM associated with the digital signal 

processor by using a write/read pattern. 

DSP ALU. Verifies the A9 CPU high-speed math processing portions of 

the digital signal processor. 

DSP Intrpt. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digitai signal processor to 

respond to interrupts from the A10 digital IF ADC. 

DIF Control. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to 

write/read to the control latches on the A10 digitaI IF 

DIF Canter. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to 

write/read to the triple divider on the A10 CPU. It tests the A9 

CPU data buffers and A10 digital IF, the 4 MHz clock from the Al2 

reference. 

DSP Control. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digital signal processor to 

write to the control latches on the A10 digital IF. Feedback is verified 

by the main processor. It primarily tests the A10 digital IF, but failures 

may be caused by the A9 CPU. 

Fr F&n Wr/Rd. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to 

write/read to the front panel processor. It tests the A2 front panel 

interface and processor,and A9 CPU data buffering and address 

decoding. (See also tests 23 and 24.) This runs only when selected. 

Rear mel. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to 

write/read to the rear panel control elements. It tests the Al6 rear 

panel, and A9 CPU data buffering and address decoding. (It does not 

test the HP-IB interface; for that, see the HP-IB Programming Guide.) 

This runs only when selected or with ALL INTERNAL. 

Post Reg. Polls the status register of the A8 post-regulator, and 

flags these conditions: heat sink too hot, inadequate air flow, or 

post-regulated supply shutdown. 

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-g

15 Frac N Cont. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to 

write/read to the control element on the Al4 fractional-N (digital) 

assembly. The control element must be functioning, and the 

fractional-N VCO must be oscillating (although not necessarily 

phase-locked) to pass. 

16 Sweep Trig. Tests the sweep trigger (L SWP) Iine from the Al4 

fractional-N to the A10 digital IF. The receiver with the sweep 

synchronizes L SWP. 

17 ADC Lin. It tests the linearity of the A10 digital IF ADC using the 

built-in ramp generator. The test generates a histogram of the ADC 

linearity, where each data point represents the relative “width” of a 

particular ADC code. Ideally, ah codes have the same width; different 

widths correspond to non-Iinearities 

18 ADC Ofs. This runs only when selected. It tests the ability of the 

offset DAC, on the A10 digit& IF’, to apply a bias offset to the IF signals 

before the ADC input. This runs only when selected. 

19 ABUS ‘Wt. Tests analog bus accuracy, by measuring several analog bus 

reference voltages (aII nodes from the A10 digitai IF). This runs only 

when selected. 

20 F’N Count. Uses the internal counter to count the Al4 fractional-N 

VCO frequency (120 to 240 MHz) and the divided fractional-N 

frequency (100 kHz). It requires the 100 kHz signal from Al2 and the 

counter gate signal from A10 to pass 

1 O-1 0 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

External Tests 

These tests require either external equipment and connections or operator 

interaction of some kind to run. Tests 30 and 60 are comprehensive front panel 

checks, more complete than test 12, that checks the front panel keys and knob 

entry. 

21 Port 1 Op Chk. Part of the “Operator’s Check” procedure, located 

in the “Start Troubleshooting” chapter. The procedure requires the 

external connection of a short to PORT 1. 

22 

Port 2 Op Cbk. Same as 21, but tests PORT 2. 

23 Fr Pan Seq. Tests the front panel knob entry and all A1 front panel 

keys, as well as the front panel microprocessor on the A2 assembly. It 

prompts the user to rotate the front panel knob, then press each key 

in an ordered sequence. It continues to the next prompt only if the 

current prompt is correctly satisfied. 

24 Fr Fan Diag. Similar to 23 above, but the user rotates the front panel 

knob or presses the keys in any order. This test displays the command 

the instrument received. 

25 ADC Hist. Factory use only. 

26 Source Ex. Factory use only. 

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-1 1

System Verification Tests 

These tests apply mainly to system-level, error-corrected verification and 

troubleshooting. Tests 27 to 31 are associated with the system verification 

procedure, documented in the “System Verification and Performance Tests” 

chapter. Tests 32 to 43 facilitate examining the calibration coefficient arrays 

(error terms) resuhing from a measurement calibration; refer to Chapter 11, 

“Error Terms,” for details. 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32-43 

Sys Ver Init. Recalls the initiaiization state for system verification 

from an HP 8753E verification disk, in preparation for a measurement 

calibration. It must be done before service internal tests 28, 29, 30, or 

31 are performed. 

Ver Dev 1. Recalls verification Iimits from disk for verification device 

#1 in aII applicable S-parameter measurements. It performs pass/fail 

Iimit testing of the current measurement. 

Ver Dev 2. Same as 28 above for device #2. 



CaI Coef 1-12. Copies error term data from a measurement calibration 

array to display memory. A measurement calibration must be complete 

and active. The de9nition of calibration arrays depends on the current 

calibration type. After execution, the memory is automatically 

displayed. Refer to Chapter 11, “Error Terms,” for details. 

lo-12 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Adjustment Tests 

The tests without asterisks are used in the procedures located in the 

“Adjustments” chapter of this manual, except as noted. 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

*Source Def. Writes default correction constants for rudimentary 

source power accuracy. Use this test before running test 47, below. 

*Pretune Def. Writes default correction constants for rudimentary 

phase lock pretuning accuracy. Use this test before running test 48, 

below. 

ABUS Cm. Measures three 6xed voltages on the ABUS, and generates 

new correction constants for ABUS amplitude accuracy in both high 

resolution and low resolution modes. Use this test before nmning test 

48, below. 

Source Cm. Measures source output power accuracy, flatness, and 

linearity against an external power meter via HP-IB to generate new 

correction constants Run tests 44, 45,46, and 48 first. 

Pretune Cm. Generates source pretune values for proper phase-locked 

loop operation. Run tests 44, 45, and 46 first. 

Disp 2 Ex. Not used in “Adjustments.” Writes the “secondary test 

pattern” to the display for adjustments. Press (Preset to exit this 

routine. 

IF Step Cm. Measures the gain of the IF ampliliers (A and B only) 

located on the A10 digital IF, to determine the correction constants for 

absolute amplitude accuracy. It provides smooth dynamic accuracy and 

absolute amplitude accuracy in the -30 dBm input power region. 

ADC Ofs Cm. Measures the A10 Digital IF ADC linearity 

characteristics, using an internal ramp generator, and stores values 

for the optimal operating region. During measurement, IF signals are 

centered in the optimal region to improve low-level dynamic accuracy. 

Sampler Cm. Measures the absolute amplitude response of the 

R sampler against an external power meter via HP-IB, then compares 

A and B, (magnitude and phase), against R. It improves the R input 

accuracy and AAYR tracking. 

Cav Osc Cm. Calculates the frequency of the cavity oscillator and the 

instrument temperature for effective spur avoidance. 

Service Key Menus and Error Messages lo-13

55 Serial Cor. Stores the serial number (input by the user in the Display 

Title menu) in EEPROM. This routine will not overwrite an existing 

serial number. 

56 

57 

58 

Option hr. Stores the option keyword (required for Option 002, 006, 

010 or any combination). 

Not used. 

Init EEPEOM. This test initializes certain EEPROM addresses to zeros 

and resets the display intensity correction constants to the default 

values. Also, the test will not alter the serial number and correction 

constants for Option 002, 006, and 010. 


Display Tests 

These tests return a PASS/FAIL condition. All six amber front panel LEDs will 

turn off if the test passes. Press m to exit the test. If any of the six LEDs 

remain on, the test has failed. 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

Dispkpu corn. Checks to con&n that the CPU can communicate with 

the A19 GSP board. The CPU writes all zeros, all ones, and then a 

walking one pattern to the GSP and reads them back. If the test fails, 

the CPU repeats the walking 1 pattern until I&%?) is pressed. 

DRAM cell. Tests the DRAM on A19 by writing a test pattern to the 

DRAM and then verifying that it can be read back. 

Main VRAM. Tests the VRAM by writing all zeros to one location in 

each bank and then writii all ones to one location in each bank. 

Finally a walking one pattern is written to one location in each bank. 

VRAM bank. Tests all the cells in each of the 4 VRAM banks 

VRAMhideo. Verifies that the GSP is able to successfully perform both 

write and read shift register transfers. It also checks the video signals 

LHSYNC, LVSYNC, and LBLANK to verify that they are active and 

toggling. 

RGB outputs. Confirms that the analog video signals are correct and it 

verifies their functionality. 

Inten DAC. Verifies that the intensity DAC can be set both low and 

high. 

Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1 O-1 5

Test Patterns 

Test patterns are used in the factory for display adjustments, diagnostics, 

and troubleshooting, but they are not used for field service. Test patterns 

are executed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . by . . . . . . . entering . . . . . . . the test number (66 through SO), then pressing 

~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~. me te,& pattem fl be displayed md the &aey 

~:.:.:..i.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.~.:.:.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~,~.~,~.~ _ ___ .,.. ,,,,,,.,.,... I .....,. ... 

. . . . . . . .:: . . . .::.: 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

labels blanked. ‘Ib increment to the next pattern, press softkey 1; to go back 

to a previous pattern, press softkey 2. To exit the test pattern and return the 

softkey labels, press softkey 8 (bottom softkey). The following is a description 

of the test patterns. 

66 ‘I&t Pat 1. Displays an all white screen for verifying the light output 

of the A18 display and checks for color purity. 

67-69 ‘l&t Pat 2-4. Displays a red, green, and blue pattern for verifying the 

color purity of the display and also the ability to independently control 

each color. 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 

‘I&t Pat 5. Displays an all black screen. This is used to check for 

stuck pixels. 

‘l&t Fat 6. Displays a 16-step gray scale for verifying that the A19 GSP 

board can produce 16 different amplitudes of color (in this case, white). 

The output comes from the RAM on the GSP board, it is then split. The 

signal goes through a video DAC and then to an external monitor or 

through some buffer amplifiers and then to the internal LCD display. 

If the external display looks good but the internal display is bad, then 

the problem may be with the display or the cable connecting it to the 

GSP board. This pattern is also very useful when using an oscilloscope 

for troubleshooting. The staircase pattern it produces will quickly show 

missing or stuck data bits 

Test Pat 7. Displays the following seven colors: Red, Yellow, Green, 

Cyan, Blue, Magenta and White. 

‘Ibest Fat 8. This pattern is intended for use with an external display. 

The pattern displays a color rainbow pattern for showing the ability 

of the A19 GSP board to display 15 colors plus white. The numbers 

written below each bar indicate the tint number used to produce that 

bar (0 & loo-pure red, 33=pure green, 67=pure blue). 

‘I&t Fat 9. Displays the three primary colors Red, Green, and Blue at 

four different intensity levels. You should see 16 color bands across 

the screen. Starting at the left side of the display the pattern is; Black 

four bands of Red (each band increasing in intensity) Black four bands 

lo-16 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

of Green (each band increasing in intensity) Black four bands of Blue 

(each band increasing in intensity) Black If any one of the four bits for 

each color is missing the display will not look as described. 

75 ‘lbst Pat 10. Displays a character set for showing the user ail 

the different types and sizes of characters available. Three sets 

of characters are drawn in each of the three character sizes. 125 

characters of each size are displayed. Characters 0 and 3 cannot be 

drawn and several others are really control characters (such as carriage 

return and line feed). 

76 l&t Pat 11. Displays a bandwidth pattern for verifying the bandwidth 

of the EXTERNAL display. It consists of multiple alternating white and 

black vertical stripes. Each stripe should be clearly visible. A limited 

bandwidth would smear these lines together. This is used to test the 

quality of the external monitor. 

77 ‘I&t Pat 12. Displays a repeating gray scale for troubleshooting, using 

an oscilloscope. It is similar to the 16 step gray scale but is repeated 32 

times across the screen. Each of the 3 outputs of the video palette will 

then show 32 ramps (instead of one staircase) between each horizontal 

sync pulse. This pattern is used to troubleshoot the pixel processing 

circuit of the A19 GSP board. 

78 ‘lbst PM. 13. Displays a convergence pattern for measuring the 

accuracy of the color convergence of the external monitor. 

79-80 l&t Pat 14-15. Displays crosshatch and inverse crosshatch patterns 

for testing color convergence, linearity,and alignment. This is useful 

when aligning the LCD display in the bezel. 


Service Key Menus - Service Features 

The service feature menus are shown in F’igure 10-3 and described in the 

following paragraphs. The following keys access the service feature menus: 

Service Modes Menu 

lo-18 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 

Figure 10-3. Service Feature Menus 

sg6103e 

allows you to control and monitor various circuits 

for troubleshooting. 

tests the Al3 and Al4 fractional-N circuits. It dOWS 

YOU to directly control and monitor the output 

frequency of the fractional-N synthesizer (10 MHz to 

60 MHZ). Set the instrument to CW sweep mode ami 

then set F’RACN TUNE ON.

:.:~l.L:.,z ) i 

k&g, ~~~~.‘~~~ 

., ,.......... 

.I /._.._..-/__//i AL.< A..> 

Change frequencies with the front panel keys or 

knob. The output of the Al4 assembly can be 

checked at A14Jl HI OUT (in high band) or A14J2 

LO OUT (in low band) with an oscilloscope, a 

frequency counter, or a spectrum analyzer. Siiai 

jumps and changes in shape at 20 MHz and 30 MHz 

when tuning up in frequency, and at 29.2 MHz and 

15 MHz when tuning down, are due to switching 

of the digital divider. This mode can be used with 

the SRC TUNE mode as described in “Source 


accesses the functions that ailow you to adjust the 

source: 

._ 

~~~~~ .~~~~~~~~ tests the p&me fun&ions 

of the phase lock and source assemblies Use 

the entry controls to set test port output to any 

frequency from 300 KHz to 6 GHz. When in this 

mode: 

� ~,~~ Set analyzer ..= . ..- ~ .(H( to CW frequency before pressing 

~~~~~~~.~. . 

� Test port output is 1 to 6 MHz above indicated 

(entered) frequency. 

� Instrument does not attempt to phase lock. 

o Residual FM increases. 

_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~..............i............................... . . . . _. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . ._ . .. . . _ . . :.; . . .,.,...,.,. . . . . . . . . .,.,. . / . . ,................. 

. . . . . . ./ . 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

~~~~~~ &ow you to change the somce 

tune frequency. 

_ ::..::::.: .;,_ . ,_; . . . . . . . . . _.,.,,.......,...,.,..................i .:.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ 

~~~~~~~~ 

,.i_i___ __ _..~ .,......_ _ ,,,.,. :.,. 

toggles the automatic leveling 

control (ALC) on and off. 

~.~~~~~~~~~ 

:. ..i 

::;:::... “.::::“:::::~::::::::~..:::.::::::::..:~:::::::::::::::::::::::::: .; ;..::::.: 

~~~~~~~~~~ 

~~.:.~.~.& . . . . . . . . . ..~... __ . . . . . . A,,.; . .,.,. i .,... 

~~~~~~~~~ 

. . . . ..c.. ii...........i 

m _ _ _ _ _; _ _ _ _i_i_ i 

.~~~~~~~~~~~~~. 

.,,....,,....... .::: ..::..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :

..,.,, _ _ _ . . . . . . . _.;.:..; ,........... ., . . . . . . . . . . . . 

~~~~~~~~~~~~(SM5) 

With this mode switched OFF, the source stays in 

the pretune mode and does not attempt to complete 

the phase lock sequence. Also, all phase lock error 

messages are disabled. The fractional-N circuits 

and the receiver operate normally. Therefore, the 

instrument sweeps, but the source is being driven by 

the pretune DAC in a stair-stepped fashion. 

Automatically attempts to determine new pretune 

values when the instrument encounters phase lock 

problems (for example, “harmonic skip”). With 

~~~~~~~~~~~ the frequencies and voltages do 

. . . . . . . . . . 

not change, like when they are attempting to 

determine new prettme values, so troubleshooting 

the phase-locked loop circuits is more convenient. 

This function may also be turned off to avoid 

pretune calibration errors in applications where 

there is a limited frequency response in the R 

(reference) channel. For example, in a high power 

test application, using band limited lllters for R 

channel phase locking. 

displays a phase lock sequence at the beginning of 

each band. This sequence normally occurs very 

rapidly, making it difficult to troubleshoot phase lock 

problems Switching this mode ON slows the process 

down, allowing you to inspect the steps of the phase 

lock sequence @retune, acquire, and track) by 

pausing at each step. The steps are indicated on the 

display, along with the channel (Cl or C2) and band 

number (Bl through B13). 

This mode can be used with PLL PAUSE to halt the 

process at any step. It can also be used with the 

analog bus counter. 

10-20 Service Key MenusandError Messages 

,;_; _ ,.... 

; _ _ .,.,., / 

used only with PLL DIAG mode. $J$#&~ indicates 

that it will continuously cycle through all steps of 

the phase lock sequence. ;@#J$&; holds it at any step 

of interest. This mode is useful for troubleshooting 

phase-locked loop problems 

Accesses the service modes more menu listed below.

Service Modes More Menu 

‘:&#dw . ;; /.i i IJHmij,, 

. . . . . . . . . . . . ii. . . 

;~.~.~~~~~~ :##g 

- .._^...................-.................... i 

Toggles the sampler correction routine ON, 

for normal operation, or OFF, for diagnosis or 

adjustment purposes 

Normal operating condition and works in 

conjunction with IF GAIN ON and OFF. The A10 

assembly includes a switchable attenuator section 

and an amplifier that amplitles low-level 4 kHz 

IF signals (for A and B inputs only). This mode 

allows the A10 IF section to automatically determine 

if the attenuator should be switched in or out. 

The switch occurs when the A or B input signal is 

approximately -30 dBm. 

Locks out the A10 IF attenuator sections for 

checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits, 

regardless of the amplitude of the A or B IF signal. 

Switches out both the A and B attenuation circuits; 

they cannot be switched independently. Be aware 

that input signal levels above -30 dBm at the 

sampler input will saturate the ADC and cause 

measurement errors. 

Switches in both of the A10 IF attenuators for 

checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits Small 

input signals will appear noisy, and raise the 

apparent noise floor of the instrument. 

,.,:,, 

,.( ,.,.;.~.~.~.~..~,,,.......: . . . . . . . j*................ .::: ,,,_; .__.. . . . . . . 

~~~~~~~~~~~~~; ($3~7) 

_ .,.,. i .-_ _ .-._.. :..T-.:.:.,.:.+L _/_ _ _ ,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,. _ _i .,... i 

For factory use only. 

. . . . . . . . .._ . . . . . . . 

~~~~~~~~~~~::~ Allows you to store the correction constants that 

reside in non-volatile memory (EEPROM) onto a 

disk. Correction constants improve instrument 

performance by compensating for specific operating 

variations due to hardware limitations (refer to the 

“Adjustments” chapter). Having this information on 

disk is useful as a backup, in case the constants are 

lost (due to a CPU board failure). Without a disk 

backup the correction constants can be regenerated 


Analog Bus 

Description of the Analog Bus 

manually, although the procedures are more time 

consuming. 

offsets the frequency of both the A3 YIG oscillator 

and the A3 cavity oscillator to avoid spurs _ _ which 

_ ..,. ,. . . . . ....:.:.: 

cannot othe&e be filtered out. ~~~~~~~i:~~~.; 

allows examination of these spurs for service. 

enables and disables the analog bus, described 

below. Use it with the analog in menu, 

(a description of this menu follows). 

The analog bus is a single multiplexed line that networks 31 nodes within the 

instrument. It can be controlled from the front panel, or through HP-IB, to 

make voltage and frequency measurements just like a voltmeter, oscilloscope, or 

frequency counter. The next few paragraphs provide general information about 

the structure and operation of the analog bus See “Analog Bus Nodes, n for a 

description of each individual node. Refer to the “Overall Block Diagram,” in 

the “Start Troubleshooting” chapter, to see where the nodes are located in the 

instrument. 

The analog bus consists of a source section and a receiver section. The source 

can be the following: 

� any one of the 31 nodes described in “Analog Bus Nodes” 

� the Al4 fractional-N VCO 

� the Al4 fractional-N VCO divided down to 100 kHz 

The receiver portion can be the following: 

� the main ADC 

� the frequency counter 

When analog bus traces are displayed, frequency is the x-axis. For a linear 

x-axis in time, switch to CW time mode (or sweep a single band). 


The Main ADC 

The main ADC is located on the A1~~~digita.l IF assembly and makes voltage 

::: ;:: .;

Select this menu to monitor voltage and frequency nodes, using the analog bus 

and internal counter, as explained below. 

lb switch on the analog bus and access the analog in menu, press: 

‘I’he ~~~~~,~~~~~~~~~~~ key toggles between low and high resolution. 

., 

R4%3OlIltiOIl -SW MiIlimnm8ignal 

LOW +0.5 v -0.5 v 

HIGH +lOV -10 v 

~~~~~~~~~~~ &lows you to monitor the adog bus nodes (except nodes 

1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 12) with external equipment (osciIloscope, 

voltmeter, etc). To do this, connect the equipment to the 

AUX 

_ 

INPUT 

-:..::;)., 

BNC . . . . . . connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on . . . . the rear panel, and press 

~~~~;~ stilly is highlighted. 

_.._........ - , 

Caution To prevent damage to the analyzer, Ilrst connect the signal to 

the rear panel AUX INPUT, and then switch the function ON. 

switches the internal counter off and removes the counter 

display from the display. The counter can be switched on 

with one of the next three keys. (Note: Using the counter 

slows the sweep.) The counter bandwidth is 16 MHz unless 

otherwise noted for a specific node. 

Note OUTPCNTR is the HP-IB command to output the counter’s 

frequency data. 


switches the counter to monitor the analog bus. 

switches the counter to monitor the Al4 fractional-N 

VCO frequency at the node shown on the “Overall Block 

Diagram, m in the “Start Troubleshooting” chapter. 

switches the counter to monitor the Al4 fractional-N VCO 

frequency after it has been divided down to 100 kHz for 

phase locking the VCO. 

ServiseKeyMenusandErrorMessages lo-26

Analog Bus Nodes 

The following paragraphs describe the 31 analog bus nodes. The nodes are listed 

in numerical order and are grouped by assembly. Refer to the “Overall Block 

Diagram” for node locations. 

A3 Source 

‘Ib observe six of the eight A3 analog bus nodes (not node 5 or 8), perform 

step A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then follow the node 

specific instructions. 

1 O-26 Service by Menus and Error Messages

Node 1 Bh Fwr DAC (main power DAC) 

Perform step A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press m 

,..,.,,..;. 

dklJ&ti# J$ fg Ixl) (Scale) .~~~~~~. 

Node 1 is the output of the main power DAC. It sets the reference voltage to the 

ALC loop. At normal operation, this node should read approximately -4 volts at 

0 dBm with a slope of about -150 mV/dB. This corresponds to approximately 

4 volts from -15 to + 10 dBm. 

START -15 B dh cw 3 888.088 am PtHZ STOP IB 0 am 

sg6262d 

Figure 10-4. Analog Bus Node 1 


Node 2 Src lV/GHz (source 1 volt per GHz) 

Press the following to view analog bus node 2: 

Node 2 measures the voltage on the internal voltage controlled oscillator. Or, in 

normal operation, it should read -lV/GHz. 

W-28 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 

sg6263d 

Figure 10-5. Analog Bus Node 2

Node 3 Amp Id (ampltier current) 

Press the following keys to view analog node 3: 

Node 3 measures the current that goes to the main IF amplifier. At normal 

operation this node should read about: 

15 mA from 30 kHz to 299 kHz 

130 mA from 300 kHz to 3 GHz 

500 mA from 3 GHz to 6 GHz 


Node 4 Det (detects RF OUT power level) 

Perform step A3, described previously, to set up a power sweep on the analog 

Node 5 lkmp (temperature sensor) 

This node registers the temperature of the cavity oscillator which must be 

known for effective spur avoidance. The sensitivity is 10 mV/” C. The oscillator 

changes frequency slightly as its temperature changes. This sensor indicates the 

temperature so that the frequency can be predicted. 

Node 6 Integ (ALC leveling integrator output) 

Perform ..?... ,;.? ,.=; step

Node 7 Log (log ampliiier output detector) 

Perform step .:::: A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press LMeas) 

.:.. :,::: :::,::::::,::.,..::,~~ ,. ‘;:~~p;$~~: p’ 

:~~~~.~.~~~~~ :~~.~;;:.:.:.~~~.:.~.:,..~ _i iii .,.,.,.,.,...,...,....,., ._ @ (XJ @izzTq ~~~~~~~~~:. 

Node 7 displays the output of a logger circuit in the ALC loop. The trace should 

be a linear ramp with a slope of 33 mv/dB with approximately 0 volts at 

-3 dBm. Absolute voltage level variations are normal. Flat segments indicate 

ALC saturation and should not occur between -15 dBm and + 10 deem. 

The proper waveform at node 7 indicates that the circuits in the A3 source ALC 

loop are normal and the source is leveled. 

Node 8 A3 Gnd (ground) 

1 O-32 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 

t i i i i i i i i i 1 

sg6267d 


AlODigitalIF 

‘Ib observe the A10 analog bus nodes, perform step AlO, below. Then follow the 

node-specific instructions 

Step AlO. 

Press: 

Node9 +0.37 V(+O.37 V reference) 

.~,,‘....:..~:...:.:.:....~I.~:~:.:.’ . . . . . ::.::.:.:::.: ;..: i~.~.~.~.~.~.~ ~::::: 

Perform 

; 

step AlO, above, and then press IMeas) ~~~~~~~~~: 

Check for a flat line at approximately + 0.37 V. This is used as the voltage 

reference in the “Analog Bus Correction Constants” adjustment procedure. The 

voltage level should be the same in high and low resolution; the absolute level is 

not critical. 

Node10 +2.50 V(+2.50 V reference) 


Node 11 Aux Input (rear panel input) 

. . . . 

Perform step A10 and then press (Meas) -#JAI,Zi$.@# (iJ (TJ (ZJ. 

This selects the rear panel AUX INPUT to drive the analog bus for voltage 

and frequency measurements It can be used to look at test points within the 

instrument, using the analyzer’s display as an oscilloscope. Connect the test 

point of interest to the rear panel AUX INPUT BNC connector. 

This feature can be useful if an oscilloscope is not available. Also, it can be used 

for testing voltage-controlled devices by connecting the driving voltage of the 

device under test to the AUX IN connector. Look at the driving voltage on one 

display channel, while displaying the S-parameter response of the test device on 

the other display channel. 

_ _ . . . . . _ . . 

With - .JKK&&%EY ,,.:.:::. * - . . :::: . . . . . . . . . . %.,., . . . . . . . . . . . switched ON, you can examine the analyzer’s analog bus nodes 

with eaem& equipment (see ~~~~~‘~~~ 

-.-._...-._........i. 1..........._..... >..A.: . 

&f$~; 

. . .

Node 14 Mb Ref (ECL reference voltage level) 

. . . . . ..,.:.. .:::: :.:.:.:.::.. . . . .._ : / .s.:.. 

Perform step Al 1 and then press IMeas) $&$$X&$ rmr” (141 a w @ Ixl] 

... ;:c,: . . .

Node 15 Pretune (open-loop source pretune voltage) 

This node displays the source pretune signal and should look like a stair-stepped 

ramp. Each step corresponds to the start of a band. 



Node 16 lV/GHz (source oscillator tuning voltage) 

. . . . . . . i . . . . . . .::::. . . . . 

Perform step A11 and then press m .. ‘$@&$%:Z# . . . . Li . . i::::.:._;;~ ... . . ~.~.C.Z ....... . . . (161 @J (Z&TZ] 

. iimo@m. 

. . . . . Li i . . . . . . . . . . . ;2 

This node displays the tuning voltage ramp used to tune the source oscillator. 

You should see a voltage ramp like the one shown in Figure 10-12. If this 

waveform is correct, you can be confident that the All phase lock assembly, 

the A3 source assembly, the A13/A14 fractional-N assemblies, and the A7 pulse 

generator are working correctly and the instrument is phase locked. If you see 

anything else, refer to the “Source Troubleshooting” chapter. 

sg6270d 


Service Key Menus and Error Messages 1037

Node 17 1st IF (IF used for phase lock) 

Vary the frequency and compare the results to the table below. 

Entered Frequency Counter Reading 

I 

0.2 to 15.999 MHz same as entered 

16MHzto6GHz 1MI-h 

This node displays the IF frequency (see node17) as it enters the All phase lock 

assembly via the A4 R sampler assembly. This signal comes from the R sampler 

output and is used to phase lock the source. 

1 O-38 Service Key Menus and Error Messages 

sg6271 d 

Figure 10-13. Counter Readout Location

Node 18 IF Det 2N (IF on All phase lock after 3 MHz filter) 

Perform step A11 and then press B ~~~~~:~~~ L18) (xl) m L20) m 

(j-Ref_J ~~~~~~~ 

.._................... i < ::. 

This node detects the IF within the low pass IIIter/iimiter. The IiIter is used 

during the track and sweep sequences but never in band l(3.3 to 16 MHz). The 

low level (about -1.7 V) means IF is in the passband of the 6Iter. This node can 

be used with the FRAC N TUNE and SRC TUNE service modes. 

sg6272d 


Node 19 IF Det 2W (IF after 16 MHz IUter) 

This node detects IF after the 16 MHz fiIter/iimiter. The 6Iter is used during 

pretune and acquire, but not in band 1. Normal state is a flat Iine at about 

-1.7 v. 


Node 20 IF Det 1 (IF after 30 MHz filter) 

. . . . . . . . . . . . .. ...:. i . . . . . _ . _ _ _ ,.. 

perfvrm step A11 and then press (Meas) - ,~~~~~~~~~~~ .._ - .____..__............... (YZJ @ I&ZTG) @ Ixl) 

::~~~~~~~~ m a). 

- .._. :..:...: ............. ~.:.:

Node 21 100 kH2 (100 kH2 reference frequency) 

Perform step Al2 and then press (EJJ .._.............._.................. ~~~~~~~:~~~.~~ .: .._ L21) Lxl) 

- ~~~~~.~~~~~~ .._......_.......................................... I i:.... i.......:... .

Node 24 2nd LO 

perform step A12 ad then press m ~~~~~~~~~~ (241@ 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. i,,_ . . . . . . _ __....,._ :.~:.:.:.~ 

This node counts the 2nd LO used by the sampler/mixer assemblies to produce 

the 2nd IF of 4 kHz. As you vary the frequency, the counter reading should 

change to values very close to those indicated below: 

1 F’reqnency Entered 1 CounterReading ) 

Node 25 PL Ref (phase lock reference) 

perform step A12 ad then press m ~~~~~~~~ 125) Lxl] 

.._; _ 

~~~~~,~~~~~~~: LMenu) ~~~~~~~~,. 

L .._............ ii... .:::: .:. . . . . :.._ s. 

This node counts the reference signal used by the phase comparator circuit on 

the All phase lock assembly. As you vary the frequency, the counter reading 

should change as indicated below: 

1042 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Node 26 Ext l&f (rear panel external reference input) 

Perform step Al2 and then press B &@@~ :Ihl 126) Lxl). 

The voltage level of this node indicates whether an external reference timebase 

is being used: 

� No external reference: about -0.9 V 

� With external reference: about -0.6 V. 

Node 27 VCXO Tune (40 MHz VCXO tuning voltage) 

Perform step Al2 and then press IMeas) _.......................................~. :;~~~~~..~~ i i L27) @ cj) 

...... ..;. * .% /....................... _., .,__ 

&&&& ” - “#g&f&? % 

:::: . . . . . . . . . . . :.:..>+% ..__ 2 ./ ._._ .;...:. T.... ;.s - i.... -s: I i ./ ..Y.... :.. 

This node displays the voltage used to fine tune the Al2 reference VCXO to 

40 MHz. You should see a flat line at some voltage level (the actual voltage level 

varies from instrument to instrument). Anything other than a flat line indicates 

that the VCXO is tuning to different frequencies. Refer to the “Frequency 

Accuracy” adjustment procedure. 

Node 28 Al2 Gnd 2 (Ground reference) 

Al4 Fractional-N (Digital) 

lb observe the Al4 analog bus nodes perform step A14, below. Then follow the 

node-specific instructions. 

Step A14. 

Press: 


Node 29 FN VU3 Tun (Al4 FN VCO tuning voltage) 

_ _ _ / . . . . . . . . . .:.. 

Perform step Al4 and then press LMeas) ~~~~~~~‘;;~# (29) @J c-1 

~~~~~~~ 

Observe the Al4 F’N VCO tuning voltage. If the Al3 and Al4 assemblies are 

functioning correctly and the VCO is phase locked, the trace should look Iike 

Figure 10-17. Any other waveform indicates that the FN VCO is not phase 

locked. The vertical lines in the trace indicate the band crossings. (The counter 

can also be enabled to count the VCO frequency in CW mode.) 


sg6274d 


Node 30 FN VC0 Det (Al4 VC0 detector) 

See whether the F’N VCO is oscillating. The trace should resemble Figure 10-18. 

sg6275d 


Node 31 Count Gate (analog bus counter gate) 

You should see a flat line at + 5 V across the operating frequency range. The 

counter gate activity occurs during bandswitches, and therefore is not visible 

on the analog bus. To view . . . . the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bandswitch activity, @ok at..$is node on an 

oscilloscope, using ~~~~~~~~. Refer to ~~~~~~~~~.-~~~~~~ mder the Analog 

. . . .L......... . . 

. . . . . . ..L . .. . ..A .A? . . . ..w................ . .,.,,.. A.A... :.:.:,.;: ,.,. i .,.,.,.,.,.~.,.,.,.,.,.~.,. i ,.,.,.~....... i . . . n . . . . . . _ . . _ _,,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,,/._i 

Bus Menu heading. 


PEEK/POKE Menu 

m acceSS tl& menu, press Csystem_l ~~~:~~~~~~r, ~p.&@~~ 

:........: 2.: .: i::::::: ;;....~.~~~.~~.~;.;;~..:: ,... ‘. z . ../ ?Z

Firmware Revision Softkey 

_.., .., 

Ress ~'~~~~~~~,~~~ ~~~~~,~~~~,~~~~to &play the current 

.//. I..i./........ ;.............................~..ii..~~..~~~...~ ..A. .:... ._._..........................-...................-..........-..-.............. 

flrmware revision information. The number and implementation date appear 

in the active entry area of the display as shown in Figure lo-19 below. The 

analyzer’s serial number and installed options are also displayed. Another way 

to display the Grmware revision information is to cycle the line power. 

I REFO dB 

START .030 000 MHz STOP 6 000.000 000 MHz 

dg632e 

Figure 10-19. Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display 


HP-IB Service Mnemonic Definitions 

Ah service routine keystrokes can be made through HP-IB in one of the 

following approaches: 

w sending equivalent remote HP-IB commands. (Mnemonics have been 

documented previously with the corresponding keystroke.) 

� invoking the System Menu (MENUSYST) and using the analyzer mnemonic 

(SCFTn), where “nn represents the softkey number. (Softkeys are 

numbered 1 to 8 from top to bottom.) 

An HP-IB overview is provided in the “Compatible Peripherals” chapter in 

the User’s ouide. HP-IB programming information is also provided in the 

Programming Guide. 

Invoking Tests Remotely 

Many tests require a response to the displayed prompts. Since bit 1 of the Event 

Status Register B is set (bit 1 = service routine waiting) any time a service 

routine prompts the user for an expected response, you can send an appropriate 

response using one of the following techniques: 

� Read event status register B to reset the bit. 

� Enable bit 1 to interrupt (ESNB[D]). See “Status Reporting” in the 

Programming Guide. 

w Respond to the prompt with a TESRn command (see Tests Menu, at the 

beginning of this chapter). 

Symbol Conventions 

[I An optional operand 

D A numericaI operand 

A necessary appendage 

I 

An either/or choice in appendages 

1048 Service Key Menus and Error Messages

Analog Bus Codes 

OUTPCNTR 

OUTPERRO 

OUTPTESS 

TST? 

Measures and displays the analog input. The preset state 

input to the analog bus is the rear panel AUX IN. The other 

30 nodes may be selected with ip., only if the AEKJS is 

enabled (ANABon). 

Outputs the counter’s frequency data. 

Reads any prompt message sent to the error queue by a 

service routine. 

Outputs the integer status of the test most recently 

executed. Status codes are those listed under “TST?“. 

Executes the power-on self test (internal test 1) and 

outputs an integer test status. Status codes are as follows: 

0 =pass 

1 =fail 

2 =in progress 

3 =not available 

4 =not done 

5 =done 



This section contains an alphabetical list of the error messages that pertain to 

servicing the analyzer. The information in the list includes explanations of the 

displayed messages and suggestion to help solve the problem. 

Note The error messages that pertain to measurement applications 

are included in the HP 8753E Network Anulgzer User’s Guide. 

BATTERY FAILED. STATE MEMORY CLEARED 

Error Number The battery protection of the non-volatile SRAM memory has 

183 failed. The SRAM memory has been cleared. Refer to the 

“Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures” chapter 

for battery replacement instructions See the “Preset State and 

Memory Allocation, n chapter in the HP 87533 Network Anulgm 

User’s Guide for more information about the SRAM memory. 

BATTERY LOW! STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK 

Error Number The battery protection of the non-volatile SRAM memory is in 

184 danger of failing. If this occurs, all of the instrument state 

registers stored in SRAM memory will be lost. Save these states 

to a disk and refer to the “Assembly Replacement and 

Post-Repair Procedures” chapter for battery replacement 

instructions. See the “Preset State and Memory Allocation,” 

chapter in the HP 8753E Network Anulgzer User’s Guide for 

more information about the SRAM memory. 

CALIBRATION ABORTED 

Error Number You have changed the active channel during a calibration so the 

74 calibration in progress was terminated. Make sure the 

appropriate channel is active and restart the calibration. 

1 O-50 Service Ksy Menus and Error Messages

CALIBRATION REQUIRED 

Error Number A calibration set could not be found that matched the current 

63 stimulus state or measurement parameter. You will have to 

perform a new calibration. 

CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED 

Error Number A store operation to the EEPROM was not successful. You must 

3 change the position of the jumper on the A9 CPU assembly. 

Refer to the “A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure” in the 

“Adjustments and Correction Constants” chapter. 

CORRECTION TURNED OFF 

Error Number Critical parameters in your current instrument state do not 

66 match the parameters for the calibration set, therefore 

correction has been turned off. The critical instrument state 

parameters are sweep type, start frequency, frequency span, 

and number of points 

CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET 

Error Number Correction is not valid for your selected measurement 

64 parameter. Either change the measurement parameters or 

perform a new calibration. 

DEADLOCK 

Error Number A fatal hrmware error occurred before instrument preset 

111 completed. 


DEVICE:noton,notconnect, wrong addrs 

Error Number The device at the selected address cannot be accessedbythe 

119 analyzer. Verify that the device is switched on, and check the 

HP-IB connection between the analyzer and the device. Ensure 

that the device address recognized by the analyzer matches the 

HP-IB address set on the device itself. 

DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM 

Error Number The disk drive is not responding correctly. Refer to the disk 

39 drive operating manual. 

DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR 

Error Number The analyzer and the external disk drive aren’t communicating 

190 properly. Check the HP43 connection and then try substituting 

another disk drive to isolate the problem instrument. 

DISK:noton,not connected, wrong addrs 

Error Number The disk cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify power to 

38 the disk drive, and check the HP-B3 connection between the 

analyzer and the disk drive. Ensure that the disk drive address 

recognized by the analyzer matches the HP-IB address set on 

the disk drive itself. 


DISK READ/WRITE ERROR 

Error Number There may be a problem with your disk. Try a new floppy disk. 

189 If a new floppy disk does not eliminate the error, suspect 

hardware problems. 

INITIALIZATION FAILED 

Error Number The disk initialization failed, probably because the disk is 

47 damaged. 

INSUFFICIENTMEMORY,PURMTRCAL OFF 

Error Number There is not enough memory space for the power meter 

154 calibration array. Increase the available memory by clearing one 

or more save/recall registers, or by reducing the number of 

points 

NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY I N PROGRESS 

Error Number The ~~~~~~~~~~~; softkey is not valid unless a 

_ _i .,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,...,.,......,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,. _ _ _ _ i.,i . . . . . . . . i . . . . . . . _ 

69 calibration is already in progress. Start a new calibration. 

NOTENOUGHSPACEONDISKFORSTORE 

Error Number The store operation will overflow the available disk space. 

44 Insert a new disk or purge files to create free disk space. 


NO FILE(S) FOUND ONDISK 

Error Number No files of the type created by an analyzer store operation were 

45 found on the disk. If you requested a specific hle title, that hle 

was not found on the disk. 

NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 

Error Number The first IF signal was not detected during pretune. Check the 

5 front panel R channel jumper. If there is no visible problem 

with the jumper, refer to the “Source Troubleshooting” chapter. 

NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL 

Error Number The tist IF signal was detected at pretune, but phase lock could 

7 not be acquired. Refer to the “Source Troubleshooting” chapter. 

NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL. CLEAR REGISTERS 

Error Number You cannot store a calibration set due to insufficient memory. 

70 You can free more memory by clearing a saved instrument state 

from an internal register (which may also delete an associated 

calibration set, if all the instrument states using the calibration 

kit have been deleted.) You can store the saved instrument state 

and calibration set to a disk before clearing them. After deleting 

the instrument states, press w to run the memory packer. 


NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL 

Error Number When the analyzer is performing a power meter calibration, the 

198 HP-IB bus is unavailable for other functions such as printing or 

plotting. 

OVER LOAD ON INPUT A, POWER REDUCED 

Error Number See error number 57. 

58 

OVER LOAD ON INPUT B, POWER REDUCED 

Error Number See error number 57. 

59 

OVER LOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED 

Error Number You have exceeded approximately + 14 dBm at one of the test 

57 ports, The RF output power is automatically reduced to 

-85 dBm. The annotation PJL appears in the left margin of the 

display to indicate that the power trip function has been 

activated. When this occurs, reset the power to a lower level, 

aen toggle the ~~~-~~~~~:~~~~~~ softkey to sMtch on Q,e 

_ . . ..i . . . . _ . . . . . . _ .,.,. .~ _,_ L,,,>>>B ,.,.: .,.,. _ _ i _ z.:.z.:.:.u. 

power again. 

PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO 

Error Number You have dellned the parallel port as COPY for sequencing in 

165 the HP-IB menu. ‘lb access the parallel port for general purpose 

I/O (GPIO), set the selection to [GPIO]. 


PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY 

Error Number You have dellned the parallel port as general purpose I/O (GPIO) 

167 for sequencing. The definition was made under the (Local key 

menus. To access the pamIle port for copy, set the selection to 

~~~~:~~:.~~ 

. . . . . . . . . i I:: ,.,,, .~~.~~~~,;~;. .” - 

PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED 

Error Number An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically 

4 executed at power-on, preset, and any time a loss of phase lock 

is detected. This message indicates that phase lock calibration 

was initiated and the first IF detected, but a problem prevented 

the calibration from completing successfully. Refer to Chapter 

3, “Adjustments and Correction Constants” and execute pretune 

correction (test 48). 

This message may appear if you connect a mixer between the 

RF’ output and R input before turning on frequency offset mode. 

Ignore it: it will go away when you turn on frequency offset. 

This message may also appear if you turn on frequency offset 

mode before you define the offset. 

PHASE LOCK LOST 

Error Number Phase lock was acquired but then lost. Refer to the “Source 

8 Troubleshooting” chapter. 


POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK 

Error Number Phase lock has been achieved, but the source may be phase 

6 locked to the wrong harmonic of the synthesizer. Perform the 

source pretune correction routine documented in the 

“Adjustments and Correction Constants” chapter. 

POWER METER INVALID 

Error Number The power meter indicates an out-of-range condition. Check the 

116 test setup. 

POWER METER NOT SETTLED 

Error Number Sequential power meter readings are not consistent. Verify that 

118 the equipment is set up correctly. If so, preset the instrument 

and restart the operation. 

POWER SUPPLY HOT! 

Error Number The temperature sensors on the A8 post-regulator assembly 

21 have detected an over-temperature condition. The power 

supplies regulated on the post-regulator have been shut down. 

Refer to the “Power Supply Troubleshooting” chapter. 

POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN! 

Error Number One or more supplies on the A8 post-regulator assembly have 

22 been shut down due to an over-current, over-voltage, or 

under-voltage condition. Refer to the “Power Supply 



POWER UNLEVELED 

Error Number There is either a hardware failure in the source or you have 

179 attempted to set the power level too high. Check to see if the 

power level you set is within specillcations. If it is, refer to the 

“Source Troubleshooting” chapter. You will only receive this 

message over the HP-IB. On the analyzer, P? is displayed. 

PRINTER: error 

Error Number The parallel port printer is malfunctioning. The analyzer cannot 

175 complete the copy function. 

PRINTER: not handshaking 

Error Number The printer at the parallel port is not responding. 

177 

PRINTER: noton, not connected, wrongaddrs 

Error Number The printer does not respond to control. Verify power to the 

24 printer, and check the HP-IB connection between the analyzer 

and the printer. Ensure that the printer address recognized by 

the analyzer matches the HP-B3 address set on the printer itself. 

PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN! 

Error Number The analyzer biasing supplies to the HP 85024A external probe 

23 are shut down due to excessive current. Troubleshoot the 

probe, and refer to the “Power Supply Troubleshooting” chapter. 


PWR MTR: NOT ON/CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDRS 

Error Number The power meter cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify 

117 that the power meter address and model number set in the 

analyzer match the address and model number of the actual 

power meter. 

SAVE FAILED. INSUFFICIENT MEMORY 

Error Number You cannot store an instrument state in an internal register due 

151 to insufficient memory. Increase the available memory by 

clearing one or more save/recall registers and pressing m, or 

by storing files to a disk. 

SELFTFST #n FAILED 

Service Error Internal test #n has failed. Several internal test routines are 

Number 112 executed at instrument preset. The analyzer reports the first 

failme detected. Refer to the internal tests and the 

self-diagnose feature descriptions earlier in this chapter. 

SOURCEPOWERTLJRNElDOFF, RESET UNDER POWERMENU 

Information You have exceeded the maximum power level at one of the 

Message inputs and power has been automatically reduced. The 

annotation P+ indicates that power trip has been activated. 

When this occurs, reset the power and then press LMenu) &J@ 

.~~~~~:.~~~~~~~~~~. 

. . . . . . ;.;,.,.,.,; . . . . . . . . .:: . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .::::. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

,,......... . . . . . .;... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

t to sdtc., on the power. This message 

follows error numbers 57, 58, and 59. 


SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP 

Error Number If you select external source auto or manuai instrument mode 

187 and you do not also select CW mode, the anaIyzer is 

automatically switched to CW. 

TEST ABORTED 

Error Number You have prematurely stopped a service test. 

113 

TROUBLE! CHECK SETUP AND START OVER 

Service Error Your equipment setup for the adjustment procedure in progress 

Number 115 is not correct. Check the setup diagram and instructions in the 

“Adjustments and Correction Constants” chapter. Start the 

procedure again. 

WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALIZE DISK 

Error Number You have attempted to store, load, or read hle titles, but your 

77 disk format does not conform to the Logical Interchange Format 

(LIF). You must initialize the disk before reading or writing to it. 

lo-60 Service Key Menus and Error Massages

Error lkrms 

The analyzer generates and stores factors in internal arrays when a 

measurement error-correction (measurement calibration) is performed. These 

factors are known by the following terms: 

� error terms 

� E-terms 

� measurement calibration coefficients 

11 

The analyzer creates error terms by measuring well-deflned calibration devices 

over the frequency range of interest and comparing the measured data with the 

ideal model for the devices The differences represent systematic (repeatable) 

errors of the analyzer system. The resulting calibration coefficients are good 

representations of the systematic error sources. For details on the various levels 

of error-correction, refer to the “Optimizmg Measurement Results” chapter of 

the HP 8753E Network Anulger User’s Guide. For details on the theory of 

error-correction, refer to the “Application and Operation Concepts” chapter of 

the HP 8753E Network Anulgm User’s Guide. 

Error YLlxms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose 

Specific parts of the analyzer and its accessories directly contribute to the 

magnitude and shape of the error terms Since we know this correlation and we 

know what typical error terms look like, we can examine error terms to monitor 

system performance (preventive maintenance) or to identify faulty components 

in the system (troubleshooting). 

� Preventive Maintenance: A stable, repeatable system should generate 

repeatable error terms over long time interval% for example, six months 

If you make a hardcopy record (print or plot) of the error terms, you can 

periodically compare current error terms with the record. A sudden shift in 

error terms reflects a sudden shift in systematic errors, and may indicate 

the need for further troubleshooting. A long-term trend often reflects drift, 

Error Terms 11-l

connector and cable wear, or gradual degradation, indicating the need for 

further investigation and preventive maintenance. Yet, the system may still 

conform to specifications. The cure is often as simple as cleaning and gaging 

connectors or inspecting cables. 

� Troubleshooting: If a subtle failme or mild performance problem is 

suspected, the magnitude of the error terms should be compared against 

values generated previously with the same instrument and calibration kit. 

This comparison will produce the most precise view of the problem. 

However, if previously generated values are not available, compare the 

current values to the typical values listed in Table 11-2, and shown graphically 

on the plots in this chapter. If the magnitude exceeds its limit, inspect the 

corresponding system component. If the condition causes system verification 

to fail, replace the component. 

Consider the following while troubleshooting: 

� All parts of the system, including cables and calibration devices, can 

contribute to systematic errors and impact the error terms. 

� Connectors must be clean, gaged, and within specification for error term 

analysis to be meaningful. 

� Avoid unnecessary bending and flexing of the cables following measurement 

calibration, minimizing cable instability errors. 

� Use good connection techniques during the measurement calibration. 

The connector interface must be repeatable. Refer to the “Principles 

of Microwave Connector Care” section in the “Service Equipment and 

Analyzer Options” chapter for information on connection techniques and on 

cleaning and gaging connectors. 

� Use error term analysis to troubleshoot minor, subtle performance problems. 

Refer to the “Start Troubleshooting Here” chapter if a blatant failme or 

gross measurement error is evident. 

� It is often worthwhile to perform the procedure twice (using two distinct 

measurement calibrations) to establish the degree of repeatability. If the 

results do not seem repeatable, check all connectors and cables. 

1 l-2 Error Terms

FuU Two-Port Error-Correction Procedure 

Note This is the most accurate error-correction procedure. Since the 

analyzer takes both forward and reverse sweeps, this procedure 

takes more time than the other correction procedures. 

1. Set any measurement parameters that you want for the device 

measurement: power, format, number of points, IF bandwidth. 

2. To access the measurement correction menus, press: 

3. If your calibration kit is different than the kit specified under the 

‘T ..,..,:,. :

FOR I SOLAT ION 



ag, 

APC-7 

* 24 INCH 

LOAD LOAD 

* DIRECT CONNECTrON 

FOR TRANSMISSION 



FOR REFLECT I ON 



TEST 

PORT 2 

Figure 11-l. Standard Connections for Full Two-Port Error-Correction 

114 Error Terms

6. To measure the standard, when the displayed trace has settled, press: 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 

11. 

12. 

13. 

14. 

The analyzer underlines the Bi&$i. softkey after it measures the standard. 

.- .._............... 

Disconnect the open, and connect a short circuit to PORT 1. 

To measure the device, when the displayed trace has settled, press: 

: s.. ::::::z.: . . . . . . . ..i .::::...::.r 

The analyzer underlines the ~~~~~~ softkey after it measures the standard. 

Disconnect the short, and connect an impedance-matched load to PORT 1. 

lb measure the standard, when the displayed trace has settled, press: 

y ::. . . p .vy< 

The analyzer tmderlines the :&&I& softkey after it measures the standard. 

Repeat the open-short-load measurement descried above, but connect the 

devices h turn to PORT 

. . . . . . . . . ..:.. . . . . .::.:... . ::. :: .i i. i ::.:.:... :,. . 

2, md use the ~~~~~~~ jj&#&$$ t .) &&!j$ 

: .-.... :Ai_... 

. . . . . . .:. . . . . . ..~.........-......~.....~............~~........... . . . . 

9 ;,.,..,,......;;;._,.~.~~~., ___ ? 

md ~~~~~ 2. ““““““. :#$s’ ....“‘...’ softkeys 

lb compute the reflection correction coefficients, press: 

f&n portion of the come&ion, press: ~~~~~~~~~~~~, 

‘lb start the transmis 

Make a “through” connection between the points where you will connect 

your device under test as shown in F’igure 11-l. 

Note Include any adapters or cables that you will have in the device 

measurement. That is, connect the standard device where you 

will connect your device under test. 

ErrorTerms 11-5

The analyzer displays the corrected measurement trace. The analyzer 

also shows the notation Cor at the left of the screen, indicating that 

error-correction is on. 

Note You can save or store the measurement correction to use for 

later measurements Use the menus under @JEGi$ or refer 

to “Printing, Plotting, and Saving Measurement Results” located 

in the HP 87533 Network Anulgger User’s cui&e for procedures. 

18. This completes the full two-port correction procedure. You can connect and 

measure your device under test. 

calibration 

Coellleient 

WYrEsi 

‘lhble 11-l. Calibration CoefKcient ‘lkrms and lksts 

calibratioll lhbE 

-POand 

Isolation* 

l-pert 

2-pod 

xkst 

NUDlbC?r 

1 &i or% Ex (ED) ED EDF 32 

2 ET (Ed ES ESF 33 

3 ER ERF 34 

4 EXF 36 

6 ELF 36 

6 ETF 37 

7 JbR 33 

3 ‘%R 30 

0 ERR 40 

10 EXR 41 

11 ELR 42 

12 &l?R 43 

Kenning oflirst subscript: D-directivity; S-source match, R-reflection tracking; X-crosstalk; 

L-load match; T-transmission tracking. 

bleaning of second mhcripk F-forward; R-reverse. 

t Response and Isolation cal yields: EX or & if a transmiwion parameter (621, 612) or ED or ER if a 

Hlection parameter (%I, 622). 

1 One-path, 2-port cal duplicates array8 1 to 6 in 8lT8yB 7 to 12. 

Error Terms 1 l-7

Error Term Inspection 

Note 

i ,,i p”. ..:.,::.. : 1 . . . . . . . . 

If the correction is not active, press [call ‘$EJWZ$@# tixU . 

The analyzer copies the first calibration measurement trace for the selected 

error term into memory and then displays it. Table 11-l lists the test 

numbers 

2. Press @GiXZj and adjust the scale and reference to study the error term 

trace. 

3. Press (TFctn) and use the marker functions to determine the error term 

magnitude. 

4. Compare the displayed measurement trace to the trace shown in the 

following “Error Term descriptions” section, and to previously measured 

data. If data is not available from previous measurements, refer to the 

typical uncorrected performance specifications listed in lhble 11-2. 

5. Make a hardcopy of the measurement results: 

a. Connect a printing or plotting peripheral to the analyzer. 

b. press LLocal) ~~~~~~~~~~~~,; ~~~~~~~~~~~~ and seIect the 

i.. *; ..A.... i . . . . . . . . . . 1.... . . . . . . . ./ 

appropriate peripheral to verify that the HP-IR address is set correctly on 

the analyzer. 

., . . .../ 

C. Press (-1 a,& aen &00x either !p&$& ..-.-.... ; . . . . . . . ;; . . . . . . ..n...... . 

. . . or . . . ~~~~~. 

..__................. 

- . . _ ~ ,._ . . . . . . . :

If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values 

1. Perform a system verification to verify that the system still conforms to 

specifications. 

2. If system verification fails, refer to “Start Troubleshooting Here. n 

Uncorrected Performance 

The following table shows typical performance without error-correction. RF 

cables are not used except as noted. Related error terms should be within these 

values. 

DilWtiVi~ 

Source Match 

had Match 

Reflection Tracking* 

Tranamisaion Tracking* 

Croestallr 

able 11-2. Uncorrected System Performance 

*Deviation from nominal trace wxo8s the frequency range. 

Frequency Jlange (GE@ 

o.ooo3 to 3.0 3.0 to 6.0 

SodB 26 dB 

16 dB 14 dB 

16dB 14 dB 

fl.6 dB +0.6 dl3, -2.6 dB 

f1.6 dB +0.6 dB, -2.6 dB 

OodB SodB 

ErrorTerms 114

Error ‘I&m Descriptions 

The error term descriptions in this section include the following information: 

� significance of each error term 

� typical results following a full 2-port error-correction 

� guidelines to interpret each error term 

The same description applies to both the forward (F’) and reverse (R) terms. 

11-10 ErrorTerms

Directivity (EDF and EDR) 

Description 

Directivity is a measure of any detected power that is reflected when a load 

is attached to the test port. These are the uncorrected forward and reverse 

directivity error terms of the system. The directivity error of the test port 

is determined by measuring the reflection (Sll, S22) of the load during the 

error-correction procedure. 

S-cant System Components 

w load used in the error-correction (calibration) 

� test port connectors 

� test port cables 

Affected Measurements 

Low reflection device measurements are most affected by directivity errors. 

HI d 

i i i i i i i i i I 

(4 04 sg632s 

Figure 11-2. Typical EDF/EDR without and with Cables 

Error Terms 1 l-1 1

Source Match (ESF and ESR) 

Description 

Source match is a measure of test port connector match, as well as the match 

between all components from the source to the test port. These are the forward 

and reverse uncorrected source match terms of the driven port. 

Signifkant System Components 

w load calibration kit device 

w open calibration kit device 

� short calibration kit device 

� bridge 


� bias tees 

w step attenuator 

� transfer switch 

� test port cables 


Reflection and transmission measurements of highly reflective devices are most 

affected by source match errors. 

11-12 ErrorTerms 

Figure 11-3. Typical ESF/ESB without and with Cables 

sg633s

Reflection Tracking (ERF and ERR) 

Description 

Reflection tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the 

reference path (R path) and the frequency response of the reflection test path 

(A or B input path). 

Significant System Components 

� open calibration kit device 

� short calibration kit device 

� R signal path if large variation in both F,RF’ and ERR 

� A or B input paths if only one term is affected 


All reflection measurements (high or low return loss) are affected by the 

reflection tracking errors. 

Figure 11-4. Typical EIWERR without and with Cables 

Error Terms 11-13

Isolation (Crosstalk, EXF and EXE) 

Description 

Isolation is a measure of the leakage between the test ports and the signal 

paths The isolation error terms are characterized by measuring transmission 

(S21, S12) with loads attached to both ports during the error-correction 

procedure. Since these terms are low in magnitude, they are usually noisy 

(not very repeatable). The error term magnitude changes dramatically with 

IF bandwidth: a 10 Hz IF bandwidth must be used in order to lower the noise 

floor beyond the crosstalk specification. Using averaging will also reduce the 

peak-to-peak noise in this error term. 


w sampler crosstalk 


Transmission measurements, (primarily where the measured signal level is very 

low), are affected by isolation errors. For example, transmission measurements 

where the insertion loss of the device under test is large. 

Figure 11-5. 

Typical EXF/EXR with 10 Hz Bandwidth and with 3 Id& Bandwidth 

11.14 Error Terms 

sg638s

Load Match (ELF and ELR) 

Description 

Load match is a measure of the impedance match of the test port that 

terminates the output of a 2-port device. Load match error terms are 

characterized by measuring the reflection (Sll, S22) responses of a “through” 

configuration during the calibration procedure. 

SignWant System Components 

� “through” cable 

� cable connectors 



All transmission and reflection measurements of a low insertion loss two-port 

devices are most affected by load match errors. Transmission measurements of 

lossy devices are also affected. 

BTRRT 

sg6277d 

Figure 11-6. Typical ELF/ELE 

Error Terms 11-15

Transmission Tracking (ETF and ETE) 

Description 

Transmission tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the 

reference path (including R input) and the transmission test path (including 

A or B input) while measuring transmission. The response of the test port cables 

is included. These terms are characterized by measuring the transmission (S21, 

S12) of the “through” configuration during the error-correction procedure. 


� R signal path (if both ETF and ETR are bad) 

� A or B input paths 

� “through” cable 


All transmission measurements are affected by transmission tracking errors. 

11-16 Error Terms 

sg6278d 

Figure 11-7. Typical ETF/ETR

Theory of Operation 

This chapter is divided into two major sections: 

� “How the HP 8753E Works” gives a general description of the HP 8753E 

network analyzer operation. 

� “A Close Look at the Analyzer’s Functional Groups” provides more detailed 

operating theory for each of the analyzer’s functional groups. 

How the HP 8753E Works 

12 

Network analyzers measure the reflection and transmission characteristics of 

devices and networks. A network analyzer test system consists of the following: 

� source 

� signal-separation devices 

� receiver 

� display 

The analyzer applies a signal that is either transmitted through the device under 

test, or reflected from its input, and then compares it with the incident signal 

generated by the swept RF source. The signals are then applied to a receiver for 

measurement, signal processing, and display. 

The HP 8753E vector network analyzer integrates a high resolution synthesized 

RF source, test set, and a dual channel three-input receiver to measure and 

display magnitude, phase, and group delay of transmitted and reflected power. 

The HP 8753E Option 010 has the additional capability of transforming 

measured data from the frequency domain to the time domain. Figure 12-1 

is a simplified block diagram of the network analyzer system. A detailed 

block diagram of the analyzer is located at the end of Chapter 4, “Start 

Troubleshooting Here. n 

Theory of Operation 12-l

- c 

\ 

30kHz to 3 or 66HL 30kHr to 3 or MHZ R 

I 

---a - 

SYNTHESIZED TEST RECE I VER DISPLAY 

SOURCE AC 

SET 

piiq 

El- 

sg623Bd 

Figure 12-1. Simplirred Block Diagram of the Network Analyzer System 

The Built-In Synthesized Source 

The analyzer’s built-in synthesized source produces a swept RF signal in the 

range of 30 kHz to 3.0 GHz. The HP 8753E Option 006 is able to generate 

signals up to 6 GHz. The source output power is leveled by an internal ALC 

(automatic leveling control) circuit. lb achieve frequency accuracy and phase 

measuring capability, the analyzer is phase locked to a highly stable crystal 

oscillator. 

For this purpose, a portion of the transmitted signal is routed to the R channel 

input of the receiver, where it is sampled by the phase detection loop and fed 

back to the source. 

The Source Step Attenuator 

The 70 dB, electro-mechanical, step attenuator contained in the source has very 

low loss. It is used to adjust the power level to the device under test without 

changing the level of the incident power in the reference path. The user sets 

the attenuation levels via the front panel softkeys. 

12-2 Theory of Operation

The Built-In lkst Set 

The HP 8753E features a built-in test set that provides the signal separation 

capability for the device under test, as well as to the signal-separation devices. 

The signal separation devices are needed to separate the incident signal from 

the transmitted and reflected signals. The incident signal is applied to the R 

channel input via an external jumper cable on the front panel. Meanwhile, 

the transmitted and reflected signals are internally routed from the test port 

couplers to the inputs of the A and B sampler/mixers in the receiver. Port 1 is 

connected to the A input and port 2 is connected to the B input. 

The test set contains the hardware required to make simultaneous transmission 

and reflection measurements in both the forward and reverse directions. A 

solid-state transfer switch in the built-in test set allows reverse measurements to 

be made without changing the connections to the device under test. 

The Receiver Block 

The receiver block contains three sampler/mixers for the R, A and B inputs. The 

signals are sampled, and down-converted to produce a 4 kHz IF’ (intermediate 

frequency). A multiplexer sequentially directs each of the three IF signals to 

the ADC (analog to digital converter) where it is converted from an analog to 

a digital signal to be measured and processed for viewing on the display. Both 

amplitude and phase information are measured simultaneously, regardless of 

what is displayed on the analyzer. 

The Microprocessor 

A microprocessor takes the raw data and performs all the required error 

correction, trace math, formatting, scaling, averaging, and marker operations, 

according to the instructions from the front panel or over HP-IB. The formatted 

data is then displayed. 

Required Peripheral Equipment 

In addition to the analyzer, a system requires calibration standards for vector 

accuracy enhancement, and cables for interconnections. 

Theory of Operation 123

A Close Look at the Analyzer’s Functional Groups 

The operation of the analyzer is most logically described in five functional 

groups. Each group consists of several major assemblies, and performs a distinct 

function in the instrument. Some assemblies are related to more than one 

group, and in fact all the groups are to some extent interrelated and affect each 

other’s performance. 

Power Supply. The power supply functional group consists of the A8 post 

regulator and the Al5 preregulator. It supplies power to the other assemblies 

in the instrument. 

Digital Control. The digital control group consists of the Al front panel and 

A2 front panel processor, the A9 CPU, the Al6 rear panel, the Al8 display 

and the A19 graphics system processor (GSP). The A10 digital IF assembly is 

also related to this group. These assemblies combine to provide digital control 

for the analyzer. 

Source. The source group consists of the A3 source, A7 pulse generator, All 

phase lock, Al2 reference, Al3 fractional-N (analog), and Al4 fractional-N 

(digital) assemblies. The A4 sampler is also related since it is part of the 

source phase lock loop. The source supplies a phase-locked RF signal to the 

device under test. 

Signal Separation. The signal separation group performs the function of an 

S-parameter test set, dividing the source signal into a reference path and a 

test path, and providing connections to the device under test. It consists of 

the A24 transfer switch, the A21 test port 1 coupler, and the A22 test port 2 

coupler. 

Receiver. The receiver group consists of the A4/A5/A6 sampler/mixers and 

the A10 digital IF. The Al2 reference assembly and the A9 CPU are also 

related. The receiver measures and processes input signals for display. 

The following pages describe the operation of each of the functional groups. 

124 Theory of Operation

Power Supply Theory 

The power supply functional group consists of the Al5 preregulator and the 

A8 post regulator. These two assemblies comprise a switching power supply 

that provides regulated DC voltages to power all assemblies in the analyzer. The 

Al5 preregulator is enclosed in a casting at the rear of the instrument behind 

the display. It is connected to the A8 post regulator by a wire bus A15Wl. 

Figure 12-2 is a simplified block diagram of the power supply group. 

O F F D U R I N G 2’ N O R M A L O P E R A T I O N 

\ 

;ON D U R I N G 

N O R M A L O P E R A T I O N 

L A L L O N D U R I N G 

N O R M A L OPERAlION 

sg6105e 

Figure 12-2. Power Supply Functional Group, Simplified Block Diagram 


The Al5 preregulator steps down and recti6es the line voltage. It provides a 

fully regulated +5 V digital supply, and several preregulated voltages that go to 

the A8 post regulator assembly for additional regulation. 

The Al5 preregulator assembly includes the line power module, a 60 kHz 

switching preregulator, and overvoltage protection for the +5 V digital supply. 

It provides LEDs, visible from the rear of the instrument, to indicate either 

normal or shutdown status. 

Theory of Operation 12-5

Line Power Module 

The line power module includes the line power switch, voltage selector switch, 

and main fuse. The line power switch is activated from the front panel. The 

voltage selector switch, accessible at the rear panel, adapts the analyzer to local 

line voltages of approximately 115 V or 230 V (with 350 VA maximum). The 

main fuse, which protects the input side of the preregulator against drawing too 

much line current, is also accessible at the rear panel. Refer to the 

HP 8753E Network Anulgzer lhstalhttin and Quick Start Guide for line voltage 

tolerances and other power considerations. 

Preregulated Voltages 

The switching preregulator converts the line voltage to several DC voltages. The 

regulated +5 V digital supply goes directly to the motherboard. The following 

parGaIly regulated voltages are routed through A15Wl to the A8 post regulator 

for llnal regulation: 

+7OV +25V +18V -18V +8V -8V 

Regulated + 6 V Digital Supply 

The + 5 VD supply is regulated by the control circuitry in the Al5 preregulator. 

It goes directly to the motherboard, and from there to all assemblies requiring 

a low noise digital supply. A + 5 V sense line returns from the motherboard to 

the Al5 preregulator. The +5 V CPU is derived from the +5 VD in the A8 post 

regulator and goes directly to the A19 graphics system processor. 

In order for the preregulator to function, the +5 V digital supply must be 

loaded by one or more assemblies, and the + 5 V sense line must be working. If 

not, the other preregulated voltages will not be correct. 

Shutdown Indications: the Green LED and Red LED 

The green LED is on in normal operation. It is off when line power is not 

connected, not switched on, or set too low, or if the line fuse has blown. 

The red LED, which is off in normal operation, lights to indicate a fault in 

the +5 V supply. This may be an over/under line voltage, over line current, 

or overtemperature condition. Refer to the troubleshooting chapters for more 

information. 


A8 Post Regulator 

The A8 post regulator lllters and regulates the DC voltages received from the 

Al5 preregulator. It provides fusing and shutdown circuitry for individual 

voltage supplies. It distributes regulated constant voltages to individual 

assemblies throughout the instnunent. It includes the overtemperature 

shutdown circuit, the variable fan speed circuit, and the air flow detector. Nine 

green LEDs provide status indications for the individual voltage supplies 

Refer to the Power Supply Block Diagram located at the end of Chapter 5, 

“Power Supply Troubleshooting”, to see the voltages provided by the A8 post 

regulator. 

Voltage Indications: the Green LEDs 

The nine green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 assembly are on in normal 

operation, to indicate the correct voltage is present in each supply. If they are 

off or flashing, a problem is indicated. The troubleshooting procedures later in 

this chapter detail the steps to trace the cause of the problem. 

Shutdown Circuit 

The shutdown circuit is triggered by overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, or 

overtemperature. It protects the instrument by causing the regulated voltage 

supplies to be shut down. It also sends status messages to the A9 CPU to trigger 

warning messages on the analyzer display. The voltages that are not shut down 

are the +5 VD and +5 VCPU digital supplies from the preregulator, the fan 

supplies, the probe power supplies, and the display supplies. The shutdown 

circuit can be disabled momentarily for troubleshooting purposes by using a 

jumper to connect the SDIS line (A8TP4) to ground. 

Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector 

The fan power is derived directly from the + 18 V and -18 V supplies from 

the Al5 preregulator. The fan is not fused, so that it will continue to provide 

airflow and cooling when the instrument is otherwise disabled. If overheating 

occurs, the main instrument supplies are shut down and the fan runs at full 

speed. An overtemperature status message is sent to the A9 CPU to initiate a 

warning message on the analyzer display. The fan also nms at full speed if the 

air flow detector senses a low output of air from the fan. (Pull speed is normal 

at initial power on.) 


Display Power 

The A8 assembly supplies +5 VCPU to the A19 GSP through the motherboard. 

The GSP converts a portion of the +5 VCPU to 3.3 V to drive the display and 

LVDS (low voltage differential signaling) logic The A19 GSP also controls and 

supplies power to the A27 backlight inverter. The voltages generated by the 

inverter are then routed to the display. Display power is not connected to the 

protective shutdown circuitry so that the Al8 display assemblies can operate 

during troubleshooting when other supplies do not work. 

Note If blanking pulses from the A19 GSP are not present, then 

+3.3 V will not be sent to the display. 

Probe Power 

The + 18 V and -18 V supplies are post regulated to + 15 V and -12.6 V 

to provide a power source at the front panel for an external RF probe or 

millimeter modules. 

Digital Control Theory 

The digital control functional group consists of the following assemblies: 

H Al front panel 

� A2 front panel processor 

� A9 CPU 

� A10 digital IF 

� Al6 rear panel 

� Al8 display 

� A19 GSP 

w A27 Inverter 

These assemblies combine to provide digital control for the entire analyzer. 

They provide math processing functions, as well as communications between 

the analyzer and an external controller and/or peripherals Figure 12-3 is a 

simplified block diagram of the digital control functional group. 

124 Theory of Operation

L-_--I 

7 --_ 

( 

IT 

Pie 12-3. Digital Control Group, Simplified Block Diagram 

-J 

sg6107e 


Al Front Panel 

The A1 front panel assembly provides user interface with the analyzer. It 

includes the keyboard for local user inputs, and the front panel LEDs that 

indicate instrument status The RPG (rotary pulse generator) is not electrically 

connected to the front panel, but provides user inputs directly to the front 

panel processor. 

A2 Front Panel Processor 

The A2 front panel processor detects and decodes user inputs from the front 

panel and the RPG, and transmits them to the CPU. It has the capability to 

interrupt the CPU to provide information updates. It controls the front panel 

LEDs that provide status information to the user. 

The A2 also contains the LVDS (low voltage differential signaling) receivers 

which connect to the graphics processor. The received video signals are routed 

to the Al8 display. 

A9 CPU/A10 Digital IF 

The A9 CPU assembly contains the main CPU (central processing unit), the 

digital signal processor, memory storage, and interconnect port interfaces 

The main CPU is the master controller for the analyzer, including the other 

dedicated microprocessors The memory includes EEPROM, DRAM, flash ROM, 

SRAM and boot ROM. 

Data from the receiver is serially clocked into the A9 CPU assembly from 

the A10 digital IF’. The data taking sequence is triggered either from the 

Al4 fractional-N assembly, externally from the rear panel, or by software on the 

A9 assembly. 

MdlCPU 

The main CPU is a 32-bit microprocessor that maintains digital control over the 

entire instrument through the instrument bus The main CPU receives external 

control information from the front panel or HP-IB, and performs processing 

and formatting operations on the raw data in the main RAM. It controls the 

digital signaI processor, the front panel processor, the display processor, and 

the interconnect port interfaces. In addition, when the analyzer is in the 

system controller mode, the main CPU controls peripheral devices through the 

peripheral port interfaces 

12-10 Thsoryof Operation

The main CPU has a dedicated flash ROM that contains the operating system for 

instrument control. Front panel settings are stored in SRAM, with a battery 

providing at least 5 years of backup storage when external power is off. 

Main RAM 

The main RAM (random access memory) is shared memory for the CPU and the 

digital signal processor. It stores the raw data received from the digital signal 

processor, while additional calculations are performed on it by the CPU. The 

CPU reads the resulting formatted data from the main RAM and converts it to 

GSP commands. It writes these commands to the GSP for output to the analyzer 

display. 

EEPROM 

EEPROM (electrically-erasable programmable read only memory) contains 

factory set correction constants unique to each instrument. These constants 

correct for hardware variations to maintain the highest measurement accuracy. 

The correction constants can be updated by executing the routines in Chapter 3, 

“Adjustments and Correction Constants. n 

Digital Signal Processor 

The digital signal processor receives the digitized data from the A10 digital 

IF. It computes discrete Fourier transforms to extract the complex phase and 

magnitude data from the 4 kHz IF signal. The resulting raw data is written into 

the main RAM. 

Al8 Display 

The Al8 display is an 8.4 inch LCD with associated drive circuitry. It receives a 

+3.3 V power supply from the A19 GSP, along with the voltage generated from 

the A27 backlight inverter. It receives the following signals from the A19 GSP: 

� digital TTL horizontal sync 

w digital TTL vertical sync 

� blanking 

w data clock 

� digital ‘ITL red video 

� digitalTI’Lgreen video 

� digital ‘ITL blue video 


A19 GSP 

The A19 graphics system processor is the main interface between the A9 CPU 

and the Al8 display. The CPU (A9) converts the formatted data to GSP 

commands and writes it to the GSP. The GSP processes the data to obtain the 

necessary video signals, which are then used for the following purposes: 

� The video signals are used to produce VGA compatible RGB output signals, 

which are routed to the Al6 rear panel. 

w The video signals are converted by an LVDS (low voltage differential signaling) 

driver which translates the signals to low level differential signals to help 

eliminate radiated emissions The converted video signals are then routed to 

the A2 assembly, where they are received and sent to the Al8 display. 

The A19 assembly receives the +5 VCPU which is used for processing and 

supplying power to the A27 backlight inverter (+ 5 VCPU) and the Al8 display 

(3.3 v). 

A27 Inverter 

The AZ7 backlight inverter assembly supplies the ac voltage for the backlight 

tube in the Al8 display assembly. This assembly takes the + 5 VCPU and 

converts it to approximately 380 Vat with 5 ma of current at 40 kHz. There are 

two control lines: 

� Digital ON/OFF 

� Analog Brightness 

0 100% intensity is 0 V 

0 50% intensity is 4.5 V 

Al6 Bear Panel 

The Al6 rear panel includes the following interfaces: 

TEST SET I./O INTERCONNECT. This provides control signals and power to 

operate duplexer test adapters 

EXT RET’. This allows for a frequency reference signal input that can phase 

lock the analyzer to an external frequency standard for increased frequency 

accuracy. 

The analyzer automatically enables the external frequency reference feature 

when a signal is connected to this input. When the signal is removed, the 

analyzer automatically switches back to its internal frequency reference. 

12-12 Theoryof Operation

10 MHZ PRECISION REFERENCE. (Option lD5) This output is connected 

to the EXT REF (described above) to improve the frequency accuracy of the 

analyzer. 

AUX INPUT. This allows for a dc or ac voltage input from an external signal 

source, such as a detector or function generator, which you can then measure, 

using the S-parameter menu. (You can also use this connector as an analog 

output in service routines.) 

EXT AM. This allows for an external analog signal input that is applied to the 

ALC circuitry of the analyzer’s source. This input analog signal amplitude 

modulates the RF output signal. 

EXT TRIG. This allows connection of an external negative TI’L-compatible 

signal that will trigger a measurement sweep. The trigger can be set to 

external through softkey functions. 

TEST SEQ. This outputs a TI’L signal that can be programmed in a test 

sequence to be high or low, or pulse (10 pseconds) high or low at the end of a 

sweep for a robotic part handler interface. 

LIMIT TEST. This outputs a TI’L signal of the limit test results as follows: 

Pass: TrLhigh 

Fail: TrLlow 

VGA OUTPUT. This provides a video output of the analyzer display that is 

capable of running a PC VGA monitor. 


Source Theory Overview 

The source produces a highly stable and accurate RF output signal by phase 

locking a YIG oscillator to a harmonic of the synthesized VCO (voltage controlled 

oscillator). The source output produces a CW or swept signal between 300 kHz 

and 3 GHz (or 300 kHz and 6 GHz for Option 006) with a maximum leveled 

power of + 10 dBm. The source’s built-in 70 dR step attenuator allows the 

power to go as low as -85 deem. 

The full frequency range of the source is produced in 14 subsweeps, one in 

super low band, two in low band, and eleven in high band. The high band 

frequencies (16 MHz to 3 GHz) or (16 MHz to 6 GHz for Option 006) are achieved 

by harmonic mixing, with a different harmonic number for each subsweep. The 

low band frequencies (300 kHz to 16 MHz) are down-converted by fundamental 

mixing. The super low band frequencies (10 kHz to 300 kHz) are sent directly 

from the Al2 reference board to the output of the A3 source assembly. This 

band is not phased locked nor does it use the ALC. It is the basic amplified 

output of the fractional-N synthesizer. 

The source functional group consists of the individual assemblies described 

below. 

A14/A13 Fractional-N 

These two assemblies comprise the synthesizer. The 30 to 60 MHz VCO in 

the Al4 assembly generates the stable LO frequencies for fundamental and 

harmonic mixing. 

Al2 Reference 

This assembly provides stable reference frequencies to the rest of the 

instrument by dividing down the output of a 40 MHz crystal oscillator. In low 

band operation, the output of the fractional-N synthesizer is mixed down in the 

Al2 reference assembly. (The 2nd LO signal from the Al2 assembly is explained 

in Receiver Theory.) The Al2 is also the origin of the super low band portion of 

the 87533 source. 


A7 Pulse Generator 

A step recovery diode in the pulse generator produces a comb of harmonic 

multiples of the VCO output. These harmonics provide the high band LO (local 

oscillator) input to the samplers. In low band and super low band the operation 

the pulse generator is turned off. 

All Phase Lock 

This assembly compares the f&t IF (derived from the source output in the 

A4 sampler) to a stable reference, and generates an error voltage that is 

integrated into the drive for the A3 source assembly. 

A3 Source 

This assembly includes a 3.0 to 6.8 GHz YIG oscillator and a 3.8 GHz cavity 

oscillator. The outputs of these oscillators are mixed to produce the RF output 

signal. In Option 006 (30 kHz to 6 GHz) the frequencies 3.0 to 6.0 GHz are no 

longer a mixed product, but are the direct output of the YIG Oscillator. The 

signal tracks the stable output of the synthesizer. The ALC (automatic leveling 

control) circuitry is also in the A3 assembly. 

Source Super Low Band Operation 

The Super Low Band Frequency Range is 10 kHz to 300 kHz. These frequencies 

are generated by the Al2 Reference Board. They are the amplified output of 

the fractional-N synthesizer. This output is not phase locked and is not subject 

to ALC control. Refer to ‘lhble 12-1. 

‘able 12-1. Super Low Band Subsweep Frequencies 

I 4o.oto43.3 ~0.010to 0.300 ~0.010to 0.300 I 


Source Low Band Operation 

The low band frequency range is 300 kHz to 16 MHz. These frequencies are 

generated by locking the A3 source to a reference signal. The reference signal 

is synthesized by mixing down the fundamental output of the fractional-N VCO 

with a 40 MHz crystal reference signal. Low band operation differs from high 

band in these respects: The reference frequency for the All phase lock is not 

a 6xed 1 MHz signal, but varies with the frequency of the fractional-N VCO 

signal. The sampler diodes are biased on to pass the signal through to the mixer. 

The 1st IF signal from the A4 sampler is not fixed but is identical to the source 

output signal and sweeps with it. The following steps outline the low band 

sweep sequence, illustrated in Figure 12-4. 

1. A signal (FN LO) is generated by the fractional-N VCO. The VCO in the 

Al4 Fractional-N assembly generates a CW or swept signal that is 40 MHz 

greater than the start frequency. The signal is divided down to 100 kHz and 

phase locked in the Al3 assembly, as in high band operation. 

2. The fractional-N VCO signal is mixed with 40 MHZ to produce a 

reference signal. The signal (F’N LO) from the Fractional-N VCO goes to the 

Al2 reference assembly, where it is mixed with the 40 MHz VCXO (voltage 

controlled crystal oscillator). The resulting signal is the reference to the 

phase comparator in the All assembly. 

3. The A3 source is pretuned. The source output is fed to the A4 sampler. 

The pretuned DAC in the All phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a 

frequency 1 to 6 MHz above the start frequency. This signal (source output) 

goes to the A4 R input sampler/mixer assembly. 

4. The signal from the source is fed back (1st IF’) to the phase comparator. 

The source output signal passes directly through the sampler in the A4 

assembly, because the sampler is biased on. The signal (1st IF+) is fed back 

unaltered to the phase comparator in the All phase lock assembly. The other 

input to the phase comparator is the heterodyned reference signal from the 

Al2 assembly. Any frequency difference between these two signals produces 

a proportional error voltage. 

5. A tuning signal (YO DRIVE) tunes the source and phase lock is achieved. 

The error voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator to bring the 

YIG closer to the reference frequency. The loop process continues until the 

source frequency and the reference frequency are the same, and phase lock 

is achieved. 


6. A synthesized sub sweep is generated. The source tracks the 

synthesizer. When lock is achieved at the start frequency, the synthesizer 

starts to sweep. This changes the phase lock reference frequency, and causes 

the source to track at a difference frequency 40 MHz below the synthesizer. 

1 

Pigure 12-4. Low Band Operation of the Source 

- 


The full low band is produced in two sub sweeps, to allow addition IF sltering 

below 3 MHz. At the transition between subsweeps, the source is pretuned 

and then relocks. ‘Ihble 12-2 lists the low band subsweep frequencies at the 

fractional-N VCO and the RF output. 

12-18 TheoryofOperation 

‘able 12-Z. Low Band Subsweep Frequencies 

t

Source High Band Operation 

The high band frequency range is 16 MHz to 3.0 GHz or 16 MHz to 6.0 GHz with 

Option 006. These frequencies are generated in subsweeps by phase-locking the 

A3 source signal to harmonic multiples of the fractional-N VCO. The high band 

subsweep sequence, ilhrstrated in F’igure 12-5, follows these steps: 

1. A signal (HI OUT) is generated by the fractional-N VCQ. The VCO in 

the Al4 fractional-N assembly generates a CW or swept signal in the range 

of 30 to 60 MHz. This signal is synthesized and phase locked to a 100 kHz 

reference signal from the Al2 reference assembly. The signal from the 

fractional-N VCO is divided by 1 or 2, and goes to the pulse generator. 

2. A comb of harmonics (1st LO) is produced iu the A7 pulse generator. 

The divided down signal from the fractional-N VCO drives a step recovery 

diode (SRD) in the A7 pulse generator assembly. The SRD multiplies 

the fundamental signal from the fractional-N into a comb of harmonic 

frequencies The harmonics are used as the 1st LO (local oscillator) signal to 

the samplers One of the harmonic signals is 1 MHz below the start signal set 

from the front panel. 

3. The A3 source is pretuued. The source output is fed to the A4 sampler. 

The pretune DAC in the All phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a first 

approximation frequency (1 to 6 MHz higher than the start frequency). This 

signal (RF OUT) goes to the A4 R input sampler/mixer assembly. 

4. The synthesizer sigual and the source signal are combined by the 

sampler. A difference frequency is generated. In the A4 sampler, the 1st 

LO signal from the pulse generator is combined with the source output signal. 

The IF (intermediate frequency) produced is a first approximation of 1 MHz. 

This signal (1st IF’) is routed back to the A11 phase lock assembly. 

5. The difference frequency (1st IF’) from the A4 sampler is compared to a 

reference. The 1st IF feedback signal from the A4 is filtered and applied to 

a phase comparator circuit in the A11 phase lock assembly. The other input 

to the phase comparator is a crystal controlled 1 MHz signal from the Al2 

reference assembly. Any frequency difference between these two signals 

produces a proportional error voltage. 

6. A tuuiug signal (PO DRIVE) tunes the source and phase lock is achieved. 

The error voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator, in order to 

bring it closer to the required frequency. The loop process continues until 

the 1st IF feedback signal to the phase comparator is equal to the 1 MHz 

reference signal, and phase lock is achieved. 


7. A synthesized subsweep is generated by A13/A14. The A3 source tracks 

the synthesizer. When the source is phase locked to the synthesizer at the 

start frequency, the synthesizer starts to sweep. The phase locked loop forces 

the source to track the synthesizer, maintaining a constant 1 MHz 1st IF 

signal. 

The full high band sweep is generated in a series of subsweeps, by phase 

locking the A3 source signal to harmonic multiples of the fractional-N VCO. 

The 16 to 31 MHz subsweep is produced by a one half harmonic, using 

the divide-by-2 circuit on the Al4 assembly. At the transitions between 

subsweeps, the source is prettmed and then relocks lkble 12-3 lists the high 

band subsweep frequencies from the fractional-N VCO and the source output. 

A13/14 

FRACTIONAL-N 

12-20 Theoryof Operation 

Figure 12-5. High Band Operation of the Source 

- - 

T O 3GHz 

ag6231d

lhble 12-3. High Band Subsweep Frequencies 

F’ractional-N (BlJ3z) 

3ot.060 

3Oto60 

3Oto60 

4Oto60 

35.4to 59.2 

32.8to 59.4 

36.7t.o 59.5 

33.0 to 60.6 

31.5 to 58.8 

Jhrmonic source output (bfEz) 

l/2 16to31 

1 31to 61 

2 61to 121 

3 121t.o 178 

6 178t.0206 

0 206to536 

15 536to 893 

27 803t.o 1607 

51 1607to3ooo 

option 666 

37.Ot.o 59.5 83 3ooot.o4060 

4o.oto 59.4 101 4060to6ooo 

1 

Theoryof Operation 12-21

Source Operation in other Modes/Features 

Resides the normal network analyzer mode, the HP 87533 has extra modes and 

features to make additional types of measurements The following describes 

the key differences in how the analyzer operates to achieve these new 

measurements 

Frequency Offset 

The analyzer can measure frequency-translating devices with the frequency 

offset feature. 

The receiver operates normally. However, the source is pretuned to a different 

frequency by an offset entered by the user. The device under test will translate 

this frequency back to the frequency the receiver expects. Otherwise, phase 

locking and source operation occur as usual. 

HarmonicAnalysis(Option002) 

The analyzer can measure the 2nd or 3rd harmonic of the fundamental 

source frequency, on a swept or CW basis, with the harmonic analysis feature 

(optional). 

To make this measurement, the reference frequency (normally 1 MHz) from the 

Al2 reference assembly to the All phase lock assembly is divided by 1, 2, or 3. 

See F’igure 12-6. 

The fractional-N assemblies are also tuned so that the correct harmonic (comb 

tooth) of the 1st LO is 0.500 or 0.333 MHz below the source frequency instead 

of the usual 1.000 MHz. ‘l’he analyzer pretunes the A3 source normally, 

then phase locks the 1st IF to the new reference frequency to sweep the 

fundamental source frequency in the usual way. The key difference is that the 

1st IF (output from the R sampler) due to the fundamental and used for phase 

locking is now 0.500 or 0.333 MHz instead of 1.000 MHz. 

Since the chosen VCO harmonic and the source differ by 0.500 or 0.333 MHz, 

then another VCO harmonic, 2 or 3 times higher in frequency, will be exactly 

1.000 MHz away from the 2nd or 3rd harmonic of the source frequency. The 

samplers, then, will also down-convert these harmonics to yield the desired 

components in the 1st IF at 1.000 MHz. Narrow bandpass flters in the receiver 

eliminate all but the 1.000 MHz signals; these pass through to be processed and 

displayed. 


A13/14 

FRACTIONAL-N 

A12 

REFERENCE 

@vcxo 

40MHz 

$ REFERENCE 

HARMONIC FREQ (MHz) 

1 1.000 

0.500 

: 

0.333 

1ST LO 

Ad 

SOURCE 

3.0 to 

6.8GHz 

YIG OSC 

Figure 12-6. Harmonic Analysis 

1 1ST IF 

3GHz TO 

-= 

sg6232d 

External Source Mode 

In external source mode, the analyzer phase locks its receiver to an external 

signal source. This source must be CW (not swept), but it does not need to be 

synthesized. The user must enter the source frequency into the analyzer. (The 

analyzer’s internal source output is not used.) 

To accomplish this, the phase lock loop is reconnected so that the tuning voltage 

from the A11 phase lock assembly controls the VCO of the Al4 fractional-N 

assembly and not the A3 source. See Figure 12-7. The VCO’s output still drives 

the 1st LO of the samplers and down-converts the RF signal supplied by the 

external source. The resulting 1st IF is fed back to the A11 phase lock assembly, 


compared to the 1.000 MHz reference, and used to generate a tuning voltage as 

usual. However, the tuning voltage controls the VCO to lock on to the external 

source, keeping the 1st IF at exactly 1.000 MHz. 

The analyzer normally goes through a pretune-acquire-track sequence to achieve 

phase lock. In external source mode, the fractional-N VCO prettmes as a 

closed-loop synthesizer referenced to the 100 kHz signal from the Al2 reference 

assembly. Then, to acquire or track, a switch causes the VCO to be tuned by the 

All phase lock assembly instead. (Refer to the Overall Block Diagram at the 

end of Chapter 4, “Start Troubleshooting Here.“) 

1A13/14 

FRACTIONAL-N 

30 to 60 MHz 

12-24 Theory of Operation 

Figure 12-7. External Source Mode 

IST IF 

- - 

sg6235d

Tuned Receiver Mode 

In tuned receiver mode, the analyzer is a synthesized, swept, narrow-band 

receiver only. The external signal source must be synthesized and 

reference-locked to the analyzer. 

To achieve this, the analyzer’s source and phase lock circuits are completely 

unused. See Figure 12-8. The fractional-N synthesizer is tuned so that one of its 

harmonics (1st LO) down-converts the RF input to the samplers (In contrast to 

external source mode, the analyzer does not phase lock at all. However, the 1st 

Lo is synthesized.) 

The analyzer can function as a swept tuned receiver, similar to a spectrum 

analyzer, but the samplers create spurious signals at certain frequencies, which 

limit the accuracy of such measurements 

A13/14 

FRACTIONAL-N 

Figure 12-8. Tuned Receiver Mode 

1ST LO 

I 

A4 (RI 

SAMPLER 

MIXER I. I-! 

-5 

1ST I F 

sg6234d 


Signal Separation 

The Built-In I’kst Set 

F’igure 12-9 shows a simplified block diagram of the analyzer’s built-in test set. 

A21 and A22 Test Port Cmplers 

The analyzer’s test port couplers are used to separate signals incident to, 

reflected from, and transmitted from the device under test. Each test port 

coupler has a coupling coefficient factor of 16 dD. 

A23 LED kont Panel 

The LED front panel board indicates whether the source power is incident on 

the analyzer’s test port 1 or test port 2. The analyzer’s source power is directed 

to test port 1 when making a forward transmission/reflection measurement. 

Similarly, source power is incident at test port 2 when making a reverse 

transmission/reflection measurement. 


The A3 source output power is directed to either the analyzer’s test port 1 or 

test port 2 via a low loss solid state transfer switch. With this switch, all four 

S-parameters can be updated continuously (for example: the data obtained from 

a full 2-port calibration). In addition, the transfer switch provides termination 

for the inactive test port in order to minimize the crosstalk between the source 

and receiver sampler. 

A26 ‘l&t Set Interface 

The test set interface board provides biasing for active devices under test with 

an external dc voltage. This dc voltage is applied directly to the test port center 

pm. In addition, the test set interface board provides the drive signal for the 

A24 forward/reverse transfer switch. 


FROM A3 

A24 

TRANSFER 

SW I TCH 

FRONT PANEL 

A21 TEST PORT 

rCOUPLER 

Figure 12-9. SimplifM Block Diagram of the Built-in ‘Ilest Set 

B!As CONNECT 

PORT 1 

BiAS CONNECT 

PORT 2 

5962364 


Receiver Theory 

The receiver functional group consists of the following assemblies: 

A4 sampler/mixer 



A10 digital IF 

These assemblies combine with the A9 CPU (described in Digital Control Theory) 

to measure and process input signals into digital information for display on the 

analyzer. Figure 12-10 is a simplijied block diagram of the receiver functional 

group. The A12 reference assembly is also included in the illustration to show 

how the 2nd LO signal is derived. 

Figure 12-10. Receiver Functional Group, Siiplilled Block Diagram 


A4/AS/A6 Sampler/Mixer 

The A4, A5, and A6 sampler/mixers all down-convert the RF input signals 

to fixed 4 kHz 2nd IF signals with amplitude and phase corresponding to the 

RF’ input. The A5 and A6 sampler/mixer assemblies both include an 8 dB gain 

preamplifier in front of the sampler. This improves the noise figure performance 

of the analyzer’s receiver channels A and B. 

The Sampler Circuit in High Band 

In high band operation, the sampling rate of the samplers is controlled by 

the 1st LO from the A7 pulse generator assembly. The 1st LO is a comb of 

harmonics produced by a step recovery diode driven by the fractional-N VCO 

fundamental signal. One of the harmonic signals is 1 MHz below the start 

frequency set at the front panel. The 1st LO is combined in the samplers 

with the RF input signal from the source. In the Option 006, samplers are 

additionally capable of recognizing RF input signals from 3 to 6 GHz. The mixing 

products are flltered, so that the only remaining response is the difference 

between the source frequency and the harmonic 1 MHz below it. This fixed 

1MHzsignalisthelstIF.RartofthelstIFsignalfromtheRsamplerisfed 

back to the All phase lock assembly. 

The hnpler Circuit in Low Band or Super Low Band 

In low band or super low band the sampler diodes are biased continuously on, 

so that the RF input signal passes through them unchanged. Thus the 1st IF 

is identical to the RF output signal from the source (300 kHz to 16 MHz for 

lowband; 10 to 300 kHz for super lowband), and sweeps with it. Part of the 1st 

IF signal from the R sampler is fed back to the All phase lock assembly. 

(Refer to “Source Theory Overview” for information on high band and low band 

operation of the source.) 

The 2nd LO Signal 

The 2nd LO is obtained from the Al2 reference assembly. In high band, the 2nd 

LO is llxed at 996 kHz. This is produced by feeding the 39.34 MHz output of a 

phase-locked oscillator in the Al2 assembly through a divide-by-40 circuit. 

In low band, the 2nd Lo is a variable frequency produced by mixing the output 

of the fractional-N VCG with a fixed 39.996 MHz signal in the Al2 assembly. 

The 2nd Lo covers the range of 0.014 to 16.004 MHz in two subsweeps that 

correspond with the source subsweeps These subsweeps are 0.304 to 3.304 MHz 

and 3.304 to 16.004 MHz. 


The Mixer Circuit 

The 1st IF and the 2nd Lo are combined in the mixer circuit. The resulting 

difference frequency (the 2nd IF) is a constant 4 kHz in both bands, as 

lhble 12-4 shows 

Band 

Super Low 

LOW 

High 

A10 Digital IF 

‘able 12-4. Mixer Frequencies 

1st IF 2nd L43 

0.010 to 0.300 MHZ 0.014 to 0.304 MHZ 

0.300tAJ 16.0 MHZ 0.304 to 16.004 MI-h 

1.ooo MHZ 0.996 MHz 

2nd IF 

4.0 HI!4 

4.0 HI2 

4.0 kHz 

The three 4 kHz 2nd IF signaIs from the sampler/mixer assemblies are input 

to the A10 digital IF assembly. These signals are sampled at a 16 kHz rate. A 

fourth input is the analog bus, which can monitor either an external input at 

the rear panel AUX IN connector, or one of 31 internal nodes. A multiplexer 

sequentially directs each of the signals to the ADC (analog-to-digital converter). 

Here they are converted to digital form and sent to the A9 CPU assembly for 

processing. Refer to “Digital Control Theory” for more information on signal 

processing. 


Replaceable Parts 

This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the 

HP 8753E network analyzer. Replaceable parts include the following: 

� major assemblies 

fl cables 

� chassis hardware 

13 

In general, parts of major assemblies are not listed. Refer to lhble 13-1 at the 

back of this chapter to help interpret part descriptions in the replaceable parts 

lists that follow. 

Replaceable Parts 13-l

Replacing an Assembly 






2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts” 


Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures” 




VeriGcation and Performance Tests. n 

13-2 Replaceable Parts

Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies 

Under the rebuilt-exchange assembly program, certain factory-repaired 

and tested modules (assemblies) are available on a trade-in basis These 

assemblies are offered for lower cost than a new assembly, but meet all factory 

specifications required of a new assembly. 

The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the 

rebuilt-exchange assembly program. Any spare assembly stock desired should be 

ordered using the new assembly part number. F’igure 13-1 illustrates the module 

exchange procedure. “Major Assemblies, Top” and “Major Assemblies, Bottom” 

list all major assemblies, including those that can be replaced on an exchange 

basis 

Ordering Information 

To order a part listed in the replaceable parts lists, quote the Hewlett-Packard 

part number, indicate the quantity required, and address the order to the 

nearest Hewlett-Packard office. 

To order a part that is not listed in the replaceable parts lists, include the 

instrument model number, complete instrument serial number, the description 

and function of the part, and the number of parts required. Address the order 

to the nearest Hewlett-Packard office. 

Replaceable Parts 133

The module exchange program described here is a 

method of keeping your Hewlett-Packard instrument 

Locate defective module 

using troubleshooting 

procedures in this 

manual. 

1 

Is Q replacement 

module on hand? 

1 

NO 

Order restored-exchange 

module from HP. Refer 

to the replaceable parts 

section for port numbers. 

134 Replaceable Parts 

Install the replacement 

module. Keep the defectfve 

module for return 

to HP. 

module from HP. Refer 

to the replaceable ports 

section for part numbers. 

fast, efficient, economical 

r service. 

Figure 13-1. Module Exchange Procedure 

B 

Restored-exchange modules are 

shipped mdividually in boxes like 

this. In addition to the circuit 

module, the box contains: 

Exchange assembly failure repor 

Return address label 

Open box carefully-it will be 

used to return defective module 

to HP. Complete failure report. 

Place it and defective module 

in box. Be sure to remove 

enclosed return address label. 

Seal box with tape. Inside 

U.S.A.*, stick preprinted return 

address label over label already 

on box, and return box to HP. 

Outside U.S.A., do not use oddress 

label; instead address box 

to the nearest HP office. 

sg613d

Replaceable Part Listings 

The following pages list the replacement part numbers and descriptions for 

the HP 8753E Network Analyzer. Illustrations with reference designators 

are provided to help identify and locate the part needed. The parts lists are 

organized into the following categories: 

� Major Assemblies, Top 

w Major Assemblies, Bottom 

� Cables, Top 

� Cables, Bottom 

� Cables, Front 

� Cables, Rear 

� Cables, Source 

� Front Panel, Outside 

� Front Panel, Inside 

� Rear Panel 

� Rear Panel, Option lD5 

� Hardware, Top 

� Hardware, Bottom 

� Hardware, kont 

� Hardware, Test Set Deck 

� Hardware, Disk Drive Support 

� Hardware, Memory Deck 

� Hardware, Preregulator 

� Chassis Parts, Outside 

� Chassis Parts, Inside 

� Miscellaneous 

Replawable Parts 13-5

M@or Assemblies, Top 

Ref. option HPPart Qty Description 

-i3. 

NUdM?r 

Al NOT SHOWN (see -Front Psnel Assembly, Inside”) 

A2 NOT SHOWN (see ‘Front Panel Aeanbly, Inside”) 

All 0876s-60231 1 ASSY-SCWRCE 3 OH2 

A3 087~6Q2sl 1 ASSY-SOURCB 3 ffirz (RRBUIIX-EXCRANGE) 

A3 006 08763-60146 1 ASSY-SCURCE 6 GHz 

A3 006 087~69146 1 ASSY-SOURCE 6 GIiz (REBUIIT-RXCBANGE) 

The following parts apply to instruments with serial numbem gnster than US37S9xxxx or W, 

and to instruments having all three samplers replaced. 

A4 087~6oalY7 1 ASSY-SAMPLERR (REBUIIZEXCBANGE: 08753-69007) 

A6 087~&woS 1 ASSY-SABWLER A (RBBUIIZ-KKCBANGE 0876%3@008) 

A6 087~6oBoS 1 ASY-SAMPLER B (RRBUIWEXCRANGIk 0876MOQOS) 

The following parta apply to instruments with serial numbers in the form of US37SOxxxx or Jp3802mmr. 

If all three samplera are being replaced, we the part numbers listed above. 

A4 087~6ooo4 1 ASSY-SAMPLER R (RRBLJILr-ExCIiANffE 0876M3ooo4) 

A6 08753-60169 1 ASSY-SAbfPLER A (REBUIUI-EXCHANGFk 08763-60169) 

A6 08763-60160 1 ASSY-SAbXPLER B (RRBUJIT-RXCIiANGEz 0876%60160) 

A7 08763-60164 1 RD AWY-PLJISE QENERAlOB 

A7 0876%69164 1 BDASSY-PUISE GRNERAlOR (RERuR3-EKCHANGE) 

A8* 087~6osM 1 BD ASSY-m RBGIJMlOR 

A10 087~6ooo6 1 BD ASSY-DIMIXL IF 

All 0876%60162 1 BDASSY-PHASEILXK 

Al2 08763-00367 1 BDASSY-RBFERKNCE 

AlS 0876s-60013 1 BD ASSY-FRAC N ANAILX 

Al4 08763-60068 1 BD ASSY-F’RAC N DIWl!A.L 

Al6 087~60008 1 ASaY-PRERRQ ULAlVB 

Al6 08763-6Qoo8 1 ASSY-PRERBGULATOB (REBUIIZFXCBAN~B) 

Al6 NOT SHOWN (me “Bear Panel Awembly”) 

Al7 NOT SHOWN (see 7%866i6 parts, Imiide”) 

A18 1 NOT SBOWN (see ‘Wont Panel Assembly, Inside”) 

AlQ 0876%30271 1 BDASBY-QRAPBI~ PROOBWOR (under lrheet metal cover) 

As0 08720-60190 1 ASSY-DISKDRIVB 

A27 1 NOT SBOWN (see “Front fine1 Aaembly, Inaide”) 

A26 lD6 NCT SHOWN (see ‘Rear Panel Assembly, Option IDS”) 

Bl NIX SHOWN (see “Rear Panel Assembly”) 

EtPQ NOT SHOWN (ee “Front Panel Assembly, tide”) 

� For fuse part numbela on the AS pbst Regulator, refer to ‘Miscellaneous” in ulis chapter. 

134 Replaceable Parts

A15\ 

A20 - 

A4' 

A10 A8 All A12 

Major Assemblies, ‘hp 

Al3 

/ Al4 

/ 

sg654e 

Replaceable Parts 13-7

Major Assemblies, Bottom 

Bt?f. OptlOll lwA3I-t. Qw Description 

big. 

NlUllbOr 

A9 087~6os16 1 cmJREPAlBKlT 

A0 os76343os16 1 CPU REPAIR KlT (REBUIfX-EXCBANGE) 

CPU FAN 606S8776 1 &-+CPUFANl 

AoBTl 14204SS8 1 BAmERY-LITBIUM 3V 12AI-I 

A21 6087-7007 1 AmY-TE8TFQBTccuPLER 

A21 6@8743007 1 ASBY-TEST PCBT COUPLER (BEBrn-EXCBANGE) 

A21 076 5087-7008 1 ASBY-TEsTPcBTcouPLER 

A21 076 60874008 1 ASSY-TWT PCBT COUPLER (BFiBUIl2=EXCBANffE) 

A!22 6087-7007 1 ASSY-TEST FCRT COUFLEE 

A22 60874007 1 AMY-TEST Par COUPLER (BEBlJIUr-EXCHANGE) 

A22 076 6087-7008 1 AWY-TEwFQKrcaJPLEu 

A22 076 60874008 1 ASSY-TEST PCBT COUFLEFl (BEBtllIMXCHANGE) 

Ass 087~60146 1 BDASY-LED FRONTPANEL 

As4 50867630 1 AWY-TRAN8FEB8wlTcFl 

A24 608m36sQ 1 AMY-TRANSFEB SWllXX @EBUII.SEXCBANGE) 

A26 0876%60280 1 BD AESY-m m INTEFtFACE 

1 Remove the backing from the heat transfer area before re-assembly. 


CPU 

Fan\ 

A24, 

Ai A23 A21 

Major Assemblies, Bottom 

, A9BTl 

sg6126e 


1 

Ref. 

De&. 

Cables, Tlbp 

A16Wl 18W 

Wl 

w2 

ws 

w4 

W6 

W6 

w7 

W8 

WO 

WlO 

Wll 

Wl.2 

WlS 

W24 

W26 

w21 

w20 

-r 

SR 

8R 

8R 

SB 

F 

F 

F 

F 

F 

F 

F 

F 

F 

SR 

F 

148 

348 

mart 

Number 

1400-0249 

(part of A16) 

08763-20286 

08753-20201 

08753-20286 

08753-20336 

087~60027 

0876%30027 

087~60027 

087~6oL320 

8l21MO21 

087~6oo20 

08763-60029 

087~6oo2o 

0876%60026 

087~20291 

8l20-6026 

SEC6876 

8l24MSSO 

- 

QQ 

- 

1 

CABLE TIE (16Wl to CHAWIS) 

* nW Wire Bundle (n is the number of wires in the bundle) 

nR Bibon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon) 

F Flexible C!eax Cable 

SE Semi-Blgld Coax Cable 

13-10 ReplaceableParts 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1- 

Description 

PREI.EQULATOR (A16) to POKl’ RJtGULA’lOiZ (A8J2) and 

bfOTHERBOARD (A17JS) 

SOUECE A88Y (ASW4) to TBANSFER SWI’RX (A24) 

Fp (It CBANNEL IN) to SAMPLEB-B (A4) 

TMT FORT 1 COUPLER (A21) to SAI@LEIt-A (AS) 

TEST PORT 2 COUPLER (A22) to SAMPLEBB (A6) 

MMFLER-R (A4) to PUISE GJZNEMlUB (A7) 

SAMPLE%A (A5) to PUME GENERATUE (A7) 

SAMPLER-B (A6) to PUISE QENERATOR (A7) 

PHASE ILICK (AlLIl) to SAMPLEEM (A4) 

FlZAGN D1GlTA.L (A14Jl) to PUUE GENERAlOR (A7) 

F&W-N DIQITAL (A14J2) toREFERENCE (Awl) 

FZAC-N DIGlTAL (A14JS) to FFtAGN ANAMG (AlSJl) 

FBAGN ANAIBG (AlSJ2) toREFERENCE (Al2J2) 

RFZEEENCFi(Al2JS)toRP(EXTEEF) 

60uRcEAs8Y(As)toFp(RcHANNEL0uT) 

6ouRcE ASSY (A3) to BEFERENCE (Al2J4) 

MOTHEREOAFtD (A17J12) to EEAB PANEL VGA OUT 

MOTHERBOARD (A17Jll) to CPU (AOJS)

w4 ’ 

w3 ’ 

w2 ’ 

w5 ’ 

W6 ’ 

w7 ’ 

Cables, lbp 

/ 

W26 

, WI2 

/ WI1 

. WI0 

' w9 

' W8 

sg656e 

Replaceable Parts 13.11

pd. 

D-k!. 

1 

A21Wl 

Cables, Bottom 

1w 

lIPPart 

Number 

140&0611 

8120-6483 

G -1 

1 

CABLE CLAMP 

De43cription 

QRAYWIUSTESFPCET~CCUP~(A~~)~~TE~TSET 

INTERFACE (A26TPl) 

A22Wl 1w 

8l2@648S 1 GRAYWIRE~FTX~T~C~UF’LER(A~~)~~T~BT~ET 

INTEWACE (A26TP2) 

A24Wl SW 86047~MOM 1 TBAN8FER mvrmH (A24) to TEST SF2 INTElPAcE (A26JS) 

Wl SR 08763-20286 1 SOURCE AWY (ASW4) to TRANSFER 8WI’DX (k&i) 

w20 s4Ft 8l20-6890 1 CFVPIG (AOJ7) to MCTHEKBC ARD (A17Jll) 

WSl SR 08762-20102 1 TlmFmT1CCupLw(A21)toTRANsFEB~(A24) 

ws2 8Il 08766-20101 1 TmT POET 2 CouPm (A22) to TRANSFER SwrIcH (A24) 

W33 4w 08766-60221 1 LED (A23Jl) to TmT SFX IIwElzFACE (A26J2) 

ws7 26R 812~8670 1 DI8K DRIVE (A20) to CPU/PIG (ASJS) 

W38 4oIl 8120-6882 1- TEST SJZT INTEIBACE (A26Jl) to MCTHKIBCARD (A17J2) 

� nW Wire Bundle (m b the number of wires in the bundle) 

aI Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon) 

SR Semi-Rigid Coax Cable 

13-12 Replawabls Partr

w32, 

w33' 

W38 

\ I I 

A22kl ill AilWl 

Cables, Bottom 

,wzo 

/ , 

.\A137 


Cables, Front 

Bof. 

wig. 

Type* opt HPart 

Number 

etJr Demription 

AlWl SOB 8ECM429 1 FP KEYBOARD (AlJl) to FP INTERFACE (A2~2) 

BPGlWl 6B (part. of BPGl) 1 BF’Q to FE’ JNTFXFACE (A2J6) 

Wl SE 08762-20286 1 EOUBCE ASSY (ASW4) to !l’BANSF’EB SWllKH (A24) 

w2 SE 08753-20201 1 FP (B CHANNEL IN) to SAMPLE&B (A4) 

ws SE 08762-20286 1 TEST PORT 1 COUPLEB (A21) to SAMPLBB-A (AS) 

w4 SE 08763-20287 1 TEST FORT 2 CXWF’LEB (A22) to SAMPLE&B (A6) 

w17 SOB 8l20-84.31 1 FP INTEBFACE (A2Jl) to MUMEBBABD (A17Jl) 

Wl8 SW 08711-6ooS7 1 FTINTEBFACFi(A2J4)toFP(PBOBEPOWEB) 

WlO SW 08711-6ooS7 1 F’P INTERFACE (A2JS) to FP (PROBE POWFiB) 

W22 6B 8120-8408 1 FP INTBBFACB (A2J7) to JNmBTEB (A27) 

W2S SlB 8l2M4OO 1 FP INTEBFACX (A2J6) to DISPLAY (A18) 

W24 SE 08763-20220 1 SOuBcxASsY(AS)toFP(BcxANNFLOUT) 

W26 SE 087zG20008 1 FF(BCHANNELOUT)toFP(BCHANNFLIN) 

* nW Wire Bundle (n b the number of wire8 in the bundle) 

nB Bibbon Cable (n is the number of wires in the ribbon) 

SE Semi-Bigid Cvax Cable 


w22 / 

W23 

I 

AIWI 

\ 

RPGIWI 

hbles, Front 

sg658e 

ReplaceableParts 13-15

Bof. 

-&f. 

BlWl 

WlS 

w21 

W27 

W28 

Wm 

W3O 

WS6 

WS6 

Cables, Rear 

HPFart 

Nnmbor 

(part of Bl) 

0876%60026 

8X20-6876 

8l2CM407 

86047-6ooo5 

86047-6ooo6 

8l2M468 

8l2IMS79 

G -1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

Deucription 

FAN (Bl) to MOTHERBOARD (A17J6) 

BFTEBENCE (Al2JS) to BP @XT BEF’) 

MOTBEBBOARD (A17Jl2) to Rp (VGA OUT) 

BF’ INTERFACE (AMJ4) to MOTHERBO ARD (A17J6) 

RF’ INTERFXCE (AMJlO) to BP (POBT 1 FUSE) 

RP JNTERFACE (A16Jll) to RP (POBT 2 FUSB) 

EtF INTERFACE (AMJS) to HIQH~lLlTY FBBQ BBF (A26Jl) 

CFWFIG (AQJl) to MOTHEF@OABD (A17J7) 

* nW 

8l2N3S82 1- CFTJ/PIQ (AQJ2) to MOTHEEBO ABD (A17J8) 

Wire Bundle (A in the number of wires in the bundle) 

nB Ribbon Cable (n is the number of wirea in the ribbon) 

F Flexible Coax Cable 

13-l 6 Replaceable Parts

i 

w30 

\ ’ 

w21 

W36 

\ 

w35 

Cables, Rear 

sg6113e 


Cables, Source 

Ref. Type* opt lxPP8l-t QQ Description 

-ig. Number 

AsA2Wl 1OR os76s-6oos4 1 EYC (ASAS) to AIL (A3AZJ.3) 

A3A4Wl 4W os76s-6oos6 1 CAm CSC (ASA4) to AU (ASA2J2) 

AsWl SR 08753-20107 1 Fxo (AsA3) to SCURCE ASSY (A3) 

Asw2 SR 0876%200% 1 CAm CSC (ASA4) to SCURCE ASSY (A3) 

ASWS SR 0876.520106 1 SCURCE ASSY (A3) to AlTENUA’ItIR (ASA6) 

A3w4 SR 0876%20111 1 ATIENUAl0R (ASA6) to Wl 

ASWS 1OR 6002-0701 1 AIL (ASA2Jl) to AlTBNUA’ltIR (ASA6) 

s nW Wire Bundle (n ia the number of wirea in the bundle) 

nR Rttbon Cable (n is the number of wirea in the ribbon) 

SR Semi-R&id Coax Cable 


A3A4Wl 

BACK 

I 

A3W3 

A3W4 

\ 

FRONT 

Cables, Source 

sg662e 

Replaceable Parts 13-l 9

Ref. OptlOll 

-ig. 

Front Panel Assembly, Outside 

1 

-k 

1 076 

2 

2 076 

EmPart Qw Description 

Number 

03763-30163 1 ovERlAY, ILnvER PRONT PANEL 

03763-30170 1 ovERLAY, LOWE61 PRONT PANEL 

03763aon24 1 FPREPAlRKlTsTDl 

037~go926 1 F’PREPADZKIT#0761 

1610-0033 1 GRouND Porn 

206o-ooo6 1 NtJTHExlAa2 

2190-0067 1 wA3HERLK.266ID 

0376340016 1 LINEBUTION 

03763-30211 1 OVERLAY, UPPER FRONT PANEL 

1 Comes with gasket, upper and lower overlays. 

13-20 Rsplawable Parts

Front Panel Assembly, Outside 

sg663e 

ReplaceablsParts 13-21

1 

2 

Ref. 

mk!. 

A18 

3 

4 

6 

7 

5 

0 

LO 

11 

I2 

13 

14 

14 

16 

16 

hl 

!I2 

LlWl 

427 

w17 

W22 

W2S 

Front Panel Assembly, Inside 

- 

cm-1 

2tm 

Km 

5B 

3lB 

lDT 

HP&l-t 

NWllblEr 

o872lMool2 

2oao-0686 

08763-60326 

lOOO-0006 

0872luNxlo4 

08768-00136 

08763-20300 

lo&w1864 

JM4oe4ooo3 

0872o-4oo10 

0616-0430 

0515-0306 

140&1430 

0616-0372 

087l2-60036 

206OG144 

08763-00112 

0624-0828 

08720-60127 

08753-60311 

812~8430 

onw3068 

8-1 

8l2&8408 

812&8409 

1 

1 

1 

4 

1 

1 

DISPLAY HOLD DOWN 

DISPLAY LAMP 

I4mREPLAcmfENTAssY 

DISPLAY GLASS 

GROUNDlNG C&IF’S 

FILLEBPLATEl 

FRCNT PANEL 

1 RR3 (INCLUDES CABLE AND HARDWARE) 

1 RPG KNOB 

1 FLUBBEB KFXPAD 

8 SCBBW SM 3.0 6CWPNTX 

4 SCREW SMM 3.0 14cWPNTx 

2 CABLE CLG 

3 SCREW SrdM 3.0 8cwPNTx 

2 CABLE ASSY, PBOBE POWEFt 

2 NUT, HEX 3/E32 

1 PLATE, PBOBE POWEB 

2 SCREW, TAFTING 

1 BD ASSY-F’RONT PANEL 

1 BD ABSY-FXONT PANEL INTEBF’ACE 

1 All’OA2 

1 ASSY-WVERlER 

1 A2TOA17 

1 CABLE-m lNTF (AzJ7) to IrwEmER (A27) 

1- CABLE-FT lNTF (AZJS) to DISPLAY (Al8) 

1 Not shown. F&places A18 and display glass for Option 1DT. Order new grounding clips when replacing 

filler plate. 

! Order with A2 and LCD hold down. 


(4 Places) 

Front Panel Assembly, Inside 

(4 Places) (2 Places) WI7 sg6122e 

Replaceable Partr 13-23

1 

2 

Ref. 

Ddg. 

3 (AM) 

4 

6 

6 

7 

7 

s 

0 

0 

10 

11 

l2 

18 

14 

16 

16 

16 

17 

17 

18 

LO 

Rear Panel Assembly 

34R 

lD6 

13-24 ReplaceableParts 

EPFart 

Number 

8l2&6407 

86047~0ooo5 

0872CM30138 

08763-60026 

08416-60036 

1261-2942 

2loo-oo84 

1251-7812 

0516-0370 

306@1192 

0516-0372 

08-1 

3160-0281 

6960-0410 

21oo-o102 

206o-oo36 

o4oo-0271 

2110-0047 

140&0112 

0o@oo27 

- 

QQ 

Ikx3cripison 

- 

1 BP INTEBFACE (A16J4) TO MB (A17J6) (W27) 

2 FUSEIFARNESGASSEMBIX 

1 BD ASSY-BEAB PANEL INTEBFACE (A16) 

1 AWY-EXTERNAL IimJmENcE CABLE (W13) 

1 ASSY-FAN 

4 FASIENEBCONNBPLOCK 

2 WASHER LK .l&MlDlO 

2 NUT STDF .327L 632 

4 F~CONNBPLOCK 

4 SCREW SbfM35Xl6 CWFWTX 

4 FLATWASHER 

10 scREwsMM3.ox8 CWFNTX 

1 REABPANELSHEETMFXAL 

1 FAN GUABD 

1 HOLE PLUG 

1 EIOLF, PLUG 

8 WASHER LK .472ID 

8 NUT BEX 15/32-32 

1 ERObfMlW SN.6-616ID 

2 FUSE 

2 FUSE CAP 

2 HOLE PLUGS 

- [we “Rear Panel Assembly, Option IDS”)

(8 Places) 

9 15 

13 

0 

PART OF FAN 

es) 


sg665e 


Rear Panel Assembly, Option lD6 

Ref. OptlOll HPRut 

Number 

wig. 

1 lD6 126&1860 

2 ID6 0516-0374 

3 IDS 3OW1646 

4 lD6 2l@O-OO6S 

6 lD6 206&0064 

6 lD6 0516-0430 

7 lD6 08763-00078 

8 6otw0027 

A26 ID6 08763-60168 

W30 lD6 81206468 

13.26 ReplaceableParts 

1 ADAFTER-CQAX 

Description 

1 ScBFm-MAcHINEM3.ox1ocW-PN-TX 

1 WASHEEF’LAT.606IDNY 

1 WA8HERMCK.606ID 

1 NUT-SPEc~1/228 

1 SCBEW-MACHINEM~.OX~CW-PN-TX 

1 BRACKET-OSCBD 

2 HOIXPLUGS 

1 BDASSY-EIGHtYFABILlTYF’BJCQREiF 

1 EPINTEBFACE(AlBJS)to~GE~~FBEQREF(A26Jl)

Rear Panel Assembly, Option lD5 

sg666e 

Replawable Parts 13-27

Hardware, lbp 

1 

2 

3 

Ref. 

D&g. 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

0 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

OptlOll HFPart 

Nnmber 

061C27OQ 

08753-40014 

08763-20062 

0516-2035 

0516-0468 

08753-00107 

05X-0374 

0616-0377 

0516-0374 

08753-00129 

08753-00113 

0515-0374 

06X-0374 

08763mO40 

0516-1400 

13-28 Replaceable Parts 

cm Descriptiox~ 

2 SCBEW-~M3.OxlOCW-FLTX 

1 STABlLrzER-PCBOARD 

1 STABlLlzER CAP 

1 SCBEW-bfACHNEM3.Ox16PGF‘LTX 

2 SCBEW-MACBJNE?d3.5x8CW-PN-TX 

1 AIRFIDWCOVER 

2 3CBEW-MACHINEIK3.ox1oCW-PN-TX 

2 SCREW-MACHINE M3.6xlOCW-PN-TX 

2 SCREW-MACBINEM~.OXI~CW-PN-TX 

1 GSF' COVER 

1 BBACKFXdOUFtCE(SCUBCESl'BAP) 

6 SCREW-- bs3.ox1oCW-m-TX 

16 SCIGW-b%MBlNE Bi3.OxlOCW-PN-TX 

1 CLlPPlJWER GROUND 

3 3CBEWXACHINEM3.5x8pOF‘LTX

(4 Places) 

(2 Places) 

(6 Places) \ / 

(15 Places) 

(2 Places) 

Hardware, lbp 

\ 1 

12 Places) 

sg6111e 


Hardware, Bottom 

1330 Replawable Parts 

lIPRut 

Number 

0516-0468 

0616-0430 

05150667 

0516-0430 

0515-1400 

0516-0375 

05X-0468 

etJr Dwcription 

4 3CREw-IUCHINEM3.6x8CW-PN-Tx 

8 SCRFM-MACHINE M3.0~6 CW-F'N-TX 

2 3CRJSW-MACHINEIK~.OXZ~CW-PN-TX 

5 SCREW-MACHINEM~.OX~CW-PN-TX 

3 SCREW-MACHINE~ M3.6x8PcwLTx 

8 3CREW-MACHINEM3.Ox16CW-PN-TX 

4 8CREW-MACHINEM3.Oxl6CW-PN-TX

sgbb0e 

(L Places) (3 Places) 

6 

(2 PLacesI x 5 

(3 Places) 

(3 Places) 

Replaceable Parts 13-3 1

Hardware, Front 

Ref. option HP- Qw Desdptioll 

Ddg. Nnmber 

1 06180665 1 SMM 3.0x14 CWFNTX 

2 03763-00137 1 BRACKEl’-CABLERJPPCRl 

3 1260-1251 2 ADAFTERFEMALE-SMA 

4 0616-1946 1 SCRJ!X’-MAcEIINEM3.Ox6F’GFLTx 


sg669e 

Hardware, Front 

I2 Places) 


Hardware, Test Set Deck 

OptlOll HPPart 

Nnmber 

13-34 Replaceable Parts 

08753-20206 

08753-40013 

08763-20293 

08763-00127 

0516-1046 

0516-0376 

0616-0430 

0616-0667 

0616-0430 

G 

- 8 

Description 

SHOULDER SCREW 

8 GUIDE WASHER 

8 FXESURESFRING 

1 CHAsslEmsET 

1 SCREW-~ M3.Ox 6 FGFTrTX 

2 SCREW-MACHlNE I&3.0x 16 CW-F'N-TX 

1 SCREW-- M3.0~ 6 CW-FN-TX 

2 SCREW-MACHINE &43.0x26 CW-PN-TX 

5- SCXEW-MACHINE M3.Ox 6 CW-FN-TX

(5 Places) 

Hardware, ‘l&t Set Deck 

(2 Places) 

I 

(8 Places) 

A 

\ 

sg670e 

Replaceable Partr 13-35

Hardware, Disk Drive Support 

Bof. OptiOll EPFart etJr Demription 

D&it. 

Nnmbor 

1 0616-1048 4 SCBEW-M 2.6X4 sCXXJST BEAD, BBX. 

2 08720-00021 1 DISXDFtIVEiBRACXFd 

2 08763-00162 1 DISKDlUVEBRACICd 

3 0616-0274 4 SCREWS -- M 3.0x10 CWPNTX 

1 Your analyzer may use either pin 08720-00021 or p/n 08753-00152. Analyzers manufactured 

prior to February 1999 use p/n 0872040021. kuxlyzers manufactured after February 1900, or 

that have been repaired or upgraded with Service Kit p/n 08720-40190, use p/n 08753-40152. 

Contact Hewlett-Packard if you need help identifying replacement parts for your analyzer. 


(4 Places) Q 

G--,, (4 Places) 

Hardware, Disk Drive Support 


Hardware, Memory Deck 

llef. OptlOll lIPF8l-t Qm De8criptlom 

Dd3. 

Number 

1 0515-0468 4 3cBEw-MACHINE M2.6xSCW-PIGTX 

2 0616-0433 2 GCREW-MACHINE WLOX 6 cw-PN-TX 

8 0616-0676 1 Ecmzw-m bB.ox14cw-PN-TX 

4 08763-00128 1 DECJGMEtdORY 

1338 Replaceable Parts 

‘0 Places)

Replaceable Partr 1339

Hardware, Preregulator 

Ref. Option lwF&rt QQ Description 

D-&f. 

Number 

1 2110-0730 1 FUSE 3A 260V NON-TIblF, DELAY (CSAAJL) 

1 21104666 1 FUSE 3.16A 260V NON-TIME DELAY (IEC) 

2 08i’63-00066 1 BRACKFFF-PBEBEGULATOR 

3 0515-1400 2 SCREW-MACHINE M&6x8 CW-FLTX 

Al6 0876s-6ooo8 1 PBEBEGULAlXIR-ASSY 

Al6 037~6ooo3 1 PlumEGuLAToR-AWY (imBLJm-EXCHANQE) 

1340 ReplaceableParts

IL- 

Hardware, Preregulator 

Al5 

sg673e 

ReplaceableParts 1341

Chassis parts, Outside 

Ref. 

D-k!. 

Option EPmrt 

Numbez 

etJr Description 

1 6041-0176 1 TIUMSTRIP 

2 08720-00078 1 COvEI-mP 

3 6041-0188 4 BEABsrAmxmF 

4 0515-1402 4 SCBEWS?dM3.68PCPNTX 

6 6041-0187 2 BBABCAP-SIDESTBAP 

6 06181384 4 SCREW SMM 5.0 10 PCFIZ'X 

7 0872O-OOOS1 2 SIDEGTRAP 

8 0872~OOOSO 2 COVEIMIDE 

0 6041-0186 2 FBONTCAP-SIDESTBAP 

10 08720-00070 2 COVEE-B(yIToM 

11 1460-1345 2 FaoTELEvAmR 

12 6041-0167 4 FQOT 

13 087~80066 1 LABELzCAUTIONWABNINQ 

14 OS76HO174 1 LABELzUXA!lTONDIAGBA?d 

16 0876S-40016 1 LINEBUTlDN 

16 6180-8600 1 MYLARlJwuLAmR 

1342 ReplaceableParts

(4 Places) (4 Places) 

(Underside) 

0 @ 

14 

P 

(4 Places) 

Chassis parts, Outside 

5 

/” (2 Places) 

6 

2(4 Places) 

A (2 Places) 

A 

--CT 

(2 Plac ES) 

-@ 

Places) 

sQ57Le 


Chassis Parts, Inside 

OptiOll HPPart. 

Number 

6022-llQ0 

6021-6808 

03753-60614 

0616-2036 

0616-04SO 

08720-ooow 

1460-1673 

0872o-ooo77 

- 

etJr 

0515-1400 1 3MMS.6x8PCFIXX 

0876%60270 1- BDM-MOTHERBOARD 

1. Part of CABDCAGJVMOTEDZRasaembly (item S). 

1344 ReplaceableParts 

1 

1 

1 

16 

1 

1 

1 

1 

FRONTPANELFRAME 

REARFRAME 

AssY-cARDcAQ~oTHER 

scREwaMM4.ox7PcFIxx 

BCREWMS.Ox6CWPNTX* 

lNslJLAmR smli* 

SPRINGEXl'ENSION.13SOD 

SWllVHEOD* 

Demxiption 

1

Chassis Parts, Inside 

(16 Places) 

sg675e 

ReplaceableParts 1345

Miscellaneous 

HP8753TOOLKrrindudesthefdlow2ng: 

RFCARLEINPUTR 

Demxiption 

ExTENDERBoARDAwEMBLY-BECEIVEB 

ExTENDERBoARDAwEMBIx-SOURCE 

EXTENDERRQARDASSEMBIX-CARDCAGE 

ADAPTER3dALEsMBlDMALEsb5 

ADAPTER-bfALETYPENTOFEMALF,SMA 

CABLE ASSEMBIX 

BAQ-ANTBLUTC 18x16 

service ‘Ibols 

Documentation 

087~6002S 

OS76%2002S 

aS76S-60010 

oS76S-6oo20 

087~60166 

l26o-0660 

l2wl260 

6061-1022 

8222-1132 

HPS76SEEKAMPLEPROGRAMDISKtl oS76S-1oL32S 

HPS76SEEKAMPLEPROGRAMDlSK#2 oS76%loo2o 

WS76SESKRVICECXJlDE oS76iwoS74 

HPS76SEOPTIONO11SERVICEMJIDE oS76S-oo404 

HPS76SEMANUALSETindvdeeulsfdlosoing: OS76MOS66 

EPS76SEIWIBPROGRA?dMINQANDrnMMAND REFERKNCEGUIDE 087~SoSed 

HPS76SEHPRASICPROGRAMMINC3RXAMPLMtXlIDE oS76mo413 

HpS763EUsEB'S~~E(~ndudes~~~erena$~~~~ 087~SOS67 

HPS76SEINSTALhWO N/QUICKSlARTWJIDE oS76HoS6o 

HPS76SESY6I‘EM VERlFICATIONANDPERFORMANCRTEGIs oS76moSe4 

BpS753EO~ONO11~~8ETi~~tkef~~~ oS76S-90370 

EPS76SEEF-lBPlW3 RAMMINQANDmMMAND REFERRNCRCXJIDE 0876%eoS66 

HPS76SEEPRASICPROGRAMMIN~EXAWLE5WIDE 08753-90418 

IIpS763EOpTIONO11U~SQuIDE(Cndudas~~~~llBT6s~rs) 087~SOS71 

HPS76SEOPTIONOlllN~ ON/QUICKS'HRTMJIDE oS76SaS72 

BpS753EOpTIONO11~~vEBIFlcATONANDpEBFoBMANcETFsTB OS76WOSO6 

upgrwk Kite 

HARMONR3MEA8uBEMENTUPGRADEKlT s76SEUoPToo2 

6OHzUPGRADEKlTFoRHPS76SE 8753RU0PT006 

6GHzUPGRADEKlTFVRHPS76SEOPTIONOll 876SELJOPT611 

TlMEDOMAlNUPGRADEKlT 876SEUOPTOlO 

FlRMB?AREUPGRADEKlT s76SEUoPTooo 

l3IQH-sTABlLlTY FBEQuENcY REPERENcERETRoFlTKlT 876SRUOFTlD6 


FXMALEIiHBCONNFXXUR 

PEMALETBTSETI/O 

FEbfALEPARALLELPORT 

RHS2CONNEC'NIR 

7-mmTESTPORlB 

Description 

Protective Cape for Conneetor~ 

PEMALETYPBNTESTPORTS(OPTIONS011AND076) 

FUSEO.6A l26VNON-TJbfEDELAYO.26xO.27 

FUSEO.76A l26VNON-TIMEDELAYO.26xO.27 

FUSE lA l26VNON-TIMRDELAYO.26xO.27 

FUSE 2A l26VNON-TIME DRLAYO.26xO.27 

FUSE4A E?SVNON-TMEDELAYO.26xO.27 

HF-lB CABLE, lM (3.3 Fr) 

IIp-ISCABLE,2BI(6.6FT) 

Hf-IB CABLE,4M(13.2 FlyI 

HP-E? CABLE, 0.6M(l.6FI9 

ADJUSTABLE ANTWSTICWRISFBTRAP 

6FTGROUNDlNGCORDfawrktsh-ap 

F~esnsedontheA8PbstRegdator 

HP-IBcablea 

ESDsllpplies 

2x4Fl'ANTMiWICTABLEMATWlTH16FTGROUNDWlRE 

ANTlsTATIc HEEL STRAP for we cm am4iuotivf3jioors 

HPS76SEKEYBOARDOVERLAYfurtx&rnuZ k4?gmwd 

RAcKM0uNTKlTwlTH0uTIiANDLEs 

RACKMOUNTKlTWlTHlLUUDLES 

FRoNTHANDLE 

FUX'PYDISKS,3.6INCHDOUBIJMIDEZD(boxof10) 

l262-46W 

l262-46OO 

1262-4607 

1401-0240 

211O-OLM6 

2110-0424 

211@0047 

2110-0426 

BPlOS33A 

HPlOS2SB 

WlW33C 

0300-1367 

OSOO-OOSO 

o200-0707 


able 13-1. 

Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Options 

REFEBENCE DESIGNATIONS 

A ....................................... ..as#embl y 

B ..................................... ..fan;moto r 

J....... electrical connector (stationary portion); jack 

.......................... rotary puke generator 

W..................... cable; transmkion path; wire 

ABBREVIATIONS 

A ........................................ ..ampe re 

......................... automatic level control 

ASSY .................................... ..assemb ly 

AUX .................................... ..a uxilhuy 

BD ........................................... board 

COAX ...................................... coaxial 

CPU ......................... central processing unit 

CW .......................... conical washer (screws) 

D ......................................... diameter 

.......................... electro6t8tic diecharge 

....................................... external 

EYO .................................. YIQwcillatm 

FL ................................ ilathead (screws) 

Fp ..................................... front panel 

FBAGN ............................... .fractional N 

FREQ ................................... frequency 

QHZ ...................................... glgaheriz 

.................................... hexagonal 

HP ................................ HewlettZaclcard 

HP-IB ................ Hewlett-Packard interface bun 

Hx .............................. hexrecess(mcrews) 

ID .................................. inside diameter 

IF ........................... intermediate frequency 

I/o .................................... input/output 

............................ llghbemitting diode 

1348 ReplaceableParts 

M......................................... ..mete m 

M ................................. metricha&vare 

..................................... megahertz 

mm ................................... ..millimete m 

MON ..................................... ..monito r 

NOM ...................................... nominal 

NY ......................................... ..nylon 

OD ................................ outside diameter 

opt ....................................... ..optao n 

...................................... wcillator 

PN ...................................... ..panhe ad 

PC .............................. patchlock(acrews) 

PC .................................. printedciEuit 

PIff ...................... peripheral interface group 

PN ................................ panhead(Bcrewa) 

...................................... reference 

REPL .................................. replacement 

RP ...................................... rear panel 

SH ....................... ..mAce t head cap (mcmws) 

............................ lmxn?cear(-#) 

ic ...................................... ..quant~ ty 

V ............................................. volt 

.................................. wire formed 

WI0 ...................................... ..withou t 

YIQ ............................. yttrium-iron garnet 

OPI’IONS 

DO!?, ......................... harmonica measurement 

006............................ ..6QHzperformanc e 

010 .................................... time domain 

011 ..................................... w/o test set 

076 ................................ ..76ohmteat= t 

ID6 ........................... 10 Mfizpreci8ion ref

14 

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair 

Procedures 

This chapter contains procedures for removing and replacing the major 

assemblies of the HP 8753E network analyzer. A table showing the 

corresponding post-repair procedures for each replaced assembly is located at 

the end of this chapter. 

Assembly Replasemeat and Post-Repair Procedures 14-l

Replacing an Assembly 


Network Analyzer. 






Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures” 

4. Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustments and 



Verification and Performance Tests m 

Warning These servicing instructions are for use by qualmed 

personnel only. lb avoid electrical shock, do not perform 

any servicing unless you are qualified to do so. 

Warning 

The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to 

expose dangerous voltages. D~SCOMCC~ the instrument from 

all voltage sources while it is being opened. 

Warning The power cord is co~ected to internal capacitors that may 

remain live for 10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from 

its power supply. 

Caution Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible 

to damage from ESD (electrostatic discharge). Perform the 

following procedures only at a static-safe workstation and wear 

a grounding strap. 

14-2 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

Procedures described in this chapter 

The following pages describe assembly replacement procedures for the 

HP 8753E assemblies listed below: 

w LineFuse 

� Covers 

w Front Panel Assembly 

w Front Panel Interface and Keypad Assemblies (Al, A2) 

� Display, Display Lamp, and Inverter Assemblies (Al& A27) 

� Rear Panel Assembly 

w Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly (Al6 ) 

N A3 Source Assembly 

� A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator 

� AS, AlO, All, A12, A13, Al4 Card Cage Boards 

� A9 CPU/PIG Board 

� A9BTl Battery 

w Al5 Preregulator 

� Al7 Motherboard Assembly 

� A19 Graphics Processor 

� A20 Disk Drive 

w A21, A22 Test Port Couplers 

� A23 LED Board 

w A24 Transfer Switch 

� A25 Test Set Interface 

� A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option lD5) 

� BlFhn 

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-3

Line Fuse 

Tools Required 

� small slot screwdriver 

Removal 

Warning For continued protection against fire hazard, replace fuse 

only with same type and rating (3 A 250 VAC). The use of 

other fuses or materials is prohibited. 

1. Disconnect the power cord. 

2. Use a small slot screwdriver to pry open the fuse holder. 

3. Replace the failed fuse with a 3 AF 250 V F fuse. See “Hardware, 

Preregulator” in Chapter 13 to find the part number. 

Replacement 

1. Simply replace the fuse holder. 

144 Assembly Replaoement and Post-Repair Procedures

FUSE IN USE 

‘INSERT SCREWDRIVER, 

PRY OPEN 

Line Fuse 

qg652d 


Covers 


� T-10 TORX screwdriver 




Removing the top cover 

1. Remove both upper rear feet (item 1) by loosening the attaching screws 

(item 2). 

2. Loosen the top cover screw (item 3). 

3. Slide cover off. 

Removing the side covers 

1. Remove the top cover. 

2. Remove the lower rear foot (item 4) that corresponds to the side cover you 

want to remove by loosening the attaching screw (item 5). 

3. Remove the handle assembly (item 6) by loosening the attaching screws 

(item 7). 


Removing the bottom cover 

1. Remove both lower rear feet (item 4) by loosening the attaching screws 

(item 5). 

2. Loosen the bottom cover screw (item 8). 



Covers 

sg677e 

Assambly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-7

Front Panel Assembly 





� ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap 

� 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb) 

Removal 


2. Remove the front bottom feet (item 1). 

3. Remove all of the RF cables that are attached to the front panel (item 2). 

4. Remove the line button (item 6). 

5. Remove the trim strip (item 3) from the top edge of the front frame by 

prying under the strip with a small slot screwdriver. 

6. Remove the six screws (item 4) from the top and bottom edges of the frame. 

7. Slide the front panel over the test port connectors 

8. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item 5). The front panel is now free from the 

. 

mstrument. 

Replacement 

1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure. 

Note When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that the 

connections be torqued to 10 in-lb. 


Front Pctnel Assembly 

Asssmbly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-9

Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies 

(Al, A21 






H 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb) 

Removal 

1. Remove the front panel assembly from the analyzer (refer to “Front Panel 

Assembly” in this chapter). 

2. DiSCOMeCt all cables from the front panel interface board (items 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 

and 7). 

� Disconnect item 4 by pulling up on the comers of the connector base. 

This will release the cable for easy removal. Damage may occxr to the 

w-n-r (f this step is not followed. 

H Disconnect item 7 by sliding the ribbon cable away from its cable clamp. 

3. Remove the four screws (item 5), attaching the interface board (A2). 

4. Remove the nine screws from the Al front panel board to access and remove 

the rubber keypad. 

Replacement 


Caution Damage may result if the following step is not followed. 

2. To reconnect item 7, ensure that the ribbon cable is placed squarely into both 

of its cable clamps 

14-l 0 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

Front Panel Keyboard and Interface Assemblies 

sg680e 

Assambly Replasement and Post-Repair Procedures 

14-l 1

Display Lamp and Inverter Assemblies 

(AH, A27) 







� 5116~inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb) 

Removal 

1. Remove the front panel assembly (refer to “Front Panel Assembly” in this 

chapter). 

2. Disconnect the cables (items 2, 3 and 4) from the Al assembly. 

3. Remove two screws (item 8) from the mounting plate (7) to remove the 

inverter (A27). 

4. Remove the three screws (item 1) that attach the mounting plate and display 

to the front panel. 

5. Remove the mounting plate and the display (A18) from the front panel. 

Note The bottom half of the following ffgure depicts the rear view of 

the Al8 assembly with the mounting plate removed. Use the 

location of the display lamp cable (item 4) to aid in orientation. 

6. Remove the three screws (item 5) from the outside of the display. 

7. Pull the lamp (item 6) out with a curving side motion, as shown. 


Replacement 


2. Be sure to route ribbon cable 2 through the cable clamp on the A2 assembly 

and the LCD mounting plate (item 7). 

Caution Be sure that cables are plugged in square and correct. Failure to 

do so will result in serious component damage. 

Caution Do not exceed 3 in-lb when replacing the self-tapping screws 

(item 8). 


Display Iamp and hverter Assemblies 

(3 Places) 

14-14 mmbly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 

shg6113e






Removal 

1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top (item 1) and bottom covers 

(refer to “Covers” in this chapter). 

2. Remove the four rear standoffs (item 2). 

3. If the anaiyzer has option lD5, remove the BNC jumper from the high 

stability frequency reference (item 3). 

4. Remove the four screws (item 5) that attach the interface bracket to the 

rear panel. 

5. Remove the six screws (item 6) and (item 7), that attach the preregulator to 

the rear panel. 

6. Remove the six screws (item 8) from the rear frame: two from the top edge 

and four from the bottom edge. 

7. Remove the screw from the pc (item 9) board stabiiizer and remove the 

stabilizer. 

8. Lift the reference board (A12) from its motherboard connector and 

disconnect the flexible RF cable from its connector on Al2 (item 10) 

9. Identify the wiring harness leading to the VGA connector (item 4). Follow 

this harness back to its connection on the motherboard. The air flow cover, 

attached by two screws, wiII have to be removed to get to this connection. 

Disconnect the VGA wire harness at this point. 

14-l 6 Assembly Replawment and Post-Repair Procedures

Bear Panel Assembly 

10. Pull the rear panel away from the frame. Disconnect the ribbon cable 

(item 11) from the motherboard connector, pressing down and out on 

the connector locks. Disconnect the wiring harness (item 12) from the 

motherboard. 

Replacement 


I 

\ @I 

12 on Top) 

I4 on Bottom) 

(2 Places) 

(3 Places) 

I4 Places) 

(4 Places) 

sg682e 




Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly (A16) 


� 9/16 hex nut driver 

� 3/16 hex nut driver 




Removal 

1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top and bottom covers (refer to 

“Covers” in this chapter). 

2. If the analyzer has option lD5, remove the high-stabiiity frequency reference 

jumper (item 1). 

3. Remove the hardware that attaches the seven BNC connectors to the rear 

panel (item 2). 

4. Remove the hardware that attaches the interface connector to the rear panel 

(item 3). 

5. Remove the rear panel from the analyzer (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” in 

this chapter). 

6. If the analyzer has option lD5, disconnect the cable (item 4) from the rear 

panel interface board. 

7. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item 5) from the rear panel interface board. 

Replacement 


14-20 Assambly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

(7 

(2 

(Opt ID5 only) 

Rear Panel Interface Board Assembly 

only) 

sg604e 

Asssmbly Replasement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-21

A3 Source Assembly 

‘Ibols Required 




Removal 

1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” in 


2. Remove the source bracket (item 1) by removing four screws (It might be 

necessary to disconnect a flexible cable from the B sampler.) 

3. Disconnect the flexible cable W26. 

4. Disconnect the semirigid cable Wl. 

5. Lift the two retention clips (item 2) at the front and rear of the source 

assembly to an upright position. 

6. Move Wl to the side while lifting the source high enough to provide wrench 

clearance for W24. ‘lb lift the A3 source assembly, use the source bracket 

handle (item 3). 

7. Disconnect the semirigid cable W24. 

8. Remove the source assembly from the instrument. 


W2L 

W26 

w1 - 

, 

AwnMy Replacclment sad Post-Repair Procedures 


. A3 

14-23


Replacement 

1. Check the connector pins on the motherboard before reinstallation. 

2. Slide the edges of the sheet metal partition (item 4) into the guides at the 

sides of the source compartment. Press down on the module to ensure that it 

is well seated in the motherboard connector. 

3. Push down the retention clips Reconnect the two semirigid cables (Wl and 

W24) and one flexible cable (W26) to the source assembly. 



4. Reinstall the source bracket. 

5. Reconnect the flexible cable to the B sampler. 

14-24 Assembty Replacement and PostRepair Procedures

A4, AS, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator 

!lbols Required 

� Needle-nose pliers 

w T-10 TORX screwdriver 



Removal 

1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” in 


2. To remove the B sampler (A6), you must remove the source bracket (item 1). 

3. Disconnect all cables from the top of the sampler (A4/A5/A6) or pulse 

generator (A7). 

4. Remove the screws from the top of each sampler assembly. Extract the 

assembly from the slot. 

Note ‘lb remove the A (A5) or R (A4) sampler, lhst remove the cable 

on the B (A6) sampler. 

Note If you are removing the pulse generator (A7), the grounding 

clip, which rests on top of the assembly, will become loose once 

the four screws are removed. Be sure to replace the grounding 

clip when reinsMhng the pulse generator assembly. 

14-26 Assembly Replacement and Past-Repair Procedures

w5 ’ 

(A4 t o A7) 

W6 ’ 

IA5 t o A7) 

w7’ 

(A6 to A7) \ 

1 

\ 

:I 

;1 

A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator 

\ 

A7 

/ 

All 

/*I4 

1 W8 

(AIIJI t o AL) 

1 w9 

(AIIJI t o A7) 


A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator 

Replacement 



Note � When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that 

the connections be torqued to 10 in-lb. 

� Be sure to route W8 and W9 as shown. No excess wire should 

be hanging in the All and Al4 board slots. Routing the wires 

in this manner will reduce noise and crosstalk. 


A8, AlO, A11, A12, A13, Al4 Card Cage Boards 





Removal 

1. DiscOMect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” in 


2. Remove the screw from the pc board stabilizer and remove the stabilizer. 

3. Lift the two extractors located at each end of the board. Lift the board from 

the card cage slot, just enough to disconnect any flexible cables that may be 

connected to it. 

4. Remove the board from the card cage slot. 

Replacement 



Note De sure to route W8 and W9 as shown. No excess wire should 

be hanging in the All and Al4 board slots Routing the wires in 

this manner will reduce noise and crosstalk in the instrument. 

14-30 Assembly Replawmeat and Past-Repair Procedures

AS, AlO, All, A12, A13, Al4 Caxd Cage Boards 

W26 From Al2 A15Wl A10 A8 All A12 Al3 

/ 

WI3 

(AlZJ3 T O 

REAR PANEL 

EXT REFi 

Al4 

W2b 

, (AIZJL T O A31 

WI2 

, (A13J2 T O A12J-B 

WI1 

, tA14J3 T O A13Jl) 

’ WI0 

(A14J2 T O A12Jl) 

----.. 

%4J, T O A71 

1 W8 

fAllJ1 T O AL) 

sg609e 


A9 CPU Board 

Ibols Required 


w T-15 TORX screwdriver 

w ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap 

Removal 


2. Remove the top and bottom covers (refer to “Covers” in this chapter). 

3. Remove the rear panel assembly, following steps 4 through 6 of “Rear Panel 

Assembly. n 

4. Turn the analyzer upside down. 

5. Pull the rear panel away from the frame as shown in the following 6gure. 

6. Disconnect the four ribbon cables (W20, W35, W36, and W37) from the CPU 

board (AS). 

7. Remove the three screws (item 2) that secure the CPU board (A9) to 

the deck. Slide the board towards the front of the instrument so that it 

disconnects from the three standoffs (item 3). 

8. Lift the board off of the standoffs 

Replacement 


2. Leave the bottom cover off in order to perform the post repair procedures 

located at the end of this chapter. 

14-32 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Prosedures

w37 

w20 \ 

A9 CPU Board 

sg6112e 


A9 CPU Board 

14-34 Assembly Replasemeat and Post-Repair Procedures 

I,” VII - c - 

-A9 

sg690e

A9BTl Battery 




� soldering iron with associated soldering tools 

Removal 

1. Remove the A9 CPU/PIG board (refer to “A9 CPU Board” in this chapter). 

2. Unsolder and remove AOBTl from the A9 CPU/PIG board. 

warning 

Replacement 

Battery A9BTl contains lithium. Do not incinerate or 

puncture this battery. Dispose of the discharged battery in 

a safe manner. 

DO NOT THROW BAlTERIES AWAY BUT 

COLLECT AS SMALL CHEMICAL WASTE. 

1. Make sure the new battery is inserted into the A9 board with the correct 

polarity. 

Warning Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. 

Replace only with the same or equivalent type 

recommended. 

2. Solder the battery into place. 

3. Replace the A9 CPU/PIG board (refer to “A9 CPU Board” in this chapter). 


II II d #I 

0 

A9BTl Battery 

,A9 

,A9BTl 

sg691e 

Asssmbly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 14-37

A15 Preregulator 





Removal 

1. Remove the rear panel (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” in this chapter). 

2. Remove the two remaining screws from the top of the rear frame. 

3. Disconnect the wire bundle (A15Wl) from A&J2 and A17J3. 

4. Remove the preregulator (A15) from the frame. 

Replacement 


Note � When reinsMing the preregulator (A15), make sure the three 

grommets (item 1) on A15Wl are seated in the two slots (item 

2) on the back side of the preregulator and the slot (item 3) in 

the card cage wall. 

� After reinsMing the preregulator (A15), be sure to set the 

line voltage selector to the appropriate setting, 115 V or 

230 V. 

14-36 Asssmbly Replacameat and Past-Repair Procedures

I b2 

Al5 

(2 Placed 

A8J2 

(3 Places) 

\ 

A17J3 


sg692e 

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 1448

Al7 Motherboard Assembly 





� smaII slot screwdriver 

� 2.5-mm hex-key driver 



Removal 

lb remove the Al7 motherboard assembly only, perform the following steps to 

remove all assemblies and cables that connect to the motherboard. 

1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top, bottom, and side covers 


2. Remove the front panel assembly (refer to “Front Panel Assembly” in this 

chapter). 

3. Remove the rear panel assembly (refer to “Rear Panel Assembly” in this 

chapter). 

4. Remove the preregulator (refer to “A15 Preregulator” in this chapter). 

5. Remove the graphics processor (refer to “A19 Graphics Processor” in this 

chapter). 

6. Remove the test set deck (item 3) by removing the three screws (item 4) 

from the bottom and four screws (item 5) from the side frames. For clarity, 

the Sgure on the next page does not show the assemblies attached to the 

test set deck. 

7. Remove the CPU board (refer to “A9 CPU Board” in this chapter). 

8. Remove the memory deck (item 1) by removing three screws (item 2) from 

the bottom and four screws (item 6) from the side frames 

1440 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

Al7 Motherboard Assembly 

9. Remove the source assembly (refer to “A3 Source Assembly” in this 

chapter). 

10. Remove the samplers and pulse generator (refer to “A4, A5, A6 Samplers 

and A7 Pulse Generator” in this chapter). 

11. Remove the card cage boards (refer to “A& AlO, All, A12, A13, Al4 

Card Cage Boards” in this chapter). Continue with step 12 to remove the 

motherboard, or step 13 to remove the motherboard/card cage assembly. 

12. To disconnect the motherboard (item 7), remove the 34 riv screws (item 8). 

Important: Do not misplace ang of these screws. 

v 

sg693e 

Assembly Replawmeat and Post-Repair Procedures 14-41

A 17 Motherboard Assembly 

lb remove the Al7 motherboard assembly along with the card cage, continue 

with the following step: 

13. Referring to the figure on the following page, remove the front frame (item 

1) and rear frame (item 6) by removing the attaching screws (item 7). At 

this point, only the motherboard/card cage assembly should remain. This 

whole assembly is replaceable. 

1442 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

Replacement 


A 17 Motherboard Assembly 

Aswmbly Replacement and Past-Repair Procedures 1443

A19 Graphics Processor 





Removal 


2. Remove the top cover (refer to “Covers” in this chapter) and front panel 

(refer to “Front Panel Assembly” in this chapter.) 

3. Remove the six screws (item 1) from the GSP cover (item 2) and lift off. 

4. Swing out the handles (item 3) and pull the GSP board (item 4) out of the 

analyzer. 

Replacement 

1. Check the connector pins on the motherboard before reinstaktion. 


1444 Assembly Replacement and Psi-Repair Procedures

(6 Plocesl 

Cc 2 

” P 

A19 Graphics Processor 

sg695e 

Awembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 1446

A20 Disk Drive Assembly 


w #2 ball-end hexdriver with long shaft 




� T-20 TCRX screwdriver 



Required Diskette 

� 3.5” diskette, 1.44 MEl, formatted (DOS) 

Prelimiuary Instructions 

Prepare the new disk drive assembly for installation in the analyzer. The 

Installation Note included in the service kit provides details for this procedure. 

1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top, bottom, and left side-covers 


2. Turn the analyzer over, so that the bottom faces up. 

3. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item 1) that connects to the disk drive from its 

connector on the CPU board. 

4. Remove the four screws (item 2) that secure the disk-drive bracket to the 

side of the analyzer, and remove the complete disk drive assembly. 

Note Save the screws removed in this step for use later when 

installing the new disk drive bracket. 

5. Disconnect the ribbon cable from its connection on the disk drive. 

1446 Assembly Replacemeat and Post-Repair Procedures


sg696e 

Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures 1447


Install the replacement disk drive. 

1. Connect the existing ribbon cable to the replacement disk drive. 

Note Make sure that the disk drive connector-contacts touch the 

ribbon cable contact areas (the ribbon-cable contact areas must 

face the contacts in the disk drive connector). Also assure that 

the connector is properly locked. 

2. Slide the disk drive and bracket assembly into the analyzer. 

3. Route the ribbon cable through the side access hole. Avoid twisting the 

cable-duplicate the original folds made to the cable. 

4. Fasten the disk-drive bracket to the side of the analyzer frame, using the four 

screws saved in step 4 (immediately above). 

5. Remove the trim strip from the top of the front panel. 

6. Remove the screw from the top left comer of the front panel. This will allow 

access to one of the #2 hex screws of the disk-drive assembly. 

7. Aligu the disk drive with the front panel, and tighten the three screws that 

fasten the disk drive to the disk-drive bracket. Do not over-tighten. 

8. ReCOMeCt the ribbon cable to the CPU board. 

Note Make sure that the CPU connector-contacts touch the ribbon 

cable contact areas (the ribbon-cable contact areas must face 

the contacts in the CPU connector). Also assure that the 

connector is properly locked. 

Test the disk-eject function, and adjust if required. 

1. Insert a diskette into the drive. 

2. Eject the diskette from the drive. 

3. If the diskette does not eject properly, loosen and re-tighten the three screws 

that hold the disk drive to the disk-drive bracket: 

a. Loosen the two screws that are readily accessible. 

b. Loosen the upper-most front screw through the access hole in the top-left 

area of the front frame. 

14-46 Assambly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

c. Center the disk drive in the opening. 

d. Re-tighten all three screws. 

Reinstall the covers. 

1. Reinstall the remaining top front-panel screw in the left corner. 

2. Reinstall the trim strip. 


3. Reinstall the covers. If needed, refer to “Covers” in this chapter for help in 

performing this task. 

Assembly Replacement and Past-Repair Prowdures 1449

A21, A22 Test Port Couplers 







Removal 

1. DiscOMeCt the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers” 

in this chapter). 

2. Disconnect the small bias wire from the test set interface board (A25). 

For coupler A2 1 disconnect the gray wire (A2 1 W 1). 

For coupler A22 disconnect the gray wire (A22Wl). 

3. Disconnect the two semirigid cables from the coupler assembly. 

For coupler A21 disconnect W3 and W31. 

For coupler A22 disconnect W4 and W32. 

4. Remove the four screws, washers, and pressure springs that secure the 

coupler to the test set deck. Remove the coupler. 

5. Remove the pressure springs 

Replacement 


Note � If you’re instalhng a new coupler, the gold lead on the 

feedthru capacitor (item 1) must be curt@&@ bent at 

90 degrees to prevent it from shorting to the bottom cover. 

� When reconnecting semirigid cables, it is recommended that 

the connections be torqued to 10 in-lb. 

14-50 Assembly Replacement and Past-Repair Procedures

A21, A22 ‘I&t Port Couplers 

w32 A22Wl w31 w21 AZIWI 

I3 

\ u:l 

w3 1 

L- 

sg697e 


A23 LED Board 







Removal 

1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers” 


2. Remove the front panel (refer to “Front Panel Assembly” in this chapter). 

3. Remove the A22 test port coupler (refer to “A21, A22 Test Port Couplers” in 


4. Disconnect W33 from the LED board (A23). 

5. Remove the screw (item 1) from the front of the test set deck. 

6. Remove the LED board (A23). 

Replacement 


1452 Assembly Replacement and Pest-Repair Procedures

I II II III ’ +~Z I II 

0 

A>3 

A23 LED Board 

sg698e 








Removal 

1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers” 


2. Disconnect A24Wl from 53 on the test set interface board (A25). 

3. Disconnect the three semirigid cables (Wl, W31, and W32) from the transfer 

switch (Az4). 

4. Remove the two screws (item 1) that secure the transfer switch. 

Replacement 






w32 w31 J3 A2LWl 

(2 Places) 

sg699e 

Assembly Replasement and Post-Repair Prosedures 14-55

A25 Test Set Interface 



m T-15 TORX screwdriver 

� 5/164nch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb) 


Removal 

1. DiscOMeCt the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to “Covers” 


2. Disconnect all cables and wires (A21W1, A22W1, W33, and W34) from the 

test set interface board (A25). 

3. Remove the five screws (item 1) that secure the test set interface board. 

Replacement 


14-56 Assembly Rsplasement and Post-Repair Procadures

(5 Places) 

w34 A24Wl 

lb A25 0 IIIIIIlI 

I - I IIA ,411 I 

A22Wl w33 AZIWI 

A25 lkst Set Interface 

I 

sg6100e 


A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option lD5) 

Assembly 

!bols Required 



� Q/16-inch hex-nut driver 


Removal 


2. Disconnect W30 from the high stability frequency reference board (A26). 

3. Remove the BNC connector nut and washer from the u 10 MI-Ix PRECISION 

REFERENCE” connector (item 1) on the rear panel. 

4. Remove the screw (item 4) that attaches the lD5 assembly to the rear panel. 

5. Remove the screw (item 2) that secures the high stability frequency 

reference board (A26) to the bracket. 

6. Slide the board out of the bracket. Be careful not to lose the plastic spacer 

washer (item 3) that is on the BNC connector as the board is being removed. 

Replacement 


Note Before reinserting the high stability frequency reference board 

(A26) into the bracket, be sure the plastic spacer washer 

(item 3) is on the BNC connector. 

M-58 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option lD5) Assembly 

INSIDE 

0 

OUTSIDE 

- w30 

sg6101e 


Bl Fan Assembly 


� 2.5-mm hex-key driver 




Removal 


2. Remove the four screws (item 1) that secure the fan and fan cover to the 

rear panel. 

Replacement 


Note The fan should be installed so that the direction of the air Bow 

is away from the instrument. There is an arrow on the fan 

chassis indicating the air flow direction. 


(4 PLACES) 

Bl Fhn Assembly 

hg628d 

Assembly Replacement and Pest-Repair Procedures 14-61

Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753E 

The following table lists the additional service procedures which you must 

perform to ensure that the instrument is working correctly, following the 

replacement of an assembly. These procedures can be located in either 

Chapter 2 or Chapter 3. 

l3yfbrm the procedures in the order that th,eg are listed in the table 

‘Jhble 14 1. Belated Service Procedures 

Replaced Alyjlwtallentd W?l%C&iOll 

-1Y clbrection constants (ch. 3) (a. 2) 

Al Front Panel None SWViCK?lbStO 

Keyboard service lbt 23 

A2 Pront Panel None SeIViWWO 

hterf~ service lbt 23 

service l&t 12 

lbtS66-80 

A3 source A9 Switch Positions lbst Port Output Frequency Range 

sourceDefcc(%st44) &Accuracy 

Pretune Default CC (l&t 46) lkst Port Output Power Accumcy 

Anal~BuscC(‘Ibst46) lbst Port Output Power Range aud 

Source Pretune CC (l&t 48) b-m 

RF Output Power CC (l&t 47) lbst Port Output/Input Hanuonics 

Sampler Maguitude and Phase CC (lb& 53) (Option 002 only) 

Cavity OBciUstor Frequency CC (J&t 54) 



MIAS/A6 Samplers A9 Switch Positions Miuimu~~ R Channel Level 

Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (‘l&t 53) (if R sampler replaced) 

IF Amplifier CC (Test 51) lbtPorLcrosetallr 

EEPROM Backup Disk 7&t Port Input Prequency Response 

A7 Pulse Generator A9 Switch Positions l&t Port Input Frequency Response 

Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (‘l&t 63) l&t Port Frequency Range and 


A8 Post Regulator A9 Switch Positions SenriCeMO 

Cavity oscibtor Frequency CC (lbt 54) Check A8 test point voltagea 

Source 8purAvoidance Tracking 

EEPROM Backup Disk

R@M%3d 

AS&Xllbl~ 

49 CPU 

FXPROM Backup 

)isk Available) 

‘able 14-l. Related Service Procedures (2 of 3) 

A4snstments/ 

Correction cons~ts (oh. 8) 


Load Pirmware 

CC Retrieval 

Serial Number CC (Test 55) 

Option Number CC (!Ibst 66) 

Operator’s Check 

service T&t, 21 

servi~W22 

V&cation 

P- 2) 

49 CPU A9 Switch Positions l&t Port Output Frequency Range 

EEPROM Backup Load Fhmware and Accuracy 

)isk Not Available) Serial Number CC (Test 66) l&t Port Output Power Accuracy 

Option Number CC (‘Rx& 60) ‘l&t Port Output Power Range and 

SourceDefCC(Jbt44) Linearity 

Pretune Default CC (lbt 46) !kst Port Receiver Dynamic Accuracy 

AnabgBusCC(‘Ibt40) l&t Port Input Frequency Response 

Cal Kit Default (Test 57) 

Source Pretune CC (!Ibst 48) 

RF Output Power Cc (Tbst 47) 

Sampler Maguitude and Phase CC (lbt 53) 

ADCLinearityCC(Test62) 

lF Amplifier Cc (lbt 51) 

Cavity O&llator Frequency CC (lb& 54) 

EEF’ROM Backup Disk 

LlO Digital IF A9 Switch Positions l&t Port Input Noise Ploor Level 

AnalogBwccW46) 

Test Port CTc&alk 

Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (‘lbt 53) System Trace Noise 

AM: Linearity CC (!kst 52) 

IF AmpWer CC (Ylbst 51) 


Lll Phase Lock A9 Switch Positions 

Anal~BusCC(‘Ibst46) 

Pretune Default CC (lbst 46) 

Source Pretune CC (l&t 48) 

EXPROM Backup Disk 

L12 Reference A9 Switch Positions 

HighLowBand%3nsition 

Fresuency Accuracy 


Minimum R channel Level 

lkst Port Output Prequency Range 

ad- 

7&t Port Output Prequency Range 

ad- 

Assembly Replacsment and Post-Repair Procedures 14-63

gepLacea 

As!3embly 


(Analog) 

A14 Fractional-N 

(Digital) 


Al6 Rear Panel 

Interface 

A17 Motherboard 

‘able 14-1. Related Service Procedures (3 of 3) 

A@wtments/ 

correction Constants (ch. 2) 


Fractional-N Spur and 

FM Sideband 

EEFROM Backup Disk 



Fractional-N Spur Avoidance 

andFMSideband 


None 

None 

None 

Verilicatlon 

(Q. 2) 

l&t Port Output Frequency Range 

andAccuracy 

!I& Port Output Frequency Range 

and- 

Self-l&t 

Internal l&t 13, 

Rear Panel 

Observation of Display 

lksk306-80 

A18 Display None Ob6ervation of Display 

lkSW66-SO 

A19 Graphics System None Observation of Display 

Processor lkStS69-SO 

A20 Disk Drive none none 

A21 l&t Port Coupler RF Output Power CC (‘lbst 47) lbtPortcn#ratallr 

Sampler Maguitude and Phase CC (‘l&t 53) ‘l&t Port Frequency Response 

A2!2 ‘Test Port Coupler Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) Bst Port crosstalk 

� lkst Port Frequency Response 

A23BdAssyLED none Self-lbt (Chapter 4) 

A24 Transfer Switch none Test Port croestalk 

A26 l&t Set Interface none Self-l&t (Chapter 4) 

A26Highstabilit.y Frequency Acauacy ment Tkst Port Frequency Range 

Frequency Reference (Option lD5) =dAccuracg 

* Hewlett-Packard verifies source output performance on port 1 only. Port 2 source output 

performance is typical. 

M-64 Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures

Safety and Licensing 

Notice 

15 

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. 

Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, 

including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and 

fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors 

contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with 

the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. 

Certillcation 

Hewlett-Packard Company certihes that this product met its published 

specifications at the time of shipment from the factory. Hewlett-Packard further 

certihes that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States 

National Institute of Standards and ‘Rxhnology, to the extent allowed by 

the Institute’s calibration facility, and to the calibration facilities of other 

International Standards Organization members 

Safety and licensing 16-l

Warranty 

This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in 

material and workmanship for a period of three years from date of shipment. 

During the warranty period, Hewlett-Packard Company will, at its option, either 

repair or replace products which prove to be defective. 

For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service 

facility designated by Hewlett-Packard. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to 

Hewlett-Packard and Hewlett-Packard shall pay shipping charges to return the 

product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and 

taxes for products returned to Hewlett-Packard from another country. 

Hewlett-Packard warrants that its software and Rrmware designated by 

Hewlett-Packard for use with an instrument will execute its programming 

instructions when properly installed on that instrrmtent. Hewlett-Packard does 

not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or software, or firmware will 

be uninterrupted or error-free. 

LIMITATION OF WARRANTY 

The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or 

inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, 

unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental 

specihcations for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance. 

NOOTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HEWLETT- 

PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCMIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF 

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 

EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES 

THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE 

REMEDIES. HEWLETT-PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, 

INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, 

WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY 

Assistance 

Product muiwnce agreements and other customer assistance agremuMs are 

available for Hewlett-ltcckard products. 

Fbr any assistance, contact gour nearest Hewlett-Rzckurd Sales and semrice 

O? 

15-2 Safety and Licensing

Instrument Support Center 

HewlettPnckard Company 

Kw 4o3-0301 

Hcodqnsrtere 

Hewlettpackard S.A. 

160, Route du NanM’Avril 

1217 Meyrin 2Meneva 

swi~rlnnd 

(4122) 7S9.8111 

Great Britain 

Hewlett-Packard Ltd. 

E&dale Rand, Winnersh Triangle 

wokinghm, Berkrhlre RQ416D2 

Headqnarters 

HewlettZackard Company 

3496DeerCreekRoad 

plrlo Alto, California, USA 

94304-1316 

(416) 867-6927 

JIlppn 

HewlettGnckard Japan, Ltd. 

91 --alo, Hachioji 

lbkyo 192, Japan 

(81426) a2111 

Ohlna HewlettPackard Company 

3SEfeiSanHuanXlRoad 

shumg Yu ml 

Hai Dian District 

Beijing, china 

(36 1) 2566333 

Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Oifices 

UNITEDsrATEs 

BUllOmAN HELD OPBE4!l’IONS 

Prsnce 

Hewlett-Packard France 

1 Avenue Du Canada 

Zone D’Activite De Courtaboeuf 

F-91947 Lea Ulia Cedex 

France 

(331)t5@826069 

INTElEON FIELD OPBBATIONB 

Alwtnliilb 

Hewlett-Packard Aust&ia Ltd. 

31-41 Joseph Street 

Blackbum, Victoria 3130 

(613) 896-2896 

Q--W 

Hewlett-Packard GmbH 

Hewlett-Packard Straae 

61362 F&d Hombug v.d.H 

Qe-Y 

(49 6172) 16-o 

HewlettPackard (Canada) Ltd. 

17690 South Service Bond 

Tram-CanadaHlghway 

Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2x8 Dian 

KS-4232 

singppore 

lhdWOJl 

Hewlettpackard Singapore (Pte.) Ltd. Hewlett-Packard lkiwan 

169 Beach Road 8th Floor, H-P Building 

#2soo Gateway west 327Fl1IIsingNorthEoad 

slnJ@pore 0718 Tkipei, lkiwan 

(ss) 291~9088 (336 2) 7l2-0404 

Safety and Licensing 15-3

Shipment for Service 

If you are sending the instrument to Hewlett-Packard for service, ship the 

analyzer to the nearest HP service center for repair, including a description of 

any failed test and any error message. Ship the analyzer using the original or 

comparable antistatic packaging materials. 

154 Safety and licensing

Safety Symbols 

The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual. Familiarize 

yourself 

. 

with each of the symbols and its meaning before operating this 

mstrument. 

Caution Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure 

that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, would result in 

damage to or destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed 

beyond a caution note until the indicated conditions are fully 

understood and met. 

Warning 

Rbrning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure 

which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could 

result in injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond 

a warning note until the indicated conditions are fkdly 

understood and met. 

Instrument Markings 

A! The instruction documentation symbol. The product is marked with 

this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the 

documentation. 

“CE” The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community. (If 

accompanied by a year, it is when the design was proven.) 

“ISMl-A” This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class 

A product. 

“CSA” The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards 

Association. 

Safety and Licensing 15-5

Safety Considerations 

Note This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance 

with IEC Publication 1010, Safety Requirements for Electronics 

Measuring Apparatus, and has been supplied in a safe condition. 

This instruction documentation contains information and 

warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe 

operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition. 

Safety Earth Ground 

Warning This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective 

txwtbhg ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains 

plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided 

with a protective earth contact. Any interruption of the 

protective conductor, inside or outside the instrument, 

is likely to make the instrument dangerous. Intentional 

interruption is prohibited. 

Warning Always use the three-prong AC power cord supplied with 

this product. Failure to ensure adequate earth groundiug by 

not using this cord may cause product damage. 

Before Applying Power 

Caution Before switching on this instrument, make sure that the 

analyzer line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the 

power supply and the correct fuse is installed. 

Caution If this product is to be energized via an autotransformer make 

sure the common terminal is connected to the neutral (grounded 

side of the mains supply). 

16-6 Safety and licensing

Servicing 

w-tit No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to 

qualified personnel. ‘Ib prevent electrical shock, do not 

remove covers. 

warning 

Warning 

These servicing instructions are for use by qualified 

personnel only. ‘Ib avoid electrical shock, do not perform 

any servicing unless you are qualified to do so. 

The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to 

expose dangerous voltages. Disconnect the instrument from 

all voltage sources while it is being opened. 

w-g Adjustments described in this document may be performed 

with power supplied to the product while protective covers 

are removed. Energy available at many points may, if 

contacted, result in personal injury. 

Warning The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may 

remain live for 10 seconds after disco~ecting the plug from 

its power supply. 

Warning 

For continued protection against fire hazard replace line 

fuse only with same type and rating (F 3AI25OV). The use of 

other fuses or material is prohibited. 

Safety and licensing 15-7

General 

Warning ‘Ib prevent electrical shock, disconnect the HP 8753E from 

mains before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly 

dampened with water to clean the external case parts. Do 

not attempt to clean internally. 

Warning 

If this product is not used as specified, the protection 

provided by the equipment could be impaired. This product 

must be used in a normal condition (in which all means for 

protection are intact) only. 

Caution This product is designed for use in InsMlation Category II and 

Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively. 

Caution VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS: When inskUng the product in 

a cabinet, the convection into and out of the product must not 

be restricted. The ambient temperature (outside the cabinet) 

must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the 

product by 4O C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet. 

If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater that 800 

watts, then forced convection must be used. 

warning 

16-8 Safety and licensing 

Install the instrument according to the enclosure protection 

provided. This instrument does not protect against the 

ingress of water. This instrument protects agains finger 

access to hazardous parts within the enclosure.

Compliance with German FFZ Emissions Requirements 

This network analyzer complies with German FIZ 526/527 Radiated Emissions 

and Conducted Emission requirements. 

Compliance with German Noise Requirements 

This is to declare that this instrument is in conformance with the German 

Regulation on Noise Declaration for Machines (Laermangabe nach der 

Maschinenlaernuerordung -3. GSGV Deutschland). 

Acoustic Noise EmissionlGeraeuschemission 

Operator Position 

Normal Operation 

Lpa

Index 

1 

100 kHz pulses, 7-16 

10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from 

A14J1, 7-26 

10 MHz precision reference 

assembly replacement, 14-58 

part numbers, 13-26 

1st Lo signal at sampler/mixer, 8-14 

2 


A14J1, 7-27 

2nd IF (4 kHz) signal locations, 8-11 

2nd LO locations, 8-14 

2ND LO waveforms, 7-21 

4 

4 kHz signal check, 8-11 

4 MHz reference signal, 7-20 

4 MHZ REF’ signal check, 8-7 

6 

+5 v digital supply 

theory of operation, 12-6 

6 


A14J1, 7-27 

8 

8753E 


A 

A10 assembly signals required, 8-8 

A10 check by substitution or signal 

examination, 8-8 

A10 digital IF, 12-30 

digital control, 12-10 

A10 Digital IF, lo-33 

All input signals, 7-36 

All Input S&n&, 7-36 

All phase lock, 10-34 

source, 12-15 

All phase lock and A3 source check, 

7-8 

All phase lock check, 7-35 

Al2 digital control signals check, 

7-23 

Al2 reference, 10-40 

source, 12-14 

Al2 reference check, 7-13 

A13/A14 Fractional-N Check, 7-24 

Al3 frac-N analog 

source, 12-14 

Al4 Divide-by-N Circuit Check, 7-29 

Al4 frac-N digital 

source, 12-14 

Al4 fractional-N (digital), 10-43 

Al4 generated digital control signals, 

7-31 

A14to-A13 digital control signals 

check, 7-29 

Al4 VCO exercise, 7-27 

Al5 preregulator 

Index-l


Al5 preregulator check, 5-9 

A15Wl plug detail, 5-10 

Al6 rear panel 


Al8 display 


power, 12-8 

A19 GSP 


Al/A2 front panel troubleshooting, 

6-13 

Al front panel 


A21 test port coupler, 12-26 

A22 test port coupler, 12-26 

A23 LED front panel, 12-26 

A24 transfer switch, 12-26 

A25 test set interface, 12-26 

A27 inverter 


A2 front panel processor 


A3 source 

external source mode, 12-23 

frequency offset, 12-22 

harmonic analysis, 12-22 

high band theory, 12-19 

low band theory, 12-16 

operation in other modes, 12-22 

source, 12-15 

super low band theory, 12-15 

theory of operation, 12-2, 12-14 

tuned receiver mode, 12-25 

A3 source and All phase lock check, 

7-8 

A4 sampler/mixer, 12-29 

A4 sampler/mixer check, 7-6 



A7 pulse generator 

source, 12-15 

A7 pulse generator check, 7-32 

A8 fuses and voltages, 5-14 

A8 post regulator 

air flow detector, 12-7 

display power, 12-8 

green LEDs, 12-7 

probe power, 12-8 

shutdown circuit, 12-7 


variable fan circuit, 12-7 

A8 post regulator test points, 5-5 

A9 CPU 

dig&ii control, 12-10 

A9 CPU operation check, 6-4 

A and B inputs check, 8-4 

A and B input traces check, 416 

ABUS Cot, 10-13 

ABUS node 16 for power check, 415 

ABUS Test., lo-10 

accessories error messages check, 

4-18 

accessories inspection, 9-3 

accessories troubleshooting, 418 

accessories troubleshooting chapter, 

9-l 

accuracy and range of frequency, 

2-18 

accuracy of frequency adjustment, 

3-48 

accuracy of power test, 2-24 

adapters, l-4 

ADC Hist., lo-11 

ADC Lin., lo-10 

ADC main, lo-23 

ADC offset correction constants 

adjustment, 3-17 

ADC of%, lo-10 

ADC Ofs Cot, 10-13 

ADD, 10-6 

addresses for HP-IB systems, 46

adjustment 

A9 Switch Positions, 3-5 

ADC offset correction constants 

(test 52), 3-17 

analog bus correction constants 

(test 46), 3-9 

cavity oscillator frequency 

correction constants (test 54), 

3-28 

fractional-N frequency range, 3-45 

fractional-N spur avoidance and 

FM sideband, 3-54 

frequency accuracy, 3-48 

high/low band transition, 3-52 

IF amplifier correction constants 

(test 51), 3-16 

initialize EEPROMs (test 58), 3-37 

option numbers correction constants 

(test 56), 3-36 

RF output power correction 

constants (test 47), 3-11 

sampler magnitude correction 


sequences for mechanical 

adjustments, 3-62 

serial number correction constants 

(test 55), 3-34 

source default correction constants 

(test 44), 3-7 

source pretune correction constants 

(test 48), 3-10 

source pretune default correction 


source spur avoidance tracking, 

3-58 

ad@&ments analyzer, 3-l 

adjustment tests, 10-3 

Adjustment Tests, 1913 

ADJUSTklENT TESTS, 10-5 


ALC ON OFF, lo-19 

ALL INT, 10-7 

Alter and Normal switch position 


amplifier (IF’) adjustment, 3-16 

analog bus, lo-22 

ANALOG BUS, lo-25 

analog bus check of reference 

frequencies, 7-13 

analog bus checks YO coil drive, 7-11 

analog bus codes, 10-49 

analog bus correction constants 


analog bus node 1, 10-27 



analog bus node 13,14, 10-35 








analog bus node 21, lo-41 













analog bus nodes, 10-26 

A3, lo-26 

ANALOG BUS ON OFF, lo-22 

analog in menu, 10-24 

analog node 10, 10-33 

Index-3

analyzer 

theory of operations, 12-1 

analyzer adjustments, 3-l 

analyzer block diagram, 419 

analyzer HP-H3 address, 46 

analyzer options available, l-7 

analyzer (spectrum), l-3 

analyzer verification, 2- 1 

antistatic wrist strap, l-4 

antistatic wrist strap and cord, l-4 

antistatic wrist strap cord, l-4 

appendix for source group 

troubleshooting, 7-38 

assemblies 

bottom view, 13-8 

part numbers, 13-6-8 

rebuilt-exchange, 13-3 

top view, 13-6 


A10 digital IF, 1430 

All phase lock, 1430 


Al3 frac-N analog, 1430 

Al4 frac-N digital, 1430 

Al5 preregulator, 14-38 

Al7 motherboard, 14-40 

A19 graphics processor, 1444 

A20 disk drive, 1446 

A21 test port-l coupler, 1450 

A22 test port-2 coupler, 1450 

A23 LED board, 1452 

A24 transfer switch, 1454 

A25 test set interface, 14-56 

A26 high stability frequency 

reference, 1458 

A3 source, 1422 

A4 R-sampler, 1426 

A5 A-sampler, 14-26 

A6 B-sampler, 1426 

A7 pulse generator, 1426 

A8 post regulator, 1430 

Index4 

A9BTl battery, 14-36 

A9 CPU, 14-32 

Bl fan, 14-60 

covers, 146 

display, 14-12 

display lamp, 1412 

front panel, 148 

front panel interface, 14-10 

keypad, 1410 

line fuse, 144 

rear panel, 1416 

rear panel interface, 14-20 

attenuator 


attenuators (fixed), l-4 

attenuator (step), l-3 

AUX OUT ON OFF, lo-24 

available options, l-7 

B 

background intensity check for 

display, 6-7 

backup EEPROM disk, 3-38 

bad cables, 9-l 

B and A inputs check, 8-4 

band (high/low) transition adjustment, 

3-52 

BAlTERY FAILED. STATE MEMORY 

CLEARED, lo-50 

BATTERY LOW! STORE SAVE REGS 

TO DISK, lo-50 

block diagram, 419 

digital control group, 6-3 

power supply, 5-25 

power supply functional group, 

5-3 

broadband power problems, 7-39 

built-in test set, 12-26 

LED front panel, 12-26 

test port couplers, 12-26 

test set interface, 12-26

transfer switch, 12-26 

bus 

analog, lo-22 

bus nodes, 19-26 

c 

cable inspection, 6-16 

cables, l-4 


front view, 13-14 


rear view, 13-16 

source, 13-18 


cable test, 9-5 

Cal Coef l-12., 10-12 

CAL FACTOR SENSOR A, 16-6 

CAL FACTOR SENSOR B, 19-6 

CALJBRATION ABORTED, lo-50 

calibration coefficients, 11-l 

calibration device inspection, 9-3 

calibration kit 7 mm, 569, l-3 

calibration kit device verification, 

9-4 

calibration kit Type-N, 758, l-3 

calibration procedure, 1 l-3 

CALIBRATION REQUIRED, lo-51 

care of connectors, l-5 

CAUTION 

OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER 

REDUCED, 8-3 

OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER 

REDUCED, 8-3 

OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER 

REDUCED, 8-3 



cavity oscillator frequency correction 

constants adjustment, 3-28 

Cav osc Cor., 19-13 

CC procedures 

ADC offset (test 52), 3-17 

analog bus (test 46), 3-9 

cavity oscillator frequency (test 

54), 3-28 

IF amplifier (test 51), 3-16 

initialize EEPROMs (test 58), 3-37 

option numbers (test 56), 3-36 

retrieve correction constant data 

from EEPROM backup disk, 

3-40 

RF output power (test 47), 3-11 

sampler magnitude (test 53), 3-18 

serial number (test 55), 3-34 

source default (test 44), 3-7 

source pretune default (test 45), 

3-8 

source prettme (test 48), 3-10 

Unprotected Hardware Option 

Numbers, 3-60 

center conductor damage, 9-3 

certification of kit, 2-7 

chassis 


check 

1st LO signal at sampler/mixer, 

8-14 

4 MHz REF signal, 8-7 

A10 by substitution or signal 



Al2 digital control signals, 7-23 


A13/A14 Fractional-N, 7-24 

Al4 Divide-by-N Circuit Check, 

7-29 

A14-to-Al3 digital control signals, 

7-29 

Al5 Preregulator, 5-9 

Al/A2 front panel, 6-13 

A3 source and All phase lock, 7-8 

A4 sampler/mixer, 7-6

A7 pulse generator, 7-32 

A8 fuses and voltages, 5-14 

A9 CPU control, 6-4 

A and B inputs, 8-4 

A and B input traces, 4-16 

accessories error messages, 4-18 

CPU control, 6-4 


disk drive, 4-7 

fan voltages, 5-22 

FN LO at A12, 7-19 

for a faulty assembly, 5-11 

HP-B3 systems, 46 

line voltage, selector switch, fuse, 

5-7 

motherboard, 5-13 

operating temperature, 5-13 

operation of A9 CPU, 6-4 

phase lock error message, 7-4 

phase lock error messages, 413 

plotter or printer, 4-7 

post regulator voltages, 5-5 


power up sequence, 411 

preregulator LEDs, 410 

rear panel LEDs, 410 

receiver, 416 

receiver error messages, 4-17 

source, 413 

the 4 kHz signal, 8-11 

trace with sampler correction off, 

8-12 

YO coil drive with analog bus, 7-11 

check front panel cables, 6-16 

cleaning of connectors, l-5 

CLEAR LIST, 10-6 

coax cable, 14 

codes for analog bus, 19-49 

coefficients, 11-l 

comb tooth at 3 GHz, 7-33 

Index-6 

components related to specific error 

terms, 9-3 

connection techniques, l-5 

connector 

care of, l-5 

CONTINUE TEST, 10-5 

controller HP-II3 address, 4-6 

controller troubleshooting, 4-8 

conventions for symbols, 19-48 

correction constants 

ADC offset (test 52), 3-17 

analog bus (test 46), 3-9 

cavity oscillator frequency(test 54), 

3-28 

display intensity (test 45), 6-7 

IF amplifier (test 51), 3-16 

initiaiize EEPROMs (test 58), 3-37 

option numbers (test 56), 3-36 

retrieval from EEPROM backup 

disk, 340 

RF output power (test 47), 3-11 

sampler magnitude (test 53), 3-18 

serial number (test 55), 3-34 

source default (test 44), 3-7 

source pretune default (test 45), 

3-8 

source pretune (test 48), 3-10 


Numbers, 3-60 

CORRECTION CONSTANT8 NOT 

STORED, lo-51 

CORRECTION TURNED OFF, lo-51 

counter, 19-23 

COUNTER 

OFF, lo-24 

counter (frequency), l-3 

counter readout location, 19-38 

CPU 


CPU operation check, 6-4

CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL 

SET, lo-51 

D 

damage to center conductors, 9-3 

data that is faulty, 417 

DEADLOCK, lo-51 

default correction constants 

adjustment for source, 3-7 

default correction constants 

adjustment for source prettme, 

3-8 

DELETE, 10-6 

delete display option, l-8 

description of tests, 10-7 

DEVICE 

not on, not connect, wrong addrs, 

lo-52 

diagnose softkey, 10-7 

diagnostic 

error terms, 11-l 

diagnostic LEDs for A15, 5-4 

diagnostic routines for phase lock, 

7-39 

diL3gIlOStiCS 

internal, 10-2 

diagnostics of analyzer, 4-3 

diagnostic tests, 6-17 

diagram 

A4 sampler/mixer to phase lock 

cable, 7-7 

digital control group, 6-3 

diagram of HP 87533, 419 

diagram of power supply, 5-25 

DIF Control, 10-9 

DIF Counter, 10-9 

digital control 

A10 dig&ii IF, 12-10 

Al6 rear panel, 12-12 

Al8 display, 12-11 

A19 GSP, 12-12 

Al front panel, 12-10 

A27 inverter, 12-12 

A2 front panel processor, 12-10 

A9 CPU, 12-10 

digital signal processor, 12-11 

EEPROM, 12-11 

main CPU, 12-10 

main RAM, 12-11 


digital control block diagram, 6-3 

digital control check, 4-11 

digital control lines observed using 

L INTCOP as trigger, 8-10 

digitai control signals A14to-A13 

check, 7-29 

digital control sign& check, 7-23 

digitai control signals generated from 

A14, 7-31 

digitai control troubleshooting 

chapter, 6-l 

digital data lines observed using L 

INTCOP as trigger, 8-10 

digital IF, 10-33, 12-30 


digital voltmeter, l-3 

directivity (EDF and EDR), 11-11 

disable shutdown circuitry, 5-16 

DISK 

not on, not connected, wrong addrs, 

lo-52 

disk drive check, 4-7 

disk drive (externai) HP-ID address, 

46 

disk drive replacement, 14-46 

disk (fIoppy), l-3 

DISK HARDWmE PROBLEM, lo-52 

DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR, 

lo-52 

DISK READ/WRITE ERROR, lo-53 

Disp 2 Ex., lo-13 

Dispkpu corn., 10-15

display 

digitai control, 12-11 

power, 12-8 

displayed spurs with a biter, 3-30 

display intensity, 6-7 

display tests, 10-3, 10-15 

DISPLAY TESTS, 10-5 

DIV FRAC N, lo-25 

Divide-by-N Circuit Check, 7-29 

DONE, 19-6 

DRAM cell, lo-15 

DSP ALU, 19-9 

DSP Control, 10-9 

DSP Intrpt, 10-9 

DSP RAM, 10-9 

DSP WrLRd, 10-9 

E 

earth ground wire and static-control 

table mat, l-4 

EDIT, 19-6 

edit iist menu, 10-6 

equipment 

automated system verification, 2-8 

cavity osciliator frequency 


display intensity correction 


EEPROM backup dish procedure, 

3-38 

external source mode frequency 

range, 2-21 

fractional-N frequency range 



FM sideband adjustment, 3-54 

frequency accuracy adjustment, 

3-48 

high/Iow band transition 

ac@stment, 3-52 

IF ampiifier correction constants 


minimum R channel level, 2-31 

RF output power correction 


sampler magnitude adjustment, 

3-18 

source spur avoidance tracking 


test port frequency range and 

accuracy test, 2-18 

test port input noise floor level, 

2-37 

test port output power accuracy, 

2-24 

test port output power range and 

linearity, 2-27 

equipment for service, l-l 

error 

BATTERY FAZLED. STATE MEMORY 




CALIBRATION ABORTED, lo-50 


CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT 

STORED, lo-51 


CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN 

CAL SET, lo-51 


DEVICE: not on, not connect, 

wrorvj addrs, lo-52 

DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM, 

lo-52 


lo-52 

DISK: not on, not connected, wrong 

addrs, lo-52 

DISK READ/WRITE ERROR, 19-53 

-ON FAILED, lo-53

INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PWR 

MTR CAL OFF, lo-53 

NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN 

PROGRESS, lo-53 

NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT 

LEVEL, lo-54 

NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT 

LEVEL, 19-54 

NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL. CLEAR 

REGISTERS, 19-54 

NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER 

METER CAL, lo-55 

NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK 

FOR STORE, lo-53 


REDUCED, lo-55 





PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE 

FOR COPY, lo-56 


FOR GPIO, lo-55 

PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED, lo-56 

PHASE LOCK LOST, lo-56 

POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK, lo-57 

POWER METER INVALID, lo-57 

POWER METER NOT SETTLED, 

lo-57 

POWER SUPPLY HOT!, lo-57 

POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!, 

lo-57 

POWER UNLEVELED, lo-58 

PRINTER: error, 10-58 

PRINTER: not handshaking, 10-58 

PRINTER: not on, not connected, 

wrong addrs, lo-58 

PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!, 

19-58 

PWR MTR: NOT ON/CONNECTED 

OR WRONG ADDRS, lo-59 

SAVE FAILED. INSUFFICIENT 

MEMORY, lo-59 

SELF TEST #II FAILED, lo-59 

SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF, 

RESET UNDER POWER MENU, 

lo-59 

SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW 

TIME SWEEP, lo-60 

TEST ABORTED, lo-60 

TROUBLE! CHECK SETUP AND 

START OVER, lo-60 

WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALIZE 

DISK, lo-60 

error-correction procedure, 1 l-3 

error message for phase lock, 7-4 

error messages, 10-1, 10-50 

error messages for receiver failure, 

8-3 

error term inspection, 9-3 

error terms, 11-l 

directivity (EDF and EDR), 11-11 

isolation (crosstaik, EXF and EXR), 

11-14 

load Match (ELF and ELR), 11-15 

reflection Tracking (ERF and ERR), 

11-13 

source match (ESF and ESR), 11-12 

transmission tracking (ETF and 

ETR), 11-16 

E-terms, 1 l-l 

external source, l-3 


range, 2-21 

external tests, 193,10-11 

EXTERNAL TESTS, 19-4 

F 

failure 

Index-9

A11 phase lock and A3 source 

check, 7-8 


key stuck, 6-14 

phase lock error, 7-4 

receiver, 8-3 

RF power from source, 7-3 

failures 

HP-IB, 6-19 

fan 



fan speeds, 5-22 

fan troubleshooting, 5-22 

fan voltages, 5-22 

faulty analyzer repair, 42 

faulty cables, 9-l 

faulty calibration devices or 

CoMectors, 9-l 

faulty data, 417 

faulty group isolation, 49 

filter (low pass), l-3 

iirmware revision softkey, 19-47 

floor level test, 2-37 

floppy disk, l-3 

FM Coil - plot with 3 point sweep, 

7-37 

FM sideband and spur avoidance 


FN count., lo-10 

FN LO at Al2 check, 7-19 

F’N LO waveform at A12J1, 7-19 

FRAC N, lo-25 

frac-N analog 

source, 12-14 

Frac N Cont., 199 

frac-N digitai 

source, 12-14 

FRACN TUNE mode HI OUT. signal, 

7-34 

FRACN TUNE ON OFT, lo-18 

Index-10 

F’ractionai-N Check, 7-24 

fractional-N (digital), 10-43 

fractional-N frequency range 

acijustment, 3-45 

F’ractionai-N Frequency Range 

Adjustment Sequence, 3-62 

fractional-N spur avoidance and F‘M 

sideband a@stment, 3-54 

kactionai-N Spur Avoidance and F’M 

Sideband Adjustment Sequence, 

3-62 

frequency accuracy adjustment, 3-48 

frequency counter, l-3, 10-23 

frequency output in SRC tune mode, 

7-8 

frequency range and accuracy test, 

2-18 

frequency range for external source 

mode, 2-21 

frequency range of fractional-N 


front panel 

assembly replacement, 148 



front panel key codes, 6-14 

front panel probe power voltages, 

5-19 

front panel processor 


front panel troubleshooting, 6-13 

Fr Pan Biag., lo-11 

F’r Pan Wr/Rd, 19-9 

fuIl two-port error-correction 

procedure, 1 l-3 

functional group fault location, 49 

functional groups 

theory of operation, 124 

fuse check, 5-7

G 

good trace display, 8-5 

green LED on Al5 

power supply shutdown, 12-6 

green LEDs on A8, 12-7 

GSP 


H 

hardkeys, 19-2 

hardware 


disk drive, 13-36 

front view, 13-32 

memory deck, 13-38 


preregulator, 13-40 

test set deck, 13-34 


HB FITR SW ON OFF, 1919 

Hewlett-Packard servicing, 42 

high band REF signal, 7-17 

high/Iow band transition adjustment, 

3-52 

High/Low Band Transition Adjustment 

Sequence, 3-62 

high quality comb tooth at 3 GHz, 

7-33 

high stabiiity frequency reference 



HI OUT signal in FRACN TUNE mode, 

7-34 

H MB line, 7-31 

how to 

adjust ADC offset correction 

constants, 3-17 

adjust analog bus correction 

constanti, 3-9 

adjust cavity oscillator frequency 

correction constants, 3-28 

adjust fractional-N frequency range, 

3-45 

adjust fractional-N spur avoidance 

and FM sideband, 3-54 

adjust frequency accuracy, 3-48 

adjust hig.hAow band transition, 

3-52 

adjust IF ampiifIer correction 


adjustment the analyzer, 3-l 

adjust option numbers correction 


adjust RF output power correction 

constants, 3-l 1 

adjust sampler magnitude correction 


adjust serial number correction 

corl!stants,3-34 

adjust source default correction 


adjust source pretune correction 


adjust source pretune default 


adjust source spur avoidance 

tracking, 3-58 

adjust the anaIyzer using sequences, 

3-62 

backup the EEPROM disk, 3-38 

check display intensity, 6-7 

clean connectors, l-5 

identify the faulty functional group, 

4-9 

initialize EEPROMs, 3-37 

load sequences from disk, 3-62 

position the A9 Switch, 3-5 

repair the analyzer, 4-l 



3-40 

IndlBx-11

set up the fractional-N frequency 

range adjustment, 3-63 

set up the fractional-N spur 

avoidance and FM sideband 


set up the high/Iow band transition 


test external source mode frequency 

range, 2-21 

test frequency range and accuracy, 

2-18 

test minimum R channel level, 

2-31 


2-37 

test port output frequency range 

and accuracy, 2-18 


2-24 



troubleshoot, 41 

troubleshoot accessories, 9-l 

troubleshoot broadband power 

problems, 7-39 

troubleshoot digital control group, 

6-l 

troubleshoot receiver, 8-l 

troubleshoot source group, 7-l 

verify an analyzer system 

automatically, 2-8 

HP 8753E adhistments, 3-l 

HP 8753E block diagram, 4-19 

HP-IB addresses, 46 

HP-IB cable, l-4 

HP-B3 Failures, 6-19 

HP-IB mnemonic for service, 10-l 

HP-IB service mnemonic defmitions, 

10-48 

HP-H3 system check, 46 

Index-12 

I 

IF ampiifier correction constants 


IF GAIN AUTO, 10-21 

IF GAIN OFF, lo-21 

IF GAIN ON, lo-21 

IF Step Cor., 19-13 

improper calibration technique, 9-l 

Init EEPROM, lo-14 

INITlALIzATION FAILED, lo-53 

initiaiize EEPROMs, 3-37 

initial observations, 43 

input noise floor level test, 2-37 

inputs (A and B) check, 8-4 

input traces check, 416 

inspect cables, 6-16 

inspect error terms, 9-3 

inspection of test port connectors 

and calibration devices, 9-3 

inspect the accessories, 9-3 

INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PWR MTR 

CAL OFF, lo-53 

Inten DAC., 19-15 

internal diagnostics, 10-2 

inted diagnostic tests, 6-17 

internal tests, W-3,10-7 

INTERNAL TESTS, lo-4 

inverter 


invoking tests remotely, 10-48 

isolation (crosstaik, EXF and EXR), 

11-14 

K 

key codes, 6-14 

key faihne identification, 6-14 

keys in service menu, 10-l 

kit re-certiiication, 2-7 

kits 

calibration kit 7 mm, 50131, l-3 

calibration kit Type-N, 75Q, l-3

tool, l-3 

verification kit 7 mm, l-3 

L 


L ENREF line, 7-23 

L I-II3 and L LB Lines, 7-24 

Iight occiuder, l-3 

LIMIT3 NORM/SPCL, 10-5 

linearity and range of power test, 

2-27 

line fuse check, 5-7 

line power module 


line voltage check, 5-7 

L INTCOP as trigger to observe control 

lines, 8-10 

L INTCOP as trigger to observe data 

lines, 8-10 

L LB and L III3 Lines, 7-24 

LO (2ND) waveforms, 7-21 

load device verification, 9-4 

load Match (ELF and ELR), 11-15 

location 

diagnostic LEDs for A15, 5-4 

post regulator test points, 5-5 

power supply cable, 5-8 

lock error, 7-4 

LO OUT waveform at Al4J2, 7-28 

Loss/sENsR LISTS, lo-5 

low band REF signal, 7-18 

low pass fiber, l-3 

M 

magnitude of sampler adjustment, 

3-18 

main ADC, lo-23 

Main DRAM, lo-8 

MAIN PWR DAC, lo-19 

Main VRAM, lo-15 

major assemblies 



rebuilt-exchange, 13-3 


measurement calibration coefficients, 

11-l 

measurement calibration procedure, 

11-3 

mechanical adjustment sequences, 

3-62 

memory 

INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PWR 

MTR CAL OFF, lo-53 

menu 

analog in, lo-24 

edit Iist, 10-6 

peek/poke, lo-46 

service keys, 19-18 

service modes, 19-21 

test options, 10-5 

tests, 10-3 

menus for service, 19-l 

message 

BATTERY FAILED. STATE MEMORY 




CALIBRATION ABORTED, lo-50 


CORRECTION CONSl!ANTS N(YT 

STORED, lo-51 


CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN 

CAL SET, lo-51 


DEVICE: not on, not connect, 


DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM, 

lo-52 


lo-52 

Index-13

DISK: not on, not connected, wrong 

addrs, lo-52 

DISK READ/WRITE ERROR, lo-53 

error, 10-50 

INIWON FAILED, lo-53 



NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT 

LEVEL, lo-54 

NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT 

LEVEL, lo-54 



NOT -WED DURING POWER 


NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK 

FOR STORE, lo-53 











PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED, lo-56 

PHASE LQCK LOST, lo-56 




lo-57 


POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!, 

lo-57 


PRINTER: error, 10-58 

PRINTER: not handshaking, 10-58 

PRINTER: not on, not connected, 


Index-14 

PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!, 

lo-58 

PWR MTR: NOT ON/CONNECTED 

OR WRONG ADDRS, lo-59 


MEMORY, lo-59 

SELF TEST #n FAILED, lo-59 



lo-59 






WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALIZE 

DISK, lo-60 

message for phase lock error, 7-4 

messages 

error, 10-l 

meter (power), l-3 

microprocessor 


microwave connector care, l-5 

minimum loss pad, l-4 


mnemonic definitions, 10-48 

mnemonics for service keys, 10-l 

monitor ABUS node 16 for power, 

4-15 

motherboard check, 5-13 

N 



nodes for analog bus, 10-26 

NO FILE(S) FOUND ON DISK, lo-54 

NO IF FOUND 

CHECK R INPUT LEVEL, 7-4,7-38, 

lo-54 

noise floor level test, 2-37

NO PHASE LOCK 

CHECK R INPUT LEVEL, 7-4,7-38, 

10-54 

Normal and Alter switch position 




NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER 


NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR 

STORE, lo-53 

number (option) adjustment, 3-36 

number (serial) adjustment, 3-34 

0 

offset (ADC) acijustment, 3-17 

open and short device verification, 

9-6 

open loop compared to phase locked 

output in SRC tune mode, 7-9 

operating temperature check, 5-13 

operation check of A9 CPU, 6-4 

operation veriikxtion, 2-l 

post-repair, 3-2, 1462 

Operator’s Check, 4-4 

option 

lDT, delete display, l-8 

Option lD5 



Option Cor., 1914 

option numbers correction constants 


options 

002 harmonic mode, l-7 

006 6 GHz operation, l-7 

010 time domain, l-7 

011 receiver configuration, l-7 

075 75Q impedance, l-8 

1CM rack mount flange kit without 

handles, l-8 

1CP rack mount flange kit with 

handles, l-8 

lD5 high stabiity frequency 

reference, l-7 

descriptions of, 13-48 

options available, l-7 

osciiioscope, l-3 

oscilloscope check of reference 

frequencies, 7-15 

output frequency in SRC tune mode, 

7-8 

overah block diagram, 419 







P 

P?, lo-58 

panel key codes, 6-14 





patterns test, 19-16 

PEEK, 10-46 

PEEK/POKE, 10-46 

PEEK/POKE ADDRESS, 10-46 

peek/poke menu, 19-46 

performance test record types, 2-6 

performance tests 

1. Test Port Output Frequency 

Range and Accuracy, 2-18 

2. External Source Mode Frequency 

Range, 2-21 

3. Test Port Output Power Accuracy, 

2-24 

4. l&t Port Output Power Range 

and Linearity, 2-27 

Index-16

5. Minimum R Channel Level, 2-31 

6. Test Port Input Noise Floor 

Level, 2-37 

chapter, 2-l 

description of, 2-l 

post-repair, 3-2, 1462 

peripheral equipment 


peripheral HP-IB addresses, 4-6 

peripheral troubleshooting, 4-8 

phase lock, 10-34 

source, 12-15 

phase lock (All) check, 7-35 

phase lock and A3 source check, 7-8 

PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED, 7-4, 

7-38, lo-56 

phase locked output compared to 

open loop in SRC tune mode, 

7-9 

phase lock error, 7-4 

phase lock error messages, 7-38 

phase lock error messages check, 

413 

PHASE LOCK LOST., 7-4, 7-38, lo-56 

photometer probe, l-3 

PLL AUTO ON OFF, lo-20 

PLL DIAG ON OFF, lo-20 

PLL PAUSE, lo-20 

plotter HP-II3 address, 46 

plotter or printer check, 47 

PLREF waveforms, 7-17 

POKE, lo-46 

Port 1 Op cl&., lo-11 

Port 2 Op chk., lo-11 

port input noise floor level test, 2-37 

port output power accuracy test, 

2-24 


Post Reg., 10-9 

post regulator 


Index-16 


green LEDs, 12-7 


shutdown circuit, 12-7 



post regulator test point locations, 

5-5 

post-repair procedures, 3-2, 14-62 

power accuracy test, 2-24 

power from source, 7-3 

POWER LOSS, lo-6 

power meter (HP-IB), l-3 

power meter HP-IB address, 46 



lo-57 

power output check, 413 

power problems (broadband), 7-39 

power range and linearity test, 2-27 

power sensor, l-3 

power splitter, l-4 

power supply 


power supply block diagram, 5-25 

power supply cable location, 5-8 

power supply check, 410 

power supply functional group block 

diagram, 5-3 


power supply shutdown 

Al5 green LED, 12-6 

Al5 red LED, 12-6 


POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!, lo-57 

power supply troubleshooting chapter, 

5-l 


power up sequence check, 411 

precision frequency reference 

assembly replacement, 1458


prereguiated voltages 


preregulator 


prereguiator LEDs check, 4-10 

preregulator voltages, 5-10 

PRESET, lo-7 

preset sequence, 4-3, 6-14 

Pretune Cor., 10-13 

Pretune Def., 10-13 

preventive maintenance, 1 l-l 

principles of microwave connector 

care, l-5 

printer, l-3 

PRINTER 

error, 19-58 

not handshaking, 19-58 

not on, not connected, wrong addrs, 

lo-58 

printer HP-IB address, 46 

probe 

power, 12-8 

probe (photometer), l-3 

PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!, lo-58 

probe power voltages, 5-19 

procedure 

spur search with a Alter, 3-30 

spur search without a filter, 3-31 

procedures 

A9 Switch Positions, 3-5 

ADC Offset Correction Constants 

(Test 52), 3-17 

Analog Bus Correction Constant 

(!lkst 46), 3-9 

Cavity Osciliator Prequency 

Correction Constants (Test 

54), 3-28 

EEPROM Backup Disk, 3-38 


range, 2-21 

F’ractionai-N Frequency Range 

Adjustment, 3-45 


PM Sideband Adjustment, 3-54 

Frequency Accuracy Adjustment, 

3-48 

High/Low Band Transition 


IF AmpIifier Correction Constants 

(Test 51), 3-16 

Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58), 3-37 


Option Numbers Correction 

Constant (Test 56), 3-36 



3-40 

RF Output Power Correction 

constants (l&t 47), 3-11 

Sampler Magnitude and Phase 

Correction Constants (Test 53), 

3-18 

Sequences for Mechanical 

Adjustments, 3-62 

Serial Number Correction Constant 

(Test 55), 3-34 

Source Default Correction Constants 

(l&t 44), 3-7 

Source Pretune Correction 

Constants (Test 48), 3-10 

Source Pretune Defauit Correction 

Constants (Test 45), 3-8 



Test Port Input Noise Floor Level, 

2-37 




2-24 

Index-17




Numbers Correction Constants, 

3-60 

verify an analyzer system 

(automated), 2-8 

pulse generator 

source, 12-15 

pulse generator (A7) check, 7-32 

pulses (100 kHz), 7-16 

PWR LOSS, 10-5 

PWRMTR 

NOT ON/CONNECTED OR WRONG 

ADDRS, lo-59 

B 

range and accuracy of frequency, 

2-18 

R channel level, 2-31 

rear panel 




Rear Panel, 10-9 

rear panel interface 


rear panel LEDs check, 410 

rebuilt-exchange assemblies, 13-3 

receiver 

digital IF, 12-30 

sampler/mixer, 12-29 


receiver check, 416 

receiver error messages, 417 

receiver failure error messages, 8-3 

receiver troubleshooting chapter, 

8-l 

RECORD ON OFF, 10-5 

red LED on Al5 


Index-18 

REP (4 MHz) signal check, 8-7 

reference 

source, 12-14 

reference, A12, 10-40 

reference (A12) check, 7-13 

reference frequencies check using 

analog bus, 7-13 

reference frequencies check using 

oscilloscope, 7-15 

reference signal (4 MHz), 7-20 

reflection Tracking (ERF’ and ERR), 

11-13 

REP signal At AllTP9, 7-17 

removing 

A8, 5-14 

line fuse, 5-7 

repair procedure, 41 

REPEAT ON OFF, 10-5 

replaceable parts, 13-l 

abbreviations, 13-48 

battery, 13-8 

cables, bottom, 13-12 

cables, front, 13-14 

cables, rear, 13-16 

cables, source, 13-18 

cables, top, 13-10 

chassis, inside, 13-44 

chwis, outside, 13-42 

documentation, 13-46 

ESD supplies, 1347 

front panel, inside, 13-22 

front panel, outside, 13-20 

fuse, preregulator, 1340 

fuses, post regulator, 13-47 

fuses, rear panel, 13-24 

handles, 13-47 

hardware, bottom, 13-30 

hardware, disk drive support, 13-36 

hardware, front, 13-32 

hardware, memory deck, 13-38 

hardware, preregulator, 13-40

hardware, test set deck, 13-34 

hardware, top, 13-28 

major assemblies, bottom, 13-8 

major assemblies, top, 13-6 

misceihineous, 1346, 13-47 

option descriptions, 13-48 

ordering, 13-3 

rear panel, 13-24 

rear panel, Option lD5, 13-26 

rebuilt-exchange assemblies, 13-3 

reference designations, 13-48 

service tools, 13-46 

touch-up paint, 1347 

upgrade kits, 13-46 

required tools, l-l 

RESET MEMORY, lo-46 

return analyzer for repair, 42 

revision (firmware) softkey, lo-47 

RF cable set, l-4 

RF output power correction constants 

adjustment, 3-l 1 

RF power from source, 7-3 

RGB outputs, lo-15 

ROM, lo-7 

S 

Sampler Cor., 19-13 

SAMF’LER COR ON OFF, lo-21 

sampler correction off when checking 

the trace, 8-12 

sampler magnitude correction 


sampler/mixer, 12-29 

2nd LO signal, 12-29 

high band, 12-29 

low band, 12-29 

mixer circuit, 12-30 

super low band, 12-29 


MEMORY, lo-59 

search for spurs with a filter, 3-30 

search for spurs without a filter, 3-31 

SEGMENT, 10-6 

selector switch check, 5-7 

self diagnose softkey, 10-7 

self-test, 4-3 

SELF TEST #n FAILED, lo-59 

sensor (power), l-3 

sequence check for power up, 4-11 

sequence contents, 3-64 

sequence contents for Fractional- 

N Avoidance and FM Sideband 

Acijustment, 3-66 

sequence contents for Fractional-N 

Frequency Range Adjustment, 

3-65 

sequence contents for High/Low Band 

Transition Adjustment, 3-64 

sequence contents for VCO 


sequences 




FM Sideband Adjustment, 3-62 

High/Low Band Transition 


Serial Cor., 10-13 

serial number correction constants 

a4@rstment, 3-34 

service and support options, l-9 

service center procedure, 42 

service features, 10-18 

service key menus, 10-l 

service features, 10-18 

service key mnemonics, 10-l 

service mnemonic definitions, 10-48 

SERVICE MODES, lo-18 

service modes more menu, 10-21 

service test equipment, l-l 

service tools list, l-l 

servicing the anaiyzer, 42 

Index-19

setup 


correction constant routine, 

3-29 


range, 2-22 


F’M sideband adjustment, 3-55 

frequency accuracy adhrstment, 

3-49 

insertion loss measurement, 3-20 

intensity check, 6-9 


mismatch device verification, 2-16 

phase lock error troubleshooting, 

7-4 

RF output correction constants, 

3-14 

sampler correction routine, 3-22 

source power check, 414 

test port frequency range and 



2-38 


2-25 



transmis&on calibration, 2-13 

setup check for disk drive, 4-7 

setup check for plotter or printer, 

47 

short and open device verification, 

9-6 

shutdown circuit 

post regulator, 12-7 

shutdown circuit on A8, 12-7 

shutdown circuitry disable, 5-16 

signal examination for phase lock, 

7-36 

signal separation 

Index-20 

built-in test set, 12-26 


signals required for Al0 assembly 

operation, 8-8 

SLOPE DAC, lo-19 

softkeys, 10-2 

source 



Al3 frac-N analog, 12-14 

Al4 frac-N digital, 12-14 

A3 source, 12-15 


external source mode, 12-23 

frequency offset, 12-22 

harmonic analysis, 12-22 

high band theory, 12-19 

low band theory, 12-16 

operation in other modes, 12-22 

source, 12-15 

super low band theory, 12-15 


tuned receiver mode, 12-25 

source and All phase lock check, 

7-8 

source attenuator 


source check, 413 

Source Cor., 10-13 

Source Def., 10-13 

source default correction constants 


Source Ex., l@ll 

source (external), l-3 

source group assemblies, 7-l 

source group troubleshooting 

appendix, 7-38 

source match (ESP and ESR), 11-12 

source mode frequency range, 2-21 

SOURCE PLL ON OFT, lo-19 

source power, 7-3



lo-59 

source pretune correction constants 


source prettme default correction 


source spur avoidance tracking 


source troubleshooting chapter, 7-l 

specifications 


range, 2-21 



2-37 




2-24 



spectrum analyzer, 1-3 

speed 

fan, 5-22 

spikes display (acceptable versus 

excessive), 3-59 

splitter (power), l-4 

spur avoidance and PM sideband 


spur avoidance tracking adjustment, 

3-58 

SPUR AVOID ON OFF, lo-22 

spurs displayed with a filter, 3-30 

spur search with a filter, 3-30 

spur search without a filter, 3-31 

SPUR TEST ON OFF, lo-21 

SRAM RAM, lo-8 

SRC ADJUST DACS, lo-19 

SRC ADJUST MENU, lo-19 

SRC TUNE FREQ, lo-19 

SRC tune mode frequency output, 

7-8 

SRC tune mode phase locked output 

compared to open loop, 7-9 

SRC tune mode waveform integrity, 

7-9 

SRC TUNE ON OFF, lo-19 

stable HI OUT signal in PRACN TUNE 

mode, 7-34 

Start Troubleshooting chapter, 4-l 

static-control table mat and earth 

ground wire, l-4 

status terms for test, 19-4 

step attenuator, 1-3 

STORE EEPR ON OFF, lo-21 

stuck key identification, 6-14 

support and service options, 1-9 



Sweep Trig., 19-10 

switch position adjustment, 3-5 

symbol conventions, 19-48 

system performance uncorrected, 

11-9 

system verihcation 

description of, 2-l 

post-repair, 3-2, 14-62 

system verification (automated), 2-8 

system verification cycle, 2-7 

system verification tests, 193,19-12 

Sys Ver hut., 19-12 

SYS VER TESTS, lo-4 

T 

table of service tools, l-l 

temperature check, 5-13 

terms for test status, 19-4 

test 44, 3-7, 19-13 

test 45, 3-8, 19-13 

test 46, 3-9, lo-13 

test 47, 3-11, 19-13 

Index-21

test 48, 3-10, 10-13 

test 50, 10-13 

test 51, 3-16, 10-13 

test 52, 3-17, 10-13 

test 53, 3-18, 10-13 

test 54, 3-28, lo-13 

test 55, 3-34, 10-13 

test 56, 3-36, 10-14 

test 57, 10-14 

test 58, 3-37, 10-14 

test 59, 10-15 

test 60, 10-15 

test 61, 10-15 

test 62, 10-15 

test 63, 10-15 

test 64,10-15 

test 65, lo-15 

test 66, 10-16 

test 67-69, 10-16 

test 70, 10-16 

test 71, 10-16 

test 72, 10-16 

test 73, 10-16 

test 74, 10-16 

test 75, 10-17 

test 76, 10-17 

test 77, 10-17 

test 78, 10-17 

test 79-80, 1@17 


test cables, 9-5 

test descriptions, 10-7 

test equipment for service, l-l 

TEST OPTIONS, 10-5 

test options menu, 10-5 

Test Pat l., lo-16 

Test Pat lo., lo-17 

Test Pat ll., lo-17 

Test Pat 12., lo-17 


n?st Pat 14-15., lo-17 

Index-22 






Test Pat 9, lo-16 

test patterns, 10-3 

test port connector inspection, 9-3 


test port input noise floor level, 2-37 

test port output frequency range and 



2-24 



test record types, 2-6 

tests 

1. Test Port Output kequency 

Range and Accuracy, 2-18 

2. External Source Mode F’requency 

Range, 2-21 


chapter, 2-l 

display, 10-15 

external, 10-11 

internal, 10-7 


patterns, 10-16 

system verifkation, 10-12 

Test Port Input Noise Floor Level, 

2-37 

l&t Port Output Power Accuracy, 

2-24 

Test Port Output Power Range and 

Linearity, 2-27 

tests (diagnostics), 6-17 

test set, 12-26 



test set interface, 12-26



test set interface, 12-26 

tests menu, 10-3 

test status terms, 104 


+5 V digital supply, 12-6 

Al5 green LED, 12-6 


Al5 red LED, 12-6 

A3 source, 12-2, 12-14 

A8 green LEDs, 12-7 

A8 post regulator, 12-7 

A8 shutdown circuit, 12-7 




functional groups, 124 

line power module, 12-6 

microprocessor, 12-3 

peripheral equipment, 12-3 



preregulated voltages, 12-6 


receiver, 12-3, 12-28 

signal separation, 12-26 

source attenuator, 12-2 

test set, 12-3 


tool kit, l-3 

tools for service, l-l 

trace (good) display, 8-5 

trace with sampler correction on and 

off, 8-13 

tracking for source spur avoidance 



transmission tracking (ETP and ETR), 

11-16 



troubleshooting 

1st LO signal at sampler/mixer, 

8-14 

A10 by substitution or signal 



All phase lock and A3 source 

check, 7-8 


A13/A14 Fractional-N, 7-24 

Al4 Divide-by-N Circuit Check, 

7-29 




accessories, 4-18, 9-l 

broadband power problems, 7-39 

diagnostics, 4-3 

digital control, 6-l 

disk drive, 47 

fan, 5-22 

faulty data, 417 

faulty group identification, 4-9 

tist step, 41 

front panel, 6-13 

HP-R3 systems, 46 

one or more inputs look good, 8-l 1 

phase lock error, 74 

plotters or printers, 47 

receiver, 8-l 

receiver error messages, 4-17 

self-test, 43 

source, 7-l 

start, 41 

systems with controllers, 4-8 

systems with multiple peripherals, 

48 

when all inputs look bad, 8-6 

Index-23

YO coil drive check with analog 

bus, 7-11 

troubleshooting power supply, 5-l 

troubleshooting source group 

appendix, 7-38 

two-port error-correction procedure, 

11-3 

U 

uncorrected performance, 1 l-9 

unprotected hardware option numbers 


USE SENSOR A/B, 10-6 

V 


VCO (A14) exercise, 7-27 

VCO range check frequencies, 7-24 

Ver Dev l., 10-12 

Ver Dev 2., lCL12 

Ver Dev 3., 10-12 

Ver Dev 4., 10-12 

veriiication cycle, kit re-certification, 

2-7 

verification kit 7 mm, l-3 

verification procedures 

post-repair, 3-2, 14-62 

verify calibration kit devices, 9-4 

voltage indications 

Index-24 

post regulator, 12-7 

voltages 

Al5 preregulator check, 5-10 

AS, 5-14 

fan, 5-22 

front panel probe power, 5-19 

YO- and YO+ coil drive voltage 

differences with& SOURCE 

PLL OFT, 7-13 

voltages for post regulator, 5-5 

voltmeter, l-3 

VRAM bank., lo-15 

VRAIWvideo, 10-15 

W 

warranty explanation, 42 

waveform integrity in SRC tune mode, 

7-9 

wrist strap and cord (antistatic), 14 

WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALTZE 

DISK, lo-60 

Y 

YO coil drive check with analog bus, 

7-11 

YO- and YO+ coil drive voltage 

differences with& SOURCE PLL 

OFT, 7-13

HP 8753E Network Analyzer Service Guide - Agilent Technologies

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?